• 











*> 








C*J 












, 1 /. 


1 





























LIBRARY OF CONGRESS J 



hap, 



-■^■g.iV . 



5 ^£ ijfi 5_ | 

J UNITED STATES 0? AMERICA < 

■»<»•%.■»,■«, ■%.«.^,^ <k*^%^»» «*^,^g| 



















M 



■I 















• 



■ 









CEREMONIAL 





o* 1 



ffDomine ldForte 






mcensunt fO in ]farispeetu 
tuo 



Alamtum 

Elevatio 







CEEEMONIAL 






FOR THE USE OF THE 



CATHOLIC CHURCHES 



IX THE 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



j Published by Order of the First Council of Baltimor- 



FOURTH EDITION. 



A 










< t'~ 



t*S*LV 



BALTIMORE : 
KELLY, PIET & COMPANY. 

1875. 




.fV3 
V\5 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1875, by 

KELLY, PIET & CO., 
in the office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



Pbebsof Kelly, Piet & Co. 



> 




This edition of the Ceremonial, published by order of 
the First Council of Baltimore, for the use of the Catholic 
Churches in the United States of America, having been 
carefully revised and corrected by the lit. Rev. Dr. 
Becker, Bishop of Wilmington, is hereby approved of. 
Given at Baltimore this 4th day of November. 
J. ROOSEVELT BAYLEY, 

Archbishop of Baltimore. 

Feast of St. Charles Borromeo, A. D., 1875. 



PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. 



In presenting to the public this edition of the 
Ceremonial, for the use of Catholic Churches in 
the United States, it has been our duty simply to 
correct the various mistakes found in the former 
editions ; and it will appear evident that many 
corrections, some of them quite important, have 
been made in the present revision, and the whole 
plan of the book has been rendered much more 
convenient and natural. 

This we have endeavored to perform with great 
care, having consulted very many of the best and 
most recent authors, and taken the advice of those 
whose knowledge and experience rendered them 
thoroughly capable of giving proper directions. 

Despite our best efforts, something may be found 
wanting to the completeness of the work, yet we 
place it before our brethren of the clergy with the 



X PREFACE. 

declaration that we know of nothing more com- 
plete in the English language on the subject treated, 
nor do we think that greater uniformity can be ob- 
tained than by following closely the directions 
here given, all of which we take from Roman 
sources, and submit entirely to the Sacred Con- 
gregation of Rites. 

We have not deemed it advisable to alter the 
arrangement of this edition, since the clergy having 
become accustomed to the former ones, might ex- 
perience some difficulty in finding the subjects 
treated of. The corrections in this edition mainly 
refer to the ceremonies connected with Benedic- 
tion of the Blessed Sacrament, the Forty Hours' 
Devotion, and some few regarding . High Mass. 
We have thought it well to add an Appendix on 
the " Defects which may occur in the celebration 
of Mass," and, whilst alluding to these, we would 
like to take this opportunity of impressing on the 
minds of all the importance of exactitude in carry- 
ing out ceremonies, even the most minute. This 
care and exactitude can very well be observed 
without displaying any affectation. 

The ceremonies of the Church have a meaning 



PREFACE. XI 

and are well calculated to inspire respect and de- 
votion in the faithful, provided they are properly 
carried out. If, however, Ecclesiastics are not 
well versed in the ceremonies of any sacred rite, 
the impression produced is far from being religious 
or edifying, and the intention of the Church is, 
in this respect, frustrated. As a rule too little 
attention is paid to certain ceremonies which are 
esteemed by some as of such slight importance 
as not to merit care in their preparation ; as, for 
instance, genuflecting, boiuing and incensing. It 
would take too much time and space to enumerate 
the almost endless varieties introduced in the per- 
formance of these simple movements. 

Let the young Levites then be well grounded 
in ceremonies during their Seminary career ; let 
them convince themselves that by zeal and fidelity 
to the prescriptions of the Rubrics, they are 
contributing to the " decency " and "order" of 
Divine Service, and let them remember that a 
carelessness in trifling matters once acquired easily 
and surely leads to a disregard of important 
Rubrics. 

As we have disclaimed perfection in getting out 



Xll 



PREFACE. 



this edition, we subjoin a few typographical errors 
which have escaped the proof-reader : 



27, pro Oramuste lege Oramus tc. 

" Pax vobis " Dominus vobiscum. 
" particles " particle. 
« No. 6 " No. 5. 

" Timit » Timet. 

" cords " cards. 

omit " in an audible voice." 
11, pro cross lege crosier. 

deacon " assistant deacon. 

first deacon u assistant deacon. 

Procedamus " Eecedamus. 

semipterne " sempiterne. 

incovenient " inconvenient. 

before amen insert et custodiat nos semper 



g. io, \ 


27, 


» 62, ' 


' 1, 


" 93, « 


1 9, 


" 125, ' 


' io, 


" 139, « 


1 3, 


" 141, « 


' 5, 


« 195, ' 


' 9, 


« 276, < 


1 11, 


» 278, ' 


1 6, 


" 328, « 


.' 12, 


" 379, « 


< 17, 


» 382, « 


' 3, 


" 383, « 


1 1, 


" 397, ' 


' 9, 



CONTENTS. 



PART I. 



Ceremonies of Low Mass. 

CHAP. PAGE 

I. — Art. I. What is to be prepared, 1 

II. On the Preparation for Mass by the Priest, . 3 

III. On Leaving the Sacristy, 6 

IV. On approaching the Altar, .... 7 

V. From the Commencement of the Mass to the 

Introit, 9 

VI. From the Introit to the Epistle, . . .11 

VII. Prom the Epistle to the Offertory, ... 13 

VIII. From the Offertory to the Canon, ... 15 

IX. From the Canon to the Consecration, . . 19 

X. From the Consecration to the Pater Foster, . 23 

XL From the Pater Noster to the Communion, . 25 

XII. From the Communion to the End of Mass, . 31 

XIII. On Votive Masses, .33 

II. — Order to be observed in celebrating two Masses on the 

same day, 37 

III. — Low Mass for the Dead, 39 

IV. — Low Mass when the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, . 41 
V. — Of Low Mass in the presence of Prelates, ... .43 

VI. — Giving Communion, ....... 45 

Art. I. Giving Communion during Mass, . . .45 
II. Purification of the Ciborium, . . . .48 

III. On giving Communion at other times, . . 48 



6 



CONTENTS. 



CHAP. PAGE 

VII. — Manner of Serving a Priest at Low Mass, . . .51 

Art. I. General Remarks, 51 

II. Of the Vesting of the Priest, . . . .52 

III. From the beginning of the Mass to the end of it, 53 

VIII. — Manner of Serving a Bishop at Low Mass, . . .57 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, . . . . . 57 

II. Of the Preparation and Vesting of the Bishop, 57 

' III. When there is but one Chaplain, . .62 

IX. — Manner of Celebrating High Mass without Deacon or 

Sub-deacon, . . 64 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, 64 

II. Vesting of the Celebrant, . . . . .65 

III. Ceremonies of the Mass, 65 

X. — Vespers sung without Cope-bearers, . . . .68 

Art. I. Things'to be prepared, . . . . .68 

II 70 



PABT II. 

Ceremonies for Holy Week and other Festivals. 



I. — Blessing of Candles on Candlemas Day, 

Art. I. Of what is to be prepared, . . 

II. Ceremonies to be performed on Candlemas Day 
II. — Of the Benediction of Ashes on Ash Wednesday, . 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... 
II. Of the Sacred Rites to be performed, 
III.— Of Palm Sunday, . 

Art. I. What is to be prepared 

' II. Of the Ceremonies to be performed 
IV.— Of Maundy Thursday, . 

Art. I. What is to be prepared, 
II. Of the Sacred Rites, 
V.— Of Good Friday, . 

Art. I. Of what is to be prepared 
II. Of the Sacred Rites, 
VL— Of Holy Saturday, 

Art. I. What is to be prepared 
II. Of the Sacred Rites, 
VII. — The Asperges, when there is but one Priest, 



75 

75 

76 

81 

81 

82 

85 

85 

86 

91 

91 

93 

98 

98 

99 

111 

111 

113 

122 



CONTENTS. 7 

CHAP. PAGE 

VIII. — Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament, . . . 326 

Art. I. "What is to be prepared, 126 

II. Ceremonies (one Priest), ..... 127 

III. V/hen the officiating Priest is assisted by 

another Priest, etc., ..... 131 

IV. "When the Bishop gives Benediction, . . 133 



PAKT III. 

Ceremonies of High Mass. 



I. — Rules to be observed by the Clergy in Choir, 
Art. I. The order of going to the Choir, 
II. The order to be observed in Choir, . 

III. Internal dispositions, .... 

IV. The order to be observed in receiving Holy 

Communion, . . . . 

V. The order in going from the Choir, 
II. — Instructions for the Officers, ... 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, . . . 
II. Instruction for the Censer-bearer, . 

III. Instruction for the Acolytes, . 

IV. Duty of the Master of Ceremonies, 
V. Instruction for the Sub-deacon, 

VI. Instruction for the Deacon, 
VII. Instruction for the Celebrant, . 
III. — High Mass for the Dead, 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... 
II. What is to be particularly observed, 

IV. — Solemn Vespers, 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... 
■ II. General Rules to be observed, . 

III. Instruction for the Acolytes, . 

IV. Instruction for the Censer-bearer, . 

V. Instruction for the Master of Ceremonies, 
VI. Instruction for the Cope-bearers, 
VII. Instruction for the Celebrant, . 
V. — Of Solemn Vespers, and of the Procession on Corpui 

Christi, 

Art. I. Of solemn Vespers, the Blessed Sacrament 
exposed, ...... 

II. Of the Procession on Corpus Christi, 



135 
135 
136 
138 

139 
140 

141 
141 
142 
146 
150 
157 
165 
173 
180 
180 
180 
183 
183 
184 
185 
186 
188 
191 
194 

196 



196 
200 



8 CONTENTS. 

CHAP. PAGE 

VI. — Vespers for the Dead on the 1st of N/ovember, . . 202 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, 202 

II. Ceremonies peculiar to these Vespers, . . 202 



PAKT IV. 

Ceremonies for the Principal Festivals. 

I.— Feast of the Purification, 204 

Art. I. Necessary Preparations, 204 

II. From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Dis- 
tribution of the Candles, .... 205 

III. From the Distribution of the Candles to the 

Procession, 206 

IV. The Procession, 208 

II.— Ash Wednesday, .210 

Art. I. Necessary Preparations, 210 

IT. Of the Blessing and Distribution of the Ashes, 211 
III. Of the Mass, . . . . . . .214 

III. — Sundays Laetare and Gaudete, . . . . . 215 

IV.— Palm Sunday, .215 

Art. I. Preparations, 215 

II. From the Beginning of the Ceremony to the 

Distribution of the Palms, .... 216 

III. Of the Distribution of the Palms, . . .218 

IV. Of the Procession, 220 

V. Of the Mass and Passion, . . . .222 

V.— Office of the Tenebra?, 225 

Art. I. Preparations, ....... 225 

II. From the Commencement to the End of the 

Office, 225 

VI.— Maundy Thursday, . . 227 

Art. I. Preparations, 227 

II. Of the Mass, 228 

III. Of the Procession, 281 

IV. Of Vespers, and of the Stripping of the Altars, 233 
VII.— Of Good Friday, . 235 

Art. 1. Preparations, ....... 235 

II. From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Un- . 

covering of the Cross, ..... 236 



CONTENTS. • 9 

CHAP. PAGE 

III. From the Uncovering of the Cross to the Pro- 

cession, ....... 239 

IV. Of the Procession, 242 

V. Of the remaining Part of the Office, . . 244 

VIII.— Holy Saturday, ........ 247 

Art. I. Things to he prepared, 247 

II. From the Benediction of the New Fire to the 

Exultet, 249 

III. From the Exultet to the Prophecies, . . 252 

IV. From the Prophecies to the Benediction of the 

Baptismal Font. 254 

V. From the Benediction of the Font to the Be- 
ginning of Mass, 255 

VI. The Mass, .258 



PAET V. 

Ceremonies for Mass and Vespers, Solemnly Celebrated 
by the Bishop, or in His Presence. 

I. Solemn Pontifical Vespers, 261 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, ..... 261 
II. From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy 

to the beginning of Vespers, .... 262 

III. From the beginning to the end of Vespers, . 262 

II. Solemn Vespers, in the presence of the Bishop, . . 265 

III. Complins, when the Bishop officiates, .... 266 

IV. Matins, when the Bishop officiates, .... 267 
V. Lauds, when the Bishop officiates, ..... 269 

VI. Solemn Pontifical Mass, 269 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, ..... 269 

II. Of the Vesting of the Clergy and of the Bishop, 273 

III. The Pontifical Mass, 277 

VII. Solemn Mass, celebrated in presence of the Bishop, 

dressed in Cope, ........ 288 

VIII. Solemn Mass in presence of the Bishop, in Kochet and 

Cape, ..291 

IX. Vespers for the Dead, celebrated by the Bishop, . . 292 
X. Matins and Lauds for the Dead, celebrated by the 

Bishop, 293 



10 



CONTENTS. 



CHAP. PAGE 

XI. Solemn Pontifical Mass for the Dead, . . . .294 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, ..... 294 

II. From the beginning to the end of Mass, . . 295 

III. The Absolution after Mass, . . . .297 

XII. Solemn Mass for the Dead, in the presence of the Bishop, 299 

XIII. Particular Instructions for the Officers who attend the 

Bishop, 300 

Art. I. Instruction for the assistant Priest, . . . 300 
II. Instructions for the two assistant Deacons, . 304 

III. Instruction for the officiating Deacon, . . 308 

IV. Instruction for the Sub-deacon, . . . 314 
V. Instruction for the inferior Ministers, . -. 318 



PART VI. 

Other Different Solemnities at which the Bishop Offici- 
ates or is Present. 



I. Commemoration of all the Faithful departed, . . 323 

II. Sundays in Advent, 324 

III. Christmas, 324 

IV. Festivals between Christmas and Candlemas, . . 326 

V. Candlemas, 326 

VI. Ash Wednesday, 329 

VII. Sundays in Lent, . 332 

VIII. Palm Sunday, 332 

IX. Matins of the Tenebrse, 336 

X. Maundy Thursday, 336 

XI. Good Friday, 346 

XII. Holy Saturday, 354 

XIII. Ceremonies to be observed in Provincial Councils, . 361 
Art. I. "What is to be done before it opens, . . . 361 

II. How the Metropolitan Church is to be adorned 

and arranged, 362 

III. The opening of the Council, . . . . 363 

IV. Mode of Procedure of the Council, . . .368 

V. Second Solemn Session, ..... 370 

VI. Third Solemn Session, 372 

XIV. Ceremonies to be observed in Diocesan Synods, . . 375 



CONTENTS. 11 

CHAP. PAGE 

XV. Solemn administration of the Sacrament of Confir- 
mation, ......... 380 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, ■ 380 

II. The administration of the Sacrament, . . 381 
XYI. Episcopal Visitation of Parishes, . . . . .383 
Art. I. The Bishop's Eeception when he visits the 

Parishes, .383 



APPENDIX. 

I. Forty Hours' Exposition, 391 

Art. I. Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Ex- 
position, ....... 391 

II. Of the Mass of the Exposition, . . . 392 

III. Of the Procession for the Exposition, . . 394 

IV. Of the Mass pro Pace, 397 

V. Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Ex- 
position, ........ 398 

VI. Of the Mass for the Eeposition, . . .398 

VII. From the Litany to the end of the Forty Hours, 403 

II. Different Intonations for Vespers and Solemn Mass, . 406 
Elenchus Defectuum, 414 



CEREMONIAL. 



PART I. 



d^ereinontea of fofo Jtlass. 



CHAPTEE I. 
Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED. 

On the Altar. 

1. The altar, which should be of stone or marble, con- 
secrated by the Bishop, or, at least, having on it an altar- 
stone, also consecrated by the Bishop, should be covered 
with three clean altar-cloths. The first' two, long enough 
to cover the whole top, and the uppermost should reach 
the base of the altar on both sides. (Rub. Miss., part i, 
n. xx.) 

2. In the middle of the altar, a crucifix sufficiently large 
to be distinctly seen. (Rub., ib.) 

3. At least two candlesticks, with wax-candles, which 
should burn during the whole time of the Mass.* 

4. In front of the altar, the antipendium of the color of 
the vestments.f (Rub., ib.) 

* All priests (even prelates, who are not Bishops) should have at 
their private Mass only two candles and one server. (S. R. C, 27th 
Sept., 1659.) 

f As the word antipendium is generally accepted to signify altar- 
veil, or frontal, it shall he made use of in this manual. 

1 



Z CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

5. If the Blessed Sacrament is in the tabernacle, the 
canopy covering the tabernacle should also be of the color 
of the vestments, unless black vestments be used. No 
canopy is needed over the tabernacle when the latter is of 
marble or stone. (Ccer. Ep., 21, c. xiii, n. 3.) 

6. The altar cards.* 

7. At the Epistle side, the bookstand. 

8. On the credence^ or any suitable place, the cruets J 
with wine and water on a plate, the finger-towel and the 
hand-bell. Should the priest be obliged to celebrate Mass 
without the assistance of a server, the plate with cruets and 
towel should be placed on a stand, near the altar, at the 
Epistle side, not on the altar. 

In the Sacristy. .§ 

1. The sacred vestments, of the color prescribed. They 
should be placed on the sacristy altar, || or ambry; they 
should be so disposed that the priest may find them in 
order as he vests. The chasuble should be adjusted first, 
so that the lower half of the front part will hang down 
from the ambry, and the lower part of the back be folded 
over the upper. Next, the stole, folded in four parts, 
should be laid across the chasuble, and the maniple across 
the stole. The girdle, in a serpentine form, should be 
placed on the maniple. The upper part of the alb should 
lie on the vestments, and over it the amice extended, the 
strings of which may be arranged on the amice itself. 

2. The Missal. 

* "Tabernaculum, in quo assidue Divinissima servatur Eucharistia 
conopeo serico, vel simili materia? vestiri debet, ejus item coloris 
cujus est altaris Pallium ; quanquam pro colore nigro violaceus con- 
gruentior erit in honorem Christi viventis." {Meraii.) 

f Credence, generally used for the side table near the altar. 

% Cruets should be of glass, not of silver. (Gavan., P. 1,7, xx.) 

§ If there is no sacristy, the sacred vestments are prepared on a 
table near the altar, or, if there is no table, on the Gospel side of the 
altar itself, not in the middle of it, unless a Bishop is to celebrate. 
(Rub. Miss.) 

|| St. Charles Borromco recommends that the altar or ambry, on 
which the sacred vestments are laid, be covered with a white linen 
cloth. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 6 

3. The chalice,* and paten with particle, the purificator, 
the chalice-veil, the pall, and the burse with the corporal 
in it. 

4. The priest's cap near the vestments, not on them, nor 
on the chalice. 

5. A surplice for the server. 

6. A lavatory, or place for the priest to w T ash the hands. 

Article II. 
On the Preparation for Mass. 

1. The priest, wishing to celebrate the most Holy Sac- 
rifice, should prepare himself by prayer. Aliquantulum 
orationi vacet. (Rub. 31iss.) He should also have said 
matins and lauds. 

2. The suitable prayers for the occasion are those sug- 
gested by the Church, and laid down in the Missal, that 
is, the anthem, Ne reminiscaris, with the Psalms and pray- 
ers that follow them. Should the priest say these prayers, 
he will take notice that the anthem above named is said 
entirely on feasts of double rite ; and during Paschal time 
the Alleluia is added to it. 

3. It is well not to omit the pious protestation, Ego volo 
celebrare missam. By reciting this, not only he can gain 
the indulgences annexed to it, but he can make his Me- 
mento. (Rub. 31iss.) 

4. The priest, clad in his cassock, opens the Missal, and 
marks the places of the Mass and prayers, that he may 
not lose time at the altar. (Rub. Miss.) After which, he 



* The chalice ought not to be carried to the altar, and fixed on it 
by any person before Mass, but the priest ought to carry it himself 
to the altar, not before he goes thither to begin Mass, but when vested 
with the sacred vestments he goes from the sacristy, or from the 
place where he dressed, to the altar, as directed. (lb., tit. ii, n. 1.) 
"Sacerdos omnibus paramentis indutus accipit rnanu sinistra calicem 
ut supra prseparatum, quern portat elevatum ante pectus, bursam 
rnanu dextra super calice tenens, et facta reverentia cruci, et capite 
cooperto acceditad altare cum ministro, cum Missali," etc. : any con- 
trary custom is to be looked upon as an abuse, which should be abol- 
ished. (See S. C. E., n. 4285.) 



4 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

washes his hands, saying at the same time, in a low voice, 
Da, Domine, etc. 

5. Having washed his hands, he prepares the chalice by 
placing on it a clean purificator,* in such a way that it will 
hang equally on both sides. On the purificator he places 
the paten, and on the paten, the Host, which should be 
round, entire, and free from loose particles, to remove 
which, the priest will pass his thumb and forefinger around 
the edge. [Rub. Miss.) Then he puts on it the pall,f 
which he covers with the veil. If the veil is not large 
enough to cover the whole chalice, he will arrange it so 
that it will hide that part of the chalice that will be to- 
wards the people while going to the altar. Last of all, he 
places the burse, containing the corporal,! on the veil. 
The opening of it should be towards himself as he proceeds 
to the altar. Nothing should be laid on the burse. (S. C. 
B., 1st Sept., 1703.) 

6. Everything being prepared, the priest proceeds to 
vest. He will do well to make the sign of the cross, al- 
though the Eubric does not say so. If he does, he should 

* The purificator should be of plain linen, neither coarse nor very- 
fine. It may be about thirteen and a half inches square, with a very 
small cross worked in the centre. It requires no special blessing, but 
after use should not be handled by laics, until washed by some one 
in major orders. 

f According to the Eubric, the pall should be of linen. Formerly 
the pall formed a part of the corporal, which was large enough to 
cover the chalice. The inconvenience of its being too light can be 
obviated by having it made out of a piece of linen about four and one- 
eighth inches square, folded into four equal parts, sewed up at the 
edges, and well starched. "In sacrificio missae uti non licet palla a 
parte superiori drapo serico cooperta." (8. R. C, 2d Jan., 1701.) 
Nevertheless, by a late decision of the S R. C, the pall may be of 
silk cloth, ornamented on the outside, while the inside is of linen ; 
but it should not be black. " Permitti poss<; dummodo palla linea 
subnecta calicem cooperiat, ac pannus superior non sit nigri coloris, 
aut referat aliqua mortis signa " (S. R. C , 10th Jan., 18V2.) 

J The corporal should be of beautiful linen, very clean, and starch- 
ed. It should have a small cross worked in the middle, but not with 
gold or silver. It is generally folded by bending first one-third of it 
over, so as to cover the second third part ; again, the other third folded 
over the first. Then one-third of its length over the middle third 
part, and the last part bent over the rest. A corporal will be found 
sufficiently large, if it be from twenty-two to twenty-four inches 
square. The corporal is blessed, as well as the pall. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

make it without the amice in his hand. He then takes 
the amice by the two corners where the strings are con- 
nected, raises it so that he may kiss the cross in the middle 
of the amice; lie puts it on his head, saying at the same 
time, Impone, Domine, etc. ; and as he continues the pray- 
ers, he adjusts the amice around his neck, so that every 
article of his neck-dress be entirety covered by it; and 
after crossing the strings upon his breast, the left being 
under the right, he passes them behind, and ties them in 
front with a loose knot.* (Rub. Hiss.) 

7. He puts on the alb (without kissing it) by passing it 
over his head ; then he introduces his right arm into the 
right sleeve, and his left into the other. He adjusts it 
about his neck, and fits it around so that it descends about 
one inch above the floor all around, at the same time say- 
ing, Dealba me, Domine, etc. (Rub. Miss.) 

8. As he girds himself with the cincture, f he says, Prce- 
cinge me, etc. (Rub. Miss.) The common practice is to 
leave the tassels hanging down as low as possible, to be 
able afterwards to fasten the stole with the two ends of the 
cord. 

9. He takes the maniple and kisses the cross on it, and 
passing it over his left arm fastens it halfway between the 
hand and the elbow, saying, Her ear, Domine, etc. 

10. Then having taken the stole, he kisses the cross on 
it, and, with both hands, he passes it over his head, fits it 
around his neck, so that both ends of the stole hang down 
at equal distances. Afterwards he crosses both ends of the 
stole, first passing towards his right the end that hangs on 

* In putting on the amice, he ought not to forget that the object of 
it is to cover entirely the usual dress, and that part of the cassock 
which is near the collar, and the collar itself; and, therefore, he ought 
to put it on so as to answer this purpose as directed, (lb., tit. i, n. 3.) 
" Ac primum accipiens amictum circa extremitates et chordulas, oscu- 
latur illud in medio ubi est crux et ponit super caput, et mox declinat 
ad collum, et eo vestium collaria circumtegens" etc. The first Council 
of Baltimore has strictly enjoined the ob.-ervance of this Rubric. In- 
dusia vero privati apparatus sub amictu et alba ia'teant, ita ut non 
indecoro vel mundano more appareant. (Con. Bolt. 1, Deer. 24.) 

f Cinctures may be made of either silk or cotton, and of any color 
except black. Congruentior est uti cingulo lineo. (S. R. C, n. 3436 
ad. 7.) 



6 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

his left side, and drawing over it the other end which hangs 
upon his right. Then he confines the stole with the ex- 
tremities of the cincture, which he allows to hang on each 
side under his arms, and not behind his back. In the 
meantime he says, Redde mihi, Domine, etc. 

11. Lastly, he puts on the chasuble without kissing it, 
saying Domine, qui dixisti, etc. He will take care to fit it 
around the neck and shoulders, and tie it in front with the 
strings. He may then fasten a white clean handkerchief 
to the cincture, but it should not be visible beneath the 
chasuble. 

Article III. 
On Leaving the Sacristy. 

12. The priest being vested, puts on his cap. Then, 
taking with his left hand the chalice per nodum, he lays 
his right flat on the burse, holding the chalice before his 
breast, neither too far, nor too near himself, but in a nat- 
ural position. He makes a low bow* to the cross or image 
in the Sacristy, and, preceded by the server, who carries 
the Missal, he proceeds to the altar, with a grave and mod- 
est deportment, his mind and heart occupied with the great 
mystery he is going to celebrate. 

13. It is a laudable custom for the priest to take holy 
water and make the sign of the cross going to the altar. 
(S. B. C, 9th April, 1808.) Nevertheless, the Rubric 
does not prescribe it. 

14. If the priest passes before the tabernacle containing 
the Blessed Sacrament, he will make a genuflection*!" with- 
out removing his cap. If he passes before the high altar, 
he makes a low bow to the cross. Should he pass before 

* Rubricians distinguish three kinds of bows: the low, the mod- 
erate, and the simple. A low bow is made by bending the head and 
the shoulders, so that the person making it could touch his knees with 
the extremities of his fingers. The moderate is made by sufficiently 
lowering the head, and somewhat bending the shoulders. The simple 
bow consists in simply bending the head, without perceptibly moving 
the shoulders. 

f A simple genuflection is made by bending the right knee to the 
floor, as near as possible to the left foot. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 7 

an altar where there is a relic of a saint whose feast is cele- 
brated, or some other remarkable relic, he makes a low 
bow, without taking his cap off. (Rub. 3Iiss.) If it be a 
relic of the true cross, he will make a genuflection with his 
head covered. (S. R. C, 7th May, 1766.) 

15. If he should pass before the Blessed Sacrament ex- 
posed, or at the time of the elevation, or when Holy Com- 
munion is given, he will take off his cap, and kneel on both 
knees, being sure, in the last two-named instances, not to 
rise until after the elevation, or before the priest giving 
communion has returned to the altar, and placed the cibo- 
rium on the corporal. (Rub. 3Iiss.) If, however, in the 
latter case, the communicants should be too numerous, a 
genuflection on both knees will be sufficient, without re- 
maining until the end. (S. R. C, 5th July, 1698.) 

16. When, on these occasions, the priest takes off his 
cap, either he will give it to the server to hold, until he is 
to put it on again, or he will hold it between his thumb 
and forefinger, with the opening of it towards himself, and 
with the last two fingers holding the burse, that it may not 
fall. 

17. While the priest is going to, or coming from the 
altar, he should salute no one, except his Bishop or other 
great prelates, or some distinguished person, and then he 
should do so by a simple bow. He will do the same on 
meeting another priest, clad in sacred vestments, going to 
or returning from saying mass. If the two priests meet in 
a narrow passage, the one returning will give way to the 
one going to celebrate. 

18. If, perchance, the priest should go to, or return from 
the altar, without the chalice (whenever he is to bow or 
make a genuflection), he should take off his cap. 

Article IV. 

On Approaching the Altar. 

19. The priest, having reached the foot of the altar on 
which he is to celebrate, stops in the middle, takes off his 
cap, gives it to the server, and makes a low 7 bow r to the 



8 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

cross. If the Blessed Sacrament be in the tabernacle, he 
makes a genuflection on the floor, not on the step. (Rub. 
Miss., Part ii, Tit. ii, n. 2.) 

20. Then he ascends the steps, and, having arrived in 
front of the middle of the altar,* without making any bow, 
he places the chalice on the Gospel side. If the veil, being 
large, is turned over the burse, he will lower it immediately, 
with both hands. Then he takes the burse, brings it to 
the middle of the altar, holds it with his left hand, and with 
his right he takes the corporal from it, which he lays on the 
altar; after which, with his right hand, he will place the 
burse at the Gospel side, against the gradus, so that the 
aperture of it be towards the tabernacle, unless some figure 
be marked on it, requiring another position. His left hand 
he will keep on the altar.f 

21. Then with both hands he will spread out entirely 
the corporal in the middle of the altar, sufficiently, but not 
too near the edge, that neither the maniple nor the chasuble 
may disturb it. 

22. Having spread the corporal, with his left hand he 
will take the chalice per nodum, and, putting his right on 
the chalice covered with the veil, he will place it in the 
middle of the corporal at such a distance that he may after- 
wards conveniently kiss the altarj without touching the 
chalice. He will be careful to extend the lower extremi- 
ties of the veil, that the chalice may not be seen. (8. R. C, 
12th Jan., 1669.) After this, without making any bow, 

* Some Rubricists direct that the priest, upon arriving at the altar, 
should make a bow to the cross. Nevertheless, neither the Rubrics 
of the Missal, nor any decree of the Sacred Congregation, makes such 
a prescription. 

f Asa general rule, when only one hand is employed, the other is 
kept on the altar ; before the consecration and after communion, off 
the corporal ; from the consecration to the communion, on the corporal. 

J Some writers on Rubrics are of opinion that the front part of the 
corporal should be laid over the foot of the chalice, giving as a reason, 
that there might remain on the corporal some consecrated particles; 
but the Rubrics of the Missal, Part 2, Art. 2, speaking of the cor- 
poral, says, quod extendit super altare. The general practice in Rome 
and Italy is to spread it entirely. The church supposes that every 
priest will follow exactly the Rubrics prescribed, and that, conse- 
quently, no consecrated particles will be left on the corporal. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. V 

having his hands joined, he goes to the Epistle side,* opens 
the Missal where the Mass of the day is to be found (Rub. 
lliss.y n. 4), and then returns with his hands joined to the 
centre of the altar, where, having bowed moderately to the 
cross, he moves his right foot a little towards the Gospel 
side, in order to avoid turning his back to the cross, and 
descends to the foot of the altar, still keeping his hands 
joined. (Bab. 3Iiss.) 

Article V. 
From the Commencement of the Ifass to the Introit. 

23. Having arrived in front of the last step, the priest 
turns on his right to the altar, and makes a low bow to the 
cross, or, if the Blessed Sacrament is in the tabernacle, he 
makes a genuflection on the last step, without making any 
other bow. Then standing modestly erect, he will com- 
mence Mass, by making on himself the sign of the cross 
(Rub. 3£iss.), pronouncing the words distinctly, and suffi- 
ciently loud to be heard by the faithful near the altar. 

24. Having signed himself, f he says, in the same tone of 
voice, the antiphon, Introibo, and the psalm, Judica me 
Deus. While he says the Gloria Patri, he inclines his 
head, and stands erect at the Sieut erat. At the Adju- 
torium nostrum, etc., he makes the sign of the cross. 

25. At the Confiteor, he inclines profoundly, still keep- 
ing his hands joined. At the words, Vobis fratres and Vos 



* To join -the hands, the palm and the fingers extended, of both 
hands, should be brought together, the thumb of the right to be 
crossed over the thumb of the left, except from the consecration till 
after the ablution. The hands, thus joined, should not be kept either 
too near or too far from the breast, nor too much turned towards the 
face, nor towards the floor, but naturally directed somewhat towards 
heaven. The elbows should recline gently towards the hips. 

f He makes the sign of the cross by putting his left hand extended 
under his breast, then he raises his right to his forehead, and, touching 
it with the extremit}' of his fingers, he says, In nomine Patris; then, 
with the same hand, touching his breast, says, Et Fllii ; touching his 
left and right shoulders, Et Spirilus Sancti; and again joining his 
hands, he says, Amen. 



10 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

fratres, he does not turn towards the server, this being only 
done at Solemn Mass. In saying mea culpa, he strikes 
gently and unaffectedly his breast with the extremities of 
the fingers of his right hand, while he holds his left ex- 
tended below his breast. (Rub. Miss.) 

After the Mea maxima culpa, he rejoins his hands, and 
remains inclined until (the server having said Misereatur 
tui, etc.) he answers, Amen, upon which he resumes his 
former attitude. 

26. The server, having terminated the Confiteor, the 
priest says, Misereatur vestri, etc.; and while he says In- 
dulgentiam, etc., he makes the sign of the cross. (Rub. Miss.) 
Then, inclining moderately, he says, Deus tu conversus, etc., 
and remains in that attitude till Oremus inclusively, which 
he says in the same' tone of voice, extending his hands* 
and immediately rejoining them, and having become erect, 
he ascends the steps slowly, saying at the same time, in a 
low voice, Aufer a nobis. f 

27. Having arrived in front of the altar, he inclines 
moderately, puts his hands joined on the edge of the altar, 
so that the little fingers, joined and extended, touch the 
front of it, and the other fingers, being also joined and ex- 
tended, rest on the top. (In this manner the hands are to 
be placed, whenever the Rubric prescribes them to be 
joined upon the altar.) In this position, he says Oramuste, 
and at the words, Quorum reliquiae hie sunt, he extends his 
hands upon the altar, on either side of the corporal, and 
kisses the altar. J After which he becomes erect, joins his 

* In extending the hands, the priest should not allow them to pass 
the width of his body. 

f The Missal (with many Eubricists) does not prescribe any eleva- 
tion of the hands in this ease. The ceremonial of Bishops, however, 
enjoins it, perhaps only for Bishops ; nevertheless, it would seem that 
priests could also do so. 

% It is to be remarked, that whenever the priest kisses the altar,. he 
does so in the middle, not on one side, nor on the edge of it ; and 
that to do this properly, he should neither be too near, nor too far 
from the altar, lest he be awkward or affected. Neither is it suffi- 
cient in these cases to put the fingers on the altar, and it is too much 
to place the wrists there ; yet it is required to lay the hands on the 
altar-cloth. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 11 

hands, and turns towards the Epistle side, to which place 
he goes to commence the Introit, without making any bow 
to the cross. 

Article VI. 

From the Introit to the Epistle. 

28. Having arrived opposite to the Missal, he commences 
the Introit aloud, making on himself the sign of the cross, 
and then having joined his hands, he continues in the same 
tone of voice;* as he says Gloria Patri, etc., he makes a 
simple bow to the cross, turning himself a little towards it, 
without, however, moving his feet. 

Should the holy name of Jesus occur during the Introit, 
he bows to the cross. If the name of Mary is mentioned, 
or the Saint whose feast is celebrated on that day, he bows 
towards the book. After the Sicut erat, he repeats the 
Introit, but does not make the sign of the cross. 

29. At the end of the Introit, he returns to the middle, 
having his hands joined ; and, facing the chalice, he says 
alternately with the server, the Kyrie. (Rub. Miss.)\ 

30. After the last Kyrie, if there are no Prophecies to 
be read, and the Gloria is to be said, he will disjoin the 
hands, and raise them as high as his shoulders, and with- 
out raising the eyes, he says, Gloria in excelsis, etc., and in 
the same tone of voice, in saying Deo, he joins the hands 
again, making a simple bow to the cross, and remains in 
that position till the end of the Gloria. At the words, 
Adoramus te, Gratias agimus tibi, Jesu Christe, Suscipe 
deprecationem nostram, Jesu Christe, he makes a simple bow 
to the cross. Whilst he says Cum Sancto Spiritu, etc., he 
makes the sign of the cross on himself, and having said 
Amen,% he kisses the altar in the usual way, joining his 
hands afterwards. 



* Sufficiently so to be heard by the faithful who assist near the altar. 

f Should there be no server the celebrant will recite all. 

% The priest is not to join his hands after making the sign of the 
cross after the Gloria, Credo and Benedictus qui venit, S. C. K., in 
una Mardorum, 12th Nov. 1831 (4520). 



12 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

31. If there are Prophecies to be read, as is the case on 
the ember days, the priest, after the Kyrie (without making 
any bow), returns to the Missal, and says Oremus, etc. He 
reads the Prophecies in the same tone of voice, having at 
the same time both his hands either on the Missal, or on 
the stand. The Prophecies being concluded, he returns to 
the middle of the altar to say the Gloria. 

32. After having kissed the altar, the priest standing 
erect, turns on his right, facing the people, and extending 
his hands and rejoining them again, he says Dominus 
vobiscum.* (Rub. Miss.) 

33. Then he returns towards the Missal as before, he 
extends the hands, and rejoining them, he says, Oremus, 
at the same time making a simple bow towards the cross; 
and again extending his hands not higher than, nor be- 
yond his shoulders, as has been already said, he says the 
prayers, f 

34. At the conclusion of the prayer or prayers, when 
Per Dominum nostrum is to be said, the priest shall join 
his hands, and bow simply to the cross; he shall remain 
erect, with hands joined, till the end of the conclusion of 
the prayer. If, however, the prayer concludes with the 
words, Qui vivis et regnas, or, Qui tecum vivit et regnat, 
without making any bow, he joins the hands while saying, 
in unitate Spiritus Sancti. (Bub. Hiss.) 

35. When there is more than one prayer, he says Oremus 
only at the commencement of the first and of the second, 
so, also, the conclusion is said at the end of the first prayer 
and of the last. 

If, during the prayers, he pronounces the holy name of 
Jesus, or of Mary, or the Saint whose feast is celebrated 

*■ Whenever the priest says Dominus vobiscum, he does not look at 
the people, nor does he raise or lower the hands, and in extending 
them, he does not bring them beyond the limits of his body, but 
simply opens them so that the palm and fingers of one band face the 
other, and rejoins them again. Neither does he bend the head towards 
the ppople, nor does he rest his back against the altar. 

f The same thing is to be done whenever Oremus is to be said, unless 
something else is prescribed. Also, in pronouncing that word, care 
should be taken not to prolong the letter O, nor should it be said in 
any way affectedly. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 13 

that day, or the name of the Pope, he makes a simple bow, 
in the first case to the cross, in the others towards the 
Missal.* 

Article VII. 

From the Epistle to the Offertory. 

36. At the end of the prayer or prayers, the priest reads 
the Epistle in the same tone of voice, having his hands on 
the book or book-stand, in such a manner, however, that 
he touches the Missal. (Rub. 3Iiss.) If, in reading the 
Epistle, he happens to pronounce the holy name of Jesus, he 
will bow as was said before. If he is to make a genuflec- 
tion, as is the case when he says, In nomine Jesu genuflec- 
tatur, etc., or, Adjuva nos Deus, he bends only the right 
knee to the floor. The last words of the Epistle he may 
say in a lower tone, as an indication to the server that he 
is to answer, Deo Gratias, but he should not turn his head 
towards him. After which, he reads, in the former tone 
of voice, the gradual, the tract, or the Sequentia, if these 
are to be read. 

37. This done, he goes, with his hands joined, to the 
middle of the altar, where, having raised his eyes to the 
cro>s, he inclines profoundly, keeping his hands joined 
between his breast and the altar, and in that attitude he 
says, Munda cor meum. Then, Jube, Domine, etc. (Bub. 
Miss.) 

38. Should there be no server, the priest will move the 
Missal to the Gospel side, so that the opening of it be some- 
what towards the middle of the altar. In moving the 
book, he makes a simple bow to the cross, and having 
adjusted it in its place, he returns to the middle to say the 
prayer above named. (Rub. Miss.) 

39. The prayer being over, standing erect, and, having 
his hands joined, he goes to the book, his face turned par- 
tially towards the Gospel side, and in the same loud tone 

* In the prayer, A cunctis, the Patron Saint to be named is that of 
the place in which he celebrates. The name of the saint, founder of 
the community to which the priest happens to belong, is mentioned 
after that of the Patron Saint of the place. 



14 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

of voice he says, Dominus vobiscum. In saying Sequentia, 
or Indium Sancti Evangelii, he disjoins his hands, and, 
with the thumb of his right, the fingers extended, he makes 
a cross on the commencement of the Gospel he is to read, 
at the same time keeping his left hand extended on the 
Missal. (S. R. C, 17th Sept., 1816.) Then he forms a 
cross with the same thumb on his forehead, his lips, and 
his breast, holding his left hand on his breast. (Rub. Ifiss., 
n. 2.) 

40. After this, he joins his hands, and continues to read 
the Gospel in the same tone of voice. Should the holy 
name of Jesus, or any other name at which (according to 
what has been said before) he is to bow, be mentioned, 
he does so towards tihe book. So, also, should he be re- 
quired to make a genuflection, it is to be made towards the 
book, his hands supported on the altar. (Rub., ib.) The 
Gospel being read, he raises the Missal with both hands, 
at the same time bending a little over it, and kisses the 
commencement of the same Gospel, saying, in a low voice, 
Per Evangelica dicta, etc. 

41. When he is to read the Passion, he makes a simple 
bow to the cross, as he goes from the Epistle side to the 
Gospel ; he reads the Passion in the same attitude as at the 
Gospel, without, however, making any sign of the cross. 
At the words, Emisit Spiritum, he kneels on both knees, 
his hand supported upon the altar, and again joins his 
hands, in which position he meditates for a few moments 
on the passion of our Lord. Then, resting his hands on 
the altar, he rises, rejoins the hands, and continues to read 
until where he is to say the Munda cor meum, which he 
says in the middle of the altar, in the same attitude pre- 
scribed above. After the Munda cor meum, he returns to 
the book, his hands being joined, and finishes reading the 
Passion ; at the end of which (except on Good Friday) he 
kisses the Missal as above, saying, Per Evangelica dicta, etc. 

42. Having kissed the Missal, he replaces it on the stand, 
and, with both hands, he takes the stand with the Missal 
on it, and brings it nearer to the corporal, placing it so 
that he may conveniently read in it thereafter, and having 
rejoined his hands, he returns to the middle. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 15 

43. There (if the Credo is to be said) he extends his 
hands, raises them (not higher than his shoulders) at the 
word Credo, and joins them again at the words, In unum 
Deum, making at the same time a simple bow to the cross. 
In this position he continues the Credo to the end, in the 
same tone of voice, except that at the words, Et Incarnatus 
est, having placed the hands upon the altar, on either side 
of the corporal, he makes a genuflection with his right 
knee only (8. R. G, 22d August, 1818), in such a manner 
that, by commencing it at the Et Incarnatus, he touches 
the floor with his knee at the words Et Homo f actus est; 
as he makes the genuflection, he does not bend his head. 
He makes a bow at Jesum Christum, Simul adoratur; 
whilst he says Et vitam, etc., he makes on himself the sign 
of the cross, as at the end of the Gloria. 



Article VIII. 

From the Offertory to th<e Canon. 

44. After the Credo, if it has been said, or after having 
arranged the Missal, the priest kisses the altar ; and, turn- 
ing towards the people, he says, Dominus vobiscum. He 
turns again to the altar, and, with the usual moving of 
the hands and bowing of the head, he says, Oremus, and, 
keeping his hands joined, he reads the Offertory. (Rub. 
Miss,) 

45. At the end of the Offertory, he removes the veil 
from the chalice with both hands, folds it, and places it at 
the right hand, near the corporal, on which he may after- 
wards place the pall, if he chooses, or, without folding it, 
he gives it to the server. Then, having placed his left 
hand on the altar, near the corporal, he takes the chalice 
per nodum with his right, and places it at the right side of 
the corporal.* Then, with the same hand, he removes the 
pall from the paten, and places it on the folded veil, or on 

* If the chalice is not purified, he puts the pall first, where the 
chalice is to be placed. 



16 CEKEMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

the corporal against the altar-card.* Then, taking the 
paten, upon which the large particle is, between the thumb 
and the forefinger of his right hand, he brings it opposite 
to him, over and in the middle of the corporal, at the height 
of his breast, and there he takes it also with the thumb and 
forefinger of his left hand, in such a manner that the paten 
is supported by the named four fingers at equal distances 
from each other, and that the other fingers are extended 
and joined underneath it; after this, he raises his eyes, im- 
mediately lowering them on the large particle, and says, 
Suscipe, Sancte Pater, etc. (Rub. Miss.) 

46. The prayer being entirely finished, still holding the 
paten in the same manner, but nearer to the corporal, he 
forms a cross in straight lines of about eight inches in 
length ; then bending the paten towards the corporal he 
causes the large particle to slide on the middle of the front 
part of the corporal. Then he places the paten somewhat 
under the corporal, at the right, holding at the same time 
his left hand on the altar. f (Rub. Hiss.) 

If there are small particles to consecrate, either in a Cibo- 
rium,! or on the corporal, he directs his intention to the 
offering of them, having previously opened the Ciborium, 
and drawn it nearer towards the middle. After saying 
Suscipe, etc., he covers it, and places it in its former posi- 
tion, having previously put the paten under the corporal. 
If he should be presented with any small particles after 
coming to the altar, he places them on the paten, and, after 
the Offertory, he puts them on the corporal, a little higher 
up than the large particle, at the Gospel side. 

47. Next, having joined his hands, he goes to the Epistle 
side. From there, he takes the chalice per nodum with the 
left hand, brings it before him, and, with the fingers of 
his right hand, he puts a portion of the purificator in the 



* It is always with the right hand that the priest uncovers and 
covers the chalice. 

f It is not permitted to make any marks with the paten, or any- 
thing else, on the Host. 

% According to Gavn?ttus, De Mensuris, the Ciborium should have 
a veil, or cover made out of rich materials, either of silk or silver, or 
even gold cloth, through respect for the Blessed Sacrament. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 17 

cup of the chalice, and purifies it, while he holds it with 
his left hand. 

48. Then, holding the chalice, with his left hand on the 
altar, he places the purificator between the cup and the 
thumb of his left hand, that it may serve to gather any 
drops, which might fall from the cruets. 

Then, with his right hand, he receives the cruet with 
w T ine from the server, and pours a sufficient quantity of it 
in the Chalice.* Then, having returned the cruet to the 
server, he forms with the same hand, extended, a cross over 
the cruet containing water, saying, Deus qui humance sub- 
stantia. He takes the same cruet, and pours a little water 
in the chalice, f saying, at the same time, Da nobis per 
hujus aquaz et vini mysterium (Rub. Miss., n. 4), he returns 
the cruet to the server, continuing the prayer, taking care 
to make a simple bow towards the cross, at the holy name 
of Jesus. It is advisable to absorb with the purificator the 
drops within the chalice, that might have gathered around 
the cup. (S.R. C, 7th Sept., 1816.) 

49. This done, he places the chalice sufficiently near the 
corporal with his left hand, goes to the middle of the altar, 
and lays the purificator, folded in two, on that part of the 
paten that remains outside of the corporal. Then, having 
placed his left hand on the altar, he takes with his right 
the chalice per nodum, carries it over the corporal, and 
advances his left hand under the foot of it; then, holding 
it raised, so that the top of it may not be higher than his 
eyes, he says, Offerimus tibi, Domine, etc., looking at the 
cross the whole time of the offering. (Rub., ib.) 

50. After the Offerimus, the priest forms with the chalice 
a cross over the corporal, without passing over the particle. 
Then, having placed the chalice in the middle of the corpo- 
ral, behind the particle, he covers it with the pall. (Rub., ib.) 

* It is generally supposed, that the quantity of the wine should 
cover the bottom of the chalice, or such quantity that the priest, in 
consuming it, may be able, without effort, to take it all at one draught 
without lowering the hand [una haitsiu). 

f The quantity of water poured in the chalice should be very 
small, three or four drops of it are sufficient, and should be less than 
the third part of the wine. (See Pope Eugenius IV, in Decreto pro 
Armenis.) 

2 



18 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

51. Then he inclines moderately, and places his joined 
hands on the edge of the altar, and says, In Spiritu humili- 
tatis, etc. (Rub., ib.) Having finished the prayer, he be- 
comes erect, extends his hands, and, having raised them as 
high as his eyes, he joins them again, in the meantime say- 
ing, Veni Sanctificator, etc. Then he forms a cross with 
his right hand over the chalice and the particle together, 
saying, Et benedic »f« hoc sacrificium tuo Sancto nomini 
preparation* while he holds his left hand on the altar near 
the corporal. 

52. After this, he joins his hands again, and goes to the 
Epistle side, where, a little beyond the altar, he washes the 
extremities of the thumbs and forefingers of his hands, at 
the same time saying, Lavabo, etc. Having washed his 
fingers, he turns towards the altar, meanwhile drying them, 
and concludes the Psalm. 

53. At the Gloria Patri he bows to the cross, and, may 
conclude it, going to the middle of the altar. 

54. Having reached the middle of the altar, with his 
hands joined, he raises his eyes to the cross, and, having 
lowered them immediately, he puts his hands, joined, on 
the edge of the altar, inclines moderately, and says, Suscipe, 
Sancta Trinitas; at the end of which, extending his hands 
on the altar, he kisses it. 

55. Then, standing erect, and rejoining his hands, he 
turns to the people, and, extending and joining the hands, 
as at the Dominus vobiscum, with a voice a little louder, he 
says, Orate, Fratres; and, having rejoined his hands, he 
turns to the altar by the Gospel side, making the complete 
circle, and saying, at the same time, in a low voice, ut meum 
ac vestrum sacrificium, etc. (Rub., ib.) The server having 

* When the priest is to make a cross over the offerings, the hands 
are first joined before his breast, and, in forming the cross, the left 
hand is placed on the altar, and the right should be straight, and the 
fingers united, according to the decree of the S K. C, 24th July, 1683. 
Also, when the cross is made on the chalice and Host conjointly, the 
first line is commenced from the middle of the pall, and, without low- 
ering the hand, it is drawn over the Host; and the second, or the 
transversal line, is drawn between the Host and the chttliee, from one 
corner of the pall to the other, or not any longer than the first line. 



.CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 19 

answered, Susdpiat, etc., the priest answers, to himself, 
Amen. 

56. Here he extends his hands, as at the prayers, and, 
without saying Oremus, he reads the Secrets in a low voice. 
The number of these should equal that of the prayers said 
before the Epistle. If there is only one of them, he does 
not read the conclusion, but stops after having said, Spiritus 
Sancti, Deus. If there are more than one, he will say the 
conclusion of the first, saying, also, Amen; and at the con- 
clusion of the last Secret, he stops at the above-named words, 
which are considered as the commencement of the Preface. 
Then he turns the pages of the Missal for the Preface with 
his left hand, whilst his right is laid on the altar, off the 
corporal, unless, through necessity, he should be obliged to 
use both hands to find the Preface. 

57. Having found the place for the Preface, he lays both 
hands on the altar, and says, with a loud voice, Per omnia 
scecula sceculorum, Dominus vobiscum, etc. At the Sursum 
corda, he raises his extended hands as high as his breast, so 
that both palms face each other. At the Gratias agamus, 
he rejoins his hands without raising them any higher. At 
Deo nostro, he looks at the cross and bows. (Rub., ib.) 

58. When he commences Vere dignum et justum est, he 
opens his hands again, and holds them as he did during 
the prayers, until he reaches the Sanctus, etc., whereupon 
he rejoins his hands, inclines moderately, and says, in a 
moderate voice, Sanctus, Sa,nctus, etc., without, however, 
placing his hands upon the altar. At the words, Benedic- 
tus, etc., he stands erect, and makes on himself the sign 
of the cross in the usual manner. 

Article IX. 
From the Canon to the Consecration. 

59. After the sign of the cross, the priest raises his hands 
as high as the shoulders, and his eyes to the cross, lowering 
them immediately. Then, joining his hands, places them 
on the edge of the altar, and inclines profoundly, whilst 
he says, Te igitur, in a low voice. (Rub. Hiss.) At the 



20 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

words, Ac petimus, he extends his hands upon the altar, 
and kisses it. Then, standing erect, and with joined hands, 
at the words, Hcec dona, etc., he makes three signs of the 
cross on the offerings conjointly, saying at the first, hcec ^ 
dona, at the second, hcec «|* munera, and at the third, hcec 
sancta $* sacrificia illibata; and, having extended his hands 
without joining them, he continues, In primis qao3 tibi offer - 
imus, etc. [Rub. Miss.) In pronouncing the name of the 
Pope, he makes a simple bow towards the Missal, but does 
not bow at the name of the Bishop in whose diocese he says 
Mass; or if the See is vacant, he does not say Papa nostro, 
nor Antistite nostro.* (Gav., p. 2, Tit. viii, n. 2.) 

60. In saying Memento, Pennine, he raises his hands only 
as high as his breast or face, and joins them slowly, and 
having somewhat bent his head (it is not requisite to look 
at the large particle, it not being consecrated), he prays in 
silence, renewing his Memento for the living, during a short 
time. Then, having extended his hands, he continues to 
read, in a low voice, Et omnium cwcumstantium, etc., till 
muniamur auxilio. (Rub. 31iss.) 

61. During Communicantes, he makes a simple bow to- 
Avards the book, at the name of the Blessed Virgin, and 
towards the cross, at that of Jesus;, he also bows towards 
the book at the name of the Saint whose Mass he says, or 
of whom he makes a commemoration. (Rub. Miss.) 

62. At the conclusion, Per eundem Dominum, etc., he 
joins his hands without bowing. Then, on commencing 
Heine igitur, etc., he extends his two hands over the par- 
ticle and chalice together, without touching the pall, the 
thumbs still crossing each other above the hands, and the 
forefingers being united. (S. R. C, 4th Aug., 1663.) At the 
conclusion of the prayer, he joins his hands, closing them 
without separating them previously, and draws them to 
himself before his breast, at the same time continuing to 



* The Bishop named is that of the diocese in which the priest cele- 
brates, although ho may not bo his Bishop. In case he does not know 
the name, it is sufficient to form his intention to pray for him. In 
Rime, the words Et antistite nostTo are omitted, as the Pope is the 
Bishop of Rome. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 21 

read, Quam oblationem, etc., till the words Btnedictam, etc. 
(Rub. Miss.) 

63. Then, having placed his left hand on the altar, near 
the corporal, he makes three crosses on the offerings, in the 
same manner spoken of in n. 56. The first, as he says 
Bene^dictam, the second at Ad^scriptam, and the third 
(which is to be made slowly) during the words, ra^tam, 
rationabilem, acceptabilemque facer e digneris ; and as he 
continues, he makes another cross on the large particle at the 
words, ut nobis Cor+f*pus, and another on the chalice whilst 
saying et San^guis ; and immediately after, raising and 
joining his hands before his breast, he continues, jiat dilectis- 
simi filii lui Domini nostri Jesu Christi, bowing at the same 
time that he pronounces the sacred name. {Rub. Miss.) 

64. If there are particles to be consecrated, he uncovers 
the Ciborium, and moves it a little in advance of the 
chalice -should they be upon the corporal, and not in a 
Ciborium, he does not move them. 

65. After this (if need be, says the Missal) the priest 
purines his fingers, which is done by rubbing the thumbs 
and the forefingers on the side of the corporal, while he 
says, Qui pridie quam paterehir. He takes the large parti- 
cle between the thumb and the forefinger of his right hand 
[Rub. Miss.), pressing it a little for that purpose with the 
forefinger of his left (which he should do, Baldeschi says, 
whenever he is to take it up), and immediately after taking 
it on the other side with the thumb and forefinger of his 
left, extends and joins the other fingers together; and, 
standing erect, holding the large particle somewhat raised 
above the corporal, he says in the meantime, accepit panem 
in sanctas ao venerabiles manus suas (Rub. 3fiss.). 

66. In saying, Et elevatis oculis in caelum, he raises his 
eyes to the cross, and lowers them immediately. At Tibi 
gratias agens he bows, and at bene^*dixit he makes with his 
right hand a cross on the large particle; while he still holds 
it with his left, he takes it again with the right hand, con- 
tinuing, f regit j deditque discipidis suis, etc. (Rub. 3fiss.) 

67. In this position of the hands, having ended the said 
words, not before, he leans with his elbows on the edge of 
the altar, in an unaffected manner, bends his head, and 



22 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

distinctly and reverently, without any twisting of the body 
or of the mouth, without at all raising his voice, or breath- 
ing violently on the particles, he pronounces the words of 
the consecration, saying, Hoc est enim Corpus meum. (Rub. 
Miss.) 

68. After pronouncing these words, continuing to hold 
the Sacred Host in the same manner, be becomes erect, 
drawing his hands a little more towards the edge of the 
altar, bends his right knee to the floor, and adores the 
Blessed Sacrament, without saying anything. (Rub. 3flss.) 
After the genuflection, following the Sacred Host with his 
eyes, he raises it respectfully in a perpendicular line over 
the corporal, a little higher than his head, that the people 
may adore it ; then, without stopping, he lowers it slowly 
towards the corporal, on which he places it, with his right 
hand, in its former position ;* and, having placed his hands 
on the altar, the thumbs and forefingers being united, he 
makes another genuflection. 

69. After rising, he uncovers the chalice, taking the pall 
with the fore and middle fingers of his right hand (in this 
manner he covers and uncovers the chalice hereafter), and, 
having purified his fingers by rubbing them over the cup 
of the chalice, he says, Simili modo postquam ccenatum est; 
then, with both hands taking the chalice between the cup 
and the nodum, he raises it a little over the" corporal, and 
replaces it immediately, saying, in the meantime, aecipiens 
et hunc prceclarum calicem ; and without taking his hands 
off, he will make a bow at the words, Tibi gratias agens, to 
the consecrated Host. In saying bene*f*dixit, he makes a 
cross on the chalice with his right hand, still holding it 
with his left, and immediately holding it with both hands, 
he will continue, deditque discipulis suis. (Rub. 3Iiss.) 

70. Having finished saying these words, he leans his 

* From this moment until after the ablution, the thumb and the fore- 
finger of each hand are kept united, find are not separated, unless to 
touch the consecrated Host; consequently, in turning the pages of 
the Missal, he does so with the fore and middle fingers. Neither are 
the hands placed out of, but on the corporal (as was said before), 
except when the}' rest against the edge of the altar as before, with 
the exception that the thumbs and forefingers continue to be united 
together. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 23 

elbows on the edge of the altar, and holding the chalice 
per nodum with his right hand, and supporting it at the 
foot with the last three fingers of his left, without bending 
it (as some do), having his head inclined, he devoutly pro- 
nounces the words of consecration, Hie est enim calix, etc. 
(Rub. 3Iiss.) 

71. After the words of consecration, he places the chalice 
upon the altar, and, in a low tone of voice, saying, Hcec 
quotiescumque feceritis, he makes a genuflection, his hands 
being placed on the altar as at the consecration of the 
Host, and adores the Precious Blood. Standing erect, he 
takes the chalice with his right hand per nodum, and, with 
his left at the foot, and following it with his eyes, he raises 
it above his head, that the people may see it ; then he puts 
it back on the corporal, in its former position, covers it 
with the pall, holding the foot meanwhile with his left 
hand, and makes a genuflection (Rub. 3Iiss.), paying atten- 
tion in this, as in any other case, that the maniple may not 
touch the Host. 

Article X. 
From the Canon after the Consecration to the Pater Noster. 

72. Standing erect, and, having extended his hands as 
before, he says, in a low voice, Unde et memores, etc. (Rub. 
Ifiss.), to the words de tuis donis ac datis, when he joins his 
hands. Then, having placed his left hand on the corporal, 
at the Gospel side, he makes three signs of the cross over 
the chalice and Host conjointly, saying, Hostiam *fc puram, 
Hostiam *f* sanctam, Hostiam «J* immaculatum; then he 
makes one on the Host only, saying Panem sanctum %* vitos 
o3terno3, and one on the chalice alone, saying, et Calicem Hh 
salutis perpetual ; after which, he extends his hands, and 
in that position he continues the Canon, in the same low 
tone of voice, saying, Supra qvm propitio, etc. 

73. After the words, immaculatam hostiam, he inclines 
profoundly, and puts his hands joined on the edge of the 
altar, and in that attitude he says, Supplices te rogamus 
(S. R. C, 7th Sept., 1816) till ut quotquot; and in saying, 



24 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

ex hac altaris participatione, having extended his hands on 
the corporal, he kisses the altar in the middle, being care- 
ful not to touch the Host. (Rub., ib.) Then, becoming erect, 
and joining his hands at the words sacrosanctum Filii tui, 
he places his hand on the corporal, making with the other 
a cross on the Host at the word, Cor^pus, and another 
immediately after, on the chalice alone, at the words, San- 
gui^nem sumpserimus; then, having placed his left hand 
under the breast, so that the thumb and forefinger do not 
touch the chasuble, he makes with his right hand a sign of 
the cross on himself, saying omni benedictione coelesti, et 
gratia repleamur; and immediately after, he joins his hands 
before his breast, while saying, Per eundem Christum Domi- 
num, etc. (Rub. 3fiss.) 

74. In saying, Memento, Domine, etc., he extends and 
closes his hands slowly, so that they be joined at the in 
somno pads. Then, thus joined, he raises them as high as 
his chin, without touching it, and somewhat lowers his 
head; and, his eyes being fixed on the Blessed Sacrament, 
he makes the Memento of the dead for whom he desires to 
pray. 

75. After the Memento, he raises his head; and, having 
extended his hands as before, he continues, Ipsis Domine, 
etc. At Per eundem Christum, he again joins his hands ; 
and, in this particular case, although the holy Name is not 
mentioned, he makes a simple bow. (Rub. Miss.) 

76. Then, having raised his head, and placed his left 
hand on the corporal, with the three last fingers of his right 
he strikes his breast, saying, in a moderate voice, Nobis 
quoque peccatoribus ;* then extending his hands, he con- 
tinues in the low tone famulis tuis. (Rub. Miss.) Should 
the name of the Saint, whose feast he celebrates, occur in 
this prayer, he will bow on reading it. 

77. At Per Christum Dominum nostrum he joins his 
hands as usual, without saying Amen; continuing with 
joined hands, Per quern, etc., to creas, after which he places 

* In this case, as well as at the Agnus Dei, and Domine non smn 
digitus, when again he is to strike his breast, he should take care that 
the thumb and the forerin<rer shall not separate, and that they may 
not touch the chasuble. (Durandus, Lib. IV, cap. 46.) 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 25 

his left hand on the corporal, and with his right he forms 
three crosses on the chalice and Host conjointly ; the first 
at sanc^tificas, the second at vivi^+ficas, and the third at 
bene^dicis et prcestas nobis. 

78. Then holding the foot of the chalice with his left 
hand, he uncovers it with his right, and having placed his 
hands on the corporal, he makes a genuflection. Standing 
erect, he takes the Host at the lower part, with the thumb 
and forefinger of his right hand, and having brought it 
over the chalice, he forms with the same Host, within the 
cup, and without touching it with the Host, three crosses, 
holding, at the same time, with his left hand the chalice per 
nodum, saying Per *fa ipsum, et cum *i* ipso, et in 4* ipso; 
and immediately bringing the sacred Host out of the chal- 
ice, but still with his left holding the chalice, he makes two 
more crosses at the words, .Est tibi Deo Patri >$* omnipotently 
in unitate Spiritus 4* Sancti. (These crosses are formed 
between the chalice and himself.) Then bringing the Host 
over the chalice, and leaning the thumb and the forefinger 
on the edge of the cup, he raises the chalice a little with 
his left hand, at the same time saying, Omnis honor et gloria. 
Then having replaced the chalice and the Host in their re- 
spective places, he lightly rubs his fingers over the chalice, 
which he covers immediately after with his right hand, at 
the same time holding it with his left. After which, hav- 
ing placed his hands extended on the corporal, he makes a 
genuflection. 

Article XL 

From the Pater Noster to the Communion. 

79. The priest having risen, with his hands still on the 
corporal, says aloud, Per omnia sozcula sasculorum. The 
server having answered Amen, he joins his hands as usual, 
and says, Or emus, at the same time bending his head some- 
what to the Blessed Sacrament. Having raised his head, 
he continues, with hands joined, the prayer till Pater Nos- 
ter, when, having extended his hands before his breast, he 
continues it to the end, at the same time keeping his eyes 
fixed on the Blessed Sacrament. (Pub. 3Iiss.) 



26 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

80. The server having answered, Bed libera nos a malo, 
the priest says to himself, Amen. Then, with his right 
hand he draws the paten from under the corporal, and 
cleans it, for which purpose he makes use of the purifica- 
tor, which he afterwards places at some distance from the 
corporal at the Epistle side. During this action his left 
hand is held on the corporal. Then, having taken the paten 
between the fore and middle fingers, he holds it upright, 
its edges resting near the corporal, and the concave part 
towards the sacred Host, and the hand above the paten, at 
the same time saying, Libera nos, etc. (Bub. Miss.) In 
pronouncing Marice he bows to the book. 

81. In saying, Petro et Paulo, he places his left hand 
under his breast, and with his right, holding the paten, he 
makes with it the sign of the cross on himself, at the same 
time that he says, Da propitius pacem in diebus nostris. 
After the sign of the cross he kisses the paten, not in the 
middle, but on the border (8. B. C, 24th July, 1683), 
where it is not to touch the Sacred Host. Then, as he con- 
tinues, saying, ut ope misericordiw turn, he places the paten 
under the Host, being helped to that effect by the forefinger 
of the left hand. (Bub., ib.) Then, in the usual manner, 
he uncovers the chalice, and makes a genuflection. Hav- 
ing risen, he takes the Host with the thumb and forefinger 
of his right hand, raises it over the chalice, and with the help 
of the thumb and forefinger of his left hand cautiously and 
skilfully breaks it in the middle, commencing from the 
upper part, and saying in the meantime, Per eundem Domi- 
num Nostrum Jesum Christum Filium tuum.* Having di- 
vided the Host, he places the portion remaining in his right 
hand on the paten, still holding the other half over the 
chalice; then with the thumb and forefinger of his right 
hand, he breaks a small piece from the lower part of the 
second half, at the same time saying, Qui tecum vivit et reg- 
nat; and holding the small piece over the chalice, he places 

* To break it properly, it should be gently bent in and out two or 
three times, commencing at the top, then in the middle, and lastly at 
the end ; and returning to the middle, bent again carefully, till it be- 
comes divided.. In this manner there is less danger of causing small 
particles to break off. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 27 

the portion that is in his left hand on the paten, near the 
other half, saying, In unitate Spiritus Sancti Deus. Then, 
with his left hand, taking the chalice per nodum, he says 
in a loud voice, Per omnia scecula sceculorum. Amen being 
answered, he makes three crosses within the cup of the 
chalice with the small piece of the Host, saying, Pax <J« 
Domini sit *f* semper vobis^cum. In forming these crosses 
he should not allow the particle to touch the chalice. 
The server having answered, Et cum spiritu tuo, the priest 
lets the particle fall into the chalice, at the same time say- 
ing in a low voice, Hcee commixtio, etc. Then having puri- 
fied his fingers as usual within the cup of the chalice, he 
covers it, holding his left hand on the foot of the chalice, 
after which he makes a genuflection. 

82. Having risen, he inclines moderately before the 
Blessed Sacrament, his hands being joined between his 
breast and the altar ; and, in a loud voice, he says, Agnus 
Dei qui tollis peecata mundi ; and, having placed his left 
hand on the corporal, he strikes his breast with the three 
fingers of his right hand that have not touched the sacred 
Host, at the same time saying, miserere nobis. In the 
same manner (without joining the hands), he strikes his 
breast again at the second miserere nobis, and at the dona 
nobis pacem. (Rub. Hiss.) Then, having joined his hands, 
and placed them as usual on the ed^e of the altar, but not 
on the corporal, according to the decree of the Sacred Con- 
gregation (7th Sept., 1816), he says, in a low voice, the three 
prayers prescribed before Communion, his eyes being fixed 
at the same time on the Sacred Host. (Rub. Miss.) 

83. Having said the prayers, the priest makes a genu- 
flection, saying, as he rises, Panem eoelestem accipiam, et 
nomen Domini invocabo. (Rub. Hiss.) Then, with his 
right hand he takes both parts of the Host at the upper 
ends, from the paten, and places them between the fore- 
finger and the thumb of his left hand, in such a manner 
that the Host preserves its round appearance as much as 
possible. After this, he takes the paten between the index 
and middle finger of the left hand, and holds it between 
himself and the chalice, a little above the corporal, and 
places it under the Host, between the index and middle 



28 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

finger of his left hand, being somewhat inclined towards 
the middle of the altar, and without resting the left elbow 
on it, he says three times, in a moderate voice, Domine, non 
sum dignus, etc., slightly striking his breast with the last 
three fingers of his right hand as many times. Then he 
continues, in a low voice, ut intres, etc. (Rub. Miss., 
n. 4.)* 

84. Standing erect, he places one part of the Sacred 
Host on the other ; then, with the thumb and forefinger of 
his right hand, having taken both parts of the Host, thus 
joined at the bottom, he forms a perpendicular cross, at the 
same time holding the paten under it. He does not raise 
the Host so high as to allow the people to see it, nor does 
he pass the limits of the paten in drawing the transversal 
line ; while he forms the cross, he says, Corpus Domini 
Nostri Jesu Christi (inclining at the word Jesu) custodiat 
animam meam in vitam ceternam. Amen. (Rub., ib.) After 
this, he inclines moderately, rests his elbows on the edge of 
the altar ; and, thus inclined, and holding the paten under 
the Host, he reverently receives the Sacred Body.f Should 
the Host adhere to the palate, he must use his tongue, not 
his fingers to loosen it. 

85. Having received the Sacred Host, the priest stands 
erect, lays the paten on the corporal near the edge of the 
altar, and joins his hands, which he raises towards his chin, 
without touching it, and, his head being a little inclined, 
he meditates for a few moments. (Rub., ib.) 

86. After a short meditation, he lays the left hand on 
the foot of the chalice, and, with the right, takes the pall 
from the chalice, saying, in a low voice, Quid retribuam 
Domino pro omnibus quce retribuit mihif and makes a 
genuflection. Then, having taken the paten between the 

* To give himself time to pronounce these words, the priest may 
lay his right hand on the corporal, immediately after striking the 
breast, or lie may move the hand slowly as he pronounces the words. 
[Baldeschi.) 

f Rubricians differ in describing the method of communicating. It 
would be extremely difficult to reduce to practice what some of them 
prescribe on the subject. It is sufficient to say. that such an action is 
to be done with as much respect and reverence, and, at the same time, 
as unaffectedly as possible. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 29 

first and the second fingers of the right hand, and holding 
it inclined, he passes it gently several times from right to 
left over the corporal, to gather the fragments that might 
have fallen on it, for that purpose, raising, with his left 
hand, the extremity of the corporal. (Rub., ib.) 

87. Having gathered the fragments, he brings the paten 
over the chalice, and, holding it there, sufficiently inclined, 
he takes it between the first and second fingers of his left 
hand, as near as he can to the place where he held it with 
his right hand ; then, with the thumb and forefinger of his 
right, rubs the paten from top to bottom, so as to bring all 
the fragments into the chalice; then rubs the same thumb 
and forefinger together in the middle of the chalice-cup, in 
order to remove any particle that may have remained on 
them. (Rub., ib.) Here the priest places his left hand 
(still holding the paten) on the corporal, and, with the 
three free fingers of his right, he takes the chalice under 
the nodus, saying, Calicem salutaris, etc., till salvus ero, 
inclusively. Then he raises the chalice until the top of it 
reaches as high as his forehead, and with it he forms a per- 
pendicular cross, in the same manner as he did with the 
Sacred Host, saying, at the same time, Sanguis Domini 
Xostri, etc., and bowing at the word Jesu. (Rub., ib.) He 
then raises the paten under his chin, and brings the chalice 
to his mouth to receive the Precious Blood, which he does 
uno velduplici haustu, together with the Particle previously 
placed in the chalice. It is well to remark, that it is more 
becoming to hold the chalice steady to the mouth than to 
move it off and replace it again while the priest consumes 
the Precious Blood. 

88. Having received the Precious Blood, or after the 
communion of the people,* the priest having placed on the 

* Attention should be paid to renew frequently the Sacred Species 
preserved in the Ciborium. St. Charles Borromeo ordained that they 
should be renewed every eighth day. The Sacred Congregation (3d 
Sept., 1662) prescribed the same thing. " In renovatione quaa quoli- 
bet octavo die fieri debet de Augustissimo Sacramento," etc. Clement 
YIII (Const Sanctissimus, 31 Maii, 1595) says, that the Sacred Species 
should be renewed at least every fifteen days, and more frequently in 
damp places. " Hostise consecrate post quindecim dies ad summum 
(quod in locis humidis, prsesertim pluvioso aut hiemali tempore, fre- 



30 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

corporal his left hand holding the paten, presents the 
chalice to the server, in order to receive wine for the puri- 
fication, and at the same time he says, Quod ore sumpsimus, 
etc. Then he takes the wine, holding the paten under his 
chin, as he did in consuming the Precious Blood. If the 
Sacred Particle should adhere to the chalice, it may be 
brought near the mouth of the same, with the finger, or 
taken with the first purification. (Rub., ib.)* 

89. After receiving the purification, he puts the chalice 
and the paten on the corporal, so that the chalice be in the 
middle, and the paten a little towards the Gospel side; 
then taking the chalice below the cup with the last three 
fingers of both hands, he puts the thumbs and forefingers, 
still joined, over the cup of the chalice, and in this manner 
he carries the chalice to the Epistle side, where, holding it a 
little raised above the altar, the server pours on the fingers 
wine and water, while the priest says, Corpus tuum Domine, 
etc. It is well to remark that the Rubric says, abluit pol- 
lices et indices, therefore the priest not only washes the ex- 
tremities of the fingers, but the fingers, by rubbing them 
against each other, as the server pours wine and water on 
them. Then holding the chalice in the same manner, he 
carries it near the purificator, where he places it; and still 
keeping the thumb and forefinger of the left hand on the 
cup, he takes the purificator with his right, and places it 
on the fingers of his left, and as he goes to the middle of 
the altar he dries his forefingers with the purificator. 

90. Having reached the middle of the altar, he places 

quentius fieri debet), una cum minutissimis fragmentorum particulis, 
quae in ciborio remanserunt, a sacerdote consumentur, et in ipsum 
ciborium, aut pyxidem, ab illis fragmentis et particulis mundatam, 
novae hostiae consecratae reponantnr; nee unquam illse recentes cum 
his vetustioribus misceantur." The same thing is to be observed 
regarding the Sacred Host which is kept for Benediction. 

* From a letter of Pius V, 8th January, 1571, quoted by Benedict 
XIV {tie Sacrif. Miss., lib. 2, ch. 21), we gather that the quantity of 
wine poured in the chalice for the purification should atleastbe equal 
to that consecrated ; also that the purification should be received at 
that part of the chalice where the Precious Blood was taken. Should, 
however, the wine for the purification happen to be less, it will suffice 
to move the chalice gently, so that it may touch the parts where the 
Blessed Sacrament reached. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 31 

the purificator between the thumb and the forefinger, so as 
to cover the fingers of the left hand, and with his right he 
takes the chalice per nodum, and takes the last ablution, 
at the same time holding the purificator under his chin. 
Then he puts the chalice in the middle of the corporal, 
wipes his lips gently with the purificator, and with the 
same in his right hand wipes the interior of the cup of the 
chalice, holding: it by the nodus with his left. 

91. Lastly, the chalice being dried, he places it at the 
Gospel side (but not on the corporal); he extends the puri- 
ficator over the cup as before, and places on it the paten 
and the pall. Having folded the corporal with both hands, 
and taken the burse with his right hand, he puts the cor- 
poral in it, which he lays on the middle of the altar. Then 
he covers the chalice with the veil, on which he places the 
burse, and taking the chalice with both hands, he puts it 
in the middle of the altar, and adjusts the veil in front as 
at the commencement of Mass. (Rub., ib.; and Sac. Con., 
5th March, 1698.) Then he joins his hands and goes to 
the Epistle side, to which the server should have removed 
the Missal.* 



Article XII. 

From the Communion until the End of Mass. 

92. Having arrived at the Epistle side, the priest, with 
his hands still joined, reads the Communion in a low voice; 
then he returns to the middle of the altar, kisses it, turns 
to the people and says in a loud voice, Dominus vobiscum. 
He rejoins his hands, returns to the Missal, and reads the 
prayer (or prayers) in the same manner and order in which 
he had previously read at the commencement of Mass. 

93. At the end of the last prayer (unless there is a proper 

* The Sacred Congregation, consulted by the Bishop of Pu} r : "An 
in Missis privatis, permitti possit ministro si fuerit sacerdos, vel Dia- 
conus, vel Subdiaconus, ut prseparet calieem, et ipsum -extergat in 
fine post oblationes sieut in Missa solemni ? " Answered : " Negative, 
et serventur Rubric*." (7th Sept., 1816, no. 4526, ad 12.) 

The above refers to private masses of priests. 



32 CEKEMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

Gospel to be read), the priest closes the book in such a 
manner that the leaves be turned towards the chalice. 

94. Then he goes to the middle of the altar, kisses it, 
and turning towards the people, he says, Dominus vobis- 
cum ; and having rejoined his hands, he says, Ite Missa 
est, or if the season or particular Mass requires it, he says, 
Benedicamus Domino. And in this case he says it turned 
towards the altar. 

95. Having said Ite Missa est, he turns to the altar, in- 
clines moderately with his joined hands on the edge of the 
altar, and says in a low voice, Placeat tibi Sancta Trinitas. 
(Rub. Miss.) 

96. Then he kisses the altar, and having risen, he raises 
his* eyes, extending his hands (which he has elevated as 
high as his shoulders), and then joining them again before 
his breast, he says, Benedicat vos omnipotens Deus ; at this 
last w T ord he inclines his head, and turns by the Epistle 
side towards the people, having his hands joined, and his 
eyes modestly lowered. Then having placed his left hand 
extended below his breast, he blesses the people with his 
right hand, by forming a cross, and saying in a loud voice, 
Pater et Filjus, et Spiritus Sanctus. 

To give the blessing properly and unaffectedly, he ex- 
tends his right hand, having all the fingers united, and the 
little finger turned towards the people ; then without pre- 
cipitancy drawing a straight line from his eyes to his 
breast, he says, Pater et Filius ; he raises his hand verti- 
cally to his shoulders, and crosses the first line transversely 
from left to right, saying, Et Spiritus Sanctus. Then he 
rejoins his hands, and turns towards the Gospel side to the 
altar corner to say the Gospel of St. John. 

97. The last Gospel is read in the same tone of voice, 
and with the same ceremonies as the first Gospel, except 
that, when the Gospel of St. John is read, in saying Ini- 
tium Sancti Evangelii, the priest forms the cross on the 
altar, or on the card instead of the book. At the Et Ver- 
bum caro factum est, he makes a genuflection, having the 
hands extended, and laid on the altar. He also makes a 
genuflection, if, on reading other Gospels, there are words 
requiring it, as is the case on the feast of the Epiphany. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 33 

98. The Gospel being ended, the priest goes, with his 
hands joined, to the middle of the altar, takes the chalice 
by the nodus with his left hand, puts his right on the burse, 
and, turning on his right, he descends to the foot of the 
altar, where he makes a profound bow ; or a genuflection 
on the floor, if the Blessed Sacrament be in the tabernacle. 
Having risen, he takes the cap presented to him by the 
server. As he leaves the altar, he says the anthem Trium 
Puerorum, — the whole of it when the Mass is of double 
rite ; or only commences it, when the Mass is semidouble ; 
to which, in Paschal time, he adds Alleluija. Then he 
says the Benedicite. {Rub. Miss.) 

99. On arriving in the sacristy, he makes a low bow to 
the cross or other image ; then he places the chalice in the 
sacristy altar, or press, takes off his cap and unrobes. In 
taking off the vestments, he observes the contrary order 
from that observed in vesting ; for in removing the alb, 
he draws off the left sleeve first, then passes the alb over 
his head, and, lastly, draws off the right sleeve. He kisses 
the cross on the stole, maniple, and amice, as he did when 
vesting. 

100. Finally, having washed his hands (a praiseworthy 
practice, not ordered by the Rubric, but recommended by 
most Rubricists), without speaking to any person, he goes 
to make his thanksgiving. If he vested at the altar, he 
un vests there also, at the Gospel side, as soon as he has 
read the Gospel, without previously returning to the mid- 
dle of the altar. 



Article XIII. 
On Votive Masses.* 

101. A votive Mass is one which a priest celebrates for 
his own devotion, or to comply with the wishes of the 
faithful. 

If such Mass differ from that prescribed by the Rubric, 

* This article is transcribed from the Ceremonies of Low Mass by 
Key. James Hughes. 



34 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

or if it do not accord with the Office, there ought to be a 
legitimate reason for it, as it cannot be said on all days.* 

Masses for the dead, nisi solemnes vel cantatce, are classed 
among votive. They are prohibited on all doubles and 
Sundays ; within the octaves of the Epiphany, Easter, 
Pentecost, Corpus Christi, and Christmas; also on Ash 
Wednesday, and during Holy Week ; and on the vigils of 
Epiphany, Pentecost, and Christmas. 

102. Votive Masses, generally speaking, are prohibited 
on days when requiem Masses cannot be celebrated. 

Newly ordained priests who are charged by the Bishop 
to say three Masses — one of the Holy Ghost, the second of 
the Blessed Virgin, and the third for the faithful departed, 
after their first Mass — can wait for the days on which these 
Masses may be celebrated ; but the obligation is satisfied 
by applying the Mass of the day to the intention prescribed, 
and by adding the prayer of the votive Mass, after those of 
precept, if the Rubric permit it. If the faithful request a 
votive Mass to be celebrated on a day when it is not allowed, 
the obligation is discharged by saying the Mass of the day. 

103. One solemn requiem Mass can be celebrated, if the 
body be present, on all days, except on the more solemn fes- 
tivals of the first class and of precept, on the festival of the 
Titular, and on the last three days of Holy Week.f If an 
interment occur on such days, and the Mass cannot be said, 
the prayer for the dead is not added after that of the day. 

104. The Church considers that more latitude ought also 
to be given for saying the Mass Pro Sponso et Sponsa in 
which the nuptial benediction is conferred. The decree on 
this subject, dated the 20th of December, 1783, was con- 
firmed by Pius VI, on the 7th of January, 1784, and the 
same Pontiff' orders its publication and observance in the 
entire Catholic world. This is the text : "In celebratione 

* Although the Mass, on Doubles, ought to accord with the Office, 
there is an exception for Ember Saturdays, on which a Bishop, 
if he confer Holy Orders, always says the Ferial Mass. This is an 
ancient usage, confirmed by m;my decrees of the Congregation of S. 
Kites. These are three in the general Collection. (11th Julv, 1739; 
21st March, 1744; 11th Feb., 1764; n. 3942, 4(104, and 4171.) 

t Decrees of 5th July, 1698; 11th Aug., 1736; 29th Jan., 1752; 
8th April, 1808; n. 3328, 3901, 4074, ad 12 et 13, 4357, ad I. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 35 

nuptiarum qua? fit extra diem Dominicum, vel alium diem 
festum de prsecepto, sen. in quo occurrat Duplex prima? vel 
secundse classis; etiamsi fiat Officiura et Missa de Festo 
Dnplici per annum, sive majori, sive minori ; dicendam 
esse Missam pro Sponso et Sponsa, in fine Missal is post 
alias Missas votivas special iter assignatam : in diebus vero 
Dominicis, aliisque diebus festis de prsecepto, ac Duplici- 
bus prima? et secundse classis, dicendam esse Missam de 
Festo, cum Commemoratione Missa? pro Sponso et Sponsa."* 
Another decree, of the 28th of February, referring to this, 
orders the Rubrics of votive Masses to be observed in the 
abovementioned Mass : that is, to omit Gloria in excdsis 
and Credo, and to say three prayers. 

105. In votive Masses, those for the dead excepted, the 
psalm Judica and Gloria Patri at the Lavabo are said, even 
at votive Masses of the Passion, or of the Cross, which may 
happen to be celebrated in Passion time. But Gloria in 
excelsis is ordinarily omitted, except at Masses of the Blessed 
Virgin on Saturday, at Masses of angels, and at those of the 
Saints on the day of their death, which is considered as a 
species of festival. f It is likewise said at solemn votive 
Masses celebrated for some weighty cause, J unless violet 
ornaments are used. 

106. Three prayers are ordinarily said. The first is that 
of the votive Mass; the second is that of the office; and 
the third, that which would have been said in the second 
place in the Mass of the day, unless some commemoration 
is to be made. When the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, 

* This decree has been inserted in the Rituale Romanum; it is n. 
4266 in the Collection. The other decree is n. 4394. It is easy to 
infer that the above Mass cannot be said on days which exclude either 
the greater or lesser Doubles; for instance, the entire octave of the 
Epiphany, the vigil of Pentecost, etc. 

f Romsee. after Gavantus. 

% By Masses pro re gravi the Congregation of Bites means those at 
which the Bishop and clergy, etc., assist. (Dec. of 19th May, 1607; 
n. 204, ad 14 ) Clothing or religious profession is not to be reckoned 
among the causes which warrant the singing of a votive Mass of the 
Holy Ghost, on a Sunday or a Douhle. (Dec. of 24th July, 1683, n. 
2060, ad 5.) Rubricians give the same decision regarding the first 
Masses of newly ordained priests, and the Masses of the fiftieth year. 
(Rit. sac. ad usum Dicec. Mechlin.) 



36 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

the prayer thereof is always added. If a votive Mass de 
B. V. Maria be said, the third prayer is de Spiritu Saneto. 

107. During Advent, Alleluia and its versicle are said at 
votive Masses, though not at ferial ones; and at the times 
of Septuagesima and Lent the tract is said, though not said 
at all ferial Masses in these times. 

108. The Credo is generally omitted at votive Masses. 
At solemn Masses pro re gravi, it may be sung; if, how- 
ever, violet ornaments be used, the Credo must be omitted, 
unless it be a Sunday. The Q~edo is not said in private 
votive Masses, during an octave. 

109. If the votive Mass have a proper preface, it is said ; 
if not, the common preface is used, or that of the time or 
of an octave, if there be a proper preface for either. In 
votive Masses the Gospel of St. John is always said. White 
vestments are used at votive Masses De SS. Trinitate, De 
SS. Eucharistise Sacramento, De S. Maria, De Angelis, In 
Annivers. Elect, seu Consecr. Episcopi, Pro Sponso et 
Sponsa ; red, at Masses De Spiritu Saneto, De Sancta Cruce, 
De SS. Apost., Pro eligendo S. Pontifice; violet,- at those 
De Pass. D. N. J. C. Ad tollendum Schisma, Pro qua- 
cumque necessitate; and at the eight other votive Masses 
which follow in the Missal. At those of Saints, the color 
is the same as on their feasts; and at requiem Masses it is 
always black. 

110. We can refer to this article the Mass which a priest 
ought to celebrate in a Church where the office differs from 
his own. What Mass then ought a priest to celebrate where 
the ordo differs from his own, either with regard to the rite 
of a feast or the day on which it is fixed ? 

111. If he say Mass in a church, where a festival is cele- 
brated solemnly and with concourse of people, for instance, 
on the feast of its patron or on the day of its dedication, he 
ought to conform to the rite and to the color of this Church. 
He would even do better to say the Mass of such Church, 
without taking any notice of his own office, unless on a 
Sunday or a privileged feria, a commemoration of which is 
never omitted. If he celebrate High Mass, on a day of 
obligation, or even on a day when devotion attracts a con- 
course of people, he is obliged to follow, exclusively, the 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 37 

rite of the Church where he is, without paying any atten- 
tion to the office he has recited. 

112. If he go, through devotion, to say Mass in a Church, 
where the festival of a saint is solemnly celebrated, he can 
say the proper Mass, if it have been granted to the whole 
Church; or, if not, he can say the common. This has 
been decided, with some exceptions, by many decrees of 
the Congregation of Sacred Rites.* 

113. On other days, not celebrated with such solemnity, 
if the color be the same as that of his own church, he can 
say Mass conformably to his office. 

114. If the office of the place be of double rite, or if 
votive or requiem Masses be inconsistent with the office of 
the place, he must conform at least to the color. 

If his own office be of double rite, he cannot say a votive 
Mass, although the office of the place be compatible with 
it; nor a requiem Mass, unless there be in the same Church, 
on that day, solemn Exequies for the dead.f 



CHAPTER II. 

ORDER TO BE OBSERVED IN CELEBRATING TWO MASSES 
ON THE SAME DAY. 

1. When a priest is authorized to say two Masses (which 
can only be done on Sundays and feasts of obligation), in 
order to afford an opportunity for a considerable number of 
people to comply with the precept of assisting at the Holy 
Sacrifice, he may be much perplexed as to how he should 
act with regard to the chalice and the ablution of the 



* See Traite des SS. Mys&res, ch. 12, n. 5. 

f All these rules have been extracted from several decrees of the 
Congregation of Rites; 11th June, 1701; 4th Sept., 1745: 7th May, 
1746; 29th Jan., 1752; n. 3137, ad 2, et 3 ; 4026, ad 8; 4032, ad 13; 
4074, ad 10, et 11. See also Romsee, torn, i, art. 5, and torn, v, n. 39. 



38 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

fingers, especially if he has to say the second Mass in an- 
other Church, and at some distance. The Sacred Congrega- 
tion of Rites, in an instruction approved by Pope Pius IX 
the 11th day of March, 1858, prescribes that when a priest 
is obliged to celebrate Mass in two different Churches on 
the same day, he should, in consuming the Precious Blood 
(during the first Mass), use the utmost diligence to take 
the whole of it. Then he places the chalice on the corporal, 
covers it with the pall, and with his hands joined, standing 
in the middle of the altar, he says, Quod ore sumpsimus. 
After which, drawing towards him the little water vase, he 
washes his fingers, saying at the same time, Corpus tuum 
Domine, etc., and then wipes them. The chalice being 
still on the corporal, removing the pall, he places on it the 
purificator, then the paten, the pall, and lastly the veil. 
He then continues the Mass, and having finished reading 
the last Gospel, goes to the middle of the altar, where, 
uncovering the chalice, he examines whether any of the 
Precious Blood has collected at the bottom, which often 
happens, for although the Sacred Species were at first care- 
fully consumed, nevertheless, in the very act of consuming, 
drops are spread around the surface, and will not collect at 
the bottom until the chalice is again in its position for 
awhile. If, then, there still remains a drop of the Divine 
Blood, he will carefully take It from the same side of the 
chalice, from which he had consumed It. He should by 
all means do so, as the sacrifice still morally lasts, and by 
divine precept is to be completed by the consummation of 
the species still existing. After this, the priest will pour 
into the chalice at least as much water as he had before 
poured Avine, and by gently moving the chalice cause the 
water to pass around, and then empty it in the vessel used 
for that purpose by the same side of the chalice from which 
he received the Precious Blood. Then, wiping the chalice 
with the purificator, he covers it as usual, and leaves the 
altar. 

2. The priest having unvested and made his thanks- 
giving, if he is to say Mass on the following day, in the 
same place, he will preserve that water, and pour it in the 
chalice at the second purification; or he will cause it to be 



LOW MASS FOR THE DEAD. 39 

absorbed by raw cotton, or tow, which he burns ; or if it 
be left to evaporate, he pats it in the Sacrarium, or in the 
Piscina. 

3. This chalice having been used by the priest, being 
now purified, if he needs it for the second Mass he can 
take it with him, or he can use another. (S. R. C, 11th 
March, 1858.) 

4. "When a priest is obliged to say two Masses in the 
same Church, he may observe the rules given above. 



CHAPTER III. 

LOW MASS FOR THE DEAD.* 

1. In a Requiem Mass there is no change to be made in 
the psalms and prayers which, are a preparation for Mass. 
The Amice, Maniple, and Stole should be kissed as usual. 

2. At the commencement of Mass, the priest having 
made the sign of the cross and said the anthem Introibo, 
omits the psalm Judica and the Gloria Patri, etc., and 
says, Adjutorium nostrum in Nomine Domini, making' at 
the same time the sign of the cross. 

3. He does not make the sign of the cross at the Introit, 
but having placed the left hand on the Missal (or on the 
altar), with the right extended, he makes the sign of the 
cross on the Missal, without, however, touching it. In- 
stead of the Gloria Patria, he says, Requiem cetemam, etc. 
The Gloria in Excelsis is not said. (Rub. 3fiss., part ii, 
rit. xiiU 



* Low Mass for the dead, even prcesente cadavere, cannot be said on 
Sundays, festivals of double rite, nor during the octaves of Christmas, 
Epiphany, Eistor, Pentecost, and Corpus Christi. nor on the vigils of 
Christmas, Epiphany, Pentecost, or on Ash- Wednesday, nor daring 
Holy Week. " Missae private de requiem, etiam corpore presente et 
insepulto, dici non possunt diebus qui bus fit de officio duplici, vel aliis 
a Ptubrica exceptis." (S R. C, 29th Jan., 1752.) 



40 LOW MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

4. At the Munda cor meum, the Jube Domine, with 
Dominus sit, etc., are omitted. After the Gospel he does 
not kiss the book, nor does he say, Per Evangelica, etc. 
(Bub., ib.) 

5. While saying Deus, qui humance substantia?, he does 
not bless the water; at the end of the Psalm Lavabo he 
omits the Gloria Patri, without saying anything in its 
place. (Rub., ib.) 

6. At the Agnus Dei, instead of saying miserere nobis, 
he says, Dona eis requiem ; and at the third he says, Dona 
eis requiem sempiternam. He does not strike his breast in 
pronouncing these words, but keeps his hands joined before 
him, without touching the altar. 

7. He omits the first of the three prayers before Com- 
munion. (^Rub., ib.)* 

8. At the end of the Mass, instead of Ite missa est, he 
says, Requiescant in pace, turned towards the altar, not to 
the people. (Rub., ib.) Having said the prayer Placeat, 
he does not say Benedicat vos, nor does he give the blessing 
to the people (even had he given communion during Mass), 
but goes to the Gospel side of the altar, where he says, 
Dominus vobiscum, and the Gospel of St. John. 

9. It is to be remarked, that as often as only one prayer 
is to be said, the Dies irw should be said ; and this occurs, 
1st, on All Souls' Day ; 2d, on the day of the death or in- 
terment ; 3d, on the third, seventh, and thirtieth day after 
interment, and on the first anniversary, which are called 
privileged days for the dead. When more than one prayer 
is said, it is ad libitum sacerdotis. 

* Communion may be given at Masses for the dead, either with 
particles consecrated at the same Mass, or with others which had been 
reserved in the tabernacle, provided there is no custom having force 
of law to the contrary in the diocese. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 41 



CHAPTER IV. 

LOW MASS WHEN THE BLESSED SACRAMENT IS EXPOSED. 

1. It should be remarked, that it would be better not 
to celebrate Low Mass at an altar on which the Blessed 
Sacrament is exposed, according to the ceremonial of 
Bishops (lib. i, ch. xii, sec. 9), which states, that the dis- 
cipline of the Church is very ancient, to which the practice 
of the Patriarchal Churches of Rome, and of the best reg- 
ulated churches, is conformable. Nevertheless, when there 
is a just reason to celebrate at such an altar, the following 
ceremonies should be exactly observed. 

2. In going to the altar, as soon as the priest comes in 
sight of the Blessed Sacrament, he takes off his cap, and 
gives it to the server. Being arrived at the foot of the 
altar, he kneels on both knees, and bows profoundly ; he 
then ascends the altar, sets the chalice thereon, makes a 
genuflection only on one knee (which kind of genuflection 
is made when it is to be made on the platform), and ar- 
ranges the corporal and chalice. He again makes a genu- 
flection, goes to the Epistle side, opens the Missal, returns 
to the middle, makes a genuflection, and turning a little 
towards the Gospel side, he descends to the foot of the 
steps, makes a genuflection on one knee only, and, without 
bowing, begins Mass. 

3. After the confession, without making a genuflection, 
he goes up to the altar, and makes there a genuflection, 
before he commences the Oramus te Domine. After the 
Oramus, he again makes a genuflection, and goes to the 
Missal for the Introit. 

A General Rule. — A genuflection is to be made when- 
ever the celebrant goes from the middle to either side of 
the altar ; the same when he goes from either side to the 
middle, with this difference only, that when he goes from 
the middle, he first kisses the altar or performs any action 

4 



42 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

prescribed, and then makes the genuflection, this being the 
last thing to be done. When he leaves any side to go to 
the middle, the first act on arriving there is to make the 
genuflection, then to kiss the altar, or perform any other 
duty. 

4. At the Dominus vobiscum, he turns back a little to- 
wards the Gospel side ; and only half turned towards the 
people, he says, Dominus vobiscum, which must be observed 
whenever he turns towards the people. 

5. When he is about to wash his hands, he makes first 
a genuflection, then goes down the steps by the Epistle 
side, and avoiding to turn his back to the altar, turns so 
that his right side be next to the corner of the Epistle, 
and his face towards the people ; and there he washes and 
wipes his hands, then returns to the middle of the altar, 
and makes a genuflection. 

6. He says Orate fr aires in the same way as the Dom- 
inus vobiscum, without completing a perfect circle. The 
remaining part, till communion, is the same as in other 
Masses. 

7. After the first ablution, without removing from his 
place, he receives the second ablution, having his face 
turned as much as possible towards the Blessed Sacrament. 
[Bauldry, part iv, ch. ix, art. ii, n. 12.) Then he wipes 
his fingers, takes the ablution, and adjusts the chalice as 
usual. 

8. He then continues the Mass, observing the genuflec- 
tions prescribed, and the manner of turning himself at the 
Dominus vobiscum, and Ite, missa est. Should he have to 
say, Benedicamus Domino, instead of the Ite, missa est, he 
turns round to the altar, and makes a genuflection before 
he says it. 

9. After the Placeat tibi, he kisses the altar, says, Bene- 
dicat vos omnipotens Deus, and, instead of the usual bow, 
makes a genuflection, and turning towards the people, he 
gives his blessing. He does not, however, make a perfect 
circle, neither does he make another genuflection; but turn- 
ing to the Gospel side, he says, Dominus vobiscum, and reads 
the last Gospel, recollecting to sign himself with the cross. 
(Rub. Miss., Fer V, in Coend Domini.) 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 43 

10. At the Verbum caro factum est, as on all other oc- 
casions without exception, he turns a little toward the 
Blessed Sacrament when he makes the genuflection. 

11. At the end, he goes to the middle, makes a genuflec- 
tion, descends, a little on the right, to the floor, makes a 
genuflection on both knees, and bows. He then returns 
to the sacristy, putting on his cap at the place he had taken 
it off when going to the altar. 



CHAPTER V. 



OF LOW MASS US PRESENCE OF PRELATES* 

1. By prelates, are here understood Cardinals in every 
part of the world, Archbishops throughout their whole 
province, and Bishops in their dioceses. Others are not 
so considered; neither are the above when they are incog- 
nito, or not in their robes. 

2. If possible, the priest should be vested, and at the 
altar, before the arrival of the prelate, and should be stand- 
ing on the floor of the sanctuary, at the Gospel side, with 
his hands joined, waiting for him, and having previously 
prepared the chalice and Missal on the altar. 

3. On the arrival of the prelate, he salutes him with a 
low bow, and on receiving the sign to begin Mass, he again 
bows to him; then turns a little towards the altar, makes 
a low bow, and begins Mass in the same place and position. 
(Hub. Miss., part ii, tit. iii, n. 2.) 

The practice introduced, is to commence Mass immedi- 
ately after the salutation, without waiting for a sign from 
the prelate. 

4. If the prelate arrive before at the altar, 'the priest, 
whether he has the chalice or not, salutes him from a con- 
venient place; then, bowing to the altar, he arranges on it 



44 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

whatever is necessary, descends on the floor to the place 
above mentioned, and after bowing to the prelate, he com- 
mences Mass. 

5. At the Confiteor, instead of saying, et vobis f retires, et 
vos /retires, turning and bowing to the prelate, he says, et 
tibi Pater, et te Pater. [Rub., ib., n. 8); if there be more 
than one, et vobis Patres, et vos Patres. 

6. After the confession, having said Or emus, he bows to 
the prelate, then ascends to the altar, and continues Mass 
as usual. (Rub., ib., n. 10.) 

7. At the end of the Gospel he does not kiss the book, 
neither does he say, Per Evangelica dicta. The attendant 
takes the book to the prelate to kiss. (Rub., ib., tit. vi, n. 
2.) Even should the prelate not kiss it (w T hich happens 
when there are many, no one kisses it), the priest should 
also omit to kiss it. 

8. After the Agnus Dei, except in Masses for the dead, 
when he has said the first prayer before communion, he 
kisses the altar, then the instrument of peace (which the 
attendant presents, kneeling at his right hand), saying Pax 
tecum, the attendant answers, Et cum spiritu tuo (Rub., ib., 
tit. x, n. 3), and takes it, covered with a cloth, to the prel- 
ate to kiss; or, to several, saying to each one, Pax tecum; 
they answering, Et cum spiritu tuo. He makes a bow to 
them after they have kissed it, not before. ( Ccerem. Episc, 
lib. i, ch. xxix, sec. 8.) The priest continues the other 
prayers. 

9. In giving the blessing, after having said Benedicat 
vos Omnipotens Deus, he bows to the cross; then turning 
to the Bishop, he makes a low bow, as if requesting per- 
mission to bless the people, and says, Pater, et Filius, et 
Spiritus Seinctus, blessing the people only on the side oppo- 
site the prelate. (Rub., ib., tit. xii, n. 3.) If the prelate 
should be in the middle, he blesses on the Gospel side. 

10. After the last Gospel, without going to the middle 
of the altar, he turns to the prelate, and makes a low 
bow (Rub. t , ib., ii, 5), and remains there until the Bishop 
leaves. 

11. Should the prelate remain, the priest goes to the 
middle, takes the chalice, descends from the altar, makes 



MANNER OF GIVING HOLY COMMUNION. 45 

a low bow to the cross, and another to the Bishop, puts on 
his cap, and proceeds to the sacristy. 

12. The instrument of peace is not presented to prelates 
out of their diocese. A bow is made to them in going to 
and coming from the altar, and, according to the opinion 
of some Rubricists, at the end of the Gospel. In other 
respects, everything is done as if they were not present. 



CHAPTER VI. 

GIVING COMMUNION. 

Article I. 
Giving Communion during Mass. 

1. The practice of giving communion to the people 
during Mass, being more conformable to antiquity, is pref- 
erable to that of giving it before or after Mass. A quantity 
of small particles should be prepared, corresponding with 
the number of persons to receive. If there are many, it is 
better to make use of a ciborium ; if only a few, they may 
be placed either on the corporal at the left side, or on the 
paten ; but, in all cases, they should be on the altar before 
the Offertory. In making the Offertory, the priest extends 
the intention also to the small particles ; and after the 
Offertory, if the particles are on the paten, he will place 
them on the corporal, near the large particle, a little at the 
left side. 

2. If the ciborium is used, before the Offertory, he brings 
it nearer to himself and uncovers it. After the Offertory, 
he covers it again, and places it a little in the rear of the 
chalice, but not oft* the corporal. 

3. At the consecration, if the small particles are on the 



46 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

corporal, he does not touch them. If the ciborium is there, 
he uncovers it before pronouncing the words of consecra- 
tion, as was said above for the Offertory ; and after the 
elevation of the Sacred Host, having made the genuflection, 
he covers it, and puts it in its place. 

4. Having consumed the Precious Blood, and placed 
the chalice on the corporal, he covers it with the pall. If 
the small Hosts are on the corporal, he makes a genuflec- 
tion before touching them, and then he reverently places 
them on the paten, and again makes a genuflection. Mean- 
while the server says the Confiteor ; after which the priest 
turns to the right, and, facing the corner of the Epistle, 
says, in a loud voice, Misereatur vestri (not tui, although 
there may be only one communicant); The server having 
answered Amen, he says, Indulgentiam, etc., at the same 
time making a sign of the cross with his right hand over 
the communicants, in the same manner as he gives the 
blessing at the end of Mass. If the small Hosts are in a 
ciborium, after having covered the chalice with the pall, he 
brings the ciborium between himself and the chalice, un- 
covers it, makes a genuflection, and turns towards the 
people to say Miserealur, etc. 

5. Having said Indulgentiam, etc., he turns to the altar, 
makes a genuflection, and takes the paten between the 
middle and forefinger of his left hand or the ciborium by 
the nodus; and, having taken one of the Hosts with the 
thumb and forefinger of his right hand, he raises it a little 
above the paten or ciborium, and in that position turns to 
the people. Then, having his eyes modestly fixed on the 
Blessed Sacrament, he says, in a clear and unaffectedly 
devout tone of voice, Ecce Agnus Dei, ecce qui toll it peccata 
mundi; and then, three times, Domine non sum dignus, ut 
intres sub tectum meum, sed tantum die verbo, et sanabitur 
anima mea. (Rub. 3Iiss., part ii, rit. x, 6.) 

6. Having said these words, he descends by the middle 
of the altar, not by the side (S. B. C, Sept., 1737), and 
approaches the communicants, beginning at the Epistle 
side. Before giving communion, the priest makes, each 
time, a sign of the cross with the Host, above the paten or 
ciborium, taking care not to pass the limits of either; while 



MANNER OF GIVING HOLY COMMUNION. 47 

he says, Corpus Domini Nostri «f* Jesu Christi, bowing at 
these last words, he puts the* Host on the tongue of the 
communicant, saying, custodial animam tuam in vitam ceter- 
nam. Amen. In giving Holy Communion, the priest will 
be careful to lay the Host on the tongue of the communi- 
cant in such a manner that it will adhere to it; at the same 
time, he will carefully avoid touching the communicant's 
lips or tongue with his fingers.* When there are many 
communicants, and the first row have received, the priest 
should not continue to give communion by retrograding, 
but should recommence at the Epistle side ; and, as he 
passes by the middle of the altar, he makes no genuflection, 
even should the Blessed Sacrament be exposed. 

7. Having given communion, the priest returns to the 
altar, without saying anything, keeping the thumb and 
forefinger of his right hand united over the paten or cibo- 
rium. If any Hosts remain, and there is no place to put 
them, he makes a genuflection and consumes them. If 
they had been on the corporal, he gathers the fragments 
with the paten, and causes them to fall in the chalice; then, 
receiving the purification, continues Mass as usual. 

8. Should the priest give communion with Hosts already 
consecrated, having consumed the Precious Blood, he puts 
the chalice at the Gospel side, on the corporal, and covers 
it with the pall. Then, having removed the altar-card, he 
opens the door of the tabernacle, and makes a genuflection. 
Then he takes out the ciborium, places it in the middle of 
the corporal, closes the tabernacle door, uncovers the cibo- 
rium, and makes another genuflection. Meanwhile the 
server says the Confiteor, after which the priest says, Mis- 
ereatur, etc., and then continues as described above. 

9. After having given communion, he returns to the 
altar, makes a genuflection, covers the ciborium, opens the 
tabernacle, and places the ciborium within, makes another 

* If there are ecclesiastics in surplice to receive holy communion, 
they kneel on the top step of the altar. If there are priests or deacons, 
they should wear a stole, and receive first. Lay persons should kneel 
at the railing, or any other place where the communion cloth is pre- 
pared It is not permitted to use the chalice veil or finger towel for 
a communion cloth. 



48 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

genuflection, closes the door, and replaces the card before 
it. Then he receives the purification, and continues Mass. 

Article II. 

Purification of the Ciborium. 

10. The priest having received the Precious Blood, and 
given Holy Communion (if it had to be given), he con- 
sumes the small Hosts that remain in the ciborium. Then, 
taking with his left hand the ciborium by the nodus, brings 
the opening of it over the chalice, and, with the forefinger 
and thumb of his right hand, causes the particles to fall 
from the ciborium into the chalice. If necessary, a little 
wine is poured into the ciborium, and he gently moves it in 
such a manner that the wine may pass all around, and detach 
the small particles that may still remain. To do this more 
thoroughly, he may use the forefinger of his right hand ; 
and then he pours that wine into the chalice, after which 
he wipes the interior of the ciborium with the purificator. 
If newly consecrated Hosts are to be placed in the cibo- 
rium, he does so ; after which, he makes a genuflection, 
covers the ciborium, and replaces it in the tabernacle. 
Otherwise, he covers the empty ciborium, and puts it off 
the corporal. This being done, he presents the chalice to 
the server, to receive wine for the purification, and con- 
tinues Mass.* 

Article III. 

On giving Communion at other times. 

11. "When circumstances require that communion should 
be given immediately before Mass, the priest proceeds to 
the altar, clothed in the vestments in which he is to cele- 

* Quarti, Murati, and other Kubricists remark, that, in purifying 
the ciborium, such particles as may be found in it should not be 
brought to the mouth with the fingers, nor received with the mouth 
at the edge of the ciborium ; for, besides the impropriety of so doing, 
there is danger of losing some of the particles. It is better, however, 
not to use any wine in purifying the ciborium, especially when newly 
consecrated Hosts are to be immediately put in it. 



MANNER OF GIVING HOLY COMMUNION. 49 

brate (provided, however, that they are not black) ; he 
places the chalice on the Gospel side, the veil concealing it 
from the people, and then, having taken the corporal from 
the burse, extends it upon the altar. After which, he 
opens the tabernacle, makes a genuflection, takes the cibo- 
rium, places it on the corporal, and proceeds as directed in 
Xos. 4, 5, and 6. Communion being over, should he per- 
ceive any particle on his fingers, he must let it fall into the 
ciborium. Then he makes a genuflection, purifies his 
fingers in the little water-vase, which is kept near the tab- 
ernacle for this purpose, wipes them with the purificator, 
and says during this time, "O sacrum convivium in quo 
Christus sumitur, recolitur memoria Passionis ejus, mens 
impletur gratia, et future glorise nobis pignus datur." 
During the Paschal time, Alleluja is added to the above 
anthem. Then he says, Panem de Coslo prestitisti eis, and 
the server answers, Omne delectamentum in se habentem, 
with Alleluja in Paschal time, and during the octave of 
Corpus Christi. Then adding, Domine exaudi, etc., and 
Dominus vobiscum (S. R. C, 24th Sept., 1842), he says, 
Oremus. 

" Deus qui nobis sub sacramento mirabili Passionis tuae 
memoriam reliquisti ; tribue qusesumus, ita nos Corporis 
et Sanguinis tui sacra mysteria venerari, ut redemptionis 
tuse fructum in nobis jugiter sentiamus. Qui vivis et 
regnas cum Deo Patre," etc., and the server answers, 
Amen. During Paschal time, instead of the above prayer, 
the following is said. Oremus. " Spiritum nobis, Domine, 
tuse caritatis ■ infunde, ut quos Sacramentis Paschalibus 
satiasti,tua facias pietate Concordes. Per Christum Domi- 
num nostrum." The server answers, Amen. After this, 
he replaces the ciborium in the tabernacle, makes another 
genuflection, closes the door, locks it, and removes the key. 
(Should the priest foresee that he is to give communion 
during Mass, or immediately after, the key may be left in 
the door of the tabernacle.) Then he places the chalice in 
the middle of the altar, on the corporal, and gives the bless- 
ing (to those who received communion) in the following 
manner. 

12. The chalice being arranged, the priest extends, 

5 



50 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

elevates, and rejoins his hands, raising his eyes at the same 
time, and says, Benedictio Dei omnipotentis ; at these words 
bowing to the cross. Having turned to those who received 
holy communion, he continues, Patris, et Filii, et Spiritus 
Sancti, and he makes the sign of the cross, adding the 
words, descendat super vos, et maneat semper. The server 
answers, Amen. Then, without turning to the altar, he 
descends the steps, and having made the requisite genuflec- 
tion or bow, he commences Mass. 

13. When communion is given immediately after Mass, 
the priest, having finished the last Gospel, goes to the 
middle of the altar, and puts the chalice on the Gospel 
side ; then, taking the corporal from the burse, opens the 
tabernacle, and proceeds as in No. 11. The ciborium being 
replaced in the tabernacle, the door of it should be locked, 
and the key placed on the altar. After the blessing, the 
corporal is again put in the burse, which he places on the 
chalice, and on the burse he puts the key of the tabernacle, 
and he returns in the usual manner to the sacristy. 

14. When communion is given at other times, the priest 
washes his hands, puts on a surplice and a stole of the same 
color as that used for the day, or white ; should the priest 
wear a cape, he takes it off for the occasion. (S. P. C, 
12th July, 1628.) He goes to the altar with his head 
covered and his hands joined, being preceded by the server, 
who should have lighted the candles previously, and car- 
ried to the altar the burse, with the key of the tabernacle 
and the communion cloth, unless the latter had been al- 
ready prepared. If the server be a layman, the priest will 
carry the burse before his breast, and take along also the 
key of the tabernacle. Having arrived in front of the 
altar, he gives his cap to the server, and makes a genuflec- 
tion before ascending the steps. Then he goes up to the 
altar, unfolds the corporal, and places the burse against the 
gradus as at Mass. He opens the tabernacle, makes a 
genuflection, takes the ciborium from the tabernacle, and 
places it on the corporal ; he uncovers the ciborium, places 
the cover on the corporal, and again he makes a genuflec- 
tion. He continues the rest as before noticed in No. 11. 
After communion he replaces the ciborium in the tabernacle, 



SERVING AT LOW MASS. 51 

gives the blessing to those who have communicated, puts 
the corporal into the burse, bows to the cross, and, after 
descending the steps, he makes a genuflection, and puts on 
his cap; the burse is carried either by the priest or the 
server. He returns to the sacristy, where, having bowed 
to the cross, he takes off the stole and surplice, and the 
server returns to extinguish the lights. 



CHAPTER VII. 



MANNER OF SERVING A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 

Article I. 

General Remarks. \ 

1. The server should consider himself highly honored, 
being permitted to attend on a priest offering the most 
Holy Sacrifice. He should therefore perform this im- 
portant office with great purity of conscience, rectitude of 
intention, devotion, and decorum. 

2. In making the sign of the cross, he should put his 
left hand a little below the breast, and touching the fore- 
head, the breast, and the left and right shoulders with the 
fingers of his right hand, he should say: In nomine Patris, 
et Filil, et Spiritus Sancti. Amen. 

3. A simple inclination is made by bending the head 
moderately. A simple bow implies an inclination of the 
head and a moderate bending of the body. A low bow is 
made by bending the head and body profoundly, yet not 
so much as to render the action unseemly. A bow is con- 
sidered sufficiently profound, when the person that makes 
it, being in that position, can reach the knee with the ex- 
tremity of his hand. 

4. To make a genuflection, one should bring the right 
knee down to the floor near the left foot, without inclining 



52 MANNER OF SERVING 

the body, and then rise up again naturally, without too 
great haste. 

5. A genuflection on both knees is made by first bend- 
ing the right knee to the floor, then the left likewise to the 
floor; and having made a low bow, the person rises by 
lifting the left knee first, and then the right. 

6. To join the hands properly, the palm of one hand 
should be applied to the palm of the other, and both held 
upwards against the breast. The thumb of the right hand 
should cross the thumb of the left. During the Holy Sac- 
rifice, whenever the hands are not necessarily employed, 
they should be joined. 

7. The server should make an inclination whenever he 
hears the priest pronounce the holy name of Jesus, of 
Mary, or of the saint whose festival is celebrated, and on 
other occasions marked in the third article. 

8. In answering, he should take care to pronounce dis- 
tinctly, and not too loud, or too quickly. His manner 
should be grave without affectation. He should hold his 
head a little inclined, and his eyes modestly lowered. 

9. To put on the surplice in a proper manner, the server 
should open the lower part of it, and with both his hands 
pass it over the head upon his shoulders. Afterwards 
he puts first the right arm in the right sleeve, and then 
the left in the other sleeve; and having adjusted it about 
his person, fastens it in front. In taking it off, he should 
first loose the strings, then withdraw his left arm from the 
sleeve, and lifting the surplice from the left side above the 
head over his right shoulder, he takes it off from the right 
arm. 

Article II. 

Of the Vesting of the Priest. 

1. At the appointed time the server puts on the surplice; 
and if no one is appointed to prepare the cruets, light the 
candles, and make other necessary preparations, he should 
attend to it. Then he places himself at the left of the 
priest and helps him to vest. Whilst the priest puts on 
the amice, the server prepares the alb; and then puts it on 



A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 53 

him, and assists him by holding up first the right sleeve of 
the alb, and then the left. Afterwards he takes the girdle 
(keeping the tassels at his right) and gives it to the priest, 
so that he may easily gird himself. He should take care 
to adjust the alb in such a manner as to let it hang equally 
around, about an inch from the floor. After that he pre- 
sents to him the maniple to kiss, and fastens it on his left 
arm. Then he hands him the stole, and finally he assists 
him in putting on the chasuble. After the priest is vested, 
he takes the Missal, holding it with both his hands before 
his breast, having the back of it to his right. He makes 
a low bow to the chief image in the sacristy, with the priest, 
and a simple bow to him, and goes before him to the altar. 

Article III. 

From the beginning of the Mass to the end of it. 

1. Being arrived before the lowest step of the altar, the 
server places himself at the right of the priest, from whom 
he receives the cap. He makes a genuflection on the floor 
with the priest, or (if the Blessed Sacrament be not there) 
a profound bow; and raising a little the priest's vesture, he 
ascends the steps with him. He places the book on the 
stand, so as to have the back of it turned to the right. 
(The server does not open the book.) Then he puts the 
cap at a suitable place, and goes to the Gospel side, kneels 
on the floor at the left of the priest, a little in the rear, and 
joins his hands. 

2. When the priest descends to the floor to commence 
Mass, and makes a genuflection or a bow, the server makes 
a profound bow. He makes the sign of the cross with him, 
and answers at the confession. He bows at the Gloria 
Patri. After the priest has said the Conjiteor, the server, 
inclining a little towards the priest, says Misereatur tui, 
etc. ; then, bowing profoundly towards the altar, he says the 
Confiteor. At the words et tibi Pater, et te Pater, he turns 
his head somewhat towards the priest. He strikes his breast 
when he says mea culpa, mea culpa, mea maxima culpa. 
When the priest has said Misereatur vestri, etc., the server 



54 MANNER OF SERVING 

raises his head. At the words Deus tu conversus, he in- 
clines a little. At the words Dominus vobiscum, he rises 
and raises a little the priest's alb, while he ascends the steps. 
Then he kneels on the lowest step, and remains there till 
the end of the Epistle. 

3. He says the Kyrie eleison alternately with the priest. 
If the celebrant says Flectamus genua, the server answers, 
Levate. If there be more than one epistle, he answers, 
Deo gratias, at the end of each of them. The Epistle or 
Epistles being read, he rises, makes a genuflection or a bow 
in the middle, and goes to the book. If the priest makes 
a genuflection, as happens during Lent, the server makes 
also a genuflection. When the priest has done reading, the 
server carries the book with the stand to the Gospel side, 
making a genuflection or a bow in the middle, as he passes. 
Having placed the book on the altar, he turns it a little to 
the right, and goes below the platform near the book. He 
answers at the Dominus vobiscum; and at the words Se- 
quential Sancti Evangelii he puts his left hand on his breast, 
and with the thumb of the right he makes a cross on his 
forehead, lips, and breast. As the priest pronounces the 
name of Jesus in the beginning of the Gospel, the server 
bows towards the book, and goes down on the floor to the 
Epistle side, making a genuflection or a bow in the middle. 
If the name of Jesus be not mentioned, then he bows to 
the priest, and goes to his place, and there he stands during 
the Gospel, at the end of which he answers, Laus tibi 
Christe, and kneels down. 

4. If the Credo be said, the server^ kneels down during 
it, and makes a low bow at the words, Et incarnatus est, 
etc. Having answered at the Dominus vobiscum, he rises 
and goes to the side-table, takes the cruets, and carries 
them to the altar on the Epistle side. (He folds the veil 
of the chalice, if the priest leaves it unfolded.) When the 
celebrant approaches the corner of the Epistle, the server 
bows to him, and presents the cruet with wine to him, after 
first kissing it; he receives it back, kissing it, and presents 
to him the cruet with water, kissing it both before giving 
it and after receiving it. (He does not kiss the priest's 
hand.) At the words Veni sanctificator, he takes in his 



A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 55 

right hand the cruet with water, and the plate in the left, 
holding the towel on his left arm, and pours water on the 
priest's fingers, bowing to him before and after. 

5. Having placed the cruets on the side-table, he kneels 
on the first step in front of the altar at the Epistle side; he 
answers at the Orate fratres ; afterwards he answers at the 
Preface, and moderately rings the little bell at the Sanctus. 

6. At the words, Qui pridie, etc., the server goes up and 
kneels on the edge of the platform, at the right of the priest. 
He inclines during the consecration of both species, and 
makes a low bow when the priest adores the Blessed Sac- 
rament. At each elevation the server raises a little the 
extremity of the chasuble with his left hand, and with his 
right gives three strokes of the bell. 

7. The elevation being over, he rises, makes a genuflec- 
tion, and goes to kneel at his place. He strikes his breast 
at the words, Nobis quoque peccatoribus. He answers at 
the Per omnia scecula sceculorum, and at the end of the 
Pater Nosier. He answers again at the Per omnia, etc., 
and at the Pax Domini, etc. When the priest says Domine 
non sum dignus, the server inclines, and rings the bell mod- 
erately, that if there be persons to go to Communion, they 
may approach the holy table. When the priest uncovers 
the chalice after receiving the Sacred Body, the server rises, 
makes a genuflection, goes to the side-table, takes the cruets, 
carries them up to the altar, and inclines when the priest 
takes the Sacred Blood; after which he ministers wine and 
water with the usual bows and kisses. 

8. If there are communicants, after the priest has re- 
ceived the most Precious Blood, the server, kneeling, bows 
profoundly, and says the Confiteor. He inclines and an- 
swers at the Misereatur vestri, and makes the sign of the 
cross at the words Indulgentiam, etc. The Communion 
being over, he raises the priest's alb while he ascends the 
steps, and kneels again until the priest has closed the tab- 
ernacle; after which he presents the cruets as is said above. 

9. Having placed the c'ruets on the side-table, the server 
goes to the Epistle side, takes the veil and carries it to the 
Gospel side; thence he takes the book and carries it with 
the stand to the Epistle side, making a genuflection in the 



56 MANNER OF SERVING 

middle as he passes ; after which he kneels on the lowest 
step at the Gospel side. He answers the prayers, etc. 
When the priest gives the blessing, the server, remaining 
at his place, bows and makes the sign of the cross, at the 
end of which he answers, Amen. Then he rises, answers 
at the Dominus vobiscum, and at the beginning of the Gos- 
pel signing himself, as mentioned in n. 3. Towards the 
end of the Gospel, he goes for the priest's cap ; he bends 
the knee at the words Et Verbum caro, etc. Then he goes 
up to the altar, takes the book, bows to the cross with the 
priest, and with him he goes down and makes a genuflec- 
tion on the floor, or a bow. He gives the cap to the priest, 
and goes before him to the sacristy. There, after making 
a low bow to the image with the priest, he bows to him. 
After that he puts the book in its place, and helps the priest 
to disrobe. Finally, he takes off his surplice, and retires. 

10. If there be a last Gospel peculiar to the day, after 
the priest has said Ite, missa est, the server takes the book 
to the Gospel side, taking care to kneel when the priest 
gives the blessing. He should stand near the book below 
the platform until the priest has done reading, after which 
he carries the book back to the Epistle side. 

11. Should the Mass be celebrated in presence of the 
Blessed Sacrament exposed, the genuflection, in going to 
and leaving the altar, is made on both knees. The server 
pours water on the priest's hands, standing on the floor at 
the Epistle side, with the towel on his arm. The cruets 
are not kissed. 

12. When Mass is for the dead, the psalm, Judica me, 
etc., is not said. The usual kisses are omitted. At the 
end of Mass, the priest, instead of Ite, missa est, says, Re- 
quiescant in pace, to which the server answers, Amen. 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 57 

CHAPTEE VIII. 

MANNER OF SERVING A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 

Article I. 
Things to be Prepared. 

1. The vestments for saying Mass, viz., chasuble, stole, 
cincture, alb, and amice, should be prepared on the middle 
of the altar. Near the vestments on the Epistle side, the 
pectoral cross on a plate, and the maniple on the Gospel 
side. The Missal open at its place. (The altar-cards 
should be removed, if the Canon* be used.) On common 
days only two candles should be lighted ; on festivals, four 
or more. On the side- table two large candles should be 
placed, to be lighted at the end of the Preface. 

2. On the side-table the chalice should be prepared, the 
cruets, the basin and ewer, with a towel ; the hand candle- 
stick with a lighted candle, and the Canon. 

3. In the sanctuary, towards the middle, the kneeling* 
desk, covered with a green or violet cloth ; also, two cush- 
ions, one placed on the upper part of the desk, the other 
on the lower part. 

4. If the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, the vestments 
should be prepared in the sacristy, or on a side-table in the 
sanctuary ; as on such occasion the Bishop does not vest at 
the altar. 

Article II. 

Of the Preparation and Vesting of the Bishop. 

1. Two chaplains, at least, are requisite to serve a 
Bishop's Mass. 

2. At the appointed time the two chaplains put on their 

* A book containing the Canon and some other parts of the Mass, 
is so called. It is placed on the altar instead of the Missal during 
the most solemn part of Mass, when a Bishop celebrates. 



58 MANNER OF SERVING 

surplices, and go to receive the Bishop at the door. They 
bow to him when they meet him, and walk before him 
towards the middle of the sanctuary, where they bow to 
the cross, or make a genuflection if the Blessed Sacrament 
be in the tabernacle. The Bishop goes to the kneeling-desk, 
with the first chaplain *at his right. The second takes the 
Canon and the hand candlestick, and goes to the left of 
the Bishop. He gives the book to the first, who opens it 
where the prelate is to read, and holds it before him, as- 
sisted by the second, who at the same time holds the hand 
candlestick. The first should be attentive to turn the 
leaves. 

3. After the preparation, all go to the lowest step of the 
altar, where they bow or make a genuflection. The second 
having placed the Canon open in the middle of the altar 
against the tabernacle, and the hand candlestick near the 
Missal, takes the basin, ewer, and towel. The first takes 
the cape from the Bishop and places it on the kneeling- 
desk. He takes the ring from the prelate's finger with the 
usual kisses ; and having taken the towel from the second, 
each kneeling on one knee, they give the water and towel 
for the washing of the Bishop's hands, and rise after hav- 
ing received his blessing. (If they are priests, they do not 
kneel.) After which, the second puts the basin, ewer, and 
towel on the side-table. 

4. The first goes up to the altar, takes the vestments one 
after the other, and with the assistance of the second, vests 
the Bishop. Taking first the amice, he presents it to the 
prelate to kiss, who puts it around his neck, and, passing 
the string around the waist, fastens it in front. Then he 
puts the alb on him ; afterwards he girds him with the 
cincture ; then he presents to him the pectoral cross to 
kiss, and suspends it from his neck ; 'then the stole is also 
kissed, and suspended from the neck down on each side 
and fastened with the cincture ; after that, the chasuble is 
put on him and fastened in front ; lastly, the ring is put on 
his finger with the usual kisses. When the Mass is for the 
dead, the maniple is put on him after the cincture. If, in 
vesting, the Bishop wishes to read the prayers, the second 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 59 

chaplain should hold the book and the hand candlestick 
before him. 

5. The Bishop being vested, the first chaplain goes to 
his right, and the second to his left; they make a genuflec- 
tion or a low bow with him (the second having on his arm 
the maniple). The) 7 answer and bow as usual during the 
confession. After the words Indulgentiam, etc., the second 
presents the maniple to the Bishop to kiss, and fastens it 
on his arm. When he ascends the steps, they raise the alb 
a little, go up with him, and remain on each side of him, 
moving with him to and from the middle of the altar, as 
may be prescribed ; the first, pointing out what is to be 
read, holds the hand candlestick. They answer, make on 
themselves the sign of the cross, and bow. * When the 
Bishop makes a genuflection, they do likewise, supporting 
him by placing each his hand under his elbow. 

6. While the Bishop says Munda cor meum, the second 
chaplain carries the book and the hand candlestick to the 
Gospel side, making the usual genuflections or bows ; and, 
holding the hand candlestick, points the text to the prelate. 
(Should a Cardinal be present, the first, as soon as the 
Bishop has kissed the text, takes another Missal, and ob- 
serving the usual ceremonies, brings it to be kissed. If 
there be several high dignitaries, the Gospel is only given 
to the highest in dignity ; if they be equal in rank, it is 
given to no one.) When the Missal is not to be carried, 
the first chaplain remains at the right of the Bishop. If 
the Credo be said, they remain by the Bishop during its 
recital. 

7. After the Dominus vobiscum, the first chaplain and 
the second, leaving the hand candlestick on the altar, go 
to the side-table. The first takes the chalice and carries it 
up to the altar on the Epistle side ; he takes the corporal 
out of the burse, and extends it in the middle of the altar. 
He gives the paten to the Bishop, kissing it and his hand. 
He then wipes the chalice with a purifier. The second 
chaplain having brought the cruets, gives the wine cruet to 
the first, who pours wine into the chalice. The second 
takes the water cruet and holds it up to the Bishop, saying, 
Benedicite, Reverendissime Pater, and puts some drops of 



60 MANNER OF SERVING 

water into the chalice, after which he takes back the cruets 
to the side-table. The first having wiped the chalice, pre- 
sents it to the Bishop with the usual kisses. (In Masses 
for the dead the water is not blessed.) Then he puts the 
pall on the chalice, and the paten partly under the corpo- 
ral, covering the remaining part with the purifier. When 
the Bishop says, In spiritu humilitatis, the second chaplain 
takes the basin, ewer, and towel, and goes to minister to 
the washing of the hands, the first receiving and returning 
the ring with the usual kisses. The second having carried 
the ewer back to the side-table, goes to the right of the 
Bishop, and the first goes to the book. After the Secreta, 
the first takes the Missal from the stand, and in its place 
puts the Canon, open. They answer at the preface, and 
bow at the Sanctus, the second ringing the little bell. 
Afterwards the second lights two large candles on the side- 
table, which are put out after the Bishop's communion, or 
after he has given communion. (It would be more con- 
formable to the Ceremonial of Bishops, if two clerks hold 
two large candles or torches.) At the words Qui pridie, 
both kneel on the platform; they bow and raise the chasu- 
ble as usual, the second giving three strokes of the bell 
at each elevation. He also uncovers and covers the chal- 
ice ; afterwards they both rise, make a genuflection on the 
platform, and stand on each side of the Bishop as before. 

8. Towards the end of the Pater Noster, the second 
wipes the paten with the purifier, and gives it to the Bishop 
with the usual kisses. Then he uncovers and covers the 
chalice. They incline and strike their breast at the Agnus 
Dei. Should the Pax be given, the first chaplain takes 
the instrument of peace, approaches the Bishop, kneels at 
his right, holding the instrument before him, which he 
kisses, saying, Pax tecum. Having answered, Et cum 
spiritu tuo, he rises and brings the Pax to the dignitary to 
kiss. In presenting it, he says, Pax tecum; and being 
answered, Et cum spiritu tuo, he bows to him. Then he 
covers the instrument with its veil, carries it back to the 
side-table, and returns to the Bishop's side. 

9. At the Domine non sum dignus, they bow and strike 
their breasts; afterwards the second chaplain uncovers the 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 61 

chalice, and both make a genuflection ; then the second 
goes for the cruets, gives the wine and water with the usual 
kisses, and puts back the cruets on the side-table. Mean- 
while the first puts the Canon in the middle of the altar, 
and the Missal on the stand, and carries it, together with 
the hand candlestick, to the Epistle side. The Bishop 
washes his hands as usual, the second giving the water, 
and the first attending to the ring and presenting the towel. 
After which the first assists the Bishop at the book, and 
the second goes and arranges the chalice, carries it to the 
side-table, and returns to the left of the Bishop. Should 
the Bishop give communion, when he has taken the Sacred 
Blood, they kneel on the edge of the platform and say the 
Conjiteor. They answer and sign themselves with the sign 
of the cross at the Indulgentiam. When the Bishop re- 
turns to the altar, they raise his alb while he ascends the 
steps. If the first chaplain be entitled to wear the stole, 
after the Conjiteor he puts on a white stole, and takes the 
paten and holds it below the mouth of the communicants, 
while they receive; after which he places it on the corpo- 
ral, on returning to the altar. 

10. When the Bishop is about giving the blessing, the 
chaplains go on the step below the platform, where they 
kneel, and answer at the blessing. If there be a last Gos- 
pel specially prescribed, the first takes the book and the 
hand candlestick to the Gospel side ; otherwise, the second 
passing to the right, the first moves over the Canon, and 
assists the Bishop while he reads the Gospel. After the 
last Gospel, the first closes the book ; all bow to the cross 
and go down on the floor, where they make a genuflection, 
or a low bow. Then the first, assisted by the second, dis- 
robes the Bishop. The maniple is taken off first (unless 
it w 7 as a Mass for the dead), w 7 hich, as well as the other 
vestments, are put on the altar. Afterwards the first 
chaplain puts the cape on the Bishop, and buttons it in 
front. The second takes the Canon and the hand candle- 
stick, goes to the kneeling-desk, places himself at the left 
of the Bishop, gives the book to the first, who opens it, 
and holds it before the Bishop whilst he makes his thanks- 
giving. Finally, they accompany him to the door, where 



62 MANNER OF SERVING 

they bow to him, and return to take off their surplices. 
If the Bishop wear a calotte, the first chaplain takes it off 
at the Sanctus, and puts it on him again after the commu- 
nion. 

Article III. 
When there is but one Chaplain. 

1. If there be no more than one chaplain, he goes to re- 
ceive the Bishop at the door, and accompanies him to the 
kneeling-desk. Then he takes the Canon and the hand 
candlestick. He opens the book and puts it on the desk, 
and holds the hand candlestick. The preparation being 
over, he puts the Canon and the hand candlestick on the 
altar, and attends to the washing of the Bishop's hands. 
He vests him in the manner above described. He takes 
the maniple, goes to the left hand of the Bishop, and an- 
swers during the confession as usual. He rises and puts 
the maniple on the Bishop's arm, after he has said Indul- 
gentiam. After the confession he goes to the Missal and 
assists the prelate, answering, kneeling, inclining, etc. 
After the Bishop has done reading, the chaplain carries 
\ the book and the hand candlestick to the Gospel side. 
After the Pax vobis, he takes the chalice to the altar, 
spreads the corporal, and gives the paten to the Bishop 
with the usual kisses. He takes the cruets and puts wine 
into the chalice. Then presenting the water cruet to the 
prelate, he says, Benedicite, Reverendissime Pater, and puts 
a few drops of water in the chalice, which he gives to him 
with the usual kisses. He covers the chalice and prepares 
for the washing of the Bishop's fingers. He answers at 
the Orate fratres, and assists at the book, pointing out to 
the prelate what is to be read. After the secreta, he puts 
the Missal aside, and places the Canon on the book-stand. 
He answers at the Preface, and rings the bell at the Sanctus. 
At the words Qui pridie, he goes to the right of the Bishop 
and assists him, as marked in the second article. After 
covering the chalice he makes a genuflection, and goes to 
the Gospel side, makes a genuflection, and assists at the 
book. Towards the end of the Pater Noster he makes a 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 63 

genuflection, and goes to the Epistle side, makes a genu- 
flection, again takes the paten and gives it to the Bishop 
with the usual kisses. He uncovers and covers the chalice. 
He bows during the Domine, non sum dignus, and strikes 
his breast. He makes a genuflection and uncovers the 
chalice. He presents the cruets with the usual kisses, and 
carries them back to the side-table. Then he puts the 
Canon, open, against the tabernacle, and places the Missal, 
open, on the stand, and carries it, with the hand candle- 
stick, to the Epistle side. He afterwards attends to the 
washing of the Bishop's hands. Afterwards he repairs to 
the Gospel side, arranges the chalice, and takes it to the 
side-table ; after which he returns to the book, and assists 
the prelate as usual. He kneels and answers at the Bish- 
op's blessing, and makes the sign of the cross. Then he 
assists the Bishop during the last Gospel, by holding the 
Canon and the hand candlestick*before him. If there be 
a special Gospel, he takes the Missal to the Gospel side 
after the Bishop's blessing. After the Gospel he bows to 
the cross with the Bishop, and with him he descends the 
steps, and makes a genuflection or a bow. Then he dis- 
robes the Bishop, and assists him at the thanksgiving in 
the manner mentioned in the second article. 

2. Should there be a boy dressed in surplice, he will 
generally hold the hand candlestick near the book, attend 
to the washing of the Bishop's hands, bring the cruets, 
ring the bell at the Sanctus, at the elevation, and at the 
Domine, non sum dignus. He kneels during the confession, 
at the elevation, during the communion of the people, and 
when the Bishop gives the blessing. 



64 MANNER OF CELEBRATING 



CHAPTEE IX. 

MANNER OF CELEBRATING HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACON 
OR SUB-DEACON. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

On the Altar. 

1. The chalice, all prepared, should be placed on the 
extended corporal in the middle of the altar. 

2. The burse against th*e gradus. 

3. The Missal opened on the book-stand. 

4. The altar-cards. 

5. If communion is to be given, the ciborium on the 
corporal. 

6. The antipendium and the canopy (if the Blessed 
Sacrament be there) over the tabernacle, of the color of 
the day. 

7. Six candlesticks with candles. 

8. The cross prominently located in the middle of the 
candlesticks. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The cruets with wine and water. 

2. The finger-towel on the plate. 

3. The hand-bell. 

The celebrant's bench may be covered with a green 
cloth. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. All the vestments of the color of the day, for the 
celebrant. 

2. Two surplices for the two acolytes. 

3. If there are clergymen to assist, a sufficient number 
of surplices for them. 



HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACONS. 65 

4. If the Asperges is to be had, everything should be 
added as marked in the chapter on the Asperges. 

Article II. 
Vesting of the Celebrant. 

1. At the last bell, the celebrant washes his hands ; after 
which, he puts on the vestments in the usual order, assisted 
by the first acolyte, clad in his surplice. 

2. The second acolyte, with his surplice on, lights the 
candles at the altar. 

Article III. 

Ceremonies of the Mass. 

3. When the celebrant is vested, the two acolytes place 
themselves at each side of the celebrant, and all bow to the 
cross, or image in the sacristy. Then, with their hands 
joined, they go to the altar, the acolytes preceding the cele- 
brant. 

4. If there are clergy, they walk two by two, the highest 
in dignity walking before the two acolytes who serve at 
Mass. The first acolyte presents the holy water to the 
priest, then to his companion. 

5. Being arrived at the foot of the altar, the acolytes 
separate, to leave space for the celebrant; the first having 
received the priest's cap, carries it to the bench, having 
previously made a genuflection with tfye celebrant and his 
companion. The second acolyte kneels at the left of the 
priest, a little in the rear, and answers Mass with the first, 
who kneels on the right, also a little in the rear. 

6. The celebrant does everything as at Low Mass, except 
that he sings all that is sung at the solemn High Mass, and 
also the Gospel. There is no incense used at any time at 
the High Mass celebrated without deacon and sub-deacon, 
as it is only Missa Cantata. 

7. Towards the end of the confession, at the words 
Domini exaudi orationem meam, both acolytes rise to raise 
the alb a little, while the priest is ascending to the plat- 



66 MANNER OF CELEBRATING 

form ; they then kneel on the last step, and answer atten- 
tively. 

8. After the priest has said the Kyrie, if he wishes to sit 
down, they rise, meet together before the altar, make a genu- 
flection (always on the floor of the sanctuary), and go to the 
seat, the first at the right, the other at the left; they raise 
the chasuble, so that he may not sit upon it; the first pre- 
sents the cap with the usual kisses, and they remain stand- 
ing, one at each side, nearly face to face, so that their 
shoulders be not turned to the altar. 

9. At the last Kyrie, the first gives notice to the cele- 
brant to rise; he takes his cap, lays it on the seat, both 
accompany the priest before the altar, they make a genu- 
flection on the floor, raise the alb, and then kneel at their 
places.* 

10. When the priest leaves the altar at the Kyrie, Gloria, 
or Credo, he goes to the bench per breviorem. When the 
priest begins the last prayer, they repair to the Epistle side. 
The second standing at the priest's right hand, the first 
takes the Missal from the side-table, and stands behind the 
priest on the floor; at the words of the conclusion, Jesum 
Christum, he bows to the cross, goes to the middle, makes 
a genuflection, returns behind the priest as before, and 
standing, sings the Epistle slowly, and with the proper 
cadence. After this he bows to the altar, and without kiss- 
ing the celebrant's hand {Rub. Miss., part ii), he places the 
Missal on the side-table, and goes to kneel at his place.f 

11. The second acolyte removes the book at the proper 
time, going by the iowest step of the altar, and returns to 



* They should observe the same at the Gloria and Credo, being 
punctual to rise as soon as the priest bows, before going to take his 
seat, after reciting the Gloria and Credo. When those parts are sung 
at which the head is bowed, they bow to the cross, and the first gives 
notice to the celebrant to uncover his head, and to cover it. While 
the words of the Credo, Et incarnatus est, are sung, they kneel down 
with their faces turned towards the altar, and rise after the words, Et 
Homo f actus est. 

f If there be a Sequentia or long Tract after the Epistle, the cele- 
brant, after having read it, sit? down, as at the Kyrie, and, at the last 
verse, returns to the altar (by the Epistle side), to say the Munda cor 



HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACONS. 67 

kneel at his place; when the Gospel commences both rise, 
and at the end answer, Laus Tibi Christe, and again kneel 
down until the end of the Credo; then the celebrant goes 
to sit down. 

12. After the Credo, whilst the celebrant is singing the 
Dominus vobiscum and Oremus, they rise, make a genuflec- 
tion together in the middle, and repair to the side-table to 
put the cruets on the altar. The first hands the cruet with 
w T ine, kissing it; the other, standing at his left, that with 
the water, and afterwards pours the water on the cele- 
brant's hands; the first presents the towel, and both bow 
to the priest, both before and after. 

13. After putting away the cruets, they return to the 
middle of the altar, make a genuflection on the floor, and 
kneel at their respective places, on each side, fronting the 
altar. 

14. At the elevation, they rise, make a genuflection in 
the middle, ascend the steps and kneel on the edge of the 
platform, and both raise the chasuble, and perform every- 
thing as in other Masses. 

15. When the priest has communicated, and made the 
genuflection, the first acolyte rises, and after the usual bow, 
goes to give the wine and water; at the same time the sec- 
ond goes to the Missal, and when the first repairs to the 
Epistle side to remove the veil, the other descends with the 
Missal, makes a genuflection with his companion, places 
the Missal on the altar, and goes to his place. 

16. At the last Gospel, they both stand up, and the first 
goes to get the cap. At the Verbum caro factum est, they 
both make a genuflection, and when the priest descends 
from the altar, they make a genuflection with him ; his cap 
is presented to him with a kiss of it and of his hand, and 
they return to the sacristy, both going before, as at the be- 
ginning. 

17. When they arrive at the sacristy, they bow to the 
cross or image ; the first acolyte remains to assist the 
priest in taking off his vestments ; the other goes to put 
out the candles, and put away the things which are on the 
altar. 

18. If communion be given, after the priest has com- 



68 VESPERS. 

municated and made a genuflection, the first acolyte goes 
alone to get the communion-cloth, returns to the middle, 
and kneels down on the floor with his companion. When 
the celebrant is receiving the Precious Blood, they bow, 
and recite the Confiteor. After the Indulgentiam, they rise, 
make a genuflection at the same time with the celebrant, 
and kneel on the platform to receive communion ; after- 
wards they rise, make a genuflection, separate and kneel, 
holding each end of the communion-cloth, for the com- 
munion of the clergy ; after which, the first acolyte takes 
away the cloth. When communion is over they meet in 
the middle, make a genuflection together, and go to give 
the wine, and water for the ablution, as was said above. 



CHAPTER X. 

VESPERS SUtfG WITHOUT COPE-BEARERS. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

In the Sanctuary. 

1. Six candlesticks on the altar, and the cross in the 
middle. 

2. In the middle of the sanctuary, against the railings, 
three stools for the two acolytes and the censer- bearer, or a 
bench sufficiently long to accommodate the three clerks.* 

3. Near the bench for the officiating priest, a stool for 
the master of ceremonies. 

4. A book-stand, with the book, in front of the priest's 
bench, for the officiating clergyman, which may be covered 
with a cloth of the color of the day. 

* If the clerks are to wear caps during vespers, they should be put 
on the stools beforehand. 



VESPERS. 69 

5. At the altar the antipendium, and if there is the 
Blessed Sacrament, the canopy on the tabernacle, of the 
color of the day. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. A surplice and a cope of the color of the day, and if 
the officiating priest is to give benediction immediately 
after Vespers without previously returning to the sacristy, 
a stole of the color of the cope.* 

2. Four surplices for the master of ceremonies and the 
three servers. 

3. The censer and incense-boat with incense. 

4. Two candlesticks, with candles, for the acolytes. 

* As to the use of the stole, it may be well to remark that the Sacred 
Congregation of Rites, on the 7th September, 1816, issued the following 
decree, which was approved by His Holiness on the 20th of the same 
month: " Stolam non esse adhibendam prasterquam in collatione et 
confectione Sacramentorum ; ideoque consuetudinem in contrarium 
esse abusum, per locorum Ordinarios omnino eliminandum." The 
stole is less the mark of jurisdiction than of the sacerdotal character ; 
hence it should be used only in performing sacerdotal functions, as is 
prescribed by the Roman Missal and Ritual. An alb or surplice should 
always be put on under the stole. Priests should not wear a stole while 
assisting at High Mass, Vespers, or Benediction ; especially as Bishops 
themselves do not wear it when they assist in cope, the Ceremonial of 
Bishops not prescribing its use on such occasions. A priest should not 
use it even in officiating at solemn vespers, unless he is to give bene- 
diction with the Blessed Sacrament immediately after. For this 
reason he may wear it on the feast of Corpus Christi, when solemn 
vespers are sung, the Blessed Sacrament being exposed, since the 
benediction is to be given afterwards. Should the officiating priest 
return to the sacristy before giving benediction, he there puts on the 
stole for the purpose of giving henediction. The Ceremonial does not 
prescribe that a cunon should put on the stole or alb for solemn vespers. 
" Canonicus hebdomadanus indutus amictu et pluviali supra cottam 
seu rochetum." According to Gavantus, the priest may put on the 
stole immediately before going to preach, if such be the established 
usage, since the Sacred Congregation allows it to be followed. The 
priest who acts as master of ceremonies at the benediction of the Blessed 
Sacrament, should put on the stole when he is to open the tabernacle 
or touch the Blessed Sacrament and the remonstrance that contains it. 
He should take it off as soon as these actions are performed, and not 
wear it during all the time of the ceremony. For a priest to wear a 
stole while assisting in the sanctuary, even if he be the pastor of the 
congregation, is simply ridiculous. 



70 VESPERS. 



Article II. 

1. The instructions given in the first article of the fourth 
chapter on solemn vespers, should be observed also during 
vespers without cope-bearers. 

2. A little before the last bell, the master of ceremonies 
and the three servers put on their surplices. The master 
of ceremonies helps the officiating priest to vest. The first 
acolyte lights the candles on the altar, and the two candles 
in the sacristy. The censer-bearer sees to the fire, that it 
may be ready when wanted. 

3. The censer-bearer in the midst of the two acolytes 
carrying the candlesticks; the first, being at his right, 
goes behind the officiating priest. As a general rule, the 
acolyte at the right will carry the candlestick by holding 
the foot of it with his left hand, and the middle of the stem 
with his right ; and vice versa, the one at the left should 
hold the foot with his right, and the stem with his left, in 
such a way that the candlestick be carried straight in front 
of the bearer, without awkwardness or affectation. 

4. At the sign of the master of ceremonies, all bow to 
the cross, and* proceed to the altar in the following order : 
First walks the censer-bearer with his hands joined, then 
the two acolytes, carrying the candlesticks, then the master 
of ceremonies, and lastly, the officiating priest. 

5. Having arrived before the lowest step of the altar, 
the servers place themselves in front, sufficiently distant 
from the step to leave space for the officiating priest. The 
priest, having arrived in front of the altar, gives his cap to 
the master of ceremonies, who receives it with the usual 
kisses. Then all make a genuflection on the floor. All 
having risen, the priest and master of ceremonies kneel on 
the lowest step, and the acolytes go on each side of the 
altar, and place the candlesticks on the lowest step, one at 
the Gospel side, the other at the Epistle side, and put out 
the candles ; after which they go in the middle, one on 
each side of the censer-bearer, where they all make a genu- 
flection, and go to their bench. 

6. In the meantime, the priest says the Aperi, Dominc, 



VESPERS. 71 

after which he rises, makes a genuflection, and the master 
of ceremonies accompanies him to the bench. Being ar- 
rived at the bench, the priest says, in a low voice, the Pater 
and Ave, after which he intones, Deus in adjutorium meum 
intende, at the same time making the sign of the cross on 
himself, while the master of ceremonies raises the right 
border of the cope. All bow at the Gloria Patri, towards 
the altar, and at the commencement of the Psalm all sit. 
The priest, having received the cap from the master of cere- 
monies, puts it on, and the master of ceremonies also sits. 

7. Whenever the Gloria Patri is sung, the priest takes 
off his cap, the master of ceremonies giving him notice to 
that effect each time, by rising and bowing to him. He 
also raises the border of the cope, and inclines towards the 
altar during the Gloria Patri, or at any similar occurrence, 
and does not sit till the former replaces the cap on his 
head. The officiating priest takes off his cap at the names 
of Jesus, Mary, and of the saint whose feast is celebrated, 
and at the words, Sit nomen Domini benedictum. 

8. Towards the end of the last Psalm, the censer-bearer 
rises, makes a genuflection before the altar, bows to the 
officiating priest, and goes to the sacristy to prepare the 
censer. The acolytes also rise, make a genuflection and a 
bow with the censer-bearer. They light the candles on 
their candlesticks, and with them they proceed to the 
middle before the lowest step, make a genuflection, and go 
to the officiating priest, to whom they bow, and then place 
themselves one on each side of the book-stand, facing each 
other, where they stand till the commencement of the 
hymn, unless it is the Ave Maris Stella, or Veni Creator 
Spiritus. in which case they will wait till the end of the 
first strophe, after which they salute the officiating priest, 
go to the middle of the altar, make a genuflection, and go 
to replace the candlesticks in their place, but do not put 
out the candles ; then they return to their seats. 

9. The Psalms being ended, the priest rises, after giving 
his cap to the master of ceremonies, sings the chapter out 
of the book before him, during which he remains standing. 
Then, in the same position, the hymn being finished, he 



72 VESPERS. 

intones the antiphon of the Magnificat "Whilst the choir 
sings the said antiphon, the priest sits, and puts on his cap. 

10. As soon as the Magnificat is commenced, the priest 
takes off his cap, rises, and, with his hands joined, goes to 
the altar, accompanied by the master of ceremonies, and 
makes a genuflection on the lowest step. Then he goes up 
to the altar, while the master of ceremonies raises a little 
the lowest part of his vestments. Having arrived on the 
platform, the priest bows to the cross, and kisses the altar. 
At this time the censer-bearer, having made a genuflection 
on the lowest step at the Epistle side, goes up to the priest, 
gives the incense-boat to the master of ceremonies, and 
raises the censer so that the priest may put incense in it. 
The master of ceremonies presents the little spoon, kissing 
it first, and then the priest's hand (unless the Blessed Sacra- 
ment be exposed), and says, Benedicite, Pater Reverende. 
The priest having put incense into the censer, returns the 
spoon to the master of ceremonies, and makes a sign of the 
cross on the censer, Ab Mo benedicaris, etc. Then the 
censer-bearer lowers the censer's cover, gives it to the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, from whom he receives the incense-boat, 
and steps down to the floor, where he places the boat on the 
credence-table, and quickly passes to the Gospel side to 
raise the border of the cope for the celebrant. The master 
of ceremonies presents the censer to the officiating priest in 
the usual manner, and with the usual kisses. 

11. The officiating priest incenses the altar in the man- 
ner prescribed in No. 6, Art. 7, of the chapter on High 
Mass. "While he incenses the altar, he says the Magnificat; 
at the same time, the master of ceremonies and censer- 
bearer accompany him, supporting the borders of the cope. 

12. Having incensed the altar, the priest gives the 
censer to the master of ceremonies, who receives it with the 
usual kisses, and returns it to the censer-bearer. * Then he 
goes to the middle of the altar, where he says the Gloria 
Patri, bowing at the same time ; after which, he descends 
the steps from the middle, makes a genuflection on the 
lowest step, and returns to his bench, where he is incensed 
with three double throws by the master of ceremonies, 
who, for that purpose, shall have stopped at a convenient 



VESPERS. 73 

distance from the priest's bench, bowing to him before and 
after incensing, and the priest returning the bow after 
being incensed. 

13. Then the master of ceremonies returns the censer to 
the censer-bearer, and bowing to the priest, he goes to his 
place. The censer-bearer from the middle of the sanctuary, 
incenses the master of ceremonies and the two acolytes, the 
former with a double swing, and the others with one, bow- 
ing to them, and they to him. 

14. Then, having made a genuflection in the middle of 
the floor, he goes to the railings, and from there he incenses 
the people, first towards the middle, then at the Gospel 
side, and lastly, at the Epistle side, bowing before and 
after the incensing. After which he returns to the sacristy, 
making a genuflection as he passes before the altar, and 
bowing to the officiating priest. 

15. The priest, being incensed, remains standing at his 
place till the end of the Magnificat, bowing with the rest 
at the Gloria Patri. 

16. If the choir sings the antiphon, the priest will sit 
and cover his head ; he rises at the end of it to sing 
Dominus vobiscum and the prayer or prayers out of the 
book before him, bowing at the Per Dominum nostrum 
Jemm, etc. 

17. The two "acolytes, after the Magnificat, at the Sicut 
erat, take the candlesticks, go to the middle, where they 
make a genuflection, thence to the officiating priest ; they 
salute him, place themselves as before mentioned, and 
remain there till after all the prayers are sung. After the 
Dominus vobiscum, they salute the priest, and go to the mid- 
dle, make a genuflection, and there they remain standing 
during the anthem of the Blessed Virgin and its prayer. 
After the Divinum auxilium, they make a genuflection 
with the priest, and walk before him to the sacristy. 

18. The priest, having sung the prayers, sings Dominus 
vobiscum. The Benedicamus Domino is sung by one or two 
members of the choir, after which the priest says, in a lower 
tone of voice, Fidelium animw, etc., and goes to the altar, 
accompanied by the master of ceremonies. 

7 



74 VESPERS. 

19. Being arrived at the foot of the altar, the priest and 
master of ceremonies make a genuflection, after which he 
says, Pater Noster, in a low voice ; and then intones Domi- 
nus det nobis suam pacem. Then the anthem of the Blessed 
Virgin is said or sung by the choir, during which time the 
priest stands or kneels, according to the season. At the 
end of the anthem, he says, or sings, in the ferial tone, 
standing, the prayer, and, after it, Divinum auxilium. After 
which, all make a genuflection, and walk to the sacristy, 
the priest with his cap on. Being arrived there, they bow 
to the cross, and unvest. 



PART II. 



Ceremonies for ||oIg iStcdt and other ^eatiuab, 

According to the small Ritual of Benedict XIII, S. M. 

TO BE USED IN CHURCHES WHERE THERE IS BUT ONE PRIEST. 



CHAPTER I. 

BLESSING OF CANDLES ON CANDLEMAS DAY. 

Article I. 

OF WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE BENEDICTION, PROCESSION, 
AND MASS. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The chalice for Mass, with white ornaments, unless 
this festival should fall on one of the privileged Sundays ; 
in which case the ornaments must be violet. 

2. The chasuble, stole, and maniple, either of white or 
of violet color, as directed above. 

3. The censer with the incense-boat* filled with in- 
cense. 

4. The vessel containing holy water, and the sprink- 
ling-brush.f 

5. A plate with some bread, and a basin with a pitcher 

* The box is so called from its form. 

f We shall hereafter use the simpler term "sprinkle," as in 
Worcester's Dictionary. 



76 BLESSING OF CANDLES. 

of water, to wash the hands of the priest, after the distri- 
bution of the candles. 

6. A towel. 

7. A plate containing the cruets with wine and water, 
and a small towel to wipe the fingers. 

At the Altar. 

1. A violet altar- veil,* that can be easily removed; or 
white, if the Mass be of the Blessed Virgin. 

2. The Missal on the Epistle side, supported by a violet 
cushion, or a small bookstand. 

At the Epistle, Side on the Floor of the Sanctuary. 

1. A table covered with white linen; and on it, the 
candles to be blessed, covered likewise with another white 
linen cloth. 

2. The processional cross. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, with stole and cope of violet 
color, for the celebrant. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 



Article II. 

CEREMONIES TO BE PERFORMED ON CANDLEMAS DAY. 

Section I. — Of the Blessing of the Candles. 

1. At the stated time, the acolytes put on their cassocks 
and surplices, in the sacristy, and prepare everything as in 
the preceding chapter. 

2. The faithful should be called to church by the ring- 
ing of the bells. 

3. The celebrant, having made his preparation for Mass, 

* The Latin term, " antipendium," is generally used for the veil 
which covers the front of the altar. 



BLESSING OF CANDLES. 77 

and washed his hands in the sacristy, being assisted by the 
second and third acolytes, puts on over his cassock the 
amice, alb, stole and cope of violet color.* 

4. In the meantime, the first acolyte removes from the 
altar the flower-pots, and lights the candles that are on it. 

5. The celebrant, having made a low bow to the cross, 
or to any other sacred image placed in the sacristy, puts 
on his cap, and, being preceded by the first acolyte, walks, 
with his hands joined, to the altar, between the second and 
third acolytes, who raise the lower part of the cope at each 
side. 

6. When he comes to the middle of the altar, he gives 
his cap to the first acolyte, who, having placed it on the cele- 
brant's bench, uncovers the candles which are to be blessed. 

7. Then the celebrant, still standing on the floor of the 
sanctuary, makes a low bow to the cross (or a genuflection 
on the low r est step, if the Blessed Sacrament be in the tab- 
ernacle), ascends the altar, and kisses it in the middle. If 
the holy water is to be given, the celebrant, kneeling on 
the lowest step, intones the anthem, Asperges, and does 
as is prescribed in the Missal, and afterwards goes up to 
the altar. 

8. The celebrant, having kissed the altar, goes to the 
Epistle side, having always the two acolytes at his sides, 
as in No. 5. 

9. There, having his face turned towards the altar, and 
his hands joined, he says in the ferial tone, Dominus vobis- 
cum, Oremus, the prayer, Domine Sancte, with the four fol- 
lowing prayers. 

10. In the meantime, the first acolyte puts fire in the 
censer, holding it and the incense-boat in his hands. 

11. While the celebrant is saying the fifth prayer, the 
third acolyte, who is on his left side, having made a genu- 
flection towards the altar, goes to the side-table, takes from 
it the holy-water vase, and, with the acolyte who carries 
the censer, goes to him. 

12. The celebrant, after the fifth prayer, receiving the 

* Should this festival fall on Sunday, the celebrant, vested as above, 
blesses the water for the aspersion, as in the Missal. 



78 DISTRIBUTION OF CANDLES. 

incense-spoon from the second acolyte, who is at his right 
side, and who, as usual, kisses first the spoon and then his 
hand, takes the incense-boat, puts the incense in the censer, 
and blesses it. 

13. Then having received the sprinkle from the second 
acolyte, he sprinkles the candles thrice, viz., in the middle, 
at the right, and at the left, saying with a low voice, As- 
perger me, etc., without the Miserere. 

14. Afterwards he incenses the candles thrice, saying 
nothing. 

15. The blessing being ended, the celebrant bows in the 
middle of the altar, and retires to the Gospel side, and then 
explains the institution of this solemnity, the meaning of 
the ceremonies, and the use of the candles, that the faithful 
may come and receive them in a proper and respectful 
manner. 

Section II. — Of the Distribution of the Candles. 

1. After the sermon, the first acolyte takes from the table 
a candle for the celebrant, and, if there is no other priest 
present, puts it on the middle of the altar. 

2. The celebrant, having bowed in the middle of the 
altar^ kneels on the platform, with his face turned towards 
the cross. 

3. Whilst kneeling down, he takes from the altar the 
candle, kisses it, and hands it to the first acolyte.* 

4. Then he goes to the Epistle side, and recites alter- 
nately with the acolytes, in a loud and even voice, Lumen, 
etc., and the Canticle, Nune dimittis, etc. 

5. The anthem, Lumen, etc., having been repeated after 
Sicut erat, the celebrant bows to the cross, turns towards 
the people, distributes the candles, first to the priests (if 
any be present), then to the acolytes kneeling on the edge 
of the platform, who all kiss first the candle, and then his 
hand. 

* If there is another priest, he gives the candle to the celebrant, 
who stands, having his face tamed towards the people: the priest 
kisses the candle only, which is also done by the celebrant on receiv- 
ing it. 



PTiOCESSION OF CANDLEMAS DAY. 79 

6. The celebrant having bowed to the altar between the 
acolytes, goes to the chancel, or rails, at the Epistle side. 

7. There he begins to distribute the candles, which are 
brought thither by the second acolyte, and handed to the 
celebrant by the third. 

8. The distribution of the candles being ended, the cele- 
brant washes his hands at the Epistle side ; the first aco- 
lyte pours the water, and the two others offer the towel. 

9. The celebrant, having washed his hands, goes to the 
middle of the altar, bows to the cross, and then ascends in 
a straight line with it, until he arrives at the centre of the 
platform, when he turns to the book at the Epistle side. 

10. There he recites with the acolytes the anthem, Exurge 
Domine, etc., with a loud voice. 

11. Then standing in the same place, he says, Oremus, 
and if Candlemas day comes after Septuagesima, and not 
on a Sunday, he subjoins, Fleetamus genua, kneeling at the 
same time with all the others ; and the second acolyte, first 
rising, answers, Levate. 

12. Afterwards the celebrant says the prayer, Exaudi 
qucesumus, etc., keeping always his hands joined. 

Section III. — Of the Procession. 

1. The prayer being ended, the celebrant goes to the 
middle of the altar, where he receives from the first acolyte 
a lighted candle, and a copy of this Ceremonial, or the 
Ritual for the anthems, to be recited during the procession. 

2. The two other acolytes take likewise lighted candles, 
and copies of this Ceremonial. 

3. The celebrant turns towards the people, and says, 
Procedamus in pace, and the acolytes answer, In nomine 
Christi. Amen. 

4. The celebrant begins to recite the anthem, Adorna, 
etc., as below, and continues all the anthems with the aco- 
lytes alternately. 

5. After the acolytes have, as directed above, answered, 
In nomine Christi. Amen ; the first acolyte takes the pro- 
cessional cross, and having made a genuflection before the 
altar, turns towards the people, and leads the procession 



80 PROCESSION OF CANDLEMAS DAY. 

either out of the church, or within it, as may be customary, 
and turning to his right, and going round, returns to the 
altar. 

6. The celebrant follows him between the other acolytes, 
reciting with them the following anthems, which, for 
greater convenience, are divided into verses : 

Antiph. Adorna ihalamum tuum, Sion ; et suscipe Be- 
gem Christum. 

Ampleetere Mariam : quae est coelestis porta. 

Ipsa enim regem portat glorice, novi luminis. 

Subsistit Virgo, adducens manibus Filium ante lueiferum 
genitum : quern accipiens Simeon in ulnas suas, prazdicavit 
popxdis: Dominum eum esse vito3 et mortis, et Salvatorem 
Mundi. 

Responsum accepit Simeon de Spiritu Sancto: non m- 
surum se mortem, nisi videret Christum Domini : 

Et cum inducer -ent puerum in templum ; accepit eum in 
ulnas suas, et benedixit Deum, et dixit : 

Nunc dimittis servum tuum, Domine : secundum verbum 
tuum in pace. 

Cum inducerent puerum Jesum parentes ejus, ut facer ent 
secundum consuetudinern legis pro eo, ipse a,ccepit eum in 
ulnas suas. 

7. As the procession enters the church, if it was made 
outside ; or the sanctuary, if it did not go out of the church, 
the following Response is recited : 

Resp. Obtulerunt Domino par iurturum, out duos pullos 
columbarum: 

Sicut scriptum est, in lege Domini. 

Postquam impleti sunt dies purgationis Marioz: secundum 
legem Moysis : 

Tulerunt Jesum in Jerusalem : ut sister ent eum Domino. 

Sicut scriptum est: in lege Domini. 

Gloria Patri et Filio: et Spiritui Sancto. 

Sicut scriptum est: in lege Domini. 

8. The acolyte, who carries the cross, after having made 
a genuflection before the altar, leaves it at its place. 

9. The celebrant ends the Responses before the altar. 



ASH-WEDNESDAY. 81 

Section IV. — Of the Mass after the Procession. 

1. The Responses being ended, the first acolyte receives 
the candles from the celebrant, and from the other acolytes, 
and places them on the table. 

2. The celebrant goes to the bench, whereon he usually 
sits in solemn Masses, attended by the second and third 
acolytes, puts off the cope, and puts on the violet chasuble 
and the maniple for the Mass of the Sunday. 

3. In the meantime, in case the Mass is to be said of the 
festival, the first acolyte removes from the altar the violet 
front veil, leaving the white one, and places the flower-pots 
between the candlesticks. 

4. The celebrant goes to the altar to say Mass, in the 
course of which, if it be of the festival, the acolytes hold 
lighted candles during the Gospel, and from the elevation 
till after the communion. 

5. Mass being ended, the celebrant, preceded by the 
acolytes, returns to the sacristy. 

There he makes his thanksgiving, as usual. 

6. The acolytes take everything from the altar and the 
table, and carry them to the sacristy, arranging them in 
their proper places. 



CHAPTER II. 

OF THE BENEDICTION OF THE ASHES ON ASH- 
WEDNESDAY. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE BENEDICTION AND MASS. 

On the Side-table near the Altar. 

1. A chalice, with a veil of violet color. 

2. A violet maniple and chasuble. 

3. The censer and boat, with incense. 



82 ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

4. The holy-water vase, with a sprinkle. 

5. A plate, with crumbs of bread ; and a basin, with a 
pitcher of water, to wash the hands of the priest after the 
distribution of the ashes. 

6. A towel. 

7. A plate containing the cruets with wine and water, 
and a small towel to wipe the fingers. 

On the Altar. 

1. A violet altar- veil, the cross, and candlesticks with 
candles, but no flower-pots. 

2. The Missal on the Epistle side, supported by a book- 
stand. 

3. A vessel containing the ashes, made out of the boughs 
blessed on Palm Sunday, which should be dry and sifted, 
covered either with a lid of the same matter as the vessel, 
or with a violet veil, and placed between the Missal and 
the Epistle side. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, violet stole and cope. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 



Article II. 

OF THE SACRED RITES TO BE PERFORMED ON ASH- 
WEDNESDAY. 

Section I. — Blessing of the Ashes. 

1. Everything having been prepared, as above, by the 
acolytes in surplices, the people should be called to church 
by the usual ringing of the bells. 

2. The celebrant, having washed his hands in the sacristy, 
attended by the second and third acolytes, puts on over the 
surplice, the amice, alb, cincture, violet stole and cope. 

3. The first acolyte lights the candles on the altar, and 
returns to the sacristy. 



ASH-WEDNESDAY. 83 

4. All having bowed to the cross, or the principal pic- 
ture in the sacristy, go to the altar. 

5. The first acolyte, having his hands joined, walks 
before, then the celebrant with his head covered, between 
the second and third acolytes. 

6. The celebrant gives his cap to the first acolyte, and 
bows to the altar. 

7. He goes up to the altar, having at his side the second 
and third acolytes, and kisses it in the middle. 

8. In the meantime, the first acolyte, having placed the 
cap on the celebrant's bench, uncovers the ashes. 

9. The celebrant goes to the Epistle side, and says, with 
the acolytes, the anthem, Exaudi. 

10. In the meantime, the first acolyte prepares the censer 
with the fire. 

11. The anthem, Exaudi, having been repeated, the 
celebrant, standing in the same place, without turning 
towards the people, says in a ferial tone, and having his 
hands joined, Dominus vobiscum, and the four prayers, as 
in the Missal. 

12. Whilst the celebrant is saying the fourth prayer, the 
third acolyte, having made a genuflection before the altar, 
takes the holy-water vase, and with the censer-bearer, goes 
to the celebrant. 

13. The celebrant, assisted by the second acolyte, puts 
the incense in the censer, blesses it, and afterwards sprinkles 
and incenses the ashes, as usual. 

14. The blessing being ended, the vessel containing the 
ashes is placed in the middle of the altar. 

15. The celebrant addresses the congregation from the 
altar, on the ceremony of the ashes. 

Section II. — Of the Putting on the Ashes. 

1. The celebrant, if no other priest is present, having 
made a reverence to the cross, kneels down in the middle 
of the platform of the altar, and whilst thus kneeling, puts 
ashes on his own head, saying nothing. 

2. But if another priest is present, this priest without 
stole goes to the altar, and puts ashes on the head of the 



84 ASH- WEDNESDAY. 

celebrant, who stands, bowing, and having his face turned 
towards the people, the priest saying, Memento homo, quia 
pulvis es; et in pulverem reverteris. 

3. The celebrant having received the ashes, goes to the 
Missal on the Epistle side, and recites, with the acolytes, 
the anthem, Immutemur, with all that follows. 

4. Then the celebrant puts the ashes on the clergy (if 
any are present), who kneel at the edge of the platform of 
the altar, the first of them in dignity being the nearest to 
the Epistle side. He says to each one, Memento, etc. 

5. The celebrant having bowed to the altar, goes between 
the second and third acolytes, to the railing at the Epistle 
side, and puts the ashes first on the men, then on the women. 

6. After the putting on of the ashes, the celebrant, stand- 
ing on the floor of the sanctuary at the Epistle side, attend- 
ed by the acolytes, washes his hands, cleaning them with 
crumbs of bread, and wipes them. 

7. Then he goes up to the altar by the steps that are in 
front of it, having made a bow in the middle, and goes to 
the Epistle side. 

8. Thus, having his face turned towards the altar, with 
his hands joined, he says, Dominiis vobiscum, and the 
prayer, Concede nobis, Domine, and having made a bow to 
the altar in the same place, descends to the Epistle side. 

Section III. — Of the Mass. 

1. The celebrant, going to the Epistle side, near the 
bench, assisted by the acolytes, takes off the cope, puts on 
the maniple and chasuble. 

2. The priest goes to the altar for the Mass, in which 
everything is to be done as in the Missal. 

3. After Mass, the celebrant, preceded by the acolytes, 
returns to the sacristy with his hands joined, puts off the 
sacred vestments, and makes his thanksgiving. 



PALM SUNDAY. 85 



CHAPTER III. 

OF PALM SUNDAY. 



APvTICLE I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE SACRED CEREMONIES OF THIS 

SUNDAY. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The chalice, with its ornaments of violet color for 
Mass. 

2. The maniple and chasuble, of violet color. 

3. The censer, with the incense-boat. 

4. A basin, with a pitcher of water, and a towel. 

5. A plate, with cruets containing wine and water, and 
a finger-towel. 

6. Copies of this Ceremonial, for what is to be recited at 
the procession. 

On the Altar. 

1. The violet antipendium. 

2. The Missal, on the Epistle side, on a cushion, or a 
small stand. 

3. Branches of palms in place of flowers, between the 
candlesticks. 

By the Side of the Epistle on the Floor. 

1. A table, covered with a white linen cloth, and palms 
to be blessed. 

2. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, stole and cope of violet color 
for the celebrant. 



86 . PALM SUNDAY. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

4. The holy -water vase, with the sprinkle. 

Article II. 

OF THE CEREMONIES TO BE PERFORMED ON PALM SUNDAY. 

Section I. — Of the Blessing of the Palms. 

1. Everything being prepared in its proper place, the 
people should be called to the church by the ringing of the 
bells. 

2. The celebrant, attended by the second and third aco- 
lytes, puts on in the sacristy the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
stole and cope. 

3. He blesses the water, as in the Missal ; and in the 
meantime the first acolyte lights the candles on the altar. 

4. The celebrant, preceded by the first acolyte, who car- 
ries the holy-water vase, proceeds to the altar, with his head 
covered, walking between the second and third acolytes, 
and kneels on the lowest step, for the sprinkling of the 
holy water. 

5. When the sprinkling is done, the first acolyte places 
the Missal on the small stand, on the Epistle side of the 
altar. 

6. The third acolyte puts the maniple on the celebrant's 
arm. 

7. The celebrant, between the second and third acolytes, 
goes up to the altar, kisses it in the middle; retires to the 
Epistle side; and there, in a high and even tone, begins the 
anthem, Hosanna, which is continued by the acolytes. 

8. The celebrant standing in the same place, with his 
hands joined, says, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer, Deus, 
quern diligere, etc. 

9. Then he recites the lesson, and after it he says, with 
the acolytes, the Response, Collegerunt, etc. In monte Oli- 
veti, etc. 

10. Having said in the same place, Munda cor rneum, 
etc., he reads the Gospel; then kisses the Missal, and takes 
off the maniple. 



DISTRIBUTION OF PALMS. 87 

11. Then he says, Dominus vobiscum, the prayer, and 
the preface, keeping his hands joined, whilst he recites the 
abovementioned and the following prayers. 

12. The acolytes say, Sanctus, Sanctus, etc. 

13. The celebrant, having said Dominus vobiscum, re- 
cites the five other prayers that follow. 

14. In the meantime, the first acolyte puts fire in the 
censer, and takes the incense-boat. 

15. Whilst the celebrant says the fifth prayer, the third 
acolyte, having made a genuflection towards the altar, takes 
from the side-table the holy-water vase, and with the censer- 
bearer goes to the celebrant. 

16. The celebrant, attended by the second acolyte, puts 
incense in the censer, and blesses it. 

17. Then he sprinkles the palms thrice, saying in a low 
voice, Asperges me, etc., without Miserere, and incenses 
them. 

18. The celebrant says again, Dominus vobiscum, and 
then the sixth prayer. 

19. The first acolyte carries back to the sacristy the cen- 
ser, and the second and third acolytes remain with the 
celebrant. 

20. The celebrant addresses to the congregation an ap- 
propriate instruction. 

Section II. — Of the Distribution of the Palms. 

1. The first acolyte carries from the side- table the palms 
for the celebrant and the acolytes, and lays them on the 
altar. 

2. The celebrant, having bowed to the cross, kneels in 
the middle of the platform before the altar, and takes his 
palm from the altar ; kisses it, and hands it to the first aco- 
lyte,* 

3. He goes to the Epistle side and recites with the aco- 
lytes the anthem, Pueri Hebrceorum, etc. 

* In case another priest is present, the palm should be given by him 
to the celebrant, as it has been said of the candle, on the feast of the 
Purification. 



88 PALM SUNDAY. 

4. Then, having bowed to the cross, he turns towards 
the people, and distributes the palms, first to priests, if any 
are present, then to the acolytes, who all kneel on the edge 
of the platform of the altar, beginning from the first in dig- 
nity, at the Epistle side; they all kiss, first the palm, then 
the hand of the celebrant. 

5. The celebrant goes down from the altar, bows before 
it, and goes to the railing of the sanctuary, at the Epistle 
side. 

6. Then the palms are handed to him by the first aco- 
lyte, and he distributes them, first to the men, and then to 
the women. 

7. After the distribution, the celebrant, standing on the 
floor of the sanctuary, attended by two acolytes, washes his 
hands. 

8. He goes by the front steps to the altar, and at the 
Epistle side says, Dominus vobiscum, and the last prayer. 

9. In the meantime, the first acolyte ties with a violet 
ribbon a palm on the top of the processional cross. 

10. After the prayer, the first acolyte gives to the cele- 
brant and to the other acolytes the palms, and a copy of 
this Ceremonial, to read what is to be recited at the proces- 
sion. 

Section III. — Of the Procession. 

1. The celebrant, holding the palm in his hands, turns 
towards the people, and says, in the middle of the altar, 
Procedamus in pace. The acolytes answer, In nomine 
Christi. Amen. And the celebrant begins, Cum appropin- 
quaret, etc. 

2. The acolyte with the cross walks first ; then the cele- 
brant, between two acolytes, reciting alternately, in a loud 
voice, the following anthems divided into verses. 

3. The procession goes by the right side out of the prin- 
cipal door ; they recite the following 

Anthem. 

Gum appropinquaret Dominus Jerosolymam : misit duos ex 
dkcipulis suis, dicens: 



PROCESSION. 89 

Ite in castellum, quod contra vos est : et invenietis pullum 
asince alligatum, super quern nullus hominum sedit : 

Solvite eum : et adducite mihi. 

Si quis vos interrogaverit, dicite : Opus Domino est. 

Solventes adduxerunt ad Jesum : et imposuerunt Mi vesti- 
menta sua, et sedit super eum. 

Alii expanderunt vestimenta sua in via : alii ramos de ar- 
boribus sternebant. 

Et qui sequebantur, clamabant : Hosanna, benedictus qui 
venit in nomine Domini. 

Benedictum regnum pair is nostri David : Hosanna in ex- 
celsis : miserere nobis, fili David. 

Another Anthem. 

Cum audiisset populus, quia Jesus venit Jerosolymam : 
aeceperunt ramos palmarum, 

Et exierunt ei obviam : et clamabant pueri dicentes : 

Hie est, qui venturus est in salutem populi. 

Hie est salus nostra, et redemptio Israel. 

Quantus est iste : cui throni et dominations occur runt ! 

Noli timer e, filia Sion, ecce Rex tuus venit tibi sedens super 
pullum asinw ; sicut scriptam est. 

Salve, Fabricator mundi : qui venisti redimere nos. 

Another Anthem. 

Ante sex dies solemnis Pasclwe : quando venit Dominus in 
civitatem Jerusalem, 

Occurrerunt ei pueri ; et in manibus portabant ramos pal- 
marum. 

Et clamabant voce magna dicentes : Hosanna in excelsis. 

Benedictus qui venisti in multitudine misericordice turn: 
Hosanntfin excelsis. 

Another Anthem. 

Occurrunt turbw cum floribus et palmis Redemptori ob- 
viam : et victori triumphanti digna dant obsequia. 

Filium Dei ore gentes prazdicant: et in laudem Christi 
voces tonant per nubila : Hosanna in excelsis. 



90 PALM SUNDAY. 

Another Anthem. 

Cum Angelis et pueris fideles inveniamur, triumphatori 
mortis elamantes : Hosanna in excelsis. 

Turba multa, quce convenerat ad diem festum : clamabant 
Domino : 

Benedictus qui venit in nomine Domini : Hosanna in ex- 
eelsis. 

1. The first acolyte, carrying the cross, stops before the 
principal door, having his face turned towards it. 

2. The second and third acolytes go into the church, 
shut the door, and turning towards the procession, say, 

Gloria, laus et honor Tibi sit, Rex Christe Redemptor : 
Cui puerile decus prompsit Hosanna pium. 

3. The celebrant outside of the church, turning towards 
the door, and having on his cap, repeats, 

Gloria, laus et honor, etc. 

Clerks. Israel es Tu Rex, Davidis et inclyta proles, No- 
mine qui in Domini, Rex benedicte, venis. 

Cel. Gloria, etc. 

Clerks. Caztus in excelsis Te laudat coelicus omnis, et mor- 
talis homo, et cuncta creata simul. 

Cel. Gloria, etc. 

Clerks. Plebs Hebraia Tibi cum palmis obviam venit : cum 
prece, voto, hymnis, adsumus ecce Tibi. 

Cel. Gloria, laus, etc. 

Clerks. Hi Tibi passuro solvebant munia laudis : nos 
Tibi regnanti pangimus ecce melos. 

Cel. Gloria, etc. 

Clerks. Hi placuere Tibi; placeat devotio nostra; Rex 
bone, Rex clemens, cui bona cuncta placent. 

Cel. Gloria, etc. 

4. The preceding verses being ended, the first acolyte, 
with the foot of the cross, knocks at the bottom of the 
door ; and the two acolytes within the church open the 
door, and place themselves at each side of it. 

5. The first acolyte, carrying the cross, enters the church, 
and the celebrant follows him, beginning the Response, 
Ingrediente Domino, etc. 



REPOSITORY. 91 

6. The second and third acolytes receive the celebrant, 
place him in the middle, and with him continue the Re- 
sponse — 

Tngrediente Domino in Sanctam Civitatem, Hebrceorum 
pueri resurrectionem vitce pronunciantes, 

Cum ramis palmarum : Hosanna clamabant in excelsis. 

Cumque audiissent quod Jesus venird Jerosolymam : ex- 
ierunt obviam ei. 

Cum ramis palmarum : Hosanna in excelsis. 

7. The procession and Responses are ended before the 
altar. 

8. The first acolyte leaves the cross, takes the palms 
from the celebrant and the clerks. 

9. The celebrant stands on the floor of the sanctuary at 
the Epistle side, where he is accustomed to sit during Mass ; 
takes off' the cope) puts on the maniple and chasuble. 

10. The celebrant proceeds to the altar to celebrate 
Mass. The acolytes hold palms in their hands whilst the 
Passion is read, and during the Gospel. 

11. After Mass, the celebrant, preceded by the acolytes, 
returns to the sacristy. 

12. There he takes off the sacred vestments, and makes 
his thanksgiving. 

13. The acolytes take everything from the altar, and 
from the side-table, and putting them in their proper 
places, retire modestly. 



CHAPTER IV. 

OF MAUND AY-THURSDAY. 

Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE SACRED CEREMONIES OF 
MATJNDAY-THURSDAY. 

On the Altar. 

1. The altar is to be adorned as for solemn festivals 
the front veil is to be white. 



92 MAUND AY-THURSDAY. 

2. The cross between the candlesticks is to be covered 
with a white veil. 

3. The Missal to be placed on a white cushion, or book- 
stand, on the Epistle side. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The chalice for Mass, with white ornaments, and two 
large particles. 

2. Another chalice with a pall, a paten, a white veil, 
and a w T hite silk ribbon. 

3. A pyx with small particles to be consecrated for the 
communion of the people. 

4. A small plate with the wine and water cruets, and a 
towel for wiping the fingers. 

5. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

6. The censer Avith the incense-boat. 

7. A white veil for the shoulders. 

8. The communion-cloth. 

9. The canopy for the procession. 

10. The wooden clapper. ' 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Surplices for the clerks. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, maniple, stole, and chasuble; 
all white. 

3. A white cope. 

4. A violet stole. 

5. A chafing-dish, containing fire. 

6. Candles for the procession. 

In the Repository for the Blessed Sacrament. 

1. This repository is to be prepared apart from the 
principal altar of the church, and hung with precious 
tapestry, which should by no means be of black color ; 
adorned with flowers and lights, but not with relics or 
images of saints. 

2. The repository or urn, in which the chalice with the 
Blessed Sacrament is to be placed, should be prepared in 



THE MASS. 93 

the centre of the altar. It should be finely adorned, and 
secured with lock and key. 

3. There should be a corporal in the repository. 

4. Another corporal on the altar. 

5. Steps to reach to the repository, where the chalice is 
to be placed. 

Article II. 

OF THE SACRED RITES TO BE PERFORMED ON 
MAUNDAY- THURSDAY. 

Section I. — Of the Mass. 

1. The bells, which call the faithful to church, should 
be rung as on festivals. 

2. The acolytes prepare everything as above, in their 
proper place. 

3. Meanwhile the priest hears confessions. 

4. At the stated hour, the parish priest of the church 
puts on the sacred vestments for Mass. 

5. The first clerk lights the candles on the altar, and 
the priest places the chalice in the middle of it ; and be- 
hind it the pyx containing the small particles. 

6. The celebrant, with his head covered, preceded by 
the first acolyte, and then by the second and third, who 
walk together, each having his hands joined, proceeds to 
the altar for Mass. 

7„ Beginning Mass, he does not say the psalm, Judica 
me Deus, nor the Gloria Patri. 

8. Whilst the Gloria in excelsis is said, they ring the 
bells, which are not rung any more until Holy Saturday. 

9. Besides the usual large particles, another large one, 
and a sufficient number of small ones, are consecrated. 

10. The Agnus Dei is said, as usual, but the Pax is not 
given. 

11. Whilst the celebrant is saying the prayers before the 
communion, the first acolyte comes from the side-table to 
the altar, with the empty chalice, pall and paten. 

12. The celebrant having consumed the Sacred Species in 
both kinds, and covered the chalice out of which he com- 



94 MAUNDAY-THURSDAY. 

municated, places the other chalice in the middle of the 
altar, and uncovers it. 

13. He kneels, places the consecrated Host in the chalice, 
covers it with a pall and paten on the concave side, covers 
the whole with the veil, and kneels. 

14. He takes the pyx, places it before the chalice cov- 
ered with a veil, uncovers it, kneels, retires to the Gospel 
side, having his face turned towards the Epistle side. 

15. One of the acolytes, kneeling at the Epistle side, re- 
cites the Conjiteor, the other acolyte and the people also 
kneeling. The celebrant subjoins the Misereatur and In- 
didgentiam, as usual. 

16. The celebrant going to the middle, kneels, takes the 
pyx, and turns round towards the people, and says as usual, 
JEcce Agnus Dei, etc. 

17. The acolytes receive communion at the altar, then 
the people at the rails, holding the communion-cloth be- 
fore them. 

18. After the communion the celebrant retires to the 
altar, covers the pyx, and puts it into the tabernacle. 

19. Then having said, Quod ore, etc., he takes the first 
ablution ; kneels, washes his fingers over the chalice, re- 
turns to the middle, kneels, and takes the second ablution. 

20. The chalice which has served for Mass, is brought 
to the side-table ; the candles at the repository are lighted, 
the canopy is prepared outside the railing, and candles are 
distributed to some of the people. 

21. In the meantime, the celebrant continues Mass, in 
which the following things are to be observed : 

Having purified the chalice, he kneels, goes to the Epis- 
tle side, and reads the CommUnio ; then goes to the middle, 
kneels, kisses the altar, withdraws to the side of the Gospel, 
and says, Dominus vobiscum. 

He returns to the middle, kneels, goes to the Epistle 
side, and there reads the Post Communio. 

He again goes to the middle, kneels, kisses the altar, 
turns, says, Dominus vobiscum, and Ite, missa est. 

Then he turns to the middle, kneels, says, Placeat, etc., 
kisses the altar, and says, Benedicat vos, etc., and kneels. 

He turns to the Gospel side and gives the blessing, 



PROCESSION. . 95 

without turning round entirely, but only towards the Gos- 
pel side, and he does not return to the middle. 

He says the Gospel of St. John, making the sign of the 
cross, not on the altar, but on the book, or altar-card, out 
of which he reads it. 

At the words Verbum caro factum est, he kneels towards 
the Blessed Sacrament. 

22. Mass being ended, the celebrant goes to the middle, 
kneels, and by the shortest way goes down, on the Epistle 
side, to the floor. 

23. There, assisted by the acolytes, he takes off the chas- 
uble and maniple, and puts on the white cope. 

Section II. — Of the Procession icith the Blessed Sacrament 
to the Repository. 

1. The celebrant goes before the altar, and having made 
a genuflection, he kneels on the lower step, and prays for 
awhile. 

2. The first acolyte takes the censer with fire, and the 
boat with incense, to the celebrant. 

3. The celebrant rises, puts incense into the censer 
without blessing it, the second acolyte offering the boat, 
without kissing it or the celebrant's hand. 

4. The celebrant goes up to the altar, and, kneeling on 
the platform, incenses the Blessed Sacrament in the chalice. 

5. Then the veil is put over his shoulders, and he rises, 
goes to the altar, kneels, rises, ties with a white ribbon the 
veil around the chalice that contains the Sacred Host. 

6. He takes the chalice with his left hand covered with 
the veil, places his right hand on the chalice, and the 
second acolyte extends over it both corners of the veil. 

7. The celebrant, holding the chalice in this manner, 
turns his back to the altar, and begins the hymn, Range 
lingua. 

8. They proceed to the repository in the following order : 
1st. The banner, if there be any. 

2dly. Some of the faithful, two by two, carrying candles 
in their hands. 

3dly. The processional cross, carried by the third acolyte. 



96 MAUNDAY-THURSDAY. 

4thly. The first acolyte with the censer, having incense 
in it. 

5thly. The celebrant under the canopy ; having at his 
right hand the second acolyte, who should take care to 
raise a little the celebrant's alb in front, when he goes up 
or down the steps. They say the hymn, Pange lingua. 

9. When the procession has arrived at the repository, it 
divides into two lines, one on each side of it, so that the 
censer-bearer and the celebrant, under the canopy, may 
pass between them. 

10. The cross-bearer stops at one side of the repository. 

11. The celebrant goes up to the altar of the repository, 
places the chalice on it, kneels, goes down one of the steps ; 
kneels on the platform ; the veil is taken from his shoul- 
ders. 

12. In the meantime, those who carried the canopy, 
leave it in some convenient place. 

13. The celebrant arises, puts incense in the censer, 
without blessing it, and without the usual kisses, and 
kneeling on the platform, incenses the Blessed Sacrament. 
The acolytes recite the verse, Tantum ergo, etc. 

14. The celebrant gives the censer to the censer- bearer, 
rises, goes up to the altar, kneels, takes the chalice, places 
it in the repository; the second acolyte placing the steps 
near the altar, if it is necessary to reach the repository. 

15. The celebrant kneels again, shuts up the repository, 
kneels, and goes down to the floor of the chapel. 

16. Then the celebrant, kneeling on the lower step of 
the altar, prays for awhile, rises, kneels on both knees on 
the floor of the chapel, and having covered his head, pre- 
ceded by the cross, he returns, between the acolytes to the 
altar. 

Section III. — Of the Removal of the Pyx. 

1. All being come to the altar, the cross is put in its 
place; the second and third acolytes take lighted candles. 

2. The celebrant having made a genuflection, goes up to 
the altar, takes out of the tabernacle the pyx with the 
Blessed Sacrament, places it on the corporal, and kneels. 



STRIPPING OF THE ALTARS. 97 

3. Going down, he kneels on the platform, and puts on 
the veil, assisted by the first acolyte. 

4. The celebrant goes up to the altar, kneels, having his 
hands covered with the veil, takes the pyx, and preceded 
by the clerks holding lighted candles in their hands, he 
carries the pyx to the altar of the repository, places it on 
the corporal, and kneels down. 

5. Then going down, he kneels on the platform ; there, 
assisted by the clerks, he takes off the veil ; again goes up, 
kneels, opens the repository, and places it in the pyx be- 
hind the chalice. 

6. The celebrant kneels, shuts up the repository, and 
having prayed on the lowest step of the altar, he kneels on 
the floor of the chapel, and, with his head covered, returns 
to the sacristy. 

7. There, the celebrant takes off the cope and the white 
stole, and puts on a violet one, crossing it on his breast as 
usual. 

Section IV. — Of the Stripping of the Altars. 

1. The celebrant vested as above, attended by the aco- 
lytes, goes to the altars, with his hands joined. 

2. Standing on the floor of the sanctuary at the foot of 
the altar, he begins with a loud voice the anthem, Divis- 
erunt sibi, which he continues with the Psalm, Deus, Deus 
mens, respice in me, Ps. xxi; reciting it with the acolytes. 

3. In the meantime, the celebrant goes up to the altar, 
strips it, taking off the altar-cloths. 

4. The acolytes receive the cloths, and remove from the 
altar the flower-pots, the front veil, and the carpet, so that 
nothing but the cross and six candlesticks, with their 
candles, but not lighted, is left on the altar. 

5. The celebrant, having stripped the principal altar, 
goes to strip the others, if there be any more. 

6. The altars being stripped, the celebrant returns to the 
principal one; there, after the last verse of the Psalm, the 
anthem Diviserunt is repeated, he waits for the Angelus 
Domini. 



98 GOOD FRIDAY. 

7. One of the acolytes gives the sign for it with the 
usual clapper; and all kneel down. 

8. Then the celebrant arises, bows to the cross, and the 
acolytes kneel ; all return to the sacristy. 

9. There, the celebrant takes off the sacred vestments, 
makes the usual thanksgivings, and causes everything to 
be put in its place. 

10. The first acolyte takes from the cross of the high 
altar the white veil, and covers it with a violet one. 

11. The priest should procure some of the faithful to 
pray before the Blessed Sacrament, whilst it remains in the 
repository ; and he should have a number of candles burn- 
ing before it. 



CHAPTEE V. 

OF GOOD FRIDAY. 

Article I. 

OF WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE OFFICE OF GOOD FRIDAY. 

At the High Altar. 

1. On the altar, which is to be altogether bare, six 
candlesticks, with candles of brown wax, not lighted. 

2. A wooden cross, covered with a black veil, fixed in 
such a manner as to be easily removed. 

3. A black cushion on the second step of the altar. 

On the Side-table. 

1. A towel, covering the side-table, without hanging 
down. 

2. An altar-cloth, folded, large enough to cover the altar, 
without hanging down. 

3. A book-stand with a Missal. 

4. A black burse containing a corporal, pall, and purifier. 

5. The censer, with the box containing incense. 



BEGINNING OF THE OFFICE. 99 

6. A black veil for the chalice, to be used at the end of 
the office. 

7. A little plate with the cruets and finger-towel. 

Near the Table. 

1. A carpet with a cushion of violet color, and a white 
veil, adorned with golden and violet silk fringe. 

2. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

3. The wooden clapper. 

At the Repository. 

1. A white veil for the shoulders. 

2. The canopy. 

3. Torches and candles for the procession. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, black maniple, stole, and 
chasuble. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

Article II. 
of the sacred rites to be performed on good 

FRIDAY. 

Section I. — From the Beginning of the Office to the Uncov- 
ering of the Cross. 

1. At the stated hour, the signal being given, the aco- 
lytes put on their surplices in the sacristy, and everything 
is prepared as above. 

2. The celebrant washes his hands, puts on the amice, 
alb, cincture, black maniple, stole, and chasuble. 

3. Preceded by the acolytes, with his hands joined, he 
goes to the altar with his head covered. 

4. He takes off his cap, kneels on the floor of the sanctu- 
ary before the altar, and prostrates himself, laying his hands 
on the cushion placed on the second step, and prays for the 
space of a minute. 



100 GOOD FRIDAY. 

5. The first acolyte takes the altar-cloth, unfolds it over 
the altar, assisted by the second acolyte, but they do not 
unfold it in its width, as they must leave the foremost part 
of the altar uncovered. 

6. The third acolyte places the bookstand with the Missal 
on the Epistle side of the altar. 

7. The celebrant rises, and the cushion being removed 
by one of the acolytes, he goes up to the altar and kisses it 
in the middle. 

8. He goes to the Epistle side, and reads the first lesson, 
with the Tract 

9. He says, Oremus, and, kneeling down with all the 
clergy and people, says, Flectamus genua; the second aco- 
lyte, w T ho rises first, answers, Levate; and the celebrant 
says the prayer, Deus a quo, etc. 

10. Then he reads the second lesson and Tract, and 
immediately the Passion. 

11. Having said in the same place, Munda cor meum, 
he continues to read that part of the Passion which is sung 
as the Gospel. 

12. At the end he does not kiss the book, but immedi- 
ately (in case there be no sermon) he reads the prayer, as 
in the Missal. 

13. Before every prayer, with the exception of the eighth, 
the celebrant says, Flectamus genua, on which all the clergy 
and people kneel; and the second acolyte, rising up before 
the other, says, Levate. 

14. About the end of the prayers, the first acolyte, as- 
sisted by the third, extends before the steps of the altar, or 
of the sanctuary, a carpet, and on the first steps, a violet 
cushion, and over all, the white veil. 

Section II. — Of the Uncovering and Veneration of the 

Cross. 

1. The prayers being ended, the celebrant, standing at 
the same side, takes off the chasuble only. 

2. Then he kneels at the middle of the altar, takes the 
cross from it, and the first acolyte takes the Missal. 

3. The celebrant goes to the Epistle side, retiring back 



VENERATION OF THE CROSS. 101 

from the altar, and having his face turned towards the 
people, the clerk holding the Missal before him. 

4. The celebrant, with his right hand, uncovers the top 
of the cross, as far as the transverse piece, and raising the 
cross a little with both his hands, he says or sings with a 
solemn voice, Ecce Lignum Cruris ; and the acolytes, in 
the same tone of voice continue, In quo Salus mundi pepen- 
dit; and all but the celebrant kneel down, and the acolytes 
say, Venite, adoremus ; after which words, all arise. 

5. The celebrant, in front of the altar, at the side of the 
Epistle, uncovering the right arm of the cross, and the 
head of the crucifix, raising his voice and the cross higher, 
says again, Ecce Lignum Cruris. 

6. The clerks continue, In quo salus, etc. ; then all 
kneeling, they say, Venite, adoremus, as before. 

7. The celebrant, finally, in the middle of the altar, un- 
covering the whole cross, and raising his hands and his 
voice still higher, says the third time, Ecce Lignum Cru- 
ris, etc. 

8. The acolytes also answer, and kneel as before. 

9. The first acolyte uncovers the processional cross, and 
all other crosses in the church are now uncovered, and the 
second acolyte replaces the book on the bookstand on the 
altar. 

10. The celebrant, going down from the altar by the 
Gospel side, carries the cross devoutly, holding it raised up 
with both his hands, to the place prepared for it. 

11. There, kneeling down, he places it on the cushion 
covered with the white veil, and, if necessary, he fastens it 
with some strings. 

12. The celebrant rises, kneels, goes to the Gospel side, 
sits down, and, with the assistance of the acolytes, takes off 
his shoes. 

13. The celebrant, thus without shoes, goes to venerate 
the cross, to which, at suitable distances, he bows, kneeling 
on both knees, the first, second, and third time, and then 
he kisses it. 

14. The celebrant rises, and having knelt to the cross, 
returns to his seat at the Epistle side, and puts on his 
shoes. 



102 GOOD FRTDAY. 

15. The clerks also take off their shoes, and after the 
celebrant, and before the people, venerate the cross in the 
same manner as the celebrant, then return to their places, 
and put on their shoes. 

16. After the acolytes, the people venerate the cross, first 
the men, and then the women. 

17. The first acolyte remains by the cross whilst it is 
venerated by the people, and the second and third acolytes 
go to the celebrant, and with a loud and distinct voice, 
recite with him the verses and responses called the Impro- 
peria. 

The Improperia to be recited by the celebrant, with the 
second and third acolytes, are as follows : 

Paet 1st. 

Celebrant Popule mens quid feci tibi, aut in quo contri- 
stavi te f Responde mihi. 

V. Quia eduxi te de terra JEgypti : parasti crucem Sal- 
vatori tuo. 

Clerk 2. R. Agios o Theos. 

CI. 3. Sanctus Deus. 

CI. 2. R. Agios ischyros. 

CI. 3. V. Sanctus fortis. 

CI. 2. Agios athanatos, eleison imas. 

CL 3. Sanctus immortalis, miserere nobis. 

Cel. Quia eduxi te per desertum quadraginta annis ; et 
manna cibavi te,introduxi te in terram satis bonam: parasti 
crucem Salvatori tuo. 

CL 3. Agios o Theos. 

CL 2. Sanctus Deus. 

CL 2. Agios ischyros. 

CL 3. Sanctus fortis. 

CL 2. Agios athanatos, eleison imas. 

Sanctus immortalis, miserere nobis. 

Cel. Quid ultra debui facer e tibi et nonfecif Ego quidem 
plantavi te vineam meam speciosissimam ; et tu facta es mihi 
nimis amara; aceto namque sitim meam potasti, et lanced 
perforasti latus Salvatori tuo. 

CL 2. Agios o Theos. 



VENERATION OF THE CROSS. 103 

CL 3. Sanctus Deus. 

CL 2. Agios ischyros. 

CL 3. Sanctus fortis. 

CL 2. Agios athanatos, eleison imas. 

Sanctus immortalis, miserere nobis. 

Part 2d. 

Cel. V. Ego propter te flagellavi JEgyptum cum primo- 
genitis suis ; et tu me flagellatum tradidisti. 

CL 2 & 3. R. Popule mens quid feci tibif out in quo 
contristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego eduxi te de JEgypto, demerso Pharaone in mare 
rubrum ; et tu me tradidisti principibus sacerdotum. 

CL 2. & 3. Popule mens quid feci tibi f aut in quo con- 
tristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego ante te aperui mare; et tu aperuisti lanced latus 
meum. 

CL 2 & 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi f aut in quo con- 
tristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego ante te prceivi in columna nubis ; et tu me dux- 
isti ad prmtorium Pilati. 

CL 2 & 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi f aut in quo con- 
tristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego te pavi manna per desertum ; et tu me cecidisti 
alapis etflagellis. 

C/. 2^3. Popule meus quid feci tibi f aut in quo con- 
tristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego te potavi aqua salutis de petrel : et tu me potasti 
felle et aceto. 

CL 2 & 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi f aut in quo con- 
tristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego propter te Chananceorum reges percussi: et iu 
percussisti arundine caput meum. 

CL 2 & 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi f aut in quo con- 
tristavi te ? Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego dedi tibi sceptrum regale: et tu dedisti capiti meo 
spineam coronam. 

CL 2 & 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi f aid in quo con- 
tristavi te f Responde mihi. 



104 GOOD FRIDAY. 

Cel. Ego te exaltavi magna virtute ; et tu me suspendisti 
in patibulo cruris. 

CI. 2 & 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi f aut in quo con- 
tristavi tef Pesponde mihi. 

Part 3d. 

Cel. Crucem tuam adoramus Domine; et sanctam resur- 
rectionem tuam laudamus et glorificamus : ecce enim propter 
lignum venit gaudium in universum mundum. 

Psal. Deus misereatur nostri et benedicat nobis. 

CI. 2 & 3. Illuminet vultum suum super nos: et miserea- 
tur nostri. 

Cel. Crucem tucim adoramus Domine: et sanctam resur- 
rectionem tuam laudamus et glorificamus; ecce enim propter 
lignum venit gaudium in universum mundum. 

CI. 2 & 3. Crux fidelis inter om,nes, arbor una nobilis; 
nulla sylva talem profert, fronde, flore, germine. Dulce lig- 
num, dulces clavos, dulce pondus sustinet. 

Cel. Pange lingua gloriosi lauream certaminis, et super 
cruris trophaeo die triumphum nobilem ; qualiter Redemptor 
orbis immolatus vicerit. 

CI. 2 & 3. Crux fidelis inter omnes arbor una nobilis: 
nulla sylva talem profert, fronde, flore, germine. 

Cel. De parentis protoplasti fraude factor condolens ; 
quando pomi noxialis innecem morsu ruit; ipse lignum tunc 
notavit, damna ligni ut solveret. 

CI. 2 & 3. Dulce lignum, dulces clavos, dulce pondus sus- 
tinet. 

Cel. Hoc opus nostras salutis ordo depoposcerat, multifor- 
mis proditoris ars ut artem falleret : et medelam ferret inde, 
hostis unde losserat. 

CI. 2 & 3. Crux fidelis inter omnes, arbor una nobilis ; 
nulla sylva talem profert, fronde, flore, germine. 

Cel. Quando venit ergo sacri plenitudo temporis : missus 
est ab arce Patris, natus orbis Conditor : atque ventre vir- 
ginali, came amictus prodiit. 

CI. 2 & 3. P. Dulce lignum, dulces clavos, dulce pondus 
sustinet. 

Cel. V. Vagit infans inter arcta, conditus prozsepia, mem- 



VENERATION OF THE CROSS. 105 

bra pannis involute, Virgo mater alligat, et Dei manus pedes- 
que stricta cing it fascia. 

CI. 2 & 3. R. Crux jidelis inter omnes, arbor una nobi- 
lis; nulla sylva talem profert, fronde, flore, germine. 

Cel. V. Lustra sex qui jam peregit, tempus implens cor- 
poris: sponte libera Redemptor passioni deditus; Agnus in 
Crucis levatur immolandus stipite. 

CI. 2(&3. Dulce lignum, dulces clavos, dulce pondus sus- 
tinet. 

Cel. Felle potus ecce languet; spina, clam, lanced, mite 
corpus perforarunt, undd manat et cruor ; terra pondus, 
astra, mundus, quo lavantur flumine. 

CI. 2 & 3. Crux jidelis inter omnes, arbor una nobilis: 
nulla sylva talem profert, fronde, jlore, germine. 

Cel. Flecte ramos arbor alta, tensa laxa viscera: et rigor 
lentescat ille, quern dedit nativitas; et superni membra regis 
tende miti stipite. 

CI. 2 & 3. Dulce lignum, dulces clavos, dulce pondus sus- 
tinet. 

Cel. Sola digna tu fuisti ferre mundi victimam; atquepor- 
tum prozparare area mundo naufrago, quern sacer cruor 
perunxit, fusus Agni corpore. 

CI. 2 & 3. Crux jidelis inter omnes, arbor una nobilis ; 
nulla sylva talem profert, fronde flore, germine. 

Cel. Sempiterna sit Beatce Trinitati gloria: cequa Patri, 
Filioque par decus Paraclito ; Unius Trinique nomen laudet 
universitas. Amen. Dulce lignum, is repeated. 

18. Towards the end of the veneration of the cross, the 
first acolyte lights the candles on the altar, and the third 
takes from the altar the book-stand, with the Missal. 

19. Then the second and third acolytes go, one to the 
Epistle side, and the other to the Gospel side, and unfold 
the altar-cloths. 

20. This being done, the second acolyte, if in orders, 
brings to the altar the burse with the corporal, and the 
purifier over it ; he takes the corporal out of the burse, 
unfolds it, and places the purifier near it, on the Epistle 
side. 

21. The third acolyte places on the altar, at the Epistle 
side, the book-stand, with the Missal opened. 



106 GOOD FRIDAY. 

22. The veneration being over, the celebrant brings the 
cross back to the altar, places it between the candlesticks, 
and makes a genuflection. 

23. The acolyte removes the cushion and the veil from 
the place where the cross lay, and one of them puts fire in 
the censer. 

24. The celebrant again puts on the chasuble at the 
bench, on the Epistle side, and goes up to the altar, with 
his head uncovered. 

Section III. — Of ike Procession to the Repositwy, and the 
return to the Altar with the Blessed Sacrament. 

1. The celebrant, standing before the altar, puts the 
incense in the censer, without the usual blessing. 

2. The procession goes to the repository in the following 
order : 

The banner. 

Some pious men of the congregation. 

The censer-bearer. 

The cross, uncovered, carried by the third acolyte. 

The celebrant, with the second acolyte at his left hand. 

3. At the repository, the banner and the cross top on 
one side of the altar, the others who compose the proces- 
sion divide themselves into two lines, one on each side of 
the altar. 

4. The celebrant, having made a genuflection before the 
repository, kneels down on the lowest step of the altar, 
and, with others, prays awhile. 

5. Then he arises, opens the repository, kneels, goes 
down the first step, and, standing, puts incense in the 
censer without blessing it, and without the usual kiss. 
The candles for the procession are lighted, and the canopy 
is prepared. 

6. The celebrant, kneeling on the platform of the altar, 
incenses the Blessed Sacrament in the repository, arises, 
makes a genuflection, takes out of the repository the chal- 
ice, and places it on the altar. 

7. The celebrant makes a genuflection, shuts the repos- 
itory, in which he leaves the pyx with the consecrated 



PROCESSION TO THE REPOSITORY. 107 

Hosts ; makes another genuflection, and then goes down 
the first step. 

8. There kneeling, he puts on the veil, rises, mates a 
genuflection, and takes the chalice as he did the day before, 
which the second acolyte covers with the veil. 

9. The celebrant, turning his back to the altar, and his 
face to the procession, with a loud voice, begins the hymn, 
Vexilla Regis, which he continues with the second clerk, 
as follows : 

Vexilla regis prodeunt, 
Fidget Cruris mysterium : 

Quo vita mortem pertulit, 
Et morte vitam protulit. 

Quw vulnerata lanceai 
Mucrone diro, criminum 
Ut nos lavaret sordibus, 
Manavit undo, et sanguine. 

Tmpleta sunt quo? concinit 
David fideli carmine, 
Dicendo nationibus, 
Regnavit a ligno Deus 

Arbor decora etfulgida, 
Ornata regis purpura, 
Electa digno stipite 
Tarn sancta membra tangere. 

Beata, cujus brachiis 
Pretium pependit saiculi, 
Stater a facta corporis, 
Tulitque prcedam tartari. 

Grux, ave, spes unica ! 
Hoc passionis tempore, 
Piis adauge gratiam, 
Reisque dele crimina. 

Te, fons salutis, Trinitas ! 
Collaudet omnis spiritus : 
Quibus cruris victorium 
Largiris, adde prozmium. Amen. 



108 GOOD FRIDAY. 

10. The procession returns to the altar in the following 
order : 

The banner. 

Some pious men with candles. 
The processional cross. 
The censer-bearer with the censer. 

The celebrant under the canopy, and the second acolyte 
at his left. 

11. Four candles should be left burning at the re- 
pository. 

12. The banner and the canopy are left outside the rail- 
ing ; the processional cross is put near the side-table. 

13. The men of the congregation carrying candles, stop 
outside the railing in regular order, holding the candles in 
their hands to the end of the office. 

14. The celebrant goes up to the altar, and places the 
chalice on the corporal ; he then kneels, rises, and goes 
down the first step of the altar. 

15. There he takes off the veil, and standing, puts 
incense in the censer without blessing or kissing ; then 
kneeling down on the platform, he incenses the Blessed 
Sacrament. 

Section IV. — Of the Last Part of the Ceremony. 

1. The celebrant arising, goes to the altar, makes a genu- 
flection, takes off the veil from the chalice, and places the 
paten on the corporal. 

2. Then he takes the chalice, lays the consecrated Host 
on the paten, takes the paten with both his hands, and 
places the Host on the corporal, not saying anything; and 
not making the sign of the cross, he places the paten on 
the corporal at his right hand. 

3. The celebrant, having made a genuflection, takes the 
chalice, goes to the Epistle side, and holding the chalice in 
his left hand, puts in it wine and water, without blessing, 
and without saying anything. 

4. The chalice is not wiped, but is placed on the side of 
the corporal. 

5. The celebrant goes to the middle, and having made 






PROCESSION TO THE REPOSITORY. 109 

a genuflection, replaces the chalice in the usual place, 
without making the sign of the cross, and covers it with 
the pall. 

6. Remaining in the same place, the celebrant puts 
incense in the censer, without blessing. 

7. Then taking the censer, he kneels, incenses the offer- 
ing, saying, as usual, Incensum istud, etc. 

8. Having incensed the offerings, he kneels again, and 
incenses the cross (ex Deer. S. R. C. 14 Mail, 1707), saying 
Dirigatur Domine, etc., and having again knelt to the cross, 
continues, as usual, the incensing of the altar, kneeling 
every time he passes by the middle of the altar. 

9. The celebrant then gives the censer to the censer- 
bearer, saying, Accendat in nobis, etc. ; he is not incensed. 

10. Immediately, taking care not to turn his back to 
the Blessed Sacrament, he goes from the platform down to 
the second step, a little back of the altar on the Epistle 
side, having his face turned towards the people, and washes 
his hands, saying nothing. 

11. He returns to the middle of the altar, kneels, rises, 
and placing his hands joined on the altar, bowing, says 
with a low, but intelligible voice, In spiritu humilitatis, etc. 

12. He kisses the altar, kneels, and turning towards the 
people on the Gospel side, he says, Orate fratres ; and 
returns by the same way to the middle, without completing 
the circle, and kneels again. 

13. The words, Suseipiat, are not answered. 

14. The celebrant, with his hands joined before his 
breast, in a ferial tone says, Oremus. Prceceptis, etc. ; and 
whilst he says, Pater noster, he extends his hands. 

15. The clerks answer, Sed libera nos a malo, and the 
celebrant, Amen; with a low voice, still holding his hands 
extended, he continues in the ferial tone as before, Libera 
nos, etc., and at the end, the acolytes answer, Amen. 

16. The celebrant kneels, arises, uncovers the chalice, 
puts the paten under the Host, and holding with his left 
hand the paten on the altar, with the right he raises the 
Host, so that it may be seen by the people. 

17. Immediately after, he raises the Host over the 
chalice already uncovered, and forthwith divides it into 



110 GOOD FEIDAY. 

three parts as usual, saying nothing; the last part he puts 
into the chalice, in silence, and without making the sign 
of the cross. 

18. The chalice being covered, he kneels, rises, and with 
his hands joined over the altar, his body inclined, he says 
secretly, Perceptio Corporis, omitting the two other prayers. 

19. He again kneels, then taking the paten with the 
Host, says, as usual, Panem Coelestem, etc., and also the 
Domine, non sum dignus, etc., striking his breast. 

20. He signs himself with the Host, saying, Corpus 
Domini nostri, etc., and communicates. 

21. Having meditated a little, he uncovers the chalice, 
and kneels. 

22. He arises, and having gathered, as usual, the frag- 
ments, he takes the chalice with both his hands, not saying 
anything, and without making the sign of the cross, he 
reverently takes the particle of the Host with the wine. 

23. Omitting the usual ablution of the chalice, he washes 
his fingers, as customary, over the chalice, with wine and 
water. 

24. Meanwhile, all rise, and the candles are put out. 

25. Having taken the ablution in the middle of the altar, 
the celebrant wipes the chalice, covers it with the small 
black veil, arranges it, and bowing, with his hands joined 
before his breast, he says secretly, Quod ore sumpsimus, etc. 

26. The first acolyte, if in holy orders, carries the chalice 
to the side-table. 

27. The celebrant, going down, makes with the clerk a 
genuflection to the cross, and having covered his head, he 
returns to the sacristy. 

28. There he takes off the sacred vestments, and puts on 
a white stole over his surplice. 

Section V. — Of the bringing back of the Pyx to the Altar. 

1. The celebrant, preceded by the first acolyte, with the 
veil, and the other two with candles, goes to the repository. 

2. Having made a genuflection on the floor of the chapel, 
he kneels on the lowest step, and prays for awhile. 

3. Then he rises, goes up to the altar, opens the reposi- 



PREPARATIONS. Ill 

tory, kneels, takes the pyx, and places it on the corporal, 
and kneels again. 

4. Going down the first step, he kneels on the platform, 
and receives the veil from the first acolyte. 

5. He goes up to the altar, kneels, and with his hands 
covered with the veil, takes the pyx, and preceded by the 
clerks with lighted candles, brings back the pyx, which 
should be kept in a tabernacle, in some remote chapel 
within the church, or in the sacristy, placing it there with 
the accustomed genuflections. 

6. When the pyx is shut up in the tabernacle, all kneel 
down, and the sign for the Angelus Domini is given with 
the usual wooden instrument. 

7. Lastly, the candles of the altar are put out, and every- 
thing is put in its proper place. 

8. Should there be no chapel or sacristy, the pyx must 
be left in the repository, with a lamp burning before it. 



CHAPTEE VI. 

OF HOLY SATURDAY. 

Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE SACRED RITES TO BE 
PERFORMED ON THIS DAY. 

Outside the Door of the Church. 

1. A table covered with a white cloth, and on it, 

2. A small book-stand with a Missal. 

3. A plate with five grains of incense. 

4. The censer, with the box, containing incense. 

5. A vessel with holy-water and the sprinkle. 

6. A white maniple, stole, and dalmatic. 

7. A lantern with a candle. 

8. Also, near the table, a chafing-dish with coals, or 
wood to be lighted for the new fire. 



112 HOLY SATURDAY. 

9. Tongs. 

10. A long ornamented rod, with the triple candle 
fastened on the top. This has but one common stock, from 
which three candles, of equal length, rise. 

At the High Altar. 

1. The altar is to have on it the candlesticks and cross, 
as on solemn festivals. 

2. Its front is to be covered with two altar-veils, a white 
one under another of violet color. 

3. A stand on the Gospel side, to fix in it the rod with 
the triple candle. 

4. On the same side, a high book-stand for the Exultet. 

5. The paschal candle on a large candlestick, the wick 
of which should be so prepared as to be easily lighted ; 
five holes in the form of a cross should be made in the 
candle. 

6. The lamps prepared at proper and convenient places. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The side-table should be covered with a white cloth. 

2. A Missal for the Exultet and for Mass. 

3. The chalice covered with, a white burse and veil. 

4. A plate with the cruets of wine and water, and a small 
linen towel. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Four surplices for the acolytes; the amice, alb, cinc- 
ture, violet stole and cope; also, a violet maniple, stole and 
chasuble. 

2. A white maniple, stole and chasuble. 

3. A white veil. 

4. Candles, to accompany the ciborium, when the priest 
brings it back to the altar. 

At the Baptismal Font. 

1. A table covered with a white cloth. 

2. Two towels. 

3. The holy-water vase, with the sprinkle. 



BEGINNING OF THE OFFICE. 113 

4. Vessels to fill water from the font. 

5. The vessels containing the oil of the catechumens and 
the holy chrism. 

6. A pitcher of water, with a basin for washing the hands, 
and a few slices of bread without crust on a small plate, for 
the same purpose* 

7. Some clean cotton on a plate, for wiping the fingers. 
If baptism be administered, besides what is abovemen- 

tioned, the following things ought to be prepared : 

1. The Roman Ritual. 

2. A small plate with salt. 

3. The vessels with the oil of the catechumens, and the 
holy chrism. 

4. A white stole and cope. 

5. A towel to wipe the head of the baptized person. 

6. Another piece of linen for the white garment. 

7. A candle, to be lighted. 

Article II. 

OF THE SACRED RITES TO BE PERFORMED ON HOLY 
SATURDAY. 

Section I. — From the beginning of the Office to the blessing 
of the Paschal Candle, 

1. Outside the church, fire is struck from a flint, and 
with it the charcoals in the pan are kindled. 

2. At a proper hour, four clerks put on their surplices in 
the sacristy, and prepare everything at their proper places. 

3. The sign being given with the clapper, the celebrant 
washes his hands, puts on the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
stole and cope. 

4. They proceed to the principal door in the following 
order : 

The first acolyte with his hands joined. 

The third acolyte with the processional cross. 

The celebrant between the second and fourth acolytes. 

5. When outside, the acolyte with the cross stops, turn- 
ing and holding the crucifix turned towards the celebrant. 

10 



114 HOLY SATURDAY. 

6. The celebrant places himself before the table, which 
is between him and the cross. 

7. There, standing, he reads out of the Missal, placed on 
the book-stand on the table, the three prayers for the bless- 
ing of the fire, and then the prayer for the blessing of the 
incense. 

8. Whilst the celebrant blesses the incense, the first aco- 
lyte takes, with the tongs, some of the new blessed fire, and 
puts it in the censer. 

9. The celebrant, with the usual blessing and kiss, puts 
the incense in the censer, then he sprinkles the fire, and 
the grains of incense, saying the anthem Asperges me, and 
incenses them. 

10. The censer-bearer, having received the censer, puts 
some more new fire into it. 

11. The celebrant takes off the cope and stole, puts on a 
maniple, and a stole on his left shoulder, as deacons wear it, 
and a dalmatic of white color. 

12. Meanwhile the second acolyte lights a candle with 
the new fire, and places it in a lantern, and the fourth aco- 
lyte takes the plate with the grains of incense. 

13. The celebrant again puts incense in the censer with 
the usual blessing and kisses, and takes the rod with the 
triple candle. 

14. They go to bless the paschal candle in the following 
order : 

The acolyte, carrying the grains of incense on the right 
hand, and the censer-bearer on the left. 

The third acolyte with the cross. 

The celebrant, holding the rod with the triple candle, 
and the second acolyte, with the lighted taper, at the left. 

15. The acolytes, carrying the grains of incense, the cen- 
ser, and the cross, go into the church, and stop when the 
celebrant has entered the door. 

16. The celebrant having entered the church, lights one 
of the three candles out of the lighted taper, and kneels 
with the rest of the clergy and the people, the cross-bearer 
excepted. 

17. Thus kneeling, the celebrant says with a distinct 



BLESSING OF THE PASCHAL CANDLE. 115 

voice, Lumen Christi; then he rises, and the acolytes also 
arising, answer, Deo gr atlas. 

18. They go as far as the middle of the church, where 
again the second candle being lighted, everything is done 
as before, except that the celebrant raises his voice higher. 

19. At last they go as far as the steps of the altar, and 
the third candle being lighted, everything is done the third 
time, as before, but they raise their voice still higher. 

Section II. — Of the Blessing of the Paschal Candle. 

1. The acolytes having answered for the third time, Deo 
gratias, all rise, and form a straight line, with the celebrant 
in the middle, before the altar. 

2. The second acolyte retiring, lays the taper on the 
table, takes the Missal for the Exultet, gives it to the cele- 
brant, who gives him the rod with the triple candle. 

3. The celebrant, holding the Missal in his hands, kneels 
on the lowest step of the altar, and without saying Munda 
cor meum, says only, Jube, Domine, Benedicere. Dominus 
sit in corde meo, et in labiis meis, ut digne et competenter an- 
nuntiem suum paschale prceconium. Amen. 

4. Then rising, and having made with the others a gen- 
uflection to the altar, they go to the book-stand, which is 
covered with a white veil, and placed at the Gospel side, 
in the following order : 

The censer-bearer, having at his right the fourth acolyte, 
w r ith the grains of incense. 

The third acolyte, with the cross, having at his left the 
second acolytej with the triple candle. 

The celebrant with the Missal. 

5. Being arrived at the book-stand^ they range themselves 
by it in the following order, in a straight line, with their 
faces towards it. 

The celebrant lays the Missal on the book-stand. 
The cross-bearer at the right of the celebrant. 
The censer-bearer at the right of the cross-bearer. 
The acolytes, holding the triple candle, at the left of the 
celebrant. 



116 HOLY SATURDAY. 

The acolytes, with the grains of incense, at the left of the 
triple candle. 

6. The celebrant, receiving the censer from the censer- 
bearer, incenses the Missal open on the book-stand, and 
with a clear and joy fill voice begins the Exultet. 

7. At the words, Curvat imperia, he puts the 1 
grains of incense in the side of the paschal candle, 4 2 5 
in the following order : 3 

8. The fourth acolyte leaves on the side-table the plate, 
in which the grains were, and takes a rod, with a wax taper 
fastened at the top, and returns to his former place, at the 
left of the triple candle. 

9. At the words, Rutilans ignis accendit, the celebrant 
lights the candle from the triple candle. 

10. At the words, Apis mater eduxit, the celebrant stops, 
until the fourth acolyte has lighted a taper to light the 
lamps of the church. 

.11. The Exultet being ended, the celebrant shuts the 
Missal, and the second acolyte puts the triple candle in the 
stand prepared for it at the Gospel side. The third acolyte 
leaves the cross at the Epistle side- 

12. Then, preceded by the censer-bearer, with the aco- 
lyte that carried the grains of incense, at his left, and also 
by the second and third acolyte, he kneels before the altar 
with them all, and returns to the sacristy* 

13. There, having taken off the white vestments, he puts 
on the violet maniple, stole, and chasuble. 

Section III. — Of the Prophecies. 

1. The celebrant thus vested, preceded by the acolytes, 
goes to the altar. 

2. Having bowed to the cross, he goes up to the altar, 
kisses it in the middle, and goes to the Epistle side. 

3. There, with a loud voice, he reads the twelve prophe- 
cies, with the prayers and tracts ; he kneels with all the 
clergy and the people, whilst he says, Flectamus genua, be- 
fore every prayer, the last only excepted ; and the clerk, 
arising, says, Levate. 

4. After the last prayer, the celebrant, having made, 



BLESSING OF THE FONT. 117 

from the place where he stands, a bow to the cross, goes 
down to his seat at the Epistle side, and takes off the chasu- 
ble and maniple. 

5. If the church has a baptismal font, the celebrant puts 
on a violet cope, and sits down. Otherwise he goes before 
the altar for the litany, as below. 

Section IV. — Of the Blessing of the Font 

1. The celebrant being seated as above, the first acolyte 
takes from its stand the paschal candle, lighted, and goes 
before the altar. 

2. The third acolyte takes the cross, and likewise goes 
before the altar. 

3. The two other acolytes go to the celebrant. 

4. The celebrant, arising, begins with a loud voice the 
tract, Slcut cervus, as here below, which he continues 
slowly with the acolytes. 

5. When the tract is begun, the procession moves to the 
front, bowing to the altar, in the following order : 

The acolyte with the paschal candle. The cross-bearer. 
The celebrant, between the two other acolytes, with his 
head covered, reciting the tract : 

" Sicus cervus desiderat adfontes aquarum: ita desiderat 
anima mea ad te Dews. 

" Sitivit anima mea, ad Deum vivum: quando veniam, et 
apparebo antefaciem Deif 

" Fuerunt mihi lacrymce panes die ae node, dum dicitur 
mihi per singulos dies, ubi est Deus tuns f 

6. All stop before the railing of the font, and the cele- 
brant having his face turned to the cross, after the tract is 
over, says, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer, Omnipotens 
sempiterne Deus, etc., the fourth acolyte holding the Missal 
before him. 

7. The acolyte carrying the paschal candle, and the 
cross-bearer, go within the railing, if the place is spacious 
enough ; they, however, stand opposite the celebrant. 

8. The celebrant goes near the font, and says the second 
prayer and the preface, as in the Missal, holding always 
his hands joined. 



118 HOLY SATURDAY. 

9. During the preface, at the proper places, as pointed 
out by the Rubrics, he performs the following rites : 

1. At these words, G-ratiam de Spiritu Sancto, w T ith his 
right hand he divides the water in the form of a cross, 
and immediately after wipes his hand. 

2. After the words, Non inficiendo corrumpat, he touches 
the water with his hand, and wipes it. 

3. After the words, Indulgentiam consequatur, w 7 ith his 
right hand he makes three crosses over the font. 

4. After the words, Super te ferebatur, he divides the 
water with his right hand, and sprinkles it towards 1 
the four parts of the world, east, west, north, and 3 4 
south, in the following manner : 2 

5. After the words, In nomine Pairis, etc., he changes 
his voice in the tone of a lesson. 

6. After the words, Tu benignus aspira, the celebrant 
breathes thrice over the water in the form of a cross. 

7. After the words, Purijicandis mentibus efficaces, he 
dips the paschal candle a little into the water, saying, De- 
scended, in hanc plenitudinem fontis, etc., and draws it forth. 
He dips it deeper the second time, saying louder, Descen- 
ded, etc., and takes it out again. Lastly, he dips the pas- 
chal candle to the bottom of the font, and says still louder, 
Descended, etc., and takes it out. 

8. The celebrant breathes three times over the water, in 
the form marked in the Missal, and continues, Totamque 
hujus aquce, etc. 

9. At the words, Fcecundet effectu, he takes the paschal 
candle out of the font, and it is wiped, 

10. He continues the preface, and in a lower tone con^ 
eludes it, saying, Per Dominum nostrum, etc., and the as^ 
sistant acolytes answer, Amen. 

11. The second acolyte takes the holy- water vase, and 
with it takes some water out of the font. 

12. The celebrant having received the sprinkle, already 
dipped into the water of the font, sprinkles both himself 
and the bystanders ; then, accompanied by two clerks, he 
sprinkles the people in the church and returns to the font. 

13. Holy water is also taken out of the font for the ves- 
sels that are by the doors of the church. 



BAPTISM OF INFANTS. 119 

14. The celebrant, having returned to the font, puts in 
the water the oil of the catechumens in the form of a cross, 
saying, Sanctificetur, etc.* 

15. Then he puts in the chrism, saying, Infusio chris- 
matis, etc. 

16. Lastly, he puts in both oils together, in the form of 
a cross, saying, Commixtio chrismatis, etc. 

17. He mixes with his hands in the font the oils with 
the water, spreading them all over the font. 

18. He wipes his hands with some cotton, and cleanses 
them with some crumbs of bread. 



Section V. — Baptism of Infants. 

" Duo potissimum (these words are from the Roman Rit- 
ual) ex antiquissimo Ecclesice ritu, sacri sunt dies, in quibus 
solemni cceremonia hoc Sacramentum administrare maxime 
convenit, nempe Sabbatum Sanctum Paschw, et Sabbatum 
Pentecostes, quibus diebus Baptismatis fontis aqua rite con- 
secratur." 

The celebrant, having finished the blessing of the font, 
proceeds to the baptism of the infants, if any are to be 
baptized. 

1. After the blessing of the font, the children to be bap- 
tized should be with their sponsors outside the door of the 
church. 

2. The celebrant, having washed his hands, preceded by 
an acolyte with the cross, another acolyte remaining by the 
font w T ith the paschal candle, goes between the two other 
acolytes, to the door of the church. 

3. There, the celebrant performs all that is prescribed 
by the Ritual, as far as the introducing of the child into 
the church. 

4. Then he lays on the infant the extremity of the stole 
which hangs from his left shoulder, and introduces it into 
the church, saying, N. Ingredere in Templum Dei, etc. 

* As, generally, the font is not sufficiently large, the water is 
blessed in a more capacious vessel ; in which case the font is filled 
with blessed water by means of vases prepared for that purpose. 



120 HOLY SATURDAY. 

5. Then having said the Credo and Pater, with his back 
turned to the railing of the font, he says the Exorcism; 
touches the ears and nostrils of the infant, and anoints it 
with the oil of catechumens on the breast, and between the 
shoulders. 

6. Remaining still outside the railing, the celebrant takes 
off the violet cope and stole, and puts on the white. 

7. Preceded by the cross, and followed by the infants to 
be baptized, with their godfathers and godmothers, he goes 
inside the railing of the font. 

8. The celebrant makes the usual questions before the 
font, N. Credis ? etc., JV. Vis baptizari f etc. 

9. The godfather having answered, Volo, he administers 
baptism, in the manner prescribed in the Ritual, etc. 

10. After the baptism, the celebrant washes his hands, 
and having put off the white cope and stole, puts on the 
violet. 

Section VI. — Of the Litany, Mass, and Vespers. 

1. The celebrant, preceded by the cross and paschal- 
candle bearers, and attended by the other acolytes, returns 
before the altar. 

2. The paschal candle is placed on its stand, and the 
cross laid against the wall on the Epistle side. 

3. The celebrant, standing before the altar, takes off the 
cope only. 

4. Then kneeling down with the clergy and people he 
recites or sings the Litany from the Missal, which is placed 
on a stool before him. 

5. The acolytes repeat all that is said by the celebrant. 

6. At the verse, Peccatores, the violet front veil is re- 
moved from the altar, the candles are lighted, and flower- 
pots are placed between the candlesticks. 

7. The celebrant continues the Litany, as far as Christe 
exaudi nos, inclusively. 

8. Then he rises, and, preceded by the acolytes, goes to 
the sacristy ; where, having taken off the violet stole, he 
puts on a white maniple, stole, and chasuble. 

9. Accompanied by the acolytes, as above, he returns to 



PYX TO THE ALTAR. 121 

the altar, before the step of which he makes the confession 
as usual, saying the Psalm, Judica me, Deus, and the 
Gloria Patri. 

10. He goes up to the altar, and having said the prayer, 
Aufer a nobis, in the middle of it, he says immediately, 
Ki/rie ekison, there being no Introit. 

11. At the Gloria in excelsis, the bells are rung. 

12. After the Epistle, the celebrant says thrice Alleluia, 
raising his voice gradually each time; and the acolytes re- 
peat it in the same tone of voice as the celebrant, who con- 
tinues the verse and the tract. 

13. Credo is not said, neither the Offertoriwn after the 
Dominus vobiscum, nor the Agnus Dei ; the Pax is not 
given. 

14. In place of the Communio, vespers are said as in the 
Missal, viz. : 

15. The celebrant, at the Epistle side, says the anthem 
Alleluia, and with the acolytes continues the Psalm, Lau- 
date, after which he repeats, Alleluia. 

16. Then he says the antiphon, Vesper e auUm, etc., with 
the canticle, Magnificat 

17. The antiphon, Vespere, etc., having been repeated, 
the celebrant goes to the middle of the altar, kisses it, and, 
turned towards the people, says, Dominus vobiscum, and 
then the prayer, as usual, at the Epistle side. 

18. At the Ite, Missa est, is added, Alleluia, Alleluia. 

19. After the Gospel of St. John, the celebrant returns 
to the sacristy, and puts oif the sacred vestments. 

Section YII. — Of bringing back the Pyx to the Altar. 

1. The celebrant puts on a white stole over his surplice, 
and, preceded by two acolytes with candles, and by another 
with the burse and veil, he goes to the place where the pyx 
with the Blessed Sacrament is kept. 

2. There, with the usual genuflections, he takes the pyx 
with his hands covered with the veil, and brings it back to 
the usual tabernacle. 

3. He returns to the sacristy, in which he puts off the 
sacred vestments, and reads the anthem, Trium puerorum, 

11 



122 ASPERGES. 

with Alleluia and the Canticle, Psalm, and prayers of 
thanksgiving, as in the Missal. 

4. Meanwhile the candles of the altar are put out. 

5. Likewise the triple candle, which is not lighted any 
more; and the rod is removed. 

6. Also the paschal candle is extinguished, but it is left 
in its stand. It is to be lighted on all Sundays and festi- 
vals of obligation at Mass and Vespers, until the Gospel 
of Ascension-day, inclusively ; after which it is put out, 
and after Mass removed from its stand. Afterwards, it is 
lighted only on the eve of Pentecost, for the blessing of 
the font. 



CHAPTER VII. 

THE ASPERGES.* — WHEN THERE IS BUT ONE PRIEST. 



THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 



In the Sacristy. 

1 . The sacred vestments for the priest, except the mani- 
ple and chasuble. 

2. A cope. 

3. The holy-water vase. 

4. The sprinkle. 

5. The Missal, or Asperges-card. 

6. Surplices for the acolytes. 

In the Sanctuary. 
The chasuble and maniple on the priest's bench. 

At the Altar. 

Everything ready for Mass. 

1. At the appointed time, the acolytes put on their sur- 

* The Asporges, or sprinkling of the holy water, takes place every 
Sunday of the year, except when the Bishop solemnly celebrates. 
(Ccerem. Epis., 1. ii, c. xxxi.) The water may be blessed in the church, 
or in the sacristy. (Rub. Miss.) The holy water should be changed, 
at least, once a week. (Ccerem. Epis., 1. i, c. vi.) 



ASPERGES. 123 

plices, the priest washes his hands, and then puts on the 
amice, alb, girdle, and stole, assisted by the acolytes. The 
first acolyte takes the holy-water vase, and the second the 
Asperges-card, placing themselves a little behind the cele- 
brant, who takes off his cap, and all bow to the image in 
the sacristy. The celebrant, having again put on his cap, 
goes to the altar, preceded by the acolytes ; they bow to the 
clergy, should they be in the sanctuary. 

2. Having arrived in front of the lowest step of the altar, 
the first acolyte at the right, and the second at the left, the 
celebrant gives his cap to the first acolyte, and all make a 
genuflection on the floor,* rise, and kneel on the lowest 
step. The priest having received the sprinkle from the 
acolyte, intones the Asperges, or the Vidi aquam, according 
to the season, and then sprinkles the altar three times, first 
in the middle, then at the right, and lastly, at the left side; 
in the meantime, the choir continues to sing the Asperges. 
Then the celebrant sprinkles himself; after which, he rises 
and sprinkles the acolytes, first the one at his right, and 
then the other, while these remain kneeling. 

3. Then all rise, and all make either a profound bow 
to the altar, or a genuflection, if the Blessed Sacrament 
be in the tabernacle; and turning at their right, they go 
as far as the railings of the sanctuary, the first acolyte 
carrying the holy- water vase, at the right of the celebrant, 
and the second at his left, both raising the borders of the 
cope. From the railings the priest sprinkles the people 
three times, first in the middle, then at the Epistle, and 
lastly, at the Gospel side, or if usual, he passes down the 
aisles; after which, turning at the right, they go back to 
the front of the lowest step, and there make a genuflection. 
During the sprinkling the celebrant recites the Miserere or 
Confitemhu. 

4. Then they rise, and stand until the Antiphon Asperges 
is sung and repeated by the choir; after which, the cele- 
brant sings the versicles, and the prayer from the book or 
card ; the choir having answered, Amen, all make a genu- 
flection, and go to the bench, where the priest takes off the 

* It is supposed that the Blessed Sacrament is in the tabernacle. 



124 ASPERGES. 

cope, assisted by the second acolyte, who carries it away, 
removing also the holy-water vase and card ; if the Missal 
has been used for the Asperges, he places it, opened at the 
right place, on the book-stand upon the altar. In the 
meantime, the celebrant, assisted by the first acolyte, puts 
on the maniple and the chasuble; after which, between the 
tw T o acolytes, he goes in front of the lowest step, where all 
make a genuflection, the acolytes kneeling on the floor, a 
little behind the priest. 

5. If the clergy be in the sanctuarv, the celebrant, hav- 
ing sprinkled the altar and himself, rises, and being accom- 
panied by the acolytes, proceeds to sprinkle the clergy. 
He sprinkles first at that side where the highest in dignity 
sits, saluting them'before and after the sprinkling. Should 
there be Canons, he sprinkles each in particular. After 
sprinkling the clergy he goes to the railings, from which 
place he sprinkles the people in the manner above pre- 
scribed. He salutes the clergy on both sides of the sanc- 
tuary as he returns to the lowest step, makes a genuflection, 
and sprinkles the acolytes. 

6. Should the Bishop assist, the celebrant, after having 
sprinkled the altar (accompanied by the acolytes carrying 
the holy-water vase), goes to the Bishop, bows to him, and, 
with the usual kisses, gives him the sprinkle. The prelate 
sprinkles himself, then the celebrant, and afterwards his 
own assistants. He then returns the sprinkle to the cele- 
brant, who receives it with the usual kisses. Having bowed 
to the Bishop, they return to the lowest step of the altar, 
where, having made a genuflection, the celebrant sprinkles 
the two acolytes. They again make a genuflection, and go 
to the railings, to sprinkle the people, bowing to the Bishop 
in going and returning. 

7. Should there be deacon and sub-deacon, their mani- 
ples must be placed on the priest's bench in the sanctuary 
beforehand. The celebrant and all the assistants being 
vested, at the signal of the master of ceremonies, all bow 
to the cross, and, making the usual salutes, put on their 
caps ; then the procession moves in the following order : 

First, the clerk with the holy-water vase, followed by 
the two acolytes carrying candles ; then the celebrant, with 



ASPERGES. 125 

hands joined, accompanied on either side by the deacon 
and sub-deacon, raising the borders of his cope. (Cccrem. 
Epis.) 

8. Having arrived in the sanctuary, they salute the 
clergy ; then, proceeding to the lowest step of the altar, 
give their caps to the master of ceremonies, and make a 
genuflection. The master of ceremonies takes the caps to 
the priest's bench, and the acolytes go to the side-table. 
The celebrant and his ministers kneel on the lowest step, 
and the clerk, with the holy-water vase, goes to the right 
of the deacon, who takes the sprinkle, and, with the usual 
kisses, presents it to the celebrant, who intones the Asperges, 
and sprinkles the altar, etc., as was before said in No. 2. 

9. The celebrant, still kneeling, having sprinkled him- 
self, sprinkles the deacon and sub-deacon. This done, the 
deacon receives the sprinkle, and gives it to the clerk, who 
carries the holy-water vase. Then they rise, make a bow 
to the altar, or a genuflection, if the Blessed Sacrament is 
in the tabernacle, and proceed to sprinkle the clergy ; the 
clerk carrying the holy-water vase precedes the celebrant, 
who is accompanied by his minister, raising the borders of 
the cope. Having saluted the clergy, the deacon presents 
the sprinkle to the celebrant, who sprinkles, as he continues 
to say the Miserere or Confitemini, if Vidi aquam has been 
sung, in a low voice, with his ministers. 

10. Having sprinkled the clergy in the manner pre- 
scribed in No. 6, the celebrant, with his ministers, sprinkles 
the people at the railing or otherwise as in No. 3; after 
which, the deacon takes from the celebrant the sprinkle, 
and gives it to the clerk, and then they return to the foot 
of the altar, saluting the clergy as they pass. There the 
deacon again gives the sprinkle to the celebrant, who 
sprinkles the acolytes and other clerks that may be about 
the altar. While sprinkling, the celebrant does not bow, 
but the clergy and others will stand uncovered, make a 
bow and the sign of the cross. (Gavant, in Benedict.) 

11. If on this occasion, that is, when the celebrant is 
assisted by deacon and sub-deacon, the Bishop is present, 
after the sprinkling of the altar, the celebrant, accompanied 
only by the master of ceremonies and the clerk carrying 



126 BENEDICTION. 

the holy-water vase, goes to the Bishop, bows to him, and, 
with the usual kisses, gives him the sprinkle; the rest is 
done as marked in No. 6. The deacon and sub-deacon re- 
main standing at the foot of the altar. This is, as Gavantus 
says, through respect for the Bishop. The celebrant, hav- 
ing received the sprinkle from the Bishop, bows to him, 
and returns to the front of the altar, makes a genuflection, 
and sprinkles the deacon and sub-deacon. After this, he 
proceeds as on other occasions, except that he is accompanied 
only by the master of ceremonies and the clerk carrying 
the holy-water vase, the ministers remaining standing at 
their post in front of the altar. 

12. The antiphon being sung, and repeated by the choir, 
the celebrant sings the versicles and the prayer, with joined 
hands, from the book that is held before him by his min- 
isters. Then they bow, or make a genuflection, and go to 
the priest's bench, where, standing with their faces towards 
the altar (Baldeschi), the ministers take off the cope from 
the celebrant, and put on him the chasuble and maniple ; 
after which, they take their own maniples. This done, 
they return to the altar, and commence Mass. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

BENEDICTION OF THE BLESSED SACRAMENT.* 

Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED. 

1. There should be, at least, twelve lighted candles on 
the altar whenever the Blessed Sacrament is exposed in the 
monstrance, and Benediction given with it.f 

2. Likewise a throne, or small canopy, should be placed 

* Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament should not be given 
without permission from the Ordinary. {Benedict XIV, Instit. XXX, 
n. 9, and S. R. C, 28th April, 1640, 18th Dec, 1647.) 

f Benedict XIV, Instit. XXX, 22, 24. 



BENEDICTION. 1 27 

on the highest step over the altar, between the candlesticks ; 
and in the canopy, a corporal or pall, on which the Blessed 
Sacrament is to be placed. 

3. On the altar, a burse with another corporal, the mon- 
strance covered with a white veil, and the key of the 
tabernacle.* 

4. On the side-table, a white benediction veil, and the 
book containing the prayers. 

5. In the sacristy, a surplice, white stole, and cope for 
the officiating priest, f 

6. A surplice and white stole, for the priest or deacon 
if there be one, who is to expose the Blessed Sacrament. 

7. If there are sacred ministers, two dalmatics, a stole 
for the deacon, two cinctures, two albs, and two amices. J 

8. A sufficient number of surplices for the clerks that 
are to assist the priest, and for the torch-bearers. 

9. Two, four, or even eight torches, to be carried by as 
many clerks. 

10. The censer, and the incense-boat. § 

Aeticle II. 

CEREMONIES TO BE PERFORMED WHEN THERE IS BUT 

ONE PRIEST. 1 1 

1. The officiating priest having put on his surplice, 

* The cross, unless it be too difficult to remove, the altar-cards, and 
reliquaries should be removed from the altar. [Benedict XIV, ibid., 
n. 17.) 

t According to Merati (Part iv, tit. xii, n. 30), it is commendable 
for the priest to wear an amice, alb, cincture, stole, and cope. 

+ In Rome it is customary, on great feasts, for an ordinary priest 
to be attended by sacred ministers, vested in dalmatics. However, 
in this respect, the Bishop's injunctions should be attended to. 

g When Benediction is given immediately after vespers, the cele- 
brant keeps the same cope and stole which he wore at vespers. Also, 
when the Benediction is given immediately after High Mass, the cele- 
brant keeps the stole he had on, and having taken off the chasuble 
and maniple at his usual seat, he puts on a cope of the color used at 
Mass. If High Mass be celebrated with deacon and sub-deacon, they 
take off their maniples, and assist in their dress at the Benediction of 
the Blessed Sacrament. 

|| It is a praiseworthy custom for the priest, on this occasion, to 
wash his hands, although the Rubrics do not prescribe it. 



1 28 BENEDICTION. 

stole and cope, preceded by the censer-bearer and the 
acolytes carrying the lighted torches, two by two, goes to 
the altar, makes a genuflection, rises, and kneels on the 
lowest step; the acolytes with their torches, forming a line 
at some distance behind the officiating priest, make a genu- 
flection with him, and then kneel in the same place till the 
end of the ceremony.* 

2. The priest rises, goes up to the altar, unfolds the cor- 
poral, and extends it in the middle ; then he opens the 
tabernacle, makes a genuflection on one knee, takes the 
Blessed Sacrament from the tabernacle, f and puts it in the 
monstranccj By this time, if necessary, the censer-bearer, 
unless there is another clerk to attend to it, shall have car- 
ried the stool or steps to the platform of the altar, that the 
priest may reach the place of exposition ; the priest makes 
another genuflection on one knee, and exposes the Blessed 
Sacrament, then he joins his hands, and makes a low bow, 
and another genuflection, having reached the platform ; 
after which, turning to his right, he descends, kneels on 
the lowest step, bows, rises, and turns to his right, to put 
incense in the censer ; the censer-bearer goes to the priest 
with the censer, who puts incense in, without, however, 
blessing it. If there are clerks assisting the priest, they 
rise with him : the one at the right receives the incense- 
boat from the censer-bearer, and presents the spoon to the 
priest ; the other, at the left, supports the border of the 
cope, as the priest puts incense in the censer. 

3. Then the priest kneels on the lowest step, takes the 
censer, and in the usual manner, incenses the Blessed 
Sacrament with three swings,§ bowing before and after. 
During the incensing, the censer-bearer, if there are no as- 
sisting clerks, kneels at the right of the priest, relieving 

* The censer-bearer may kneel in the middle, between the torch- 
bearers. 

f At this time, where such is the custom, the choir commences the 
hymn, Salutaris Hostia ! 

X Should the priest touch the Blessed Sacrament, he ought to purify 
his fingers in the little vase kept for that purpose near the tabernacle, 
and wipe them with the purirlcator. 

\ The Blessed Sacrament is to be incensed " triplici ductu," that is 
with three single swings. 



BEX EDICT rON. 129 

the border of the cope ; then he receives back the censer, 
makes a genuflection, and goes to his place, where he 
kneels. 

4. In the meantime, the choir may sing such hymns and 
antiphons as are approved by the Church,* or by ancient 
usage ; nevertheless, they should be in the Latin language. 
The corresponding versicles and responses may be sung 
also; last of all, the whole hymn, Pange lingua, etc., or the 
two last strophes, Tantum ergo, etc., and Genitori, etc., 
should be sung, and after it, the versicle, Panem de ccelo, 
etc., and the prayer, Deus qui nobis, etc., 

5. During the Tantum ergo, at the words, veneremur cer- 
nui, all make a low bow, without, however, prostrating 
themselves. f 

6. All remain kneeling, unless the Te Deum be sung, 
during which they stand, except at the verse, Te ergo quce- 
sumus, etc., during which verse they kneel ; at the com- 
mencement of Genitori,% the priest, his assistants, and the 
censer-bearer bow, rise, and incense is put in the censer, as 
is said in n. 2, and the Blessed Sacrament is incensed again, 
as before indicated.! 

7. The hymn being finished, the singers, or the cele- 
brant, begin the versicle, Panem de cado, etc. ; the choir 
answers, Omne delectamentum, etc. During Paschal time 
and the Octave of Corpus Christi, Alleluia\\ is added both 
to the versicle and response. After this, the priest rises 
without making a genuflection, and sings, Oremus,^ bowing 
at the same time; then he sings the prayer Deus qui nobis 
sub Sacramento, etc., out of the book, which, in the absence 
of sacred ministers, he holds in his hands. 

He concludes the prayer with these words, Qui vivis et 

* Alex. VII, constit. Pice Solicitudinis. Benedict XIV, consiit. Inter 
omnigenas. Gardell. 

f Such is the practice in Rome and through all Italy, and it seems 
very becoming as an expression of deep sentiment of reverence. 

% Merati, pars ix, tit. xii, 31. Gardell., \ xxxiv, 17. 

\ The officiating priest incenses the Blessed Sacrament only twice, 
as is indicated. Ret. Rom., Cozrem. Epis., and Instruct., Clem. XI, 
n. 2. 

|| Merati, pars iv, tit. xii. Gardell., g xxxiv, 17. 

\ Gardell., xxiv, 22. 



130 BENEDICTION. 

regnas in scecula sceculorum;* neither before nor after this 
prayer Dominus vobiscum is said. 

8. After the prayer, the priest kneels, and, if there is no 
one assisting, the censer-bearer goes to the side-table, takes 
the benediction-veil, and extends it on the priest's shoulders ; 
then, if necessary, he carries the steps to the middle of the 
platform ; then the priest bows, rises, goes to the platform, 
makes a genuflection on one knee, takes down the Blessed 
Sacrament from the throne, places it on the corporal, and 
makes another genuflection. In the meantime the steps are 
removed. 

9. The priest then turns the back of the monstrance to 
his face ; then covering his hands with the extremities of 
the veil, he takes hold of it at the highest part of its foot 
with his right hand, and at the lowest with his left ; then 
he turns to his right on the Epistle side towards the people, 
raises the Sacrament as high as his eyes, brings it down 
lower than his breast, then he raises it in a straight line as 
high as his breast, afterwards brings it to his left shoulder, 
and completes the circle, turning himself to the altar to his 
right, on the Gospel side. At last, he places it on the 
altar, turns its forepart towards his face, and makes a gen- 
flection, f 

10. During Benediction the priest is silent, J but a few 
strokes of the hand-bell may give notice of Benediction 
being given ; also, the censer-bearer may incense the Blessed 
Sacrament with three swings. § The organ may play a 

* Other prayers taken from the Missal may be added, especially the 
collect ordered bv the Ordinary, under the same conclusion. (S. R. 
tt, 7th Sept., 1850.) 

f " Sacerdos, ostensorium manibus tenens, vertit se a parte Epis- 
tolae, ita ut in medio Altaris populum respiciat. Tune illud elevat 
decenti mora, non supra caput, sed tantum usque ad oculos, et eodem 
modo illud dimittit infra pectus ; mox iterum recta illud attollit usque 
ad pectus; et deinde ad sinistrum humerum ducit, et reducit ad dex- 
terum, nee ante pectus reducit, sed continuo se convertit ad cornu 
Evangelii ; perficiens circulum, nee tamen, dum Crucem efformat, 
movens pedes." {Ccer. Epis.) 

% The Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament is to be given in si- 
lence by the celebrant, whether he be a Bishop or a priest, according 
to the Roman Ritual, the Ceremonial of Bishops, and several decisions 
of the Sacred Congregation of Rites, 9th Feb., 1762. 

\ Neither the ringing of the bell, nor the incensing during Bene- 



BENEDICTION. 131 

grave and sweet melody during Benediction, as at the ele- 
vation, during Mass. 

11. The priest having replaced the monstrance on the 
altar, makes a genuflection on one knee, and is in the mean- 
time divested of the benediction-veil; having risen, he 
takes the Blessed Sacrament out of the monstrance, puts it 
in the tabernacle, makes a genuflection, closes the. taberna- 
cle, goes down to the lowest step, makes a genuflection with 
the clerks, and in the same order as he came to the altar, 
returns to the sacristy. 

12. Whilst the Blessed Sacrament is replaced in the 
tabernacle, the psalm, Laudate Dominum omnes gentes, or 
anything suitable for the occasion, may be sung. 

Article III. 

WHEN THE OFFICIATING PRIEST IS ASSISTED BY ANOTHER 
PRIEST, OR BY DEACON AND SUB-DEACON. 

1. If a priest or deacon assist at the Benediction, he 
walks from the sacristy before the officiating priest. He 
carries the stole, not from his neck, but folded on his left 
arm. At the altar, he takes his place at the right of the 
officiating clergyman. After making the genuflection with 
the rest, he puts on the stole,* goes up to the platform, 
unfolds the corporal in the middle of the altar, opens the 
door of the tabernacle, and makes a genuflection on one 
knee. In making a genuflection on the platform, he turns 
his body a little towards the Gospel to avoid turning his 
back to the officiating priest. He exposes the Blessed 
Sacrament in the manner prescribed in Art. II, n. 2. 

2. Having made the genuflection after the exposition, 
he turns to his left, goes down, kneels on the lowest step, 
and takes off' the stole without kissing it. Then, having 

diction is prescribed by the Rubrics, yet, in man}'- well -regulated 
churches in Europe, the custom prevails of doing either or both. In 
some places even, the large church bell announces to the people that, 
at that moment, God, in His mercy, blesses them. 

* If a deacon assists, he should put on the stole, suspending it from 
his left shoulder to his right side, under his arm. 



132 BENEDICTION. 

bowed with the officiating priest, he rises, moves a little 
backward so as to allow the censer-bearer to pass at his 
right in going to the officiating priest with the censer. 
He receives the incense-boat, and presents the spoon to the 
officiating priest without kisses. Incense having been put 
in the censer, the assisting priest receives back the spoon, 
returns the boat to the censer-bearer, and from him he 
receives the censer, which he presents to the officiating 
priest in the usual manner, but without kisses. He bows 
with the officiating priest, and holds up the border of the 
cope during the incensing. He bows again with him, takes 
the censer, and returns it to the censer-bearer. 

3. At the Genitori, he bows, and rises with the officiat- 
ing priest for the incense, in which he proceeds as before. 

4. After the prayer, Deus qui nobis sub Sacramento, etc., 
he puts on the stole, goes up to the altar, and, with the 
usual genuflections, he takes the monstrance, places it on 
the corporal, extended in the middle of the altar, and makes 
another genuflection. In the meantime, the benediction- 
veil is extended on the shoulders of the officiating priest 
by a clerk, or by the censer-bearer. He rises when the 
celebrant arrives at the predella, hands to him the osten- 
sorium, and assists in adjusting the humeral veil. 

5. During the Benediction he kneels on the predella,* and 
removes the stole. After Benediction he puts on the stole, 
rises, and takes the ostensorium from the celebrant, places 
it upon the altar, and genuflects. Having risen, be takes 
the Blessed Sacrament out of the monstrance, and puts it 
in the tabernacle. Then he makes another genuflection, 
closes the door of the tabernacle, folds the corporal, places 
it in the burse, and, having gone down to his place, he 
takes off the stole and kisses it. Then, having given the 
cap to the officiating priest, he makes with him a genuflec- 
tion on the floor, and all return to the sacristy. 

* If it is not the custom for the assisting priest to give the mon- 
strance into the hands of the celebrant, this need not be done. The 
Form of Exposition and Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament for the 
Archdiocese of Baltimore does not prescribe; it ; hence it is optional 
with the pastors of churches to observe what we have, given above, 
or adhere to their Diocesan regulations or customs if opposed to it. 
The custom in Rome is the one we have given. 



BENEDICTION. 133 

6. Should there be a deacon and sub-deacon dressed in 
dalmatics, as they go from the sacristy to the altar, and 
from the altar to the sacristy, the deacon at the right, and 
the sub-deacon at the left of the officiating priest, they 
hold up the borders of the cope. The deacon makes the 
exposition of the Blessed Sacrament, and replaces it in the 
tabernacle, unless there is another priest for that purpose. 
They assist the officiating priest to put incense in the 
censer, instead of the above-named priest. They hold the 
book before him while he sings the prayers, but they do 
so kneeling. The sub-deacon should ascend with the cele- 
brant, and remain kneeling on the predella. The deacon 
(if there be no assisting priest) should assist as in No. 4. 

Article IV. 

WHEN THE BISHOP GIVES BENEDICTION. 

1. Besides the preparations mentioned in Art. I, the 
following things are to be prepared: The cope, stole, pec- 
toral cross, cincture, alb, amice, mitre, and, if the Bishop 
is in his diocese, the crosier.* Also, the hand-candlestick 
with a candle in. (These articles are prepared instead of 
the vestments for the priest.) On the lowest step of the 
altar a cushion. 

2. The same ceremonies are observed as when a priest 
gives Benediction, with the following particulars : The 
Bishop, having put on the amice, alb, cincture, pectoral, 
cross, stole, cope, and mitre, takes the crosier, if he be in 
his diocese, to the sanctuary, preceded by the censer-bearer, 
torch-bearers, master of ceremonies, deacon and sub-deacon 
dressed with dalmatics, holding up the borders of the cope. 
Then follow the crosier-bearer and mitre-bearer. 

3. On arriving at the foot of the altar, the Bishop gives 
the crosier to the sub-deacon, and the mitre is taken off by 
the deacon, then he makes a genuflection on the floor, f 
for which purpose the master of ceremonies will put the 

* Should the Bishop wash his hands, the pitcher, basin with water, 
and a towel, are prepared. 

f Coere?n. Episc, lib. i, eh. xv, and S R. C, 12th Nov., 1831. 



134 BENEDICTION. 

cushion, and replace it on the lowest step, on which the 
Bishop kneels. 

4. The Benediction veil having been put on the Bishop's 
shoulder, he bows profoundly, rises, with the deacon and 
sub-deacon, and with them ascends the steps, while they 
raise his alb in front. Then he kneels with the sub-deacon 
at his left, on the edge of the platform, where the master 
of ceremonies has previously put the cushion. Meanwhile 
the deacon, having made a genuflection on the platform, 
takes the monstrance, keeping the forepart of it towards 
himself, and standing, gives the Blessed Sacrament into 
the hands of the Bishop, who then rises, and, without say- 
ing anything, blesses the people with three signs of the 
cross,* i. e., the lirst on the Epistle side, the next in the 
middle of the altar, and the third on the Gospel side. 

During the Benediction, the deacon and sub-deacon, 
kneeling on the edge of the platform, raise the cope on 
each side. While standing, the Bishop gives the mon- 
strance to the deacon or priest kneeling at his right, and, 
the veil being taken from his shoulders, kneels on the 
cushion on the lowest step.f 

5. The deacon or the priest, having placed the mon- 
strance on the corporal, takes the Blessed Sacrament out of 
it, and places it in the tabernacle, with the usual genu- 
flections. 

6. After this, the Bishop takes his mitre and crosier, if 
he use it, makes a genuflection on the floor,J and returns 
to the sacristy. 

If there be no sacred ministers to assist the Bishop at the 
Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament, he will conform 
to the directions found in Art. I for the Benediction given 
by a priest in a similar case; however, in blessing the 
people, he will make three signs of the cross, as explained 
above, n. 4. 



* Ccerem. Episc., lib. ii, ch. xxxiii. 

f lb., Grardellini, sec. xxxi, 12. 

t lb., lib. i, ch. xv, S. R. C, 12th Nov., 1831. 



PART III. 



Ceremonies of pgh Jftass. 



CHAPTER I. 

RULES TO BE OBSERVED BY THE CLERGY IN CHOIR. 

Article I. 

The Order of going to the Choir. 

1. The clergy, dressed in their cassocks and surplices,* 
go out of the sacristy, two by two, so close together that 
the right shoulder of the one may almost touch the left 
shoulder of the other; and they proceed gravely, with 
regular step, holding their caps with both bands below their 
breasts, each pair keeping at equal distance from the other. 

2. When they arrive at the altar, they make a genu- 
flection to the cross, both taking care to make it at the 
same time, and to rise slowly, and with gravity ; in this, 
the uniformity and decorum of the ceremonies consist. 
Each pair make their genuflection in the same place that the 
first made theirs; it will, therefore, be necessary that those 

* It is difficult to give any precise rule regarding the size and 
shape of the surplice. It would, however, seem more fitting that lace 
surplices should not be used except by Prelates. The surplice might 
very properly have a narrow edging of lace. 



136 HIGH MASS. 

who are behind should advance slowly, so as to allow those 
before them time to make the genuflection with decorum. 
After the genuflection, they turn and salute each other, and 
then proceed to their place,* one on one side of the choir, 
the other on the other, and remain standing. 

Article II. 
The Order to be observed in Choir. 

1. There are three different postures to be observed in 
choir, viz., to stand, sit, or kneel. When it is time to 
stand, all must stand, and no one must sit down or kneel ; 
so all must be uniform, when it is time to sit or kneel. 

The clergy should remember not to kneel down during 
the elevation at Low Masses that may be celebrated whilst 
they are in the choir. (Sac. Con. Bit, 5th Mart.', 1667.) 
And they should conform to the directions of the master 
of ceremonies, in whatever regards divine worship. (Sac. 
Con. RiL, 4th June, 1817.) 

2. During high mass, the clergy remain standing, from 
the end of the confession, until the celebrant has said the 
Kyrie eleison, whilst he is singing the Gloria in excelsis, 
and until he is seated after reciting it ; whilst he is singing 
the prayers ; whilst the deacon is singing the Gospel ; 
whilst the celebrant is singing the Dominus vobiscum, and 
the Oreraus, at the Offertory; during the incensing of the 
choir ; during the preface, until the Sanctus, is recited ; 

* There should be no chairs in the sanctuary, except that of the 
Bishop, or some very distinguished personage. Priests, even Canons, 
and others belonging to the clergy, should sit on benches. These 
should be neatly made, with high backs, especially when attached to 
the walls. The bench for the celebrant should be near the altar on 
the Epistle side, and should be sufficiently large to accommodate the 
celebrant, deacon, and sub-deacon. It may be richly ornamented with 
carved work, but should never look like a throne. 

" Sacerdos, Diaconus, et Subdiaconus, celebrantes solemnitcr, pos- 
sunt et debent sedere in banco, dum canitur Gloria, Credo, etc. ; non 
obstante qualibet consuetudine." (S. R C, loth J.sn., 1611.) 

41 Canonici Missam celebrantes coram Episcopo, non debent sedere 
insedecum poster^iM, sed in aliquo scamno oblongo, tapete, velpanno 
coopcrto in latere^Epistolaj." (S. R. C , 19th Maji, 1614.) 



RULES FOR THE CHOIR. 137 

after the elevation, until after communion ; at the prayer, 
after communion, until the end of Mass. 

3. The clergy kneel from the beginning of Mass until 
the end of the confession ; whilst the deacon sings the 
Flectamus genua, rising again when the sub-deacon sings 
Levate; whilst the sub-deacon sings in the Epistle, In 
nomine Jesu omne genu flectatur, etc., to the word infer- 
norum, inclusively ; in time of Lent, at the verse, Adjuva 
nos; at Pentecost, at the verse, Veni Sanete Spiritus ; at 
the Verbum caro factum est, and at the Incarnatus est of the 
Credo in the Masses of Christmas and of the Annunciation 
of the Blessed Virgin ; from the Sandus, till after the con- 
secration ; at the communion of the clergy, after the cele- 
brant has said Indulgentiam ; in the ferial Masses of Ad- 
vent, Lent, ember days and vigils, which are fast days ; 
and in masses for the dead, at the prayers, at the Sandus, 
till the Pax Domini, inclusive; at the Post Communio, 
except the vigils of Easter, Pentecost, Christmas, and the 
ember days of Pentecost. (Pub. Miss., part 1.) The clergy 
remain seated with their caps on, at all times when it is 
not prescribed above for them to stand or kneel unless the 
Blessed Sacrament be exposed. 

4. The clergy take off their caps whenever they stand 
up ; when they are saluted by the officiating clergy, or by 
others, who come to and from the choir, to return the salu- 
tation ; whenever they have to bow their heads. In the 
above cases, it is understood that the cap only should be 
taken off. Should any wear the calotte,* it is taken off 
also when a genuflection is made ; when the deacon sings 
the Gospel ; at the Incarnatus est; when the choir is in- 
censed ; at the consecration ; in giving and receiving the 
Pax; at the communion of the clergy ; when the celebrant 
gives the blessing. 

5. They bow the head during Mass at the following 
times : at the Gloria Patri, till the Sicut erat exclusively; 
whilst it is sung by the choir ; when the name of Jesus or 
Mary, or of the saint whose office is recited, or of whom a 

* This is a small cap, used for covering the crown of the head, 
where the clerical tonsure is made. 

12 



138 HIGH MASS. 

commemoration is made, is pronounced ; and at the name 
of the Pope; during the Gloria in excelsis ; at the words, 
Adoramus te, Gratias agimus tibi, Jesu Christe, Suscipe de- 
precationem nostram; during the Credo, at the words, 
Jeswm Christum; Et incarnatus est, etc.; adoratur ; in time 
of the preface, at Gratias agamus Domino Deo Nostro. 

6. During the time of singing, all should sing in a uni- 
form manner, not elevating or lowering the voice more 
than the rest, and if any be unable to keep tune, it is better 
to be silent. They should also be attentive not to be faster, 
or slower than the others, but all should utter at the same 
time, the same syllable and note, and each one should be 
attentive not to get out of tune. 

7. When the sub-deacon goes to give the Pax, the first 
of the choir should, on his approach, bow to him, and lean 
his head towards his left cheek, placing at the same time 
his hands under his elbows, and the sub-deacon, laying his 
hands on the shoulders of the others, says, Pax tecum ; to 
which he answers, Et cum spiritu tuo, and again bows to 
the sub-deacon, then turning to the one next, he gives the 
Pax in the same way that the sub-deacon gave it to him, 
and so on, each one to the one next to him. 

8. The clergy in choir should always observe silence, 
with modesty and recollection, shunning anything that 
might have an air of levity or irreverence. 



Article III. 

The Internal Dispositions required of those who attend the 

Choir. 

1. A right intention to worship God purely for his glory, 
and not for interest or vanity. 

2. Reflection on what is to be done, in order that no 
mistakes may be made, which are the cause of many de- 
fects. This preparation should be made before going to 
the choir, by reading the instructions for the ceremonies, 
and impressing them upon the mind by serious recollec- 
tion, and, even in time -of choir, at leisure moments, by 
reflecting on what ceremony comes next, and how it is to 



RULES FOR THE CHOIR. 189 

be performed. Thus nothing will be unforeseen, and all 
will be done well. 

3. Attention to what is doing; not giving way to thoughts, 
even if good in themselves, foreign to the present occupa- 
tion, as such thoughts do not come from God, but proceed 
from some evil cause, to divert us from the good we are 
doing. The presence of God will aid us to have proper 
attention, that we may apply our mind to what is done, or 
said, attending to. the signification ; exciting; sentiments 
corresponding to those, which the words express, as St. 
Augustin beautifully recommends in his commentary on 
the tenth Psalm: SI orat psalmus, orate; et si gemit, 
gem He ; et si timit, timete ; omnia enim quo3 hie conscripta 
sunt, speculum nostrum sunt. What St. Augustin recom- 
mends in singing the Psalms, we should do in regard to 
whatever is recited or sung in Mass, or any other sacred 
function. 

4. Devotion is required, making us delight in those 
sacred duties, lest we be as those who perform them reluc- 
tantly and with tepidity, to whom that sentence is applica- 
ble : Maledictus homo, qui facit opus Dei fraudulenter . 

Article IV. 

The Order to be observed in receiving Holy Communion. 

1. After all have received the Pax, all who go to com- 
munion meet together in the middle, two by two, with 
their caps and calotte off, with their hands joined, bowing 
at the Confiteor, and striking their breast, etc. The offici- 
ating clergy, who assist at Mass, communicate first ; as also 
the priests (if any wish to communicate), with their stoles 
of the color of the day. Whilst the acolytes, after their 
communion, are descending the side-steps on each side, the 
two first of the clergy, who are yet to communicate, ap- 
proach, making their usual genuflection, on the floor, be- 
fore they ascend the steps, and after descending, they sepa- 
rate in coming down the steps, so as to leave space for the 
two who follow them to communicate ; and so on, through- 
out. All kneel on the edge of the platform to receive 



140 HIGH MASS. 

communion ; and, afterwards, with gravity and devotion, 
return to their places in the choir, and conform themselves 
to the rest of the clergy. If any of the laity communicate, 
they do it at the railings of the choir, or on the floor, at 
the foot of the altar ; and the celebrant descends to the 
lowest step to give them Communion, beginning always at 
the Epistle side. 

2. The same order is likewise observed in going to re- 
ceive candles from the celebrant, ashes, or blessed palms, 
or in going to kiss sacred relics, and in similar ceremonies; 
each one holding in his hand his cap and calotte, and kiss- 
ing first the candle, or blessed palm, and then the celebrant's 
hand. 

Article V. 
The Order in going from the Choir. 

1. No one should leave the choir without necessity ; in 
which case, he goes to the middle, makes a genuflection, 
salutes the choir, first on the Gospel side, then at the Epis- 
tle side. If the celebrant is sitting at the Epistle side, he 
should bow first to that side, then to the other. The same 
is done when any one enters the choir after the functions 
have commenced ; he should, however, remain some time 
kneeling, saying some prayers, then make a genuflection, 
and bow to the choir, as mentioned above. No one should 
go out of the choir or enter it, whilst the celebrant is re- 
citing the Confession, during the singing of the prayers, the 
Gloria Patri, Incarnatus est, Veni Sancte Spiritus, Adjuva 
nos, etc. Should any one enter the choir at these times, he 
must stop, and kneel, or stand, conforming himself to the 
rest of the choir ; during the Confession, at the beginning 
of Mass, he must remain kneeling till it is finished. 

2. After the service, the acolytes go out of the Sanctuary, 
and after them the members of the choir ; those who are 
last on the Gospel side, and the last on the Epistle side, 
advance in a straight line, and meet together in the middle, 
make a genuflection, and turning, follow the acolytes; the 
others do the same, and proceed to the sacristy, in the same 
order as they left it. When they arrive at the sacristy, 



INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OFFICERS. 141 

they separate ; one going on one side, and the other on the 
other, forming two lines: when the celebrant arrives, he 
bow T s to them, and they return a similar bow, and then 
with modesty, gravity, and in silence, unvest. 



CHAPTER II. 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OFFICERS. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

At the Altar. 

1. The altar should be decorated according to the so- 
lemnity of the festival. 

2. Six candlesticks with candles, and the cross with, 
image of the Crucified, in the middle, prominently located. 

3. Relic-cases, with relics, or flowers, between the candle- 
sticks. 

4. The Antipendium and the canopy of the Tabernacle 
of the color of the vestments. 

5. The altar-cords. 

6. The book-stand, with the missal opened at the proper 
place. 

On the Side- Table. 

1. The table is to be covered with a linen cloth. 

2. A plate with the cruets containing wine and water, 
the finger-towel, and the hand-bell. 

3. The chalice with the purificator, paten, Host, pall, 
covered with the chalice-veil, on which is placed the burse 
having in it the corporal. 

4. The Book for Epistle and Gospel, or missal, with 
marks in the right place. 

5. The veil for the sub-deacon should cover the chalice, 
and hang down on each side of the side-table. 



142 HIGH MASS. 



In the Sanctuary. 

1. A carpet on the steps and platform of the altar. 

2. A carpet on the platform of the celebrant's bench. 

3. The celebrant's bench may be covered with a green 
cloth. (Merati.) 

In the Sacristy. 

1. On the sacristy altar the sacred vestments for the 
celebrant : viz., chasuble, stole, maniple, alb, cincture, and 
amice. 

2. On one side of the chasuble the dalmatics for the 
deacon and sub-deacon, the stole for the deacon, two cinc- 
tures, two albs, and two amices. The two maniples should 
be placed outside the dalmatics, as they are to be put on 
after the celebrant has put on the chasuble. 

3. In a convenient place, the surplices for the master of 
ceremonies and for the three clerks; also as many surplices 
as there are clergymen to assist. 

4. Two candlesticks with candles, for the acolytes. 

5. The censer and the incense-boat. 

6. The fire ready for the censer. 

7. A number of torches for the elevation, if they are to 
be used. 

Article II. 
Instruction for the Censer-Bearer. 

1. The censer-bearer goes to the sacristy a quarter of an 
hour before Mass, puts on his surplice, and, if no acolytes 
be present, assists the deacon and sub-deacon to vest.* 

2. In the beginning of Mass, he prepares the fire in the 
censer; and, at the end of the Confession, he approaches the 
altar, and goes up to the platform, hands the incense-boat 

* Should the clergy proceed to the altar in solemn procession, pre- 
ceded by the cross, the censer-bearer will have incense blessed by the 
celebrant (or by the Bishop if present) before leaving the sacristy ; 
and then, with smoking censer, will walk immediately before the 
cross-bearer. (Cceretn. Epis., lib. ii, ch. viii.) 



CENSER-BEARER. 143 

to the master of ceremonies, and when the incense is put in, 
and blessed, he adjusts the cover of the censer, and hands 
it to the deacon ; he takes the boat in his left hand, and 
goes down holding his right hand on his breast.* 

3. He stands near the deacon, whilst he is incensing the 
celebrant, and bows to the priest both before and after ; 
then takes the censer in his right hand (he should make a 
genuflection, if he is obliged to pass before the altar, to put 
away the censer, and the Blessed Sacrament is present), 
puts it in its proper place, and returns to the choir, or 
waits in the sacristy. 

* As. the censer-bearer moves either alone or with the clergy, he 
carries the censer in his right hand, holding it at the top just under 
the chain-holder, having previously pulled the cover chain sufficiently 
high that the tire may burn. Unless there is another clerk for the 
incense-boat, he carries it in his left hand, otherwise he keeps his left 
hand extended on his breast, as he moves along modestly and gravely. 
Should there be two censer-bearers, the one at the left carries the 
censer in his left hand. In making a genuflection, while holding the 
censer, he will so raise his hand that the censer will not touch the 
floor. When his hands are not employed, they should be joined. 
When incense is to be put in the censer, with his left hand he will 
present the boat to whom he should; then, with the same hand, he 
takes from his right the top of the censer's chains, and brings it to 
his breast, and with his right he takes the censer's chains near the top 
of the cover, and raises the censer sufficiently high that he who is to 
put incense in it may easil} T do so. After the blessing, if a blessing 
is to be given, he lowers the censer, and takes it in his right hand at 
the top. When the censer-bearer puts incense in it, he will hold the 
chains at the top, and also near the cover with his left hand, and with 
his right will put in incense. If he presents the censer to one of the 
ministers who is to give it to some one else, he will present it with 
his right hand. If to the officiating priest, or to a minister who is to 
incense, he will present the top with his right hand, and the middle 
of the chains near the cover with his left. If ^;o the celebrant or 
officiating priest, and the Rubrics require it, he will kiss first the top 
of the chain, and then the right hand of the receiver. When he re- 
ceives back the censer, he does so with his right hand. To incense in 
a proper manner, having lowered the cover of the censer, he takes 
the top of the chains in his left hand, and brings it to his breast ; with 
the fingers of his right hand he takes the chains close to the cover, 
and brings it as high as his eyes ; then he lowers it, and stretches his 
arm, while he raises it again towards the one whom he is incensing, 
causing the censer to swing forward, and then lowers it again towards 
himself. He will repeat the same as often as he is to give throws, or 
swings. He bows before and after incensing. This manner of in- 
censing is the same practiced in Rome and in Italy, in well-regulated 
churches. 



144 HIGH MASS. 

4. When all the prayers are sung, he goes to prepare the 
censer; and, as soon as the priest has finished the Gospel 
(unless there be a long tract), he goes to the altar, to have 
incense put in and blessed ; then, holding the censer in his 
right* hand, and the boat in his left, he descends to the floor, 
and goes before the acolytes, in the middle of the choir, 
before the altar, at some distance from the steps, and stands 
between the acolytes. If there be a second master of cere- 
monies the thurifer stands on his left, in front of the acolytes. 
When the master of ceremonies gives the sign, he makes a 
genuflection, then bows to the choir, together with the 
officiating ministers ; passes the first acolyte, and goes on 
the left of the deacon, a little in the rear, so that he may 
be opposite the first acolyte. 

5. At the proper time he gives the censer to the master 
of ceremonies, and takes it again in the same manner ; he 
raises the lid of it a little, and swings it, in order to keep 
the coals alive, having to use it to incense the priest. 

6. At the end of the Gospel, he approaches the deacon, 
and presents him the censer, making with him the usual 
bows before incensing the celebrant and after. He then 
goes before the altar, makes a genuflection behind the 
sub-deacon, and remains there while the celebrant intones 
the Credo , if it is to be said, bowing at the word Deum; 
if the Credo is not said, after receiving the thurible from 
the deacon he goes at once to the sacristy. 

7. Towards the end of the Credo, he goes to prepare the 
censer, and is ready at the altar after the oblation of the 
chalice. The incense is put in as usual ; he takes the in- 
cense-boat and places it upon the credence-table, and re- 
mains there at the Epistle side, with his hands joined before 
the breast. He attends the deacon whilst he is incensing 
the celebrant, the choir and sub-deacon ; and he stands at 
his left hand, a little in the rear, making the bows and 
genuflections at the same time with him. He receives the 
censer from the deacon, and when he arrives at his place 
behind the celebrant, incenses him twice; then he incenses 
the master of ceremonies, and the acolytes once each ; he goes 
then to the entrance of the choir, and incenses the people 
thrice, once in the middle, then on the left, and last on 



CENSER-BEARER. 145 

the right, making the usual bows both before and after, 
and the genuflections to the altar, passing and repassing. 
He then goes to the credence-table, takes the incense-boat, 
and places himself just behind the sub-deacon, when he 
awaits the torch-bearers, with whom he goes to the sacristy, 
having saluted the choir as usual. 

8. He again returns with the torch-bearers, and genu- 
flecting with them, not omitting the usual bows to the 
choir, he approaches the altar at the Epistle side, to the 
right of the master of ceremonies, to have the incense put 
into the censer ; when that is done, he kneels on the floor, 
and, at the elevation of the sacred Host, incenses it three 
times, making a low bow, both before and after. He does 
the same at the elevation of the chalice. (Rub. Ifiss., 
part ii.) After this, he goes to the middle, genuflects with 
the torch-bearers, and goes, without saluting the choir, to 
the sacristy. 

9. Here his duty ends, but he receives the Pax from the 
master of ceremonies, and gives it to the first acolyte. 

10. After receiving the Pax from the master of cere- 
monies, he takes the chalice- veil to the Gospel side, pre- 
sents at the proper time the cruets for the ablutions, and 
returns to his place, after putting everything on the table. 

11. After the Pax, if the clergy communicate, he takes 
the veil of the chalice, and communion cloth, passes to the 
Gospel side, and kneels on the fluor. After the " Indul- 
gentiam," he kneels on the lateral edge of the platform, to 
extend and hold the cloth with the master of ceremonies. 
After communion, he goes down, makes a genuflection 
with the master of ceremonies, and proceeds to the side- 
table, to present the cruets, provided the acolytes do not 
attend to this duty. 

The censer-bearer makes a genuflection on one knee, 
when he goes from the choir, or returns to it ; when he 
leaves or approaches the altar, after the consecration only, 
not before it ; in passing from one side of the altar to the 
other. 

When the incense is not blessed, the censer is held in 
the left hand ; otherwise in the right, and the boat in the 
left. When it is carried for any particular function, viz., 

13 



146 HIGH MASS. 

when the Gospel is sung, or in processions, the censer- 
bearer puts his little finger in the ring of the small cover, 
and the thumb through that of the large cover. On other 
occasions — for instance, when he goes to have incense put 
into it, etc. — it is usual to hold it by the chains below the 
small cover, with the large cover a little raised, except in 
the act of incensing. 



Article III. 

Instruction for the Acolytes. 

1. The acolytes, who should be of equal size (Ccerem. 
JEpisc, lib. i), put on their surplices a quarter of an hour 
before Mass, and prepare, and take to the altar whatever 
is necessary; they assist the deacon and sub-deacon in 
vesting, after they have lighted the candles on the altar 
(unless some other person do this), one on one side, the 
other on the other; beginning from the candle nearest to 
the cross; and in putting them out, they begin with the 
furthest. If there be only one to light them, he will begin 
on the Epistle side, and end with those on the Gospel side; 
and vice versa, in extinguishing them. 

They must take care not to let the wax fall upon the 
altar-cloth. 

2. The second acolyte lights the candles in the sacristy. 

3. When the celebrant is vested, they put the maniples 
on the deacon and sub-deacon, presenting them first to be 
kissed. 

4. At a signal given by the master of ceremonies, they 
take their candles, and, meeting together, make a bow to 
the cross, or to the chief picture in the sacristy, then with 
their eyes modestly cast down, with a moderate pace, they 
go before the clergy to the altar. (Rub. 31iss., part ii.) 

5. The first acolyte, at the right of his companion, holds 
the knob of the candlestick with his right hand, and the 
foot with his left; the second with his left holds the knob, 
and the foot with his right. (Ccerem. Episc, ib.) 

6. When they arrive at the altar, they make a genuflec- 



ACOLYTES. 147 

tion on the floor ; they then separate, and go to the corners 
of the steps, and stand facing each other. 

7. When the sacred ministers have arrived, they turn 
towards the altar, make with them a genuflection, and 
then go to place their candles on the table. (Rub., ib.) 
Turning towards the altar, they kneel down, with their 
hands joined, and answer in a low voice to the priest ; at 
the end of the Confession they rise, and stand near the 
table. 

Whenever the sacred ministers go to sit dow r n, the aco- 
lytes raise the dalmatic and chasuble over the back of the 
seat, so that they may not sit upon them ; this, however, 
depends upon its situation ; should it be necessary to pass 
before the celebrant, they bow to him. If the celebrant 
makes a genuflection during the Epistle or Gospel, they do 
the same ; and they make the usual signs of the cross at 
the Sequentia Sancti Evangelii. 

If the deacon and sub-deacon use the folded chasuble, 
the second acolyte, during the singing of the prayer, takes 
off the sub-deacon's chasuble, and puts it on again, after he 
has kissed the celebrant's hand. In like manner he takes 
off that of the deacon, while the priest is reading the Gos- 
pel ; the first acolyte puts on him the large stole, and takes 
it off after removing the book for the Post Communio ; and 
then the second acolyte puts on him the folded chasuble. 

8. Whilst the celebrant is putting incense into the censer 
for the Gospel, they take their candlesticks, and the censer- 
bearer having descended from the altar, they follow him to 
the middle of the choir; he then goes between them (if 
there is no second master of ceremonies), they make a genu- 
flection to the altar, and salute the choir, together with the 
sacred ministers. In these, and in similar actions, uni- 
formity as to manner and time is requisite, that they may 
appear as one person moving and bowing. Then they go 
to the place where the Gospel is to be sung. 

9. When the sub-deacon arrives at the place where the 
Gospel is usually sung (Rub. Miss., part ii), the first acolyte 
places himself at his right, and the second at his left, in a 
straight line, facing the left part of the choir. During this 



148 HIGH MASS. 

time, they never kneel down (Rub. 3Iiss., part i), neither 
do they make the sign of the cross, but remain motionless. 

10. At the end of the Gospel, they go to the middle of 
the choir, three or four steps from the lowest front step of 
the altar, according as the space will allow, and make there 
a genuflection, and then return to the side-table. Having 
placed the candlesticks there, they remain standing, and 
kneel at the Incarnatus, on one knee, when it is repeated 
by the priest ; and on both, when it is sung. 

11. When the sub-deacon takes the chalice, the second 
acolyte folds the veil; the first follows the sub-deacon with 
the cruets and towel (Rub. 3Iiss., part ii), places all upon 
the altar, and presents the cruets to the sub-deacon. When 
the wine and water are put into the chalice, he takes them 
back, and remains standing at his place. 

12. Whilst the deacon is incensing the celebrant, they 
prepare the water to wash his hands. The first acolyte 
takes the towel ; the other the cruet and basin. When the 
deacon has done incensing, they attend to the washing of 
the celebrant's hands (Rub., ibid.), bowing to him both 
before and after. They then put everything on the side- 
table, and remain there standing. 

13. They bow to the censer-bearer both before and after 
being incensed; and the first acolyte bows to his companion 
before being incensed. 

14. At the commencement of the Preface, they go to the 
sacristy to light the torches, and return at the Sancfus 
(Rub., ib., tit. vii); and both enter together in the middle 
of the choir before the altar; they make a genuflection, 
then bow to the choir, and to each other, and kneel at some 
distance apart, in a straight line. 

15. After the elevation, if there be no one to go to com- 
munion (Rub.), and it is not a privileged feast, according to 
the Rubrics, they meet together, make a genuflection, then 
bow to the choir, and take away the torches. Otherwise, 
they remain with the torches, kneeling until after com- 
munion. (Rub., ib.) 

16. The first acolyte takes the veil off of the sub-deacon 
at the proper time, and folds it, and lays it on the table. 
They bow when the celebrant is communicating. 



ACOLYTES. 149 

17. The first acolyte takes the cruets to the altar at the 
proper time for the ablutions; and, in the meantime, the 
second takes the veil of the chalice to the other side of the 
altar, making a genuflection in passing and repassing. If 
they hold the torches till after communion, the censer-bearer 
supplies their place. 

18. During the blessing, at the end of Mass they kneel 
down on both knees ; at the beginning of the Gospel, they 
rise and make the sign of the cross on themselves, as usual, 
at the Initium Saneti Evangelii. 

If the clergy remain in choir after the Gospel, the aco- 
lytes take the candles, go together to the middle, make a 
genuflection, and, with the sacred ministers, bow to the 
choir. 

19. Towards the end of the Gospel, they take the candle- 
sticks and go to the middle ; they make a genuflection at 
the words, Et verbum caro, or at the end of any other Gos- 
pel, and move towards the sacristy; there they bow to the 
cross, and with the candlesticks in their hands wait until 
the sacred ministers arrive, and then make a bow together. 
They put out their candles afterwards, and assist the deacon 
and sub-deacon in unvesting, and then go to put out the 
candles on the altar, unless some other person do it. 

The acolytes remain always standing by the side-table, 
except when they are engaged, as on the occasions men- 
tioned above. Whilst the celebrant is singing, or reading, 
they keep their hands joined before their breast; at other 
times they keep them folded. In the choir the bow is 
generally made, first on the Gospel side, then on the Epis- 
tle side, beginning always with the greater dignitary. In 
holding the torches, or carrying them, they should hold 
them always as follows : the first acolyte being always on 
the right hand of the other, holds the torch in his right 
hand, and his companion holds his torch in his left. When 
one hand only is occupied, the other is held open upon his 
breast. When they present anything to the celebrant, they 
kiss it before they present it ; and also when they receive 
it from him (except in Masses for the dead). If they pass 
before the altar in going for the torches, they make a genu- 
flection. Should they communicate in time of Mass, after 



150 HIGH MASS. 

the deacon and sub-deacon, and the priests, if any commu- 
nicate, they make a genuflection on one knee, before and 
after communion. During their communion, they hand 
their torches to others. 

Aeticle IV. 

Duty of the Master of Ceremonies. 

1. The Master of Ceremonies should be acquainted with 
the duties of all the clergy, and be attentive to their per- 
formance, making signs to them, but not pulling or pushing 
them ; and in case some mistake be not of much importance, 
it is better to let it pass. 

2. He should go to the sacristy, a quarter of an hour be- 
forehand, and after a short prayer, put on his surplice, and 
prepare the chalice, together with the pyx (in case the 
clergy communicate) and put in as many particles as there 
are persons to communicate. He prepares two Missals 
with the marks at their proper places, and takes all to the 
side-table, which should be covered with a white cloth — 
Rub. Hiss., part ii — and there, aided by the acolytes, he 
arranges everything: he should see that the cruets are there 
prepared, together with the towel, the bell, the censer with 
the incense-boat, the torches for the elevation, etc. He 
leaves one Missal on the table ; the other he places on the 
book-stand at the Epistle side ; he opens it at the Mass of 
the day, and covers the table with a veil of the same color 
as the vestments which are to be used. 

3. He gives notice in time to the clergy that are to offi- 
ciate, and with the acolytes assists them in vesting. He 
does not present the maniple to the deacon and sub-deacon, 
nor the folded chasuble, when they are used, until the cele- 
brant is vested. 

4. When it is time, he gives notice to the acolytes to 
move towards the sanctuary ; when the clergy have passed 
on, he makes a sign to the officiating clergy to proceed ; they 
bow to the cross, and he precedes them, without cither cap, 
or calotte, on his head ; which is to be observed in all other 



MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 151 

functions. (Cong. Bit, 17th Jul., 1734.) He gives holy 
water to the sub-deacon and deacon. 

5. If there be any steps to ascend in going to the altar, 
the master of ceremonies raises the border of the celebrant's 
alb. When the officiating clergy enter the choir, or arrive 
at the altar, he receives the caps from the deacon and sub- 
deacon, and after the genuflection, places them in order on 
the bench where they are to sit. He then kneels down at 
the Epistle side, with his face turned to the Gospel side, 
and answers the celebrant in a low voice, making the usual 
signs of the cross, and bows. 

6. At the end of the Confession, he goes up to the altar 
with the ministers, to have the incense put in ; and comes 
down again to the Epistle side. When the celebrant is in- 
censing that side, he takes off the Missal, and afterwards 
replaces it, without making any genuflection. 

7. If in time, after the incensing of the altar and the 
celebrant, lie points out the beginning of the Introit, as he 
should do, whenever he attends to the book, raising or 
lowering it as may be necessary, and pointing out what is 
to be read or sung, turning the leaves, etc. 

8. When the celebrant has said the Kyrie eleison, if the 
singing is to continue for any length of time, the master of 
ceremonies makes him go and sit down on the bench 
(Ccerem.. Kpisc, lib. i), as is expressly ordered by the Sac. 
Cong. Hit. 17th Sept., 1822. He descends to the floor, and 
with his hands modestly folded before his breast, stands at 
the right hand of the deacon ; he should observe the same 
at the Gloria and Credo, whilst the clergy are sitting. 

9. When the choir is singing the last Kyrie, he makes a 
moderate bow, to invite the ministers to the altar, and he 
goes to the Epistle side. When the ministers do not sit, 
during the singing of the Kyrie, he gives them notice to go 
to the middle of the altar, and to stand in a line, one after 
the other ; when the Gloria in exeelsis Deo is intoned, he 
directs them to go on each side of the celebrant to recite it 
with him. 

10. When they have said the Gloria in exeelsis, he gives 
them notice to sit down ; but not whilst the choir is sing- 
ing, Adoramus te, Gratias agimus tibi, When they are 



152 HIGH MASS. 

seated, by a moderate bow, he gives them notice to take 
off their caps, whilst the choir is singing the above men- 
tioned words, Adoramus te,gratias agimus Tibi; Jesu, etc., 
Suscipe, etc., during which time he bows to the altar. 

11. At the Cum Sancto Spiritu, he makes them a sign 
to go to the altar, and he goes to the Missal to find the 
prayers which are to be sung, pointing them out to the 
celebrant, and turning the leaves of the Missal. 

12. At the beginning of the last prayer, he goes to the 
side-table, takes the Missal in both hands, so as to turn the 
opening of it to his right, and presents it to the sub-deacon, 
bowing both before and after. He then places himself at 
his left, standing a little in the rear, and at the conclusion 
of the last prayer, at the words Jesum Christum, he bows, 
and goes to the middle of the altar with the sub-deacon, 
makes a genuflection, salutes the choir, returns to the same 
place, and points out the Epistle, supporting his left whilst 
he is singing. He makes a genuflection at the words In 
nomine Jesu, etc., and bows at the names of Jesus and 
Mary, and of the saint whose feast is celebrated ; giving 
notice to the choir, immediately before, to kneel down, or 
take off their caps. 

13. When the Epistle is finished, he accompanies the 
sub-deacon to the middle of the altar, makes a genuflection 
and bows to the choir, then goes with him to the Epistle 
side, to receive the celebrant's blessing. He receives the 
Missal from the sub-deacon, and gives it to the deacon, at 
the beginning of the Gospel. When the celebrant has re- 
cited the Gospel, he goes up to the platform, or to the 
highest step at the Epistle side, to have incense put in, and 
he hands the incense-boat, open, to the deacon. 

Should the choir sing a Sequentia, or long Tract, he makes 
a sign to the ministers to sit down, and he stands near the 
bench, as at the Gloria. At the end of it he makes a sign 
to rise, and goes to the Epistle side to have incense put in. 

During the Ferial clays in Lent, the ministers kneel on 
the edge of the platform, at the words Adjuva nos Deus, so 
that it is well to have the incense put in before, to give 
time to the deacon to say the Munda cor meum. And as 
the organ is not played on those days, he can request the 



.MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 153 

choir to prolong their chant, so as to have time to perform 
these ceremonies without. confusion. 

14. Whilst the deacon is receiving the celebrant's bless- 
ing, the master of ceremonies stands at the Epistle side, 
with his face towards the altar. He then places himself at 
the right hand of the deacon, and makes a genuflection 
with all the other ministers, and goes to the Epistle side, 
always at the right hand of the deacon, a little in the rear ; 
he presents him the censer after the Sequentia Sancti Evan- 
gelii, he takes it again after the Missal is incensed, gives it 
to the censer-bearer, and remains at the side of the deacon 
to turn the leaves of the Missal. 

If it be necessary to make a genuflection, or bow, during 
the singing of the Gospel, he makes it towards the altar, 
which will serve as a notice to the celebrant. 

15. .At the end of the Gospel, he goes to the Epistle side, 
and there makes a genuflection with the others. He re- 
ceives the Missal from the sub-deacon, with the usual bows, 
and places it on the side-table, then returns to the Epistle 
side, and remains there until the Credo is recited, he bows 
at the same time with the celebrant, and also makes the 
sign of the cross with him. 

16. When the celebrant says, Et incarnatus est, the mas- 
ter of ceremonies makes a genuflection on one knee only, 
and at the end of the Credo, makes a sign to sit down ; he 
stands, in order to give notice when they are to take off 
their caps. When the Incarnatus est is sung by the choir, 
he kneels on both knees, together with the acolytes and 
censer-bearer; the sacred ministers take off their caps. In 
the Masses of Christmas and the feast of the Annunciation, 
all kneel down at those words ; he, therefore, should pre- 
pare cushions for the occasion. 

17. After Et homo f actus est, he makes a sign to the 
deacon to come for the burse, and after giving it to him, 
he returns to the bench of the sacred ministers. At the 
words, Et vitam venturi, etc., or a little before, he gives 
notice to the celebrant and others to go to the altar, and 
goes to the Epistle side. 

18. When the celebrant has said the Or emus, at the 
Offertory, he makes a sign to the sub-deacon to make a 



154 HIGH MASS. 

genuflection, and go to the side-table. When there, he 
puts the veil upon him, letting it hang down somewhat 
lower on the right than on the left. He accompanies him 
to the altar, taking the pyx with him from the side-table ; 
he assists in uncovering the chalice, and when the sub- 
deacon has taken the paten, he should have the incense put 
in as usual. 

19. He afterwards goes to the Epistle side, and when the 
celebrant is incensing the cross or the Epistle side, he passes 
to the Gospel side, making a genuflection in the middle, 
and removing the Missal, goes down to the floor. After 
the celebrant has incensed that side, he replaces it and re- 
mains there to attend to the book, pointing to the prayers, 
and turning the leaves. 

20. At the end of the Preface, he gives notice to the 
deacon to go up on the platform to the right of the cele- 
brant, to recite the Sanctus. At the Te igitur, the deacon 
goes to the left of the celebrant, and the master of cere- 
monies to the Epistle side, both making a genuflection in 
the middle, as they pass. The master of ceremonies re- 
mains there until the words, Qui pridie quam pateretur; 
when after putting incense in the censer, he kneels down 
with the censer-bearer, and, at the elevation, rings the bell 
three distinct times. He makes a low bow with the censer- 
bearer, both before and after each elevation. 

21. After this, he rises, and remains there, or goes to 
the top step, near the altar, until the Nobis quoque pecca- 
toribus, and then passes to the other side, making a genu- 
flection in the middle, always behind the sub-deacon. 

22. When the deacon goes from the left side of the cele- 
brant, the master of ceremonies takes his place, makes a 
genuflection w 7 ith the celebrant and deacon, who should be 
at the right hand of the celebrant. The master of cere- 
monies remains at the left, attending to the Missal, until 
the Agnus Dei, making the genuflections with him, and 
turning the leaves, etc. 

23. Before the Pater Nostw is commenced, he makes a 
sign to the deacon to make a genuflection and go behind 
the priest, on the usual step ; and at .the words, Dimitte 
nobis, he again gives notice to the deacon and sub-deacon 



MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 155 

to make a genuflection, and go up to the altar at the Epis- 
tle side ; the sub-deacon leaves there the paten, and takes 
olf the veil; the master of ceremonies makes him a sign to 
make a genuflection there, and return to his place on the 
floor. The deacon remains at the right of the celebrant, 
and he at the left, until the Pax Domini is sung, at which 
time he gives the sub-deacon notice to make a genuflection 
at his place, and come up to the left of the celebrant, where 
he makes again a genuflection, and says the Agnus Dei. 
(Pub. 3Iiss., part ii.) The master of ceremonies makes a 
genuflection at the same time, goes down to the floor, and 
waits to accompany the sub-deacon, when he goes to give 
the Pax to the choir, beginning at the Gospel side, giving 
it to the first in dignity, and then passing to the Epistle 
side, making a genuflection in the middle. 

24. When this ceremony is over, he returns to the altar, 
makes a genuflection on the floor with the sub-deacon, and 
receives the Pax from him, bowing both before and after. 
He then gives it to the first acolyte, or to the censer-bearer, 
when he assists at the side-table in place of the acolytes, 
who are occupied in holding the torches. He remains 
after this in his usual place, at the Epistle side, until the 
celebrant has communicated. 

If the clergy communicate, the sub-deacon covers the 
chalice, after the celebrant has received the Precious Blood. 
The two sacred ministers make a genuflection and change 
places. The deacon uncovers the pyx, and they both again 
make a genuflection with the celebrant. After this, the 
deacon stands upon the highest step at the Epistle side, 
facing the Gospel side, and bowing lowly, he sings the 
Confiteor, and the celebrant, turning on the platform, 
towards the deacon, says the Misereatur and Indulgentiam, 
making the sign of the cross over those who are to com- 
municate, and holding his left hand on his breast. When 
the deacon is about to sing the Confiteor, the sub-deacon 
retires to the highest step on the Gospel side, with his face 
turned towards the deacon, and with his hands joined ; he 
remains there till after the Indulgentiam; both of them 
then change places, making a genuflection as they pass the 
middle of the altar, one behind the other, at the same time 



156 HIGH MASS. 

with the celebrant, and place themselves by the side of the 
celebrant, the deacon at the Gospel side, the sub-deacon at 
the Epistle side. 

If the sacred ministers communicate, after the Indulgen- 
tiam, they kneel upon the edge of the platform in front of 
the celebrant; after communion, they make a genuflection 
in the same place, and place themselves by the side of the 
celebrant as mentioned above, taking the communion-cloth 
from those who hold it, as they pass, and giving it back 
when they have passed. The deacon takes the paten, and 
holds it at a just distance below the Sacred Particle, and 
accompanies the priest's hand in giving communion. The 
sub-deacon stands near the priest, with his hands joined, 
and face turned towards the people, during the communion; 
at the end of which, the censer-bearer takes the commu- 
nion-cloth, and places it on the side-table, and the master 
of ceremonies assists at the ablution on the Epistle side. 

25. When the celebrant returns to the Epistle side, the 
master of ceremonies stands by him at the Missal, which 
he closes after the last prayer, if there be not a particular 
Gospel at the end of Mass. In case there be, after the 
deacon sings the Ite, missa est, the master of ceremonies 
hands the Missal to the sub-deacon for greater convenience, 
to take to the other side. 

26. In time of the blessing, he and all the ministers 
kneel down, and rise after it is given. Towards the end 
of the last Gospel, he makes a sign to the acolytes to take 
the candlesticks, and go to the middle of the altar. They 
make a genuflection there at Verbum car o factum, est, or at 
the end of any other Gospel, and move towards the sac- 
risty, followed by the clergy. He takes the caps of the 
sacred ministers, with whom, at the proper time, he makes 
a genuflection, and gives them their caps, presenting first 
to the deacon that of the celebrant. 

27. They return to the sacristy in the same order as 
they came; he salutes the clergy at the same time with the 
sacred ministers, and having bowed to the cross, or picture, 
in the sacristy, he assists in disrobing the celebrant, and 
then removes the things from the side-table. 

If the clergy remain in choir, the acolytes take the can- 



SUB-DEACON. 1 57 

dlesticks at the end of the Gospel, and go to the middle. 
When the sacred ministers descend, all make a genuflection 
together, and salute the choir; the master of ceremonies 
presents the caps, and they proceed in the abovementioned 
order to the sacristy. 

The sacred ministers make a genuflection on the floor, 
when they first come to the altar before Mass, and at the 
end before they leave the sanctuary ; at other times they 
make it on the step, as far as practicable. 

Article V. 
Instruction for the Sub -deacon. 

1. The sub-deacon should repair to the sacristy a quarter 
of an hour before Mass ; and, after a short prayer, wash 
his hands, and put on the vestments, except the maniple, 
and folded vestment, when the latter is used, which he 
puts on after the celebrant is vested. After assisting the 
celebrant to vest, he puts on his cap. 

2. On a sign made by the master of ceremonies, he bows 
before the picture in the sacristy, holding his cap in his 
hand ; he makes also a moderate bow to the celebrant, 
and then puts on his cap, and proceeds, with his hands 
joined, after the clergy, and before the deacon. 

3. He receives the holy water from the master of cere- 
monies, with his cap in his hand, and then puts it on. 
When he enters the choir, he goes to the left of the cele- 
brant, gives his cap to the master of ceremonies, and pro- 
ceeds with the other ministers. 

4. He makes a genuflection with the deacon before the 
altar, and answers with him during the Confession, mak- 
ing the sign of the cross, and bowing with the celebrant. 
He stands erect when the celebrant says the Confiteor ; 
bows moderately when he says, Miser eatur vestri; and 
bows profoundly when he recites the Confiteor; turning a 
little towards the celebrant at the words, Et tibi Pater, 
and Et te Pater. (Pub. Miss., part ii.) He stands upright 
when the celebrant says, Indulgentiam ; and again -bows 
moderately at the Deus, lu conversus, until the Oremus. 



158 HIGH MASS. 

He holds his hands joined before his breast, except 
when he sits down, or is engaged, when he performs some 
sacred rite with his right hand, he keeps his left open upon 
his breast ; and when the priest makes a low bow, or a 
genuflection, he also bows, or makes a genuflection, and 
supports the priest's arm as he rises. 

5. When the celebrant has said the Oremus, he goes up 
to the altar with him, raising a little the extremity of his 
alb. When the celebrant incenses the altar, he raises the 
chasuble with his hand, and makes a genuflection every 
time he passes before the cross. (Hub., ib., iv.) When the 
celebrant returns the censer to the deacon, he goes down to 
the Epistle side, and stands at the left of the deacon facing 
the celebrant, and makes with him a low bow, both before 
and after incensing. 

6. After that, he goes to the Epistle side, aud stands on 
the step below that on which the deacon stands at his right, 
so that, with the celebrant and deacon, who stands at his 
right, an imperfect semicircle may be formed. 

7. He makes the sign of the cross at the beginning of 
the Introit, and answers to the Kyrie, and remains there, 
or goes to sit down (Rub. Miss., part i), according to the 
directions of the master of ceremonies, making a moderate 
bow to the altar. 

8. On notice given by the master of ceremonies, when 
the choir is at the last Kyrie, he goes with the deacon to 
the altar, the celebrant being between them ; they bow to 
the choir. When they arrive before the altar, he makes a 
genuflection at the same time with the deacon, on the low- 
est step, and then he stands behind the deacon. (Bub. 3fiss., 
part ii.) 

9. He bows at the word Deo, when the celebrant sings 
the Gloria; then he goes up to the platform, to the left of 
the celebrant, and says the remainder of the Gloria with 
him. (Rub., ib.) He should take care not to say it faster 
than the celebrant. He ought also to bow and make the 
sign of the cross with him. 

10. At the end of the Gloria, he makes a genuflection 
with the deacon, and (at the right of the deacon, or before 
him, according to the situation of the bench or choir) goes 



SUB-DEACON. 159 

to sit down. He takes his cap, makes a moderate bow 
with the deacon to the celebrant, and then sits down at his 
left ; puts on his cap, keeps his hands open on his lap, and 
takes off his cap, when directed by the master of cere- 
monies. 

If the choir is singing a verse, at which it is necessary to 
bow, whilst he is going to the bench, he stops, and bows 
towards the altar. 

11. At the sign made by the master of ceremonies, he 
rises, takes off his cap, places it on the bench, and, after 
two or three steps, salutes the choir, together with the dea- 
con and celebrant ; first on the Epistle side, then on the 
Gospel side. 

12. When he arrives at the altar, he makes a genuflec- 
tion with the others, raises the celebrant's alb, as he goes 
up to the altar, and then stops at his place behind the 
deacon. 

13. After the Dominus vobiscum, he goes behind the 
deacon at the Epistle side. (Bub., ib.) He bows with 
the celebrant during the prayers ; but does not answer 
Amen, which he should observe whenever the choir re- 
sponds. 

When Flectamus genua is to be said, the deacon sings it 
in the act of bending the knee, and the sub-deacon sings 
Levate; and rises before the rest. All kneel down except 
the celebrant. (Rub., ib., lib. v.) If the sub-deacon has 
on the folded chasuble, he will take it off to sing the Epis- 
tle and put it on after receiving the celebrant's blessing. 

14. He takes the book, when it is presented by the 
master of ceremonies, bowing a little in the act of receiving 
it. He rests the upper part of the Missal on his breast, 
holding it below with both hands (Rub., ib., lib. vi, n. 4), 
with the edge to his left, and turning towards the altar, he 
waits until the celebrant has said the words, Jesum Chris- 
tum; when they occur in the conclusion, he bows at them, 
and then goes to the middle of the altar, makes a genuflec- 
tion on the lowest step, bows to the choir at the Gospel 
side, and at the Epistle side; he returns behind the cele- 
brant, opens the book, and sings the Epistle (Rub., ib.), 

. and when these words occur, In nomine Jesu omne genu 



160 HIGH MASS. 

fledatur, etc., he makes a genuflection, on one knee only, 
upon the step. 

15. When the Epistle is ended, he shuts the book, and 
holding it, as was mentioned above, he returns to the mid- 
dle of the altar, makes a genuflection, salutes the choir as 
he did before the Epistle, goes to the Epistle side, kneels 
upon the upper step, and kisses the celebrant's hand placed 
on the Missal. (Rub., ibid.) 

16. After receiving his blessing, he rises, gives the book 
to the master of ceremonies, then puts on the folded chasu- 
ble if he has worn it, and removes the Missal to the Gospel 
side (Rub., ibid., n, 5), making a genuflection in passing 
before the altar. 

17. After placing the book upon the altar, he remains 
on the upper step' with his face turned towards the Epistle 
side, and there answers to the priest, making the sign of 
the cross, and bowing with him, and turning the leaves, if 
necessary. He answers, Laus tibi, Christe, at the end, and 
goes upon the platform, and turns the book for the conve- 
nience of the celebrant, leaving room to spread the cor- 
poral. 

If the choir sings the Adjuva nos, the Veni, Sancte Spiri- 
tus, etc., he kneels on the edge of the platform at the 
celebrant's left, until it be finished. (Rub. Miss., part i.) 

18. When the incense is put into the censer, and blessed, 
he goes down to the floor, and waits for the deacon. He 
makes a genuflection with the other ministers, salutes the 
choir, and proceeds before, or if the space will allow, at the 
left of the deacon, to the place where the Gospel is to be 
sung, and there stands between the acolytes, holding the 
book open (Rub. 3£iss., part ii), and leaning it upon his 
forehead or upon his breast, as may be more convenient 
for the deacon. Being occupied in holding the book, he 
does not bow, nor make a genuflection, when the name of 
Jesus occurs, although the others do. (Rub. Ifiss., part i.) 

19. At the end of the Gospel, he takes the book open to 
the celebrant (Rub., ibid.), by the shortest way (he does not 
make a genuflection, even if he pass before the Blessed 
Sacrament), and presents it to him to kiss, pointing out, 
with his right hand, the beginning of the Gospel, which 



SUB-DEACON. 161 

was sung. He shuts the book, after the priest has kissed 
it, withdraws a little, salutes the celebrant, and then goes 
down to the floor in front of the Epistle side, where, with- 
out making a genuflection, he gives the Missal to the mas- 
ter of ceremonies. 

20. At the intoning of the Credo, he stands behind the 
deacon, and having made a genuflection with him on arriv- 
ing at the middle of the altar, he bows at the word Deum, 
and goes up to the celebrant's left, observing the same that 
was prescribed for the Gloria. (Rub., ibid.) 

21. At the Incarnatus est, he makes a genuflection, and 
at the end of the Creed goes to sit down, as he did at the 
Gloria. When the Incarnatus est is sung, he takes off his 
cap, and bows moderately till Homo factus est is finished. 

In the three Masses of Christmas, and on the feast of the 
Annunciation, even if the office is not said on this festival, 
on account of its occurring on some privileged day, he 
kneels down with the other ministers, whilst the words Et 
incarnatus, etc., are sung. 

22. When the deacon goes for the burse, the sub-deacon 
rises, and stands with his cap in his hand until the deacon 
has passed with the burse, and bowed to the celebrant; 
then sits down, and puts on his cap. When the deacon 
returns to sit down, the subdeacon rises a little before, bows 
with him to the celebrant, and sits down again with him. 

The subdeacon may stand up while the deacon is prepar- 
ing the corporal, according to the custom of many. He 
takes off his cap whenever the master of ceremonies gives 
notice. 

23. At the end of the Credo, when the sign is made, he 
returns with the other ministers to the altar, observing 
what was prescribed at the end of the Gloria. 

24. When the celebrant says Oremus, at the Offertory, 
he bows, then makes a genuflection, and goes to the table, 
puts the veil upon his shoulders, takes the veil off the 
chalice, and gives it to the second acolyte; he takes hold of 
the chalice at the knob with his left hand, covers it with 
the right end of the veil, places his right hand over it, goes 
upon the platform to the deacon's right, and there places 
the chalice upon the altar. {Rub., ibid.) 

14 



162 HIGH MASS. 

When there is no Credo, he takes the burse upon the 
chalice. (Rub., ibid.) 

25. After the deacon has taken off the pall and paten, 
he wipes the chalice with the purifier, and presents it to 
the deacon. He receives the cruets from the acolyte, pre- 
sents wine to the deacon, and receives back the cruet in his 
left hand. When the deacon has poured the wine into the 
chalice, he presents the cruet of water to the celebrant, and 
bowing a little toward him, says, Benedicite, Pater Rever- 
ende (Rub. Miss., ibid.); but if he is a prelate, he says, 
Benedicite, Reverendissime Pater. After the celebrant has 
blessed it, he pours a few drops into the chalice, and gives 
back the cruets to the acolyte. (Rub., ibid.) 

26. He does not, cover his hands with the veil before he 
receives the paten from the deacon ; after receiving it in his 
right hand, he covers it with the end of the veil, which is 
at his right, and then rests it against his breast, as he should 
do whenever he moves from one place to another, when he 
is incensed, while he is kneeling, and when he responds to 
the Orate Fratres. He goes in front of the altar, makes a 
genuflection on the lowest step, and then remains standing 
until the words of the Pater Noster, Dimitte nobis debita 
nostra; holding the paten on a level with his eyes, with his 
left hand under his right elbow. The end of the veil at 
his left hangs down at his side.* 

27. When the deacon kneels at the elevation, he also 
kneels at his place, on the lowest step, until it is over. 
(Rub., ibid.) 

28. At the words Dimitte nobis, he makes a genuflection 
at his place, and goes up to the altar at the Epistle side, 
near the deacon, and presents him the paten. AVhen the 
acolyte or censer-bearer has taken off the veil, he makes a 
genuflection there, and returns to the floor behind the cele- 
brant, and without making another genuflection, stands 
there with his hands joined. (Rub., ibid.) 

29. When the celebrant says Pax Domini, he makes a 
genuflection, and goes up. to his left, makes there a genu- 

* S R. C, Nov. 12, 1831, has decreed that the suh-deacon should 
proceed to say the Sanctus with the celehrant in churches where the 
custom exists ; otherwise, he remains in his place. 



SUB-DEACON. 163 

• 

flection with the others, and then bowing towards the 
Blessed Sacrament, says, Agnus Dei, etc., striking his breast 
at the Miserere nobis, and at the end of the third he makes 
a genuflection, and returns where he was at first. [Rub., ib.) 

30. When the deacon comes to give him the Pax, he 
salutes him both before and after, then makes a genuflection 
at his place (at the same time that the deacon makes it on 
the platform), and, accompanied by the master of ceremo- 
nies, he proceeds to give the Pax to the clergy, beginning 
with the first one on the more worthy side, and then on 
the other. (Rub., ibid.) Laying his hands on the shoulders 
of the one to whom lie gives it, he says, Pax tecum, bowing 
to each of them after having given it, but not before. If 
there be several rows of clergymen, he gives it to the first 
in each row, and makes his genuflection before the Blessed 
Sacrament when he" passes in the middle of the choir. 

Should he have to give the Pax to prelates, he puts his 
hands under their elbows. 

31. After giving the Pax to the clergy, he returns to 
the middle of the altar, makes a genuflection on the step, 
and gives it to the master of ceremonies ; then goes up to 
the right of the celebrant, and there makes again a genu- 
flection. (Rub., ibid.) 

32. At the Domine non sum dignus, he strikes his breast, 
and bows moderately to the Blessed Sacrament. He bows 
profoundly to the Blessed Sacrament whilst the celebrant 
is receiving both species. (Rub., ibid.) 

33. He uncovers the chalice at the proper time, makes 
a genuflection, and presents wine and water for both ablu- 
tions, observing the usual ceremonies. (Rub., ibid.) After 
giving the water, he lays the purifier on the celebrant's 
fingers. 

34. He gives back the cruets to the acolyte, and changes 
place with the deacon, making a genuflection only in the 
middle of the altar behind the deacon. When he comes to 
the Gospel side, he wipes the chalice, and adjusts it in the 
usual manner, putting the purifier upon it, the paten with 
the pall, the veil, and lastly the burse, with the corporal 
in it; then holding the chalice with his left hand, and 
placing his right upon the burse, he takes it to the table, 



164 HIGH MASS. 

makes a genuflection in the middle of the altar, and returns 
behind the deacon. (Rub., ibid.) 

35. After the Ite, missa est, or JBenedicamus Domino, 
whilst the celebrant is saying the Placeat, he goes up to the 
second step, and he kneels on the edge of the platform, at 
the words Benedicat vos, and bowing, receives the blessing. 

36. He rises and goes to the Gospel side, and there holds 
the card for the celebrant, or attends to the book, if neces- 
sary. (Hub., ib.) He does not make a genuflection towards 
the altar, at the Verbum caro, being obliged to hold the 
Gospel-card with both hands for the convenience of the 
celebrant, and for the same reason he does not make the 
sign of the cross at Initium Sancti Evangelii, etc. 

If any other Gospel is read, after the Ite, missa est, or 
Benedicamus Domino, he receives the Missal from the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, makes a genuflection, and takes it to the 
Gospel side, and kneels down as was said, at the left of the 
deacon, upon the edge of the platform, to receive the bless- 
ing. He rises, and attends at the celebrant's left, making 
the sign of the cross, genuflection, etc.; at the end, he shuts 
the Missal, and leaves it there. 

37. At the end of the Gospel, he goes upon the platform 
at the celebrant's left, and, on notice given by the master of 
ceremonies, bows to the cross, goes down to the floor with 
the other ministers, makes a genuflection with them, puts 
on his cap, and proceeds immediately after the clergy to- 
wards the sacristy. 

38. AVhen in the sacristy, he stands at the left of the 
celebrant ; he salutes the clergy, bows to the picture or 
cross in the sacristy, and to the celebrant, then takes off 
his maniple, and the folded vestment when it is used, and 
assists the celebrant to disrobe. 

If the clergy remain in the choir, he bows to them after 
having bowed towards the altar, then puts on his cap, and 
proceeds as above. 



DEACOX. 165 



Article VI. 

Instruction for the Deacon. 

1. The deacon goes to the sacristy a quarter of an hour 
before Mass, makes a short prayer, and looks over the 
Gospel, and Ite, missa est, or JBenedicamus Domino, which 
he has to sing ; he then washes his hands, and puts on all 
the vestments, except the maniple (and the folded vestment 
when it is used), which he puts on after the celebrant is 
entirely vested. He assists him in vesting, handing him 
the sacred vestments, by turns with the sub-deacon. 

2. When the celebrant is vested, and has put on his cap, 
he also puts on his, and remains standing at the celebrant's 
right, with his hands joined, until the master of ceremo- 
nies gives the signal, he then descends with the other two 
ministers, bows with them to the cross, or image, with his 
cap in his hand, and again bows moderately to the cele- 
brant, and, with his cap on and hands joined, proceeds 
after the sub-deacon. 

3. In entering the church, he receives the holy water 
from the master of ceremonies, or from, the sub-deacon, 
with his cap in his hand, and presents it to the celebrant, 
bowing as usual, then makes the sign of the cross, and 
puts on his cap. 

4. He takes off his cap when he comes to the choir, 
waits for the celebrant, and goes to his right ; he gives his 
cap to the master of ceremonies, then receives the cele- 
brant's cap with both hands, with the usual kisses (except 
in Masses for the dead), and hands it to the master of cere- 
monies. 

5. He goes to the altar at the celebrant's right, makes a 
genuflection, answers with the sub-deacon, and makes the 
sign of the cross on himself, with the priest, etc. He 
bows moderately towards him when he says the Misereatur, 
and makes a low bow towards the altar when he says the 
Conjiteor, turning a little towards the celebrant at the 
words, Et tibi, Pater, and Et te, Pater. (Rub. Miss., part ii.) 

He rises at the Indulgentiam, and bows again at Deus, 



166 HIGH MASS. 

tu conversus, continuing in this posture to the Oremus, in- 
clusively. 

He generally holds his hands joined before his breast, 
except when he is sitting, or engaged. When he uses his 
right hand, he keeps his left upon his breast. When the 
celebrant makes a genuflection, if he be by his side, he 
makes it with him, and with one hand supports his arm 
whilst he is rising ; if he holds the taper, he does not make 
a genuflection. 

6. After the Oremus, he goes up to the altar at the cele- 
brant's right, raising the alb a little in front. He receives 
the incense-boat from the master of ceremonies, takes the 
spoon, kisses it, and presents it to the celebrant, kissing 
his hand, and says, Benedicite, Pater JReverende. If he be 
a Prelate, Benedicite, Reverendissime Pater. (Pub., ib.) 

7. After the incense is put in, he receives the spoon from 
the celebrant, and kisses it, after kissing his hand. (Rub., 
ib.) He should observe this on similar occasions. When 
the incense is blessed, he takes the censer, holding with his 
right hand the top of the chain, with his left the other ex- 
tremity, and presents it to the celebrant, kissing first the 
upper part of the chain, then the right hand of the cele- 
brant, which is placed between his own hands. (Rub., ib.) 

8. Whilst the celebrant is incensing the altar, the deacon 
stands a little in the rear at his right, and with his left 
hand holds up the back of the chasuble. He makes a 
genuflection every time he passes before the cross. (Rub., ib.) 

9. At the end of the incensing, he receives the censer 
from the celebrant, kissing his right hand and the upper 
part of the chain, as above; then with the top in his left, 
and with his right holding the bottom of the chain near 
the cover, he descends to the floor at the Epistle side, and 
incenses the celebrant thrice, making a low bow both be- 
fore and after ; he gives the censer to the censer -bearer, and 
goes up to the step, near the platform, to the celebrant's 
right. (Rub., ib.) He points out the Introit, makes the 
sign of the cross with the celebrant, and answers at the 
Kyrie, etc. He remains in the same place, or, if the master 
of ceremonies gives notice, he goes to sit down with the 



DEACOX. 167 

other sacred ministers, making first a bow towards the 
altar, from whatever plaee he is standing. (Rub. Miss.) 

10. At the last Kyrie, if he is sitting, he returns to the 
altar in the same manner as at the end of the Gloria and 
Credo. If he is not seated, at the sign made by the master 
of ceremonies, he goes behind the celebrant (Rub. Miss., 
part ii), in the middle, on the step next to the platform, 
and at the word Deo in the Gloria, he bows, and goes up 
to the celebrant's right, and continues the Gloria with him 
(Rub. Miss., ib.), making the bows together, and at the 
end the sign of the cross ; he makes a genuflection with 
the rest ; he goes before the celebrant at the sub-deacon's 
left to the seat. 

11. On arriving at the bench, he takes the celebrant's 
cap, and presents it with the usual kisses, he then takes 
his own cap, and bows to the celebrant at the same time 
with the sub-deacon, sits down, and puts on his cap. He 
keeps his hands open on his knees, and wheu the master 
of ceremonies gives notice, he takes off his cap and rests it 
on his right knee. 

12. Towards the end of the hymn, at the words, Cum 
Sancto Spiritu, etc., he takes off his cap and rises, places 
his cap on the bench, receives the celebrant's, first kissing 
his hand, then the cap, and lays it on the bench. Going 
to the altar, he salutes the choir at the same time with the 
other ministers, first on the Epistle side, then, after a few 
steps, on the Gospel side, and at the celebrant's right. 

13. When he comes before the altar, he makes a genu- 
flection on the first step, and raises the celebrant's alb; he 
remains behind on the upper step, and after the Dominus 
vobiscum, removes behind him to the Epistle side (Rub., 
ibid.), without making a genuflection, or bow; and remains 
there whilst the celebrant is singing the prayers, bowing 
when he bow r s. 

If the Flectamus genua is to be sung after the Oremus, 
the deacon sings it in the act of bending the knee, and 
rises, after the sub-deacon has sung Levate. (Rub., ib.) 

14. As soon as the celebrant terminates the last prayer, 
the deacon goes to his right on the upper step, and at the 
end of the Epistle, which the celebrant reads in a low 



168 HIGH MASS. 

voice, he answers, Deo gratias, and remains there until the 
celebrant begins the Gospel. (Rub., ib.) 

15. On notice from the master of ceremonies he goes 
down to the floor, and receives from him the Missal, and 
holds it nearly on a level with his eyes, the edge of the 
book being at his left ; he salutes the clergy first on the 
Epistle side, then on the Gospel side, and goes to the mid- 
dle of the altar, makes a genuflection on the lower step, 
then goes up and places upon the altar the closed book 
(Rub., ib.), with the edge towards the Gospel side ; and he 
remains there without repeating the genuflection. 

If the deacon has on a folded vestment, at a signal from 
the master of ceremonies, whilst the celebrant is reading 
the Gospel, he comes down, takes it off assisted by an 
acolyte, and puts on the large stole, which he keeps on 
until he removes the Missal, at the Post Communio; and 
then he puts the vestment on again. After putting on the 
large stole, he receives the Missal from the master of cere- 
monies, and proceeds as above. 

16. When the master of ceremonies directs, the incense 
is blessed ; then the deacon goes upon the upper step, 
kneels on the edge of the platform, and bowing profoundly, 
says : " Munda cor meum, ac labia mea, Omnipotens JDeus, 
qui labia Isaice Prophetce caleulo mundasti ignito : ita me 
tua grata miseratione dignare mundare, ut Sanctum Evan- 
gelium tuum digne valeam nuntiare. Per Christum Domi- 
nium nostrum. Amen." After this prayer he rises, takes 
the book, and turning towards the celebrant (who also 
turns towards the deacon ), kneels on the platform and says, 
Jube, Domne, benedicere. (Rub., ib.) 

17. He kisses the celebrant's hand placed on the book, 
after receiving his blessing; then he rises, bows to the 
celebrant, and goes down to the floor; he makes a genu- 
flection at the sub-deacon's right, bows to the choir, and 
proceeds abreast with, or after the sub-deacon, to the place 
where the Gospel is to be sung ; then he gives the sub- 
deacon the Missal open, and with his hands joined, he in- 
tones the Dominus vobiscum. After Sequentia Sancti 
Evangelii, placing his left hand open on the book, with 
his right thumb he makes the sign of the cross on the be- 



DEACON. 169 

ginning of the Gospel, and then on his forehead, lips, and 
breast, putting his left hand on his breast. After this, he 
takes the censer, and incenses the book, first in the middle, 
then at his right, and lastly at his left; he returns the 
censer to the roaster of ceremonies, and sings the Gospel 
with his hands joined. (Rub., ib.) He bows, and makes 
his genuflection, wherever it is prescribed. (Rub. Miss., 
part i.) 

18. Having finished the Gospel, he points out the text 
to the sub-deacon, and incenses the celebrant thrice, as 
usual, from the Gospel side, making a low bow, both be- 
fore and after. (Rub., ib.) 

19. He then gives the censer to the censer-bearer, and 
goes up to the second step, or to the top one, behind the 
celebrant, and makes a genuflection there, at the same 
time with the sub-deacon and censer-bearer. When the 
celebrant intones the Credo, he bows at the word Deum, 
and goes up to the celebrant's right, and observes all the 
ceremonies prescribed for the Gloria in excelsis ; then he 
goes to his seat. (Rub. Miss., part ii.) 

20. After the choir has sung Et homo f actus est, he rises, 
leaves his cap upon the bench, with his hands joined, bows 
to the celebrant, and goes to the table, takes the burse, 
holding it up with both hands, and keeping the open part 
of it towards his eyes. He bows to the celebrant as he 
passes him by, then to the choir, first at the Epistle side, 
next at the Gospel side ; after which he makes a genuflec- 
tion on the lowest step, and goes up to the altar. 

21. After taking out the corporal, he places the burse at 
the Gospel side, and spreads the corporal; then adjusts the 
Missal for the convenience of the celebrant. (Rub., ib.) 
He makes a genuflection there, without putting his hands 
upon the altar, and goes to his seat, bowing to the celebrant 
before he sits down. Towards the end of the Credo, at the 
words Et vitam, or a little before, he returns to the altar 
with the others, as at the end of the Gloria. 

In the three Masses on Christmas day, and on the day 
of the Annunciation, even if this festival be not then cele- 
brated, all kneel when the Incarnatus est is sung. 

22. He bow T s when the celebrant says Oremus; then 

15 



170 HIGH MASS. 

goes up to his right ; and when the sub-deacon brings the 
chalice, he uncovers it (if it be a Mass in which there is no 
Credo, he takes the burse, and spreads the corporal, takes 
off the pall, and places it near the corporal), then takes the 
paten with the particle, and presents it, kissing first the 
paten and then the celebrant's hand. (Rub., ib.) 

23. If it is necessary to consecrate particles for the com- 
munion of the clergy, he uncovers the pyx, and during the 
oblation of the particle, he raises it up a little in his right 
hand, and with his left supports the celebrant's arm ; he 
then covers it, and places it upon the corporal, behind the 
foot of the chalice. When the sub-deacon has purified the 
chalice, he takes it in his left hand, and pours in the wine, 
and the sub-deacon pours the water. (Rub., ib.) 

24. After having wiped off the drops of wine and water 
from the side of the chalice, he takes it, holding it below 
the cup with his right hand, and the foot with his left, and 
presents it to the priest, with the usual kisses. He sup- 
ports with his right hand the foot of the chalice, or the 
celebrant's arm (Rub., ib.), and with his left on his breast, 
he says with him, {t Offerimus tibi, Domine, calicem salutaris, 
tuam deprecantes clementiam, ut in consjoectu divinoe majes- 
tatis tuce, pro nostra et totius mundi salute cum odore suavi- 
tatis ascended. Amen." At the end, he covers the chalice 
with the pall, and puts the paten in the sub-deacon's right 
hand, and covers it with the right extremity of the veil. 
(Rub., ibid.) 

25. The incense is put in and blessed, as was explained 
above. When the celebrant incenses the offerings, the 
deacon raises the chasuble with his left hand, and places 
his right hand on the foot of the chalice. After the genu- 
flection, he removes it from the middle towards the Epistle 
side, but not outside of the corporal ; after the incensing of 
the cross he puts it back in its place. (Rub., ib.) He 
makes a genuflection with the celebrant, and proceeds as at 
the Introit. 

26. After having incensed the celebrant, he incenses the 
choir, beginning at the Gospel side, and ending at the Epis- 
tle side; he makes a genuflection in the middle of the choir, 
in passing from one side to the other. 



DEACON. 171 

27. In incensing, he makes a moderate bow to" those he 
is going to incense; and then incenses each one once; he 
bows to them when he is done. After incensing the choir 
at the Epistle side, he incenses the sub-deacon twice ; he 
then gives the censer to the censer-bearer, and goes up be- 
hind the celebrant, on the highest step, makes a genuflec- 
tion, and turns, that he may be incensed by the censer- 
bearer. (Rub., ib.) 

If there be prelates in the choir, they are incensed with 
a double swing of the censer, as the sub-deacon, and a bow 
is made both before and after. 

28. Whilst the Preface is sung, the deacon remains be- 
hind the celebrant ; at the words Supplici confessione di- 
centes, he goes up to the platform at his right, says with 
him the Sanctus, makes on himself the sign of the cross at 
the Benedictus, passes to the left to turn the leaves of the 
Missal, and as he passes across he makes a genuflection on 
the edge of the platform. 

29. At the words, Quam oblationem, the deacon goes to 
the celebrant's right, making a genuflection, as he crosses 
to the other side ; if the pyx be there, he places it before 
the celebrant, uncovers it, kneels on the platform during 
the elevation of the Sacred Host, raises the celebrant's 
chasuble with his left hand, and rises with him, after he 
has adored the Blessed Sacrament, covers the pyx, replaces 
it behind the chalice, kneels down again, and raises the 
celebrant's chasuble. 

30. When the celebrant is about to place the chalice on 
the altar, the deacon rises, covers it, makes a genuflection 
with him, and returns to his left. He does not make the 
genuflection as he recrosses, but only after he has arrived 
at the celebrant's left, where he attends him at the Missal. 

31. At the words, Per quern hcec omnia, the deacon 
makes a genuflection, and goes to the right of the cele- 
brant; at the words, Prcestas nobis, he uncovers the chalice, 
and makes a genuflection with the celebrant. After the 
words, Omnis honor et gloria, he covers it, makes a genu- 
flection with the celebrant, and remains there till he be- 
gins the Pater. Then, having made a genuflection he re- 
tires behind the celebrant, on the highest step. 



172 HIGH MASS. 

32. At the words, Et dimitie nobis, the deacon makes a 
genuflection with the sub-deacon, and goes to the right of 
the celebrant, where, having received from the sub-deacon 
the paten, he wipes it with the purifier, kisses and presents 
it to the celebrant, kissing his hand. He then uncovers 
the chalice, makes a genuflection, covers the chalice again 
as soon as the celebrant has put into it the small particle 
of the consecrated Host, makes again a genuflection, bow- 
ing together with the celebrant, and says the Agnus Dei, 
striking his breast, after which he kneels at the right of 
the celebrant. 

33. After the celebrant has finished the first prayer, the 
deacon rises at the same time with the celebrant, kisses the 
altar outside of the- corporal ; with his hands joined before 
his breast, receives from him the Pax, making to him a 
bow before and after, and answers, Et cum sjnritu tuo. 
Then, having made a genuflection, the deacon goes down 
as far as the last step, and standing on it, gives to the sub- 
deacon the Pax, makes to him a bow, goes up to the left of 
the celebrant, makes a genuflection, and remains there till 
after the last ablution. Whilst the celebrant communicates 
under both species, the deacon bows profoundly. 

34. After the last ablution, the deacon carries the Missal 
to the Epistle side, making a genuflection at the same time 
with the sub-deacon as they pass before the middle. And 
when he uses the large stole, takes it off and puts on the 
folded chasuble. Then he goes on the highest step behind 
the celebrant, follows him when he goes to the middle, and 
returns to the Epistle side. 

35. When the celebrant has said Dominus vobiscum, after 
the last prayer, the deacon turns to the people, and sings, 
Ite, missa est. 

When the Benedicamus Domino or Pequiescant in "pace 
is sung, the deacon does not turn round to the people. In 
Lent, when Humiliate capita vestra Deo is to be sung, 
after the third prayer of the Post commvnio, the celebrant 
having sung Oremus, the deacon turns round to the people 
by his right hand, sings Humiliate, and turns again to the 
altar by the same right side. 

36. Whilst the celebrant says the Placeat, the deacon, 



CELEBRANT. 173 

retiring towards the Epistle side, turns to the altar. When 
the celebrant says Benedieat vos, the deacon, kneeling on 
the edge of the platform, receives the blessing, making on 
himself the sign of the cross; he then rises, makes with his 
thumb the usual crosses on his forehead, lips and breast, at 
the beginning of the Gospel, and makes a genuflection at 
the words, Et Verbum caro. 

37. After the Gospel, the deacon goes up to the right of 
the celebrant ; at the sign made by the master of ceremo- 
nies, he bows to the cross, descends with the rest below the 
steps, makes a genuflection, salutes the clergy, if they re- 
main in the sanctuary, presents the cap to the celebrant 
with the usual kisses, first of the cap, and secondly of the 
hand, receives from the master of ceremonies his cap, puts 
it on, and walks to the sacristy behind the sub-deacon. 

38. When arrived at the sacristy, the deacon takes off 
his cap, salutes the clergy, if they have also left the sanctu- 
ary, makes a bow to the crucifix and to the celebrant, takes 
off his maniple (also the folded chasuble when used), helps 
the celebrant to disrobe, salutes him, and takes off his 
sacred vestments. 

When the sacred ministers have to pass from one side of 
the altar to the other, before the consecration, they make 
the genuflection in the middle ; but after the consecration, 
they make it on each side near the celebrant, both before 
and after, without placing their hands, which they hold 
joined, upon the altar. Only at the Dimitte nobis they 
make the genuflection in the middle, before they go up to 
the altar. The first and last genuflection is to be made on 
the floor, below the lowest step ; all the others on the lowest 
step. 

Article VII. 

Instruction for the Celebrant. 

1. The priest who is to celebrate High Mass should fore- 
see everything that is to be sung, especially the Gloria, 
the prayers, the Preface, and the manner of singing them, 
according to the quality of the Mass, and the festival which 
is celebrated. 



174 HIGH MASS. 

2. At the proper hour, the celebrant, having spent some 
time in prayer, and washed his hands, puts on the sacred 
vestments, attended by the ministers, who should have pre- 
viously put on their own. 

3. The celebrant being vested, puts on his cap, and on 
notice given by the master of ceremonies, takes it off, goes 
below the steps, makes a bow to the crucifix, or to the 
principal image of the sacristy, salutes the sacred ministers 
at his right and at his left, covers his head, at the door of 
the sacristy takes off his cap, receives the holy water from 
the deacon, makes the sign of the cross, puts on his cap, 
and, with his hands joined and his eyes modestly cast down, 
walks towards the sanctuary. 

If, on their way to the altar, where High Mass is to be 
celebrated, the celebrant pass before the high altar, he 
should make a profound bow to it, and in case the Blessed 
Sacrament be kept there, he should make a genuflection. 
If he pass before an altar whilst Mass is celebrated, and in 
time of the elevation, as the bell rings, the celebrant, with 
the ministers on each side of him, should stop, and kneel 
on both knees, till after the elevation. 

4. As the celebrant enters the sanctuary, he takes off his 
cap, gives it to the deacon, makes a profound bow to the 
cross, or a genuflection, if the Blessed Sacrament be kept 
there, and begins the Confession, having the deacon at his 
right and the sub-deacon at his left. 

If the clergy are already in the sanctuary, the celebrant 
should salute them as he enters it. 

5. At the words, Vobis, fratres — Et vos, fratres, the cele- 
brant turns towards the deacon and sub-deacon. After the 
Confession, he goes up to the platform, kisses the altar, 
puts incense thrice into the censer, saying, Ab illo benedi- 
caris in cujus honore cremaberis. Amen, and makes the 
sign of the cross on the censer with his right hand, holding 
the left on his breast. 

6. The celebrant, having received the censer from the 
deacon, makes a profound bow to the cross, or a genuflection 
to the Blessed Sacrament (if it is on the altar), in the latter 
case, laying his left hand on the altar ; he then incenses the 



CELEBRANT. 175 

cross with three swings* (as directed in the plates, n. 2, 3); 
after this, he again makes a bow to the cross, or a genu- 
flection to the Blessed Sacrament, and, remaining in the 
same place, incenses the relics (if there be any) with two 
swings, between the candlesticks at the side of the Gospel 
(as in n. 4, 5), makes again a bow or genuflection, and, with 
two other swings, incenses the relics at the Epistle side (as 
in n. 7). If there are more or less than two cases of relics 
on each side, the celebrant incenses them all with two 
swings. If the relic of the saint whose festival is celebrated 
is placed in the middle of the altar, the celebrant, after 
having incensed the cross, incenses it with two swings, 
bowing to it before and after. Having incensed the relics, 
the celebrant proceeds to incense the altar ; he incenses 
the table of it, at the Epistle side, with three swings, corre- 
sponding to the places where the three candlesticks stand (as 
in n. 8, 9, 10), walking one step at each swing. On ar- 
riving at the Epistle side, the celebrant lowers his hand, 
and incenses with one swing, the lower part of that side of 
the altar, and with another the upper part (as in n. 11, 12). 
Then, turning to the altar and raising his hand, he incenses 
the table of the altar with three swings as far as the middle 
(as in n. 13, 14, 15), advancing in like manner, one step at 
each swing; when he is arrived at the middle, he makes 
the bow or genuflection, and incenses the other side of the 
altar with three swings (as in n. 16, 17, 18), then he in- 
censes the lower and the upper part of the Gospel side with 
two swings (as in n. 19, 20); without moving from that 
corner, he raises the censer, and incenses with three swings 
the table of the altar towards the middle (as in n. 21, 22, 
23) ; then lowering his hand, he incenses with three swings 
the front of the altar on the Gospel side (as in n. 24, 25, 
26), advancing one step at each swing ; having arrived at 
the middle, he makes a bow or genuflection, and continues 
to incense the front of the altar with three other swings (as 
in n. 27, 28, 29), advancing likewise one step at each swing; 

* The Rubrics and Ceremonial prescribe the incensing of the Cross, 
etc., to be done triplici ductu. We can find no authority for the 
" double" swings as directed by Rev. J. Hughes. All commentators 
are of one mind on this subject. 



176 HIGH MASS. 

when he is arrived at the Epistle side, he stops, gives the 
censer to the deacon, and, standing with his face turned 
towards him, is incensed by him, 

7. After the incensing, the celebrant reads the Introit, 
says the Kyrie, and if the music is long, makes a bow to 
the cross, and goes per breviorem to sit clown. He should 
be sitting when he receives his cap from the deacon, as also 
when he gives it back to him. Whilst sitting, the cele- 
brant holds his hands spread on his lap, and when he re- 
turns to the altar he salutes the clergy, first at the Epistle 
side, then the Gospel side, before he arrives at the middle. 

8. When he is arrived before the lowest step, the cele- 
brant makes a profound bow or a genuflection, goes up to 
the platform, and there, in the middle, intones the Gloria 
in excelsis Deo, and continues it with the ministers in a low 
voice. Having finished it, at the signal from the master of 
ceremonies, the celebrant makes a bow, and by the nearest 
way goes to the bench as before. At the end of the Gloria 
he takes off* his cap and returns to the altar, as directed 
above, he kisses it in the middle, turns to the people, sings 
Dominus vobiscum. Then he goes to the Missal and sings 
the prayers. 

9. If the altar is fixed in such a manner that the priest 
is always turned to the people, the celebrant, saying, Domi- 
nus vobiscum, Orate fratres, Ite, missa est, and giving the 
blessing, ought not to turn. 

10. After the sub-deacon has sung the Epistle, the cele- 
brant places his hand on the Missal, to be kissed by the 
sub-deacon, and then gives him the blessing; afterwards 
he goes to the middle, says- Munda cor meum, goes to the 
Missal, reads the Gospel, but after reading it he does not 
kiss the book, nor does he say Per evangelica dicta; then 
he returns to the middle of the altar to put the incense into 
the censer, and to bless it. 

If there is in the gradual any verse at which the clergy 
kneel, when the choir sing it, the celebrant kneels on the 
edge of the platform, with the ministers at his side, till the 
verse is sung. 

11. When the deacon, having said Munda cor meum, 
kneels before the celebrant, and says, Jube Domnc benedicere, 



CELEBRANT. 177 

the celebrant, turned towards him, with his hands joined, 
says, " Dominus sit in corde tuo, et in labiis tuis, ut digne et 
competenter annunties Evangelium mum: In nomine Patris, 
et Filii, et Spiritus Sancti. Amen" In saying In nomine, 
etc., he makes on him the sign of the cross, then he places 
his right hand on the book, to be kissed by the deacon. 

12. When the deacon goes down below the steps, the cele- 
brant retires to the Epistle side, and remains turned to the 
altar, with his hands joined, till the deacon begins to sing 
the Gospel ; then he turns round towards the deacon, makes 
the usual signs of the cross at the words, Sequentia, etc., 
bows to the cross at the name of Jesus, bows also towards 
the book, at the name of Mary, and of the saint w r hose feast 
is celebrated. 

13. When the sub^deacon offers him the Missal, the cele- 
brant kisses it, saying, Per evangelica dicta, etc., remains 
in the same place till he is incensed by the deacon, goes to 
the middle^ intones the Credo, if it is to be said, and con- 
tinues it in a low voice with his ministers. 

14. Having said the Credo, the celebrant goes to sit, as 
said above; at the Incarnatus he takes off his cap, and 
bows towards the cross, till the verse is finished; he takes 
it off also at the words, Simul ddoratur, and at the end of 
the Credo returns to the altar, kisses it in the middle, and 
sings Dominus vobiscum and Oremus. 

15. After having said the Offertory, the celebrant re- 
ceives from the deacon the paten with the particle, offers it, 
saying the usual prayer, blesses the water, saying Deus, 
qui humance substantia?; receives from him the chalice, 
offers it, saying, Offerimus, etc. 

16. The celebrant having said, In spiritu humilitatis and 
Veni sanctificator , puts incense into the censer, saying the 
prayer, "Per inter cessionem Beati Michaelis Archangeli, 
stantis a dextris altaris incensi, et omnium electorum suorum 
incensum istud dignetur Dominus benedicere, et in odorem 
siiavitatus accipere. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. 
Amen" At the word benedicere, the celebrant makes the 
sign of the cross on the incense, then he receives the censer, 
and without making any reverence, he incenses the sacred 
offerings, forming with the censer three crosses on both 



178 HIGH MASS. 

chalice and particle, saying at the first, Incensum istud; at 
the second, a te benedictum ; at the third, ascendat ad te, 
Domine; and afterwards making three circles round the 
chalice and particle, beginning the first two from the right 
to the left, and the third from the left to the right (see the 
plate), and saying at the first, et descendat super nos ; at the 
second, misericordia ; and at the third, tua. 

17. After the incensing of the sacred offerings, the cele- 
brant makes a profound bow, or a genuflection, and incenses 
the cross and the altar, as directed above, but with this differ- 
ence, that at each swing he says the prayer, distributed as 
follows: at n. 1 (see the plate), Dirigatur ; 2, Domine; 3, 
Oratio mea; S,8icut; 9, Incensum; 10, In conspectu tuo ; 
11, Elevatio; 12, Manuum; 13, Mearum; 14, Sacrificium; 
15, Vespertinum; 16, Pone; 17, Domine; 18, Custodiam; 19, 
Ori; 20, Meo ; 21, Et ostium; 22, Circumstantice ; 23, Labiis 
meis; 24, Ut non declinet ; 25, Cormeum; 26, In verba mali- 
tios ; 27, Ad excusandas; 28,Excusationes; 29, In peccatis.* 

18. When the celebrant gives back the censer to the 
deacon, he says, Accendat in nobis Dominus ignem sui 
amor is et flammam odernce charitatis. Amen. Afterwards 
he is incensed, he washes his hands, and continues Mass ; 
he sings the Preface, the Pater, etc. After the Agnus Dei, 
having said the first of the three prayers before the com- 
munion, he kisses the altar, gives the Pax to the deacon, 
saying, Pax tecum, and goes on as usual. 

19. After having received the Precious Blood, if com- 
munion is to be given, the celebrant, after the deacon has 
uncovered the pyx, makes a genuflection with him; then 
turns towards the deacon whilst he says the Confiteor; after 
which, he says, Misereatur and Indidgentiam, etc. As 
usual, he turns to the altar, makes a genuflection, takes the 
pyx in his left hand, and one of the small Hosts in his 
right, and, turned to the people, says, Ecce Agnus Dei, etc. 
Then he gives the communion, first to the deacon, after- 
wards to the sub-deacon ; and likewise he gives the com- 
munion to the others, first to him who kneels at the Epistle 
side, then to the other who kneels at the Gospel side. 

For the communion of the people, the celebrant goes to 

* This distribution of the words is neither prescribed by the Rubrics 
nor by the Ceremonial, yet it is well to do as recommended here. 



CELEBRANT. 179 

the railing of the sanctuary, and there gives the commu- 
nion, beginning from the Epistle side. 

20. After communion, the celebrant either consumes the 
Hosts that are left, or, if the Blessed Sacrament is kept at 
that altar, he puts them in the pyx with the others in the 
tabernacle. When requisite, he removes from the pyx 
into the chalice the small particles that may be there, 
takes the purification and ablution as usual, wipes the 
chalice with the purifier, leaves it to the sub-deacon, and 
goes to the Epistle side, to read the Communio. 

21. When the choir has sung the Communio, the cele- 
brant sings, Dominus vobiscum, Oremus, and the prayers ; 
then he sings again, Dominus vobiscum, and remains turned 
towards the people, whilst the deacon sings Ite, missa est, 
or he turns to the altar, if the Benedicamus Domino be 
said, and he says it in a low voice. [Deer. S. R. C, 7th 
Sept., 1816.) 

22. The celebrant then says, Placeat, gives the blessing, 
and reads the last Gospel, as usual ; after which he goes to 
the middle, makes a bow to the cross, goes down below the 
lowest step, makes a profound bow or a genuflection. If 
the clergy remain in the sanctuary, the celebrant salutes 
them on each side, receives from the deacon the cap, puts 
it on himself, and walks to the sacristy, after the deacon. 

23. At the door of the sacristy, if the clergy have re- 
turned thither, the celebrant takes off his cap, having his 
ministers at his side, salutes them, first at the right, then 
at the left; makes a bow to the cross, salutes the ministers, 
and, assisted by them, takes off the sacred vestments, sa- 
lutes them again, and retires to make his thanksgiving. 



180 HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD. 



CHAPTER III. 

HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD.* 



Article I. 



THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 



1. In the sacristy, black vestments. 

2. The bench of the ministers should be bare. 

3. Antipendium of black ; a carpet of purple color, 
covering the platform only. 

4. The side-table is to be covered with a cloth, hanging 
down a little on each side ; besides everything necessary 
for the celebration of Mass, the candles to be distributed 
to the clergy should be prepared on it. The chalice is not 
to be covered with the long veil, which is not used by the 
sub-deacon at this Mass. 

Article II. 

What is to be particularly observed at High Mass for 
the Dead. 

1. During the Confiteor, the master of ceremonies kneels 
below the steps at the Epistle side ; after the Confiteor, the 
deacon and sub-deacon, without going up to the middle of 
the altar, go to the Epistle side, to attend as usual the 
celebrant for the Introit. There is no incensing at the be- 
ginning of this Mass. The clergy and the minor minis- 
ters kneel down, while the celebrant sings the prayers. 

2. The sub-deacon, after having sung the Epistle, does 

* Solemn Mass for the Dead prcesente cadavere is permitted every 
day, except on great festivals of precept of first class, on the last 
three davs in Holy Week, and on the feast of the titular saint. (S. 
R. C, 29 Jan., 1752.) 



HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD. 181 

not carry the Missal to the celebrant, but immediately gives 
it to the master of ceremonies, and does not kiss the cele- 
brant's hand nor receive his blessing. 

3. While the Sequentia is sung, the celebrant having 
read it, goes with the ministers to sit on the bench ; then 
candles are distributed to the clergy, who keep them 
lighted in their hands whilst the Gospel is sung, and from 
the Sanctus till after the communion of the celebrant. 

4. Five or six strophes before the end of the Sequentia, 
the ministers and the celebrant go by the nearest way to 
the altar, where the celebrant goes to the middle, and says, 
Munda cor meum, etc. ; the sub-deacon removes the book 
with the stand from the Epistle side to the Gospel, and 
the celebrant reads the Gospel. The deacon, at the proper 
time, carries, as usual, the Missal to the altar, lays it in the 
middle, kneels on the edge of the platform, and says, 
Munda cor meum, but does not ask the blessing of the 
celebrant nor kiss his hand. 

5. After the celebrant has read the Gospel, the deacon 
and sub-deacon go down below the steps. The acolytes, 
without candlesticks, go behind the deacon and sub-deacon. 
All make a genuflection, and go to the usual place, where 
the deacon sings the Gospel. Incense is not used at the 
Gospel. 

6. After the Gospel, the sub-deacon does not carry the 
book to the celebrant to kiss, but gives it back at once to 
the master of ceremonies. 

7. After the celebrant has said Oremus, at the Offertory, 
the sub-deacon goes to the side-table, and carries from 
thence to the Epistle side the chalice, with its veil and 
burse. 

8. The deacon takes the corporal out of the burse, and 
spreads it on the altar, as usual ; the sub-deacon takes the 
veil off the chalice, and gives it to the acolyte ; when he 
presents the water, he does not offer it to the celebrant to 
be blessed. 

9. At the Mass for the Dead, neither the celebrant's 
hand nor anything given to or received from him is to be 
kissed. 

10. While the celebrant is making the oblation of the 



182 HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

chalice, the sub-deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, 
making a genuflection in the middle. The sub-deacon 
does not hold the paten, as at the other Masses. 

11. After the oblation of the chalice, the deacon places 
the paten partly under the corporal, and covers the rest of 
it with the purifier ; at the proper time he presents the 
censer for the incense, and both ministers attend the cele- 
brant at the incensing, which is done in the usual manner; 
the celebrant only is incensed by the deacon, after the in- 
censing of the altar. 

12. The celebrant being incensed, the sub-deacon re- 
ceives from one of the acolytes the water-cruet and the 
basin ; the deacon having given the censer to the censer- 
bearer, receives from the other acolyte the towel, and both 
go to the Epistle side for the Lavabo ; afterwards they go 
to the middle, as usual, behind the celebrant. The deacon 
at the proper time answers, Suscipiat, etc. 

13. At the end of the Preface, the deacon goes up to 
the right of the celebrant, and the sub-deacon to the left, 
and say with him the Sanctus ; then the sub-deacon re- 
turns to his place below the steps, and the deacon goes to 
the left of the celebrant to attend to the book. 

14. At the words, Quam oblationem, the deacon goes to 
the right of the celebrant, and the sub-deacon to the 
Epistle side, where he kneels on the second step. Having 
put incense in the censer, he receives it from the censer- 
bearer, and incenses the Blessed Sacrament thrice, at each 
elevation ; afterwards he gives back the censer to the cen- 
ser-bearer, returns to his place in the middle, makes a 
genuflection, and remains there till Pax Domini. 

The acolytes remain kneeling on each side of the altar, 
holding their candles till after the celebrant's communion. 

15. At the words, Dimitte nobis, the deacon only makes 
a genuflection, and goes up to the right of the celebrant, 
to give him the paten. 

16. A little before the celebrant says Agnus Dei, the 
sub-deacon makes a genuflection, and goes to the left of 
the celebrant ; there he makes a genuflection with the 
others, who profoundly bowing towards the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, say the Agnus Dei, without striking their breast. 



SOLEMN VESPERS. 183 

17. After the Agnus Dei, the deacon and sub-deacon 
exchange places, making a genuflection both before and 
after ; the Pax is not given ; the rest goes on as usual. 

18. After the last Dominus vobiscum, the deacon, with- 
out turning himself to the people, sings, JRequiescant in 
pace (always in the plural number). The celebrant, turned 
likewise to the altar, savs the same in a low voice. (Deer. 
S. R. C, Sept. 7th, 1816.) The blessing is not given j the 
rest is as usual. 



CHAPTER IV. 

SOLEMN VESPERS. 

Article I. 

THIXGS TO BE PREPARED. 

In the Sanctuary. 



1. Six candlesticks on the altar, and the cross in the 
middle. 

2. In the middle of the sanctuary, at a proper distance, 
two or four stools for the cope-bearers. 

3. Against the railings in the middle, three stools,, or 
a bench sufficiently long to accommodate the censer-bearer 
and the two acolytes. 

4. Near the bench for the officiating priest, a stool for 
the master of ceremonies.* 

5. A book-stand with the book, in front of the priest's 
bench, for the officiating priest, which may be covered with 
a veil of the color of the day. 

6. The celebrant's bench, covered with a green cloth. 

* If the servers are to wear caps, they should be put on the bench 
beforehand. 



184 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

7. At the altar the antipendium; and if there is the 
Blessed Sacrament, on the tabernacle the canopy, of the 
color of the day. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. A surplice and a cope of the color of the day ; and if 
the Benediction is to be given immediately after Vespers 
without previously going to the sacristy, a stole of the color 
of the cope. 

2. Two or four surplices and copes of the same color for 
the cope-bearers, 

3. Four surplices for the master of ceremonies and the 
three servers ; and surplices for the clergy. 

4. The censer and incense-boat. 

5. Two candlesticks with candles for the acolytes. 

Article II. 

General Hides to be observed by the Clergy in the Sanctuary 
for solemn ' Vespers and Compline, 

1. Besides what has been said in the first chapter of this 
book concerning High Mass, clergymen should observe 
what follows, in solemn Vespers : They should not enter 
the sanctuary whilst Deus in adjutorium, Gloria Pakri,, 
prayers, Capihdum, the first verse, and the last strophe of 
any hymn, the first strophe of the Ave Maris Stella, and 
Veni, Creator Spiritus, and the last two strophes of the 
hymns, Pange Lingua, Vexilla Regis prodeunt, are sung. 

2. At Compline, they should not go into the sanctuary 
whilst the Confession is being made; should, however, any 
one enter the sanctuary at the abovementioned times, he 
should kneel, or bow, or stand, during the singing of the 
aforesaid verses or strophes, in conformity with the clergy 
already in the sanctuary. 

3. As soon as the officiating clergyman arrives at the 
altar, the clergy kneel to say, each in particular, the prayer, 
Aperi; they should kneel likewise during the first strophe 
of the hymns, Ave Maris Stella, and Veni, Creator; during 
the hymn, Tantum ergo; when the Blessed Sacrament is 



ACOLYTES. 185 

exposed ; while they sing the strophe, Crux ave, spes 
unica, even if it be said during the Paschal time; at the 
ferial prayers ; at the anthem of the Blessed Virgin, said at 
the end of the office, and at the Pater, Ave, and Credo, re- 
cited after said anthem, except all Saturdays after Vespers, 
and all Sundays and the Paschal time, in which the clergy 
kneel only at the prayer Sacrosandce. 

4. The clergy should stand while the Pater and Ave are 
said; and from the beginning of Vespers till the first Psalm 
is intoned. When the antiphon is intoned, all the clergy 
who are on the same side with the clergyman that intones 
it, rise as soon as the chanters in cope come to give the 
tone: the clergy should stand also during the chapter, the 
hymn, and from the hymn till the end of Vespers, only 
except whilst the choir sing and repeat the antiphon of the 
Magnificat; at which time they sit, if the incensing be over. 
They should likewise stand during the prayer and com- 
memorations, and till the end of Vespers. 

5. At Compline, the clergy stand from the beginning 
till the intonation of the first Psalm; from the intoning of 
the hymn till the end of Compline. 

6. The clergy bow, and take off their caps at the Gloria 
Patri, at the names of Jesus and Mary, at the last strophe 
of the hymns, when it contains the doxology; at the words, 
Sit nomen Domini benedictum, of the Psalm, Laudate pueri 
Dominum, and whilst the Confiteor is said at Compline. 

Article III. 
Instruction for the Acolytes. 

1. Before the beginning of Vespers, the acolytes go to 
the sanctuary, and put their caps at their places. Having 
lighted the candles on the altar, they afterwards light those 
of their own candlesticks, and go to the sanctuary, as when 
High Mass is to be celebrated. 

2. When the officiating clergymen has arrived at the 
altar, the acolytes turn themselves to the altar, make with 
the others a genuflection, and immediately after go to place 
the candlesticks on the steps near the altar, each on his 

16 



186 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

own side ; they put out the candles of their candlesticks, 
and go to their place. 

3. Towards the end of the last Psalm, the acolytes, leav- 
ing their caps at their places, go to light the candles of 
their candlesticks, and with them go to the middle before 
the lowest step, make a genuflection, and go to the officiating 
clergyman. 

4. Having made a bow to him, the acolytes, turned 
towards each other, stop on each side of the book-stand 
which is before him, till he has intoned the hymn, and when 
the Ave Maris Stella or the Veni Creator Spiritus is said, 
they stand during the first strophe; then they go, after 
having saluted the celebrant; they should take care to turn 
in such a manner that each one remains on his own side ; 
that is, the first acolyte at the right, and the second acolyte 
at the left ; then they return to the altar, where, having 
made a genuflection, they carry the candlesticks to their 
place, and leave them lighted; afterwards they go to their 
seats. 

5. After the Gloria Patri of the Magnificat, the acolytes 
take the candlesticks, and go, as before, to the celebrant, 
salute him, place themselves as before, and remain there 
till after all the prayers are sung ; after which, when the 
celebrant has said Dominus vobiscum, having saluted him, 
they go to the middle ; and when he has arrived at the 
same place, they make a genuflection together with him, 
salute the clergy, and w T alk to the sacristy. 

If the clergy also immediately after Vespers return to 
the sacristy, when the celebrant has arrived before the 
altar, they do not make a genuflection w r ith him, but re- 
main standing daring the anthem of the Blessed Virgin, 
and its prayer; after the celebrant has said Divinum aux- 
ilium, they make a genuflection, and walk to the sacristy, 
as directed. Ch. iii, n. 19. 

Article IV. 

Instruction for the Censer-Bearer. 

1. The censer-bearer prepares everything as directed for 
High Mass. 



CENSER-BEARER. 187 

2. He goes to the sanctuary with the clergy, and sits in 
such a place of the sanctuary as may be most convenient, 
that he may go to the sacristy when required. The hymn 
being intoned, or if there be no hymn, as in Easter-week, 
about the end of the fifth Psalm, he takes off his cap, leaves 
it at his place, and having made a genuflection to the altar, 
goes to the sacristy to prepare the censer. 

3. When the celebrant, after intoning the antiphon of 
the Magnificat, arrives at the altar, the censer-bearer also 
goes thither, making a genuflection below the steps ; the 
incense having been put into the censer, and blessed as 
usual, the censer-bearer gives the censer to the master of 
ceremonies, from whom he receives the incense-boat ; then, 
without making a genuflection in the middle, he goes im- 
mediately to the left of the celebrant ; there he makes a 
genuflection, keeps the celebrant's cope raised on his side 
during the incensing, and follows him, making a genuflec- 
tion at the same time with the master of ceremonies, when- 
ever the celebrant makes it • or if the Blessed Sacrament be 
not on the altar, whenever he makes a bow in the middle. 

4. After the incensing of the altar, the censer-bearer 
goes to the Epistle side, receives the censer from the master 
of ceremonies, puts the censer-boat on the table, gives 
back the censer to the master of ceremonies, remains at his 
left, makes with him a profound bow to the celebrant 
before and after he is incensed, receives the censer, and 
incenses the clergy, as directed in the instruction for the 
deacon. 

5. The censer-bearer having incensed the clergy, incenses 
with a double swing the master of ceremonies, and then 
incenses the people, as directed for High Mass ; he carries 
the censer to the sacristy, and returns to the sanctuary, 
making the usual genuflections. 

If there be chanters in cope, the censer-bearer does not 
go to the left of the celebrant for the incensing, as in such 
case they assist the celebrant ; the clergy also are incensed 
by the first of them, and the censer-bearer accompanies him, 
as he does the deacon at Mass, holding his cope raised at 
his right hand, that he may more easily swing the censer. 
After the clergy on each side are incensed, the censer-bearer 



188 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

accompanies tKe chanters in cope to incense the other chant- 
ers dressed likewise in cope; then he receives from him 
the censer, and standing at the Epistle side, he incenses 
him with two swings, then the master of ceremonies with 
a double swing, and lastly the people. 

If, besides the high altar, any other altar is to be in- 
censed, the censer-bearer will follow the directions of the 
master of ceremonies. 

Article V. 

Instruction for the Master of Ceremonies. 

1. The master -of ceremonies having prepared every- 
thing, and placed the marks in the book of the celebrant, 
which is to be placed on a stand covered with a long veil 
of the same color of the vestments, and which should be 
sufficiently light to be easily removed, goes to the sacristy, 
helps the celebrant to put on the surplice and cope ; and 
everything being ready, gives the signal to the acolytes to 
walk to the sanctuary, having first, in an audible voice, 
announced to the clergy the Vespers, the commemorations 
to be made, and other particulars. 

2. As the clergy walk out of the sacristy, the master of 
ceremonies bows to the celebrant to follow them, and walks 
with him to the altar; at the door of the sacristy he gives 
him the holy water ; when they arrive at the altar, he makes 
a genuflection at the right of the celebrant below the steps, 
kneels during the Aperi, and rises with the celebrant. 

3. When the celebrant bows to the altar, the master of 
ceremonies makes a genuflection, salutes the clergy at the 
Gospel side, and at the Epistle side ; accompanies the cele- 
brant to his seat, stops there at his left, receiving from him, 
and giving him at the proper times, his cap, with the usual 
kisses, turning the leaves of the book when necessary, 
pointing out to him everything that he has to read or sing, 
and raising his cope whenever he has to make the sign of 
the cross. 

4. The master of ceremonies sits on a stool near the cele- 
brant, whilst he is not employed in attending him particu- 



MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 189 

larly, and whilst the Psalms are sung; making him signs 
to take off or put on his cap, whenever he is to do it ; he 
likewise makes the same signs to the clergy in the sanctu- 
ary, unless another be appointed for this purpose, which is 
desirable. 

5. Towards the last Psalm, the master of ceremonies 
makes a sign to the acolytes to light their candles, and to 
come before the celebrant, whilst the antiphon is repeated; 
likewise he makes them a sign when they should go. 

6. When the Magnificat is intoned, the master of cere- 
monies receives the celebrant's cap, accompanies him to the 
altar, having, with him, saluted the clergy, first on the 
Epistle side, then on the Gospel side. 

7. When arrived at the altar, the master of ceremonies 
makes a genuflection below the steps at the right of the 
celebrant, raises his cassock a little in front, and the lower 
extremity of the cope, whilst with him he ascends to the 
platform, presents the incense-boat and the spoon, as usual, 
with the customary kisses, for the benediction of the in- 
cense, saying, Benedicite, Pater Reverende. 

8. The incense being blessed, the master of ceremonies 
gives the boat to the censer-bearer, receives from him the 
censer, and gives it to the celebrant; whilst the latter in- 
censes the altar, the master of ceremonies raises his cope on 
his side, and with the censer-bearer makes a genuflection 
whenever the celebrant makes a bow, or a genuflection. 

9. After the incensing, the master of ceremonies receives 
the censer from the celebrant, gives it to the censer-bearer, 
goes again by the celebrant on the platform, makes with 
him a bow to the cross, goes down below the steps, makes 
a genuflection, salutes the clergy, accompanies the celebrant 
to the bench, and there incenses him with three double 
swings, gives the censer to the censer-bearer, goes near the 
celebrant, and points out to him whatever he has to read 
or sing. The master of ceremonies is incensed after the 
clergy on each side of the sanctuary. 

10. When the celebrant has said Fidelium animce, the 
master of ceremonies gives him the cap, and goes with him 
to the altar, after having saluted the clergy. 

11. If Compline is not said after Vespers, the master of 



190 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

ceremonies, having made a genuflection before the altar, 
presents to the celebrant the book, to intone the anthem of 
the Blessed Virgin, either kneeling or standing, as required 
by the particular time ; then, at the left of the celebrant, 
he returns to the sacristy, salutes the clergy, makes a bow 
to the cross, and assists the celebrant to take off the sacred 
vestments. 

12. If there be chanters in cope, they attend the cele- 
brant at the altar for the incensing, and the first of them 
incenses the celebrant and the clergy. 

13. If, besides the high altar, any other be incensed, as 
for instance that of the Blessed Sacrament, which ought to 
be incensed first, the master of ceremonies should observe 
what follows : whilst the hymn is sung, he should invite 
two or four of the clergymen in the sanctuary, who are the 
first in dignity, to assist at the incensing. 

14. The Magnificat having been intoned, the acolytes 
will be ready with their candlesticks in the middle of the 
sanctuary, and the censer-bearer between them, and the two 
or four clergymen behind the acolytes, all turned to the 
altar. 

15. The master of ceremonies accompanies the celebrant 
to the altar between the two chanters in cope ; whither 
being arrived, they make the genuflection, salute the clergy, 
and walk out of the sanctuary in the following order ; 

16. The censer-bearer walks first, then the acolytes, the 
chanters in cope, haviug the celebrant in the midst, and 
raising his cope on each side. They put on their caps be- 
fore they move forward. 

17. If there be four cope-bearers, the two chanters walk 
first, and the two others after them, at the side of the cele- 
brant. The four clergymen follow the celebrant, two by 
two. 

18. Having arrived at the altar of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, they make a genuflection. The acolytes and the 
cope-bearers, with the celebrant in their midst, place them- 
selves in a row before the lowest step. The celebrant, with 
the two cope-bearers next to him, ascends to the altar to in- 
cense it, and the others remain standing below. 

19. After the incensing, having made a genuflection, 



COPE-BEARERS. 191 

they return to the high altar as they came. The acolytes 
having arrived at the sanctuary, divide and retire, the first 
with the censer-bearer at his right towards the Epistle 
side, the second towards the Gospel side, so also the chant- 
ers in cope ; and the celebrant between the two assistant 
cope-bearers, having arrived, and all forming one line, 
they salute the clergy on each side, walk to the altar, and 
make a genuflection below the steps. 

20. The acolytes immediately put the candlesticks at 
their places on each side of the altar ; the others remain as 
before till after the incensing of the high altar, for which 
the incense is not again put into the censer. 

21. After the incensing, they all make the genuflection 
(the celebrant only makes an inclination, if the Blessed 
Sacrament be not at the high altar), salute the clergy, and 
the four clergymen return to their places, after having 
bowed to each other. 



Article VI. 

Instruction for the Cope-Bearers. 

On some festivals, Vespers are sung with the assistance 
of two or four clergymen, according to the greater or less 
degree of solemnity of the festival, dressed in surplice and 
cope. When there are four, two of them, who are inferior 
in dignity, should perform the office of chanters, and go to 
the celebrant and clergy to pre-intone the antiphon and 
intone the Psalms in the middle of the sanctuary. The 
two others attend immediately the celebrant ; when there 
are only two, these perform the office of assistants and 
chanters. 

1. The cope-bearers having put on their surplices, assist 
the celebrant to put on his surplice and cope; then, at- 
tended by the acolytes, they put on their own copes, which 
should be of the proper color and uniform, as also their 
caps. 

2. At a sign made by the master of ceremonies, they 
come down, bow to the cross, and with their caps on, walk 
after the clergy, at the side of the celebrant, raising his 



192 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

cope on each side; if there be four cope-bearers, the two 
chanters walk together first. 

3. As they enter the sanctuary, they take off their caps, 
and when arrived at the altar, all in one line make a genu- 
flection below the lowest step (the celebrant bowing, if the 
Blessed Sacrament be not at the altar) ; they kneel on the 
lowest step ; at a sign made by the master of ceremonies 
they rise, make a genuflection, salute the clergy, accom- 
panying the celebrant to the bench, they stop before him, 
being turned towards him, without turning entirely their 
back to the altar, until the first cope-bearer chanter has 
pre-intoned to him the first antiphon. 

4. Then they all go to the middle to intone the Psalm, 
taking care always to make a genuflection to the altar, in 
going to and from it, and a bow to the celebrant every 
time they pass before him. Having intoned the first 
Psalm, they make a genuflection, salute each other, and go 
to sit down on the stools prepared for them in the middle 
of the sanctuary, before the altar. 

5. The cope-bearers put on their caps only after having 
seated themselves, and sing together with the rest of the 
clergy. 

6. After the first Psalm, both chanters go to pre-intone 
the antiphon to the clergyman who occupies the first place 
on the Gospel side ; and when having intoned it, they go 
to the middle to intone the Psalm, and thus successively 
and alternately on each side of the sanctuary ; the two as- 
sistants remain sitting during all this time. 

7. All the Psalms being sung and the last antiphon re- 
peated, the four cope-bearers go to the celebrant, and re- 
main before him, whilst he sings the chapter ; then the first 
chanter pre-intones to him the hymn ; which being done, 
they return to their places, after having made a bow to the 
celebrant and a genuflection to the altar. They remain 
there standing, with their heads uncovered. 

When the Ave Maris Stella, or Veni Creator, is sung, 
the cope-bearers go to the middle, and kneel during the 
first strophe. 

8. After the hymn, the cope-bearers go to the middle, 
and sing the verse ; then they go to pre-intone the antiphon 






COPE-BEARERS. 1 93 

to the celebrant, return to the middle, intone the Magnifi- 
cat, make a genuflection, and go to the celebrant. 

9. As they accompany him to the altar, he being be- 
tween them (in case no other altar is to be incensed), they 
salute the clergy, and make together a genuflection to the 
altar ; the two assistant cope-bearers, with the celebrant, go 
up to the altar, and the others, if there be any, remain 
below the steps; the first assistant cope-bearer presents the 
incense-boat for the benediction of the incense, and the 
second raises the celebrant's cope a little on his right. 

10. During the incensing, they hold the celebrant's cope 
raised a little on each side ; after which they return to the 
middle, make a bow to the cross, go below the steps, make 
a genuflection to the altar, salute the clergy and accompany 
the celebrant to the bench ; the first assistant cope-bearer 
incenses the celebrant, then the clergy, beginning at the 
Gospel side; and the others go to their places. 

11. After having incensed the clergy, who are on the 
first or highest row of benches, or stools, on each side, the 
first assistant cope-bearer incenses the cope-bearers, each 
with two swings ; then he continues to incense those who 
are in the inferior rows; then, having returned to his place, 
he is incensed by the censer-bearer. 

12. When the celebrant is about to say the prayer, all 
the cope-bearers rise, go to attend him at the conclusion, 
bowing at the name of Jesus, and having bowed to the cele- 
brant, they go to the middle to sing the Benedicamus Dom- 
ino; or if there be any commemorations, after the first 
prayer, they go to the middle to sing the verses; they re- 
main there, and sing the Benedicamus Domino. 

13. Having sung the Benedicamus, the cope-bearers go 
again to the celebrant, make with him a bow to the clergy, 
go to the altar, make a genuflection to the cross, go to {he 
sacristy in the same order as they had come from it, or 
assist to recite the usual anthem. 

14. The cope-bearers go to the sacristy, aud if the clergy 
also have left the sanctuary, and are already in the sacristy, 
they salute them, and take oif their copes, after having as- 
sisted the celebrant to disrobe. 

17 



194 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

If, besides the high altar, any other is to be incensed, 
they follow the directions of the master of ceremonies. 



Article VII. 
Instruction for the Celebrant. 

1. The officiating priest, having made an inclination to 
the cross, walks with his cap on, to the altar, attended by 
the master of ceremonies ; when arrived there, he takes off 
his cap, makes a profound bow to the cross, or if the Blessed 
Sacrament be at the high altar, makes a genuflection below 
the steps, and kneels down to say the Aperi Domine, which 
he, as well as each of the clergy, say submissd voce. 

What has been said about the profound bow or genuflec- 
tion, is to be observed whenever we say that the celebrant 
makes a profound bow ; for if the Blessed Sacrament is 
kept at the high altar, the celebrant should make a genu- 
flection. 

2. After the Aperi, the celebrant rises, makes a profound 
bow, salutes the clergy at each side of the sanctuary, and 
goes to the bench, which is the same where he sits with the 
ministers at High Mass, and should be placed at the Epis- 
tle side near the wall, facing the Gospel side, and near the 
altar. There, standing, he says, Pater et Ave; intones 
Deus in adjutorium; bows at the Gloria Patri, towards 
the altar; sits when the first Psalm is begun, and, having 
received the cap from the master of ceremonies, he puts 
it on. 

3. Every time the Gloria Patri is sung, he takes off* his 
cap, and bows during that verse, then he puts on his cap ; 
likewise he takes it off, and bows at the names of Jesus, 
Mary, and of the saint whose feast is celebrated. 

4. After the Psalms have been sung, the celebrant rises, 
sings the chapter, intones the hymn, during which he re- 
mains standing, and intones the antiphon of the Magnificat. 

5. Whilst the choir sings the antiphon of the Magnificat, 
the celebrant sits down ; when the Magnificat is begun, he 
rises, goes to the altar with his hands joined, and salutes 



CELEBRANT. 195 

the clergy as usual ; when he has arrived at the altar, he 
makes a profound bow to the cross, goes up, kisses the 
altar, and makes the incensing as directed for High Mass. 
After it, he gives the censer to the master, of ceremonies (if 
there be no cope-bearers), goes to the middle, bows to the 
cross, goes below the steps, makes a profound bow, and 
goes to his place, where he is incensed with three swings. 

6. After the Magnificat is sung, the celebrant sits down, 
with his cap on, whilst they sing or repeat the antiphon of 
the Magnificat ; then he rises, sings the prayers, and the 
Dominus vobiscum ; the Benedieamus is to be sung either 
by the cope-bearers or the choir ; and having said Fidelium 
animcB, etc., he goes to the altar in the usual manner. 

7. The celebrant when arrived at the altar, if Compline 
is not to be sung, after having said the words, Pater noster, 
in an audible voice, and continued and finished secretly, he 
says, Dominus det nobis suam pacem; then the anthem of 
the Blessed Virgin is said or sung, either standing or 
kneeling, according to the different prescriptions of the 
Rubrics for the different times; the celebrant standing, says 
or sings, in the ferial tone, the prayer, and after it, Divinum 
auxilium. 

8. If the clergy leave the sanctuary, the celebrant waits 
till the last couple have made the genuflection, then at the 
sign made by the master of ceremonies, having made a pro- 
found bow to the altar, he walks, with his cap on, to the 
sacristy, and on his entering it, he takes it off, salutes the 
clergy, and disrobes, as usual. 

9. If Compline is to be sung after Vespers, then the 
celebrant leaves the sanctuary after having said Fidelium 
animce, etc., and returns to the sacristy preceded by the 
acolytes, and attended by the master of ceremonies and 
cope-bearers, if there be any. 

At the hymn, Ave Maris Stella, or Veni Creator Sjiiritiis, 
the celebrant, after having intoned them, kneels at his 
place before his seat, during the first strophe. He kneels 
also there on similar occasions. For the incensing of 
another altar besides the principal one, he follows the di- 
rections of the master of ceremonies. 

The celebrant should never put on his cope in the sane- 



196 SOLEMN VESPEES. 

tuary during Vespers ; but he must do it in the sacristy, 
before he goes to the sanctuary for Vespers. Neither 
should he incense the bishop, or any other superior prel- 
ate ; but after having incensed the altar, he must be in- 
censed at his place, with three throws, but if the bishop 
be present, only with two throws, after which the bishop 
is incensed with three throws. 



CHAPTEE V. 



OF SOLEMN VESPERS, AND OF THE PROCESSION ON COR- 
PUS CHRISTI, AND DURING THE OCTAVE OF THIS 
FEAST. 

Article I. 

Of Solemn Vespers, the Blessed Sacrament being exposed. 

1. The master of ceremonies should see that everything 
necessary for this solemnity be prepared ; besides what is 
required for solemn Vespers, and a stole for the clergyman 
who is to expose the Blessed Sacrament. 

2. If the Blessed Sacrament be not kept at the high 
altar, but at another, the master of ceremonies should have 
the ombrellino,* long veil, and candles ready to carry it 
to the high altar. 

3. On the altar he should prepare a corporal, the key of 
the tabernacle, and monstrance. 

4. On the side-table, the long veil, and the Missal with 
a mark in it, at the place where the prayer of the Blessed 
Sacrament may be found. 

5. The cope-bearers and the celebrant, having put on 
their copes — the celebrant, besides the cope, should have 



* A small ornamented canopy, somewhat in the shape of an um- 
brella, which is carried over the Blessed Sacrament. 



BEFORE THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 197 

on a stole — the clergy walk to the sanctuary preceded by 
the acolyte, and the censer-bearer with his censer and boat 
before them. 

6. Arrived before the altar, they make a genuflection ; 
the acolytes carry their candlesticks to the usual place; the 
celebrant, with the cope-bearers, kneels on the lowest step ; 
the priest who is to expose the Blessed Sacrament puts on 
the stole, goes up to the altar, extends the corporal in the 
middle of it, opens the tabernacle, makes a genuflection 
turning towards the Gospel side, takes the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, puts it in the monstrance and places it in the middle, 
makes a genuflection, and places it on the throne; then he 
goes below the steps at the Gospel side, takes off the stole, 
and remains there kneeling. 

7. The celebrant, with his two assistants, having made 
a profound bow, rises ; he then puts incense into the cen- 
ser, the first assistant holding the incense-boat and present- 
ing the spoon, without kissing it, and the second holding 
the cope at his right, kneels down again ; receives the cen- 
ser from the first assistant, makes a profound bow, incenses 
thrice the Blessed Sacrament, the two assistants raising in 
the meantime his cope on each side; makes again a pro- 
found bow, gives back the censer to the first assistant, who 
gives it to the master of ceremonies ; and having said the 
Aperi Domine, they rise, make a genuflection below the 
steps on both knees, and a profound bow, and go as usual 
to the bench. 

8. But if the Blessed Sacrament be kept at another 
altar, a little before Vespers, a priest in surplice and stole, 
with his cap on, carrying the burse with a corporal in it, 
and the key of the tabernacle before his breast, preceded 
by some acolytes with candles, and attended by the master 
of ceremonies, carrying the long veil and the ombrellino, 
goes from the sacristy to the altar where the Blessed Sacra- 
ment is kept. 

9. When they have arrived at the altar, they all make a 
genuflection ; the priest gives his cap to the master of cere- 
monies, goes up to the altar, extends the corporal on it, 
opens the tabernacle, and having made a genuflection, takes 
out the Blessed Sacrament, kneels, receives the veil, which 



198 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

the master of ceremonies puts on his shoulders, rises, covers 
his right hand with the veil, takes the Blessed Sacrament, 
covers it with the other extremity of the veil, and carries 
it with both his hands before his breast, reciting some 
Psalms, to the high altar, preceded by the acolytes with 
lighted candles, who alternately with the priests say the 
Psalms ; and followed by the master of ceremonies, who 
carries the ombrellino opened over him. 

10. Having arrived at the altar, the acolytes kneel below 
the steps at a short distance from them ; the priest goes up, 
places the Blessed Sacrament on the corporal, kneels, and 
in the meanwhile takes off the veil, which the master of 
ceremonies carries to the side-table, leaving the ombrellino 
in some convenient place. 

11. The priest rising, places the Blessed Sacrament in 
the monstrance, makes a genuflection, places it on its throne, 
goes below the steps, makes a genuflection on both knees 
on the lowest step, rises, puts incense into the censer, but 
does not bless it; kneels again, makes a profound bow, 
incenses the Blessed Sacrament with three throws; after 
a short prayer, rises, and all make a genuflection on both 
knees, and go to the sacristy. 

12. After the exposition of the Blessed Sacrament, at 
a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the clergy go into 
the sanctuary, and make a genuflection on both knees in 
the middle ; they go to their places without bowing to each 
other ; there they stand, and wait till the celebrant, with 
the cope-bearers, have arrived before the altar ; then they 
kneel on the lowest step. The latter, as soon as they 
arrive within sight of the Blessed Sacrament, take off their 
caps and carry them in their hands ; they make a genuflec- 
tion on both knees below the lowest step. 

13. After having made a profound bow, while kneeling, 
the celebrant and his assistants rise with the master of 
ceremonies, and the acolytes ; the acolytes carry their 
candlesticks, each to his side of the altar, and place them 
on the highest step near it ; the celebrant with his assistants 
kneels on the lowest step ; and at the same time all the 
clergy in the sanctuary kneel at their places ; say the 
Aperi; at the sign made by the master of ceremonies, all 



BEFORE THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 199 

rise, and the celebrant with the cope-bearers goes to the 
bench. It is to be remarked, that when the Blessed Sac- 
rament is exposed, no bow is made to any one in the sanc- 
tuary. 

14. Vespers are sung as usual as far as the Magnificat, 
except that no one should put on his cap, and the singers 
and cope-bearers do not bow to each other. 

15. At the Magnificat, the celebrant with the cope- 
bearers goes to the altar, where having made a genuflection 
on both knees, he goes up with his assistants, kisses the 
altar, puts in the incense, kneels on the edge of the plat- 
form, incenses the Blessed Sacrament, rises, makes a genu- 
flection, and incenses the altar as usual. 

16. After the incensing of the altar, the celebrant and 
his assistants go to the middle, make a genuflection, bend- 
ing one knee, go below the steps, the celebrant with the 
second assistant by the Gospel side, and the first assistant 
by the Epistle side ; make a genuflection, bending both 
knees on the floor below the steps, and return to the bench. 
No other altar is incensed ; but the celebrant, clergy, and 
people are incensed as usual; the censer-bearer incenses the 
people, not from the middle, but from one side, taking care 
not to turn his back to the Blessed Sacrament. 

17. After the prayers, the acolytes carry the candlesticks 
to their place, and after the Benedicamus Domino, the cele- 
brant does not say Fidelium animce, but goes with the 
cope-bearers immediately to the altar, makes a genuflection 
on both knees below the steps, and a profound bow, rises, 
and kneels with them on the lowest step. 

18. In the meanwhile the acolytes come to the sanctuary 
with lighted candles, and kneel on each side ; the singers 
intone the Tantum ergo ; the celebrant incenses the Blessed 
Sacrament as usual, and after the verse, Panem de coelo, 
etc., says the prayer, Deus qui nobis, etc., with the short 
conclusion, Qui vivis et regnas in scecula, etc. ; then a priest 
in surplice puts on the stole, goes up to the altar, and with 
the usual genuflections places the Blessed Sacrament on 
the corporal, in the middle of the altar, and assists as at 
page 134. 

19. The celebrant puts on the long veil, makes a pro- 



200 SOLExMN VESPERS. 

found bow, goes with the assistants up to the altar, makes 
a genuflection, rises, receives with both his hands, covered 
with the veil, the Blessed Sacrament, and turning by his 
left to the people, gives the Benediction as usual. 

If the altar be so situated that the celebrant always faces 
the people, he should not turn as directed above. 

20. After the Benediction, the celebrant makes a genu- 
flection, takes off the long veil, goes down, kneels on the 
lowest step, and makes a profound bow. Then the assist- 
ant priest makes a genuflection, puts the Blessed Sacra- 
ment in the fabernacle, makes again a genuflection, and 
shuts it. 

If there be no tabernacle at the high altar, the priest 
above mentioned, having taken the sacred Host from the 
monstrance, and put it into a pyx, covers it with a veil, 
and after the clergy have left the sanctuary, -he carries it 
to the altar where the Blessed Sacrament is kept, in the 
manner described above. 

21. At a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the 
acolytes with the candles go back, or, if necessary, leave 
them in a convenient place, take their candlesticks, go to 
the middle, make a genuflection, and walk to the sacristy, 
as usual. 

Article II. 
Of the Procession on Corpus Christi and its Octave. 

1. The master of ceremonies should take care to have 
prepared in the sacristy, the cope, stole, cincture, alb, and 
amice for the celebrant ; dalmatic, etc., for the deacon ; 
tunic, etc., for the sub-deacon, but without maniples ; the 
candlesticks for the acolytes, the processional cross, and, 
according to custom, the sacred vestments for the priests 
and other clergymen who attend — such as copes, chasubles, 
dalmatics, tunics, etc., but without stoles and maniples. 

2. The canopy should be prepared in a convenient place, 
and the ombrellino, two censers with their boat, and at 
least four lanterns, with candles within. 

3. The Blessed Sacrament being exposed, when every- 
thing is ready, at the sign made by the master of ceremo- 



PROCESSION OF CORPUS CHRISTI. 201 

nies, the acolytes, preceded by the censer-bearers, walk 
from the sacristy to the sanctuary, followed by the clergy, 
two by two, according to their order and dignity, and the 
celebrant walking between the deacon and sub-deacon, who 
raise his cope on each side. 

4. When they arrive within sight of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, they take off their caps, and, when they have arrived 
before the altar, they make a genuflection on both knees ; 
the clergy go to their places, and the celebrant and minis- 
ters kneel on the lowest step. 

5. At a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the 
ministers rise, the celebrant puts incense in the two censers, 
and incenses the Blessed Sacrament. The deacon takes 
from the throne the Blessed Sacrament, puts it on the cor- 
poral in the middle of the altar, makes a genuflection, and 
goes down. 

6. The celebrant, having put the long veil on his shoul- 
ders goes up with the ministers, and kneels on the edge of 
the platform ; there he receives the Ostensorium from the 
deacon, rises, turns to the people, having the ministers at 
his side, who raise the extremities of his cope ; and the 
chanters intone the Pange Lingua, and the procession 
moves, and makes the usual tour. 

7. If there is a repository with an altar, where the pro- 
cession is to stop, when the ministers arrive before it, the 
deacon kneeling receives the Blessed Sacrament from the 
celebrant, rises, puts it on the altar, or on the throne, if 
there is any, makes a genuflection, returns to the right of 
the celebrant, who takes off his veil ; the choir sings the 
Tantum ergo, and the Blessed Sacrament is incensed as 
usual. 

8. After the Partem de coelo, etc., the celebrant sings the 
prayer with the short conclusion, puts on the veil, gives 
the Benediction, and the procession is continued. 

9. The procession having returned to the church, and 
the sacred ministers having arrived at the altar, the deacon 
receives the Ostensorium, etc. The Tantum ergo, etc., the 
verses, and the prayers are sung, and the Benediction given 
as above. 



202 VESPEKS FOR THE DEAD. 



CHAPTER VI. 

VESPEES FOR THE DEAD ON THE FIRST DAY OF 
NOVEMBER. 

Article I. 
Things to be prepared. 

1. In the church, a cenotaph, or representation of a 
tomb, covered with a black cloth, with candlesticks and 
candles of unbleached wax around it. 

2. At the altar, the black altar-veil under the white 
one, if possible, otherwise it should be kept ready in the 
sacristy ; also, if the tabernacle with the Blessed Sacrament 
is on the altar, the violet canopy under the white one. 

3. On the side-table, a black cope for the celebrant. 

4. A book-stand, or desk, in a convenient place. 

Article II. 

Ceremonies peculiar to these Vespers. 

1. Whilst the Magnificat of the Vespers of All Saints is 
sung, the candles around the tomb are lighted, and whilst 
they sing the Benedicamus Domino, the acolytes go from 
the celebrant's bench, place their candlesticks as usual at 
each side of the altar, put out their candles, go behind the 
cope-bearers who sing the Benedicamus, make together a 
genuflection to the altar, and bow to the clergy, and pre- 
ceded by the acolytes with their hands joined, go to the 
sacristy, and take off their copes. 

2. After the Benedicamus Domino, the celebrant does 
not say Fidelium animce; he takes off his white cope, and 
puts on the black; the acolytes take the carpet from the 



VESPEES FOR THE DEAD. 203 

steps of the altar, and remove the white altar-veil and the 
white canopy. 

3. The celebrant having put on the black cope, all rise, 
and the choir begin Placebo Domino, and sing it entirely, 
the Vespers being of double rite; and when they begin the 
Psalm, all the clergy sit, till the beginning of the Mag- 
nificat. 

4. At the beginning of the Magnificat, they all rise, and 
the acolytes light their candles. After the Magnificat, they 
all sit down whilst the antiphon is repeated; the acolytes 
take their candlesticks, make a genuflection in the middle, 
and go before the celebrant. 

5. The antiphon being repeated, all the clergy kneel, 
except the acolytes, the celebrant intones Pater noster, which 
is continued in a low voice ; then the celebrant says, Et ne 
nos inducas, with the other verses, and the choir answers 
them. At the Dominus vobiscum, the celebrant rises and 
says the prayer, Fidelium Deus, and after it Fidelium animw, 
etc., and Requiem asternam, etc. 

6. The acolytes make the usual bow to the celebrant, go 
to the middle, make a genuflection, put the candlesticks in 
the proper place, return to the middle, and when the 
singers have sung Requiescant in pace, they make a genu- 
flection, and with their hands joined, go to the sacristy, 
followed by the clergy and the celebrant. 



PART IV. 



femorats for % frinripl Jftsiifals 



THROUGHOUT THE YEAK. 



CHAPTER I. 

FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

Article I. 

Necessary preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, a cope, stole, cincture, alb, and amice 
for the officiating clergyman ; a folded chasuble, stole, cinc- 
ture, alb, and amice for the deacon ; likewise a folded chas- 
uble, cincture, alb, and amice for the sub-deacons. The 
sacred vestments should be violet. 

2. On the altar, six candlesticks and the cross as usual, 
and a violet altar-veil over a white one. 

3. A small table covered with a white cloth should be 
placed near the altar, at the Epistle side ; and on the table 
the candles to be blessed, covered also with a white linen 
cloth. 

4. On the small table, a vessel with holy water, a sprin- 
kle, and a basin, ewer, and towel ; also the chalice with 
everything else necessary for Mass ; the whole covered 
during the blessing of the candles with a violet veil. 

5. In any convenient place, the processional cross, the 



VESTING OF THE MINISTERS. 205 

censer with the incense-boat, and a chafing-dish with fire 
and tongs. 

6. At the bench of the officiating 'clergyman, a white 
chasuble, stole, and maniple for him; on those of the min- 
isters, a white dalmatic, stole, and maniple for the deacon; 
and also a white tunic and maniple for the sub-deacon. 

7. If the Mass be not of the Blessed Virgin, but of the 
Sunday, the sacred vestments ought to be such as are re- 
quired for the Sunday. 

Article II. 

From the vesting of the Ministers to the distribution of the 

Candles. 

1. At a stated hour, the ministers put on the amice, alb, 
and cincture ; then the officiating clergyman, attended by 
them, puts on the amice, alb, cincture, violet stole, and 
cope ; lastly, the ministers put on the folded chasubles with- 
out maniples. The signal being given by the master of cere- 
monies, the ministers, with the officiating clergyman be- 
tween them, bow to the cross, put on their caps, and go to 
the sanctuary ; the deacon at the right of the officiating 
clergyman, and the sub-deacon at the left. Both sacred 
ministers raise the cope of the officiating clergyman. 

2. Having arrived at the sanctuary, the celebrant gives 
his cap to the deacon, and the deacon and sub-deacon give 
theirs to the master of ceremonies, and, having knelt on the 
floor of the sanctuary, they go up to the altar ; the celebrant 
kisses it, and the ministers at the same time make a genu- 
flection, and all go to the Epistle side, where the deacon 
stands on the first step, at the right of the celebrant, and 
the sub-deacon at the left, on the platform. Then the 
master of ceremonies uncovers the candles. 

If the Blessed Sacrament be not kept on the great altar, 
the celebrant bows profoundly to the cross, and the minis- 
ters and the other clergymen make a genuflection. 

3. The celebrant thus, between the ministers, with his 
hands joined, sings in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, 
Oremus, and the prayer Domine Sancte, with the other four 



206 FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

that follow. When he blesses the candles, he lays his left 
hand on the altar ; the deacon in the meantime raising the 
hem of his cope ; as -also when the celebrant uses the censer 
and the sprinkle. 

4. At the beginning of the prayers, the censer-bearer puts 
fire into the censer, and at the end he goes to the Epistle 
side, having at his right hand the first acolyte, carrying 
the vessel with holy water and the sprinkle. 

5. The fifth prayer being ended, the censer-bearer makes 
a genuflection, goes up to the highest step of the altar, to 
have incense put into the censer and blessed as usual by 
the celebrant, and goes down with the censer and the in- 
cense-boat ; then the first acolyte makes likewise a genu- 
flection, goes up to the highest step, gives the sprinkle to 
the deacon, who taking it in the middle, with the usual 
kisses, gives it to the celebrant, who sprinkles the candles 
thrice, first in the middle, then at the right, and lastly at 
the left of the candles, saying the anthem, Asperges me, 
etc., without the Psalm. The deacon, having received the 
sprinkle from the celebrant, gives it back to the first aco- 
lyte ; then takes the censer from the censer-bearer, gives it 
with the usual kisses to the celebrant, who incenses the 
candles thrice, in the same manner as he sprinkled them, 
but without saying anything. 

6. Afterwards the censer-bearer takes back the censer, 
and with the first acolyte makes a genuflection to the altar, 
and they carry the censer and the vessel with holy water 
to their proper places. 

Article III. 

From the distribution of the Candles to the Procession. 

1. After the blessing of the candles, the celebrant and 
ministers go to the middle of the altar, and having bowed 
to the cross, turn to the people ; the first acolyte at the 
Epistle side hands the candles to the deacon, who stands 
at the left of the celebrant. 

2. Before the celebrant turns towards the people, the 
second master of ceremonies calls the clergyman first in 



VESTING OF THE MINISTERS. 207 

dignity amongst those who are present in the sanctuary, 
who, without stole, goes to the highest step of the altar ; 
where, standing, he receives from the deacon a candle, 
kisses it, and gives it to the celebrant, without kissing his 
hand ; the celebrant also kisses the candle but not the hand 
of the clergyman from whom he receives it ; and gives the 
candle to the sub-deacon, who having received it with the 
usual kisses, lays it on the altar. -The celebrant having re- 
ceived another candle from the deacon, gives it to the 
clergyman highest in dignity, who receives it kneeling 
with the usual kisses, and having made a genuflection to 
the cross, and bowed to the celebrant, retires, accompanied 
by the second master of ceremonies. The latter should 
direct the clergy to go in proper order to receive the can- 
dles. 

If there be not a priest to offer the candle to the cele- 
brant, the deacon, having received it from the acolyte, 
places it on the middle of the altar ; then the celebrant, 
having bowed to the cross, kneels on the platform towards 
the cross, and thus takes the candle from the altar, kisses 
it, and gives it to the sub-deacon; then, rising, he con- 
tinues the distribution as is hereafter directed. 

3. At the beginning of the distribution of the candles, 
the choir sings the anthem, Lumen ad revelationem, and the 
canticle, Nunc dimittis. 

4. If the distribution be not finished at the end of the 
canticle Nunc dimittis, the canticle ought to be repeated, 
and the Gloria Patri sung at the end of the distribution. 

5. The clergyman highest in dignity having retired, the 
deacon and sub-deacon go on the highest step, kneel on the 
platform, receive with the usual kisses their candles from 
the celebrant ; rise, and return to their former places, that 
is, the deacon to the left, to hand the candles to the cele- 
brant, and the sub-deacon to the right, to hold up the bor- 
der of his cope. The ministers give their candles to the 
acolytes, and then the celebrant distributes the candles, 
first to the priests, then to the clergy in inferior orders, who 
go up to the altar, two by two, kneel on the platform, kiss 
first the candle, then the celebrant's hand. 

6. Towards the end of the distribution, at a signal given 



208 FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

by the master of ceremonies, the acolytes light the candles 
of the clergy for the procession. 

7. The distribution being ended, the celebrant and the 
ministers turn towards the altar, bow to the cross, go back 
in the same order as before, to the Epistle side, where the 
celebrant washes his hands, and in the meantime the choir 
sings the anthem, JExurge, etc., which is repeated. 

8. After the anthem, the celebrant, standing at the Epistle 
side, without saying Dominus vobiscum, sings Oremus, and 
the prayer, Exaudi. 

After Septuagesima, provided it be not on Sunday, be- 
fore the celebrant says Oremus, the ministers place them- 
selves behind the celebrant, the deacon sings Flectamus 
genua, immediately after the Oremus has been sung; he 
and all in the church kneel ; the sub-deacon sings Levate, 
and they all arise, and stand till the prayer is finished. 
Where it is customary that the candles should be dis- 
tributed to the people by the celebrant, he shall do it at 
the railing; the men first kiss the candle, then the hand of 
the celebrant ; but the women kiss only the candle. After 
the distribution, the ministers go back to the altar, make 
genuflections on the lowest step, and the celebrant bows to 
the cross. They then go to the Epistle side, where the 
celebrant washes his hands at the small table. In case the 
number of people be great, another priest, in surplice and 
violet stole, may distribute the candles with the celebrant. 

Article IV. 

The Procession. 

1. Whilst the celebrant sings the last prayer, the censer- 
bearer puts fire into the censer ; when the prayer is fin- 
ished, he goes to the Epistle side, the incense is put into 
the censer, and blessed by the celebrant as usual. Then 
the sub- deacon bows to the altar, and goes, by the shortest 
way, to take the cross, which he receives from the second 
master of ceremonies, and walks between the acolytes to 
the middle of the sanctuary, where he stands turned to- 
wards the altar. 



PROCESSION. 209 

2. In the meanwhile, the deacon receives from the 
master of ceremonies the celebrant's candle, gives it to him, 
kissing it and the celebrant's hand, and having received 
his own candle, at the signal given by the master of cere- 
monies, turned towards the people, sings with a loud voice, 
Procedamus in pace. The clergy answer, In nomine Christi, 
Amen. 

3. The procession then moves in the following order: 
first, the censer-bearer, who makes a genuflection ; then 
the cross-bearer between the acolytes, none of whom make 
a genuflection ; then follow the singers, and the rest of the 
clergy, who make genuflections, two by two, and carry their 
candles lighted ; then the deacon and the celebrant, who 
likewise carry their candles lighted, and, when notified by 
the master of ceremonies, descend the steps, and bow to the 
altar ; the deacon then gives the cap to the celebrant, kiss- 
ing it first, then the celebrant's hand. He afterwards places 
himself at the left of the officiating clergyman, raising the 
border of his cope. The singers sing the anthems as in 
the Missal. 

If, during the procession, a Low Mass is said in the 
church, the bell should not be rung at the elevation ; but 
if the bell should be inadvertently rung, the procession 
passing before that altar should kneel till the end of the 
elevation. (Deer. E. S. C, 1 Mart,, 1681.) 

4. When they are out of the door of the church, they 
all put on their caps, the censer-bearer, cross-bearer, aco- 
lytes, and master of ceremonies excepted : but as soon as 
they re-enter the church, they uncover their heads, the 
celebrant and deacon only excepted. 

5. Coming into the church, the singers chant the response, 
Obtulerunt, even if the anthems be not yet finished. 

6. The censer-bearer makes a genuflection in the middle 
of the sanctuary, and carries the censer back to its place. 
The cross-bearer and the acolytes do not kneel ; they go 
to the side-table, on which the acolytes place their candle- 
sticks, and the cross-bearer the cross ; the latter goes to 
the minister's bench, where he waits for the celebrant and 
the deacon. 

7. The clergy having made a genuflection in the middle 

18 



210 ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

of the sanctuary, go to their places, and extinguish their 
candles. The celebrant and deacon, as they come into the 
sanctuary, take off their caps, go to the middle of the 
sanctuary, put out the candles, give them to the master of 
ceremonies, make the usual bows, go to the ministers' 
bench, turn towards the altar, and the ministers take the 
cope from the celebrant, help him to put on the chasuble, 
put on their own vestments, accompany him to the altar, 
and having made the usual bows, begin Mass, which is 
said as usual, and is to be sung by the priest that officiated 
at the distribution of the candles. (Deer. 8. C. R., 12 Jun., 
1627.) If a Bishop bless the candles, a priest may say 
the Mass. 

When the Mass of the feast of the Purification is to be 
celebrated, an acolyte should remove from the side-table 
and the altar all the violet ornaments. 

Also, when the Mass of said festival is celebrated, the 
celebrant and the clergy hold lighted candles in their hands 
during the Gospel ; the clergy, moreover, hold them from 
the Sanctus till after the communion. 



CHAPTEK II. 

ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

Article I. 

Necessary Preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, the violet cope and stole, also the 
cincture, alb, and amice for the celebrant; the folded 
chasuble and stole of violet color, with the cincture, alb, 
and amice for the deacon ; the same things (the stole ex- 
cepted) are to be prepared in the usual place for the sub- 
deacon. 

2. On the altar, six candlesticks, with the cross and the 
violet altar-veil. At the Epistle side, a vessel containing 



DISTRIBUTION OF THE ASHES. 211 

ashes, and covered either with a violet veil or with its own 
cover. 

3. On the side-table, besides the things that are neces- 
sary for High Mass, the holy-water vase with the sprinkle ; 
a small plate with some bread ; a ewer and basin with a 
towel. 

4. On the ministers' bench, the chasuble and maniple for 
the celebrant ; two other maniples for the ministers, who 
put them on, after having assisted the celebrant to put on 
his vestments. 

5. In any convenient place, the censer with the incense- 
boat, and a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs* 



Article II. 

Of the Blessing and Distribution of the Ashes. 

1. The deacon and sub-deacon, having put on, as usual, 
all their vestments (the maniples and folded chasubles 
excepted), help to vest the celebrant with the amice, alb, 
cincture, stole, and cope ; then they put on their folded 
chasubles. The signal being given by the master of cere- 
monies, they all bow to the cross, put on their caps, go out 
of the sacristy, having the celebrant in the middle, and 
raising his cope on each side. 

2. Having arrived at the altar, they give their caps to 
the master of ceremonies, kneel, go up to the platform, the 
celebrant kisses the altar in the middle, and the ministers 
make a genuflection ; then they go to the Epistle side, the 
celebrant having the sub-deacon at his left, and the deacon 
at his right ; the master of ceremonies uncovers the ashes. 

3. There the celebrant, with his hands joined, reads the 
anthem, JExaudi, while it is sung by the choir. • 

4. After the anthem has been repeated by the singers, 
the celebrant, in the same place, without turning to the 
people, sings, in a ferial tone, with his hands joined, Domi- 
nus vobiscum, Or emus, bowing as usual to the cross, and 
then the four following prayers ; w T hen he blesses the ashes, 
he place's his left hand on the altar, and the deacon raises 



212 ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

his cope, which is also to be observed whenever the cele- 
brant uses the sprinkle or the censer. 

5. At the beginning of these prayers the censer-bearer 
prepares the censer, and at the end of them he goes to the 
Epistle side, having on his right the first acolyte, who 
carries the holy-water vase and the sprinkle; they both 
kneel, and the censer-bearer goes up to the highest step, 
that the incense may be put into the censer, and blessed ; 
he then descends, and gives his place to the acolyte, who 
presents to the deacon the sprinkle, which, is presented by 
him to the celebrant, whose hand, as well as the sprinkle, 
is kissed by the deacon. The celebrant sprinkles the ashes 
thrice, first in the middle, then on the right, and lastly on 
the left, saying with a low voice, Asperges me, etc., but not 
the Psalm, Miserere. The deacon* returns the sprinkle, and 
having received the censer from the censer bearer, gives it 
to the celebrant, who incenses the ashes thrice. 

6. The censer-bearer, having received the censer, makes 
a genuflection to the altar with the acolyte, and they carry 
the censer and the holy-water vase to their proper places. 

7. The celebrant and the ministers proceed to the middle 
of the altar without their caps; the deacon, on the left, 
holds the vessels with the blessed ashes, and the sub- 
deacon, turned towards the people, stands at the celebrant's 
right. 

8. The signal being given by the master of ceremonies, 
the clergyman who is first in dignity amongst those that 
are present, goes, without stole, to the highest step, when, 
forming as usual the sign of the cross, and saying, Memento 
homo, etc., he places the ashes on the forehead of the cele- 
brant, who stands with his hands joined. 

9. The celebrant then forming the sign of the cross, and 
saying, Memento homo, places the ashes on the head of the 
same clergyman, who kneels to receive them, and after 
having made the usual bows and genuflection, returns to 
his place, accompanied by the master of ceremonies, who 
directs the clergy in what order they are to proceed to the 
altar. 

If there be no priest present dressed in surplice, the 
celebrant kneeling on the platform of the altar makes the 



DISTRIBUTION OF THE ASHES, 213 

sign of the cross on his own head, with the ashes, without 
saying anything; which must be observed even if the 
ministers be priests. 

10. At the beginning of the distribution of the ashes, 
the singers chant the anthem, Immutemur habitu, etc., which 
they repeat, if necessary, during the distribution. 

11. The priest who is first in dignity having retired, the 
deacon ^ives the vessel containing the ashes to the master 
of ceremonies, or lays it on the altar. He then kneels on 
the highest step at the right of the sub-deacon, where they 
both receive the ashes ; then the deacon goes to the right 
side of the celebrant, where he holds the vessel with the 
ashes, and the sub-deacon proceeds to the left. The cele- 
brant puts the ashes on the foreheads of the clergymen, 
who go to the altar, two by two, according to their respec- 
tive dignity and order. 

12. After the distribution of the ashes, the deacon re- 
turns the vessel in which they are contained to the master 
of ceremonies, who places it on the table ; the celebrant, 
attended by the ministers, goes to the Epistle side, where 
he washes his hands, rubbing them also with bread pre- 
pared for that purpose, one of the acolytes pouring the 
water, and a minister holding the towel. 

Where it is customary, the celebrant may distribute the 
ashes to the people at the railing. 

13. Then, the ministers standing at the side of the cele- 
brant, he sings, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer, Concede 
nobis, in a ferial tone. The prayer being ended, and the 
singers having answered, Amen, they bow to the cross, and 
go by the shortest way to their seats, where the celebrant, 
assisted by the ministers, takes off the cope, and puts on 
the maniple and the chasuble. The ministers also put on 
their maniples. They then go to the altar to sing Mass, 
which must be sung by the same priest who has blessed 
the ashes. {Beer. S. C. R., 12 Jun., 1627.) 



214 ASH- WEDNESDAY. 



Article III. 

Of the Mass. 

1. The ministers having left their seats, bow, as usual, 
to the clergy, and on arriving at the steps of the altar, 
kneel before the cross. Mass is celebrated as usual, with 
the following exceptions : at the Confession, and at the 
prayers, the clergy, as well as the acolytes, who serve at 
the altar, remain kneeling; the same is to be observed 
from the Sanctus to the Agnus Dei. 

2. Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer before the last 
previously to his reading the Epistle, the second acolyte 
takes off the sub-deacon his chasuble, and lays it on the 
bench, and assists him in putting it on again after he has 
sung the Epistle, and kissed the hand of the celebrant. 
Whilst the celebrant is reading the Gospel, the same acolyte 
helps the deacon to take off the chasuble and put on the 
large stole ; taking care to assist him again in taking off 
the large stole and resuming the chasuble, after he has 
removed the Missal from the Gospel side to the Epistle 
side, after the communion. 

3. The celebrant should not kneel whilst he reads the 
Adjuva nos, etc., but after having read the Gospel, he goes 
as usual to the middle of the altar, where he remains till 
the Adjuva nos, etc., then he and the ministers kneel on the 
platform ; when the Adjuva nos, etc., is ended, they all 
arise, incense is then put into the censer, and the rest pro- 
ceeds as usual. 

4. The acolytes holding their candles, remain kneeling 
from the ISanctus to the communion of the celebrant. 

5. At the prayer, Super populum, the celebrant having 
sung Or emus, the deacon at his right side, turned towards 
the people, sings, Humiliate capita. 



SUNDAYS L^ETARE AND GAUDETE — PALM-SUNDAY. 215 

CHAPTER III. 

Sundays Ljetare and Gaudete. 

On these Sundays three things are particularly to be 
observed : 

1. The organ, which is silent during Lent, is played at 
High Mass and Vespers. 

2. The sacred vestments should be of rose color. 

3. The deacon and sub-deacon, instead of folded chas- 
ubles, make use of the dalmatic and tunic. 



CHAPTER IV. 

PALM-SUNDAY. 

Article I. 
Preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, for the celebrant, the violet cope and 
stole, the cincture, alb) and amice ; for the deacon, the folded 
chasuble, stole, and maniple of violet color, the cincture, 
alb, and amice ; for the sub-deacon, the violet folded chas- 
uble and maniple, the cincture, alb, and amice. Also, three 
amices, albs, and cinctures, and three violet maniples and 
stoles ; besides three books for the three deacons who sing 
the Passion. 

2. On the altar) the cross and six candlesticks, without 
any ornaments ; where the custom prevails, branches of 
olive or palm trees may be placed between the candlesticks. 

3. Near the altar, on the Epistle side, a small table 
covered with a linen cloth ; on the Gospel side, in any con- 
venient place, three bookstands for the Passion. 

4. On the table, the holy-water pot with the sprinkle, 



216 PALM-SUKDAY. 

the chalice in the middle, covered as usual with the veil, 
the cruets, bell, the Missal for the Epistle and Gospel, the 
large stole for the deacon, a basin with a pitcher of water, 
and a towel. 

5. In any convenient place, the processional cross, covered 
with a violet veil, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

6. On the minister's bench, the violet chasuble and 
maniple, for the celebrant. 

Article II. 

From the beginning of the Ceremony to the Distribution of 
the Palms. 

1. The ministers dressed as usual, with amice, alb, and 
cincture, and the deacon having put on his stole, assists the 
celebrant in putting on the amice, alb, cincture, stole, and 
cope ; they then put on their folded chasubles and mani- 
ples. The master of ceremonies having given the signal, 
they bow to the cross ; and proceed to the altar, having 
their heads covered, walking at each side of the celebrant, 
and raising the border of his cope. 

2. Having arrived at the altar, and given their caps to 
the master of ceremonies, they kneel before the cross, and 
go up to the platform, where the celebrant kisses the middle 
of the altar, and the sacred ministers make a genuflection ; 
they immediately go to the Epistle side, where they remain ; 
the sub-deacon standing at the left hand of the celebrant, 
and the deacon on the highest step at his right. The palms 
are then uncovered by the master of ceremonies. 

3. The celebrant, with his hands joined, and without 
making the sign of the cross, reads from the Missal the 
anthem, Hosanna, which is sung by the chanters. 

4. The anthem being sung, the celebrant remaining 
turned towards the Missal, and with his hands joined, sings 
in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer that 
follows ; during this, the ministers at each side raise the 
celebrant's cope. At the beginning of the prayer, the sub- 
deacon, bowing to the cross, descends to the floor, and stand- 
ing below the steps, behind the celebrant, with his face 



BLESSING OF THE PALMS. 217 

turned towards the altar, with the assistance of the second 
acolyte he takes off the chasuble, and receives the Missal 
from the second master of ceremonies. 

5. At the end of the prayer, having made the usual 
bows to the clergy, he sings the lesson that follows it in 
the tone of the Epistle ; then bowing as before the lesson, 
he goes to the celebrant, and kneeling kisses his hand, and 
receives his blessing. Having put on the chasuble, he goes 
by the shortest way to the left of the celebrant, and remains 
there. 

6. After the lesson, the singers chant one of the two 
responses with its verses, and in the meantime the deacon 
having bowed to the cross, goes down, and taking off his 
chasuble, puts on the large stole, receives from the second 
master of ceremonies the Missal, which he places on the 
middle of the altar ; then making a genuflection, he returns 
by the shortest way to the right of the celebrant, to hold the 
iucense-boat whilst he puts the incense into the censer; in 
the same time the sub-deacon raises the border of the cele- 
brant's cope. 

7. The incense being blessed, the sub-deacon goes down 
the steps, and the deacon goes by the shortest way to the 
middle of the altar; there, kneeling on both knees, he says, 
M unda cormeum; then takes the Missal, and saying, Jube 
Domnef etc., asks the blessing of the celebrant, who turn- 
ing himself to the Gospel side, gives it in the usual words, 
Domlnus sit, etc. The Gospel is sung, as usual in High 
Masses; at the end of which the sub-deacon carries the 
book to the celebrant, who kisses it, and the deacon incenses 
him as customary ; he then takes off the large stole, puts 
on the folded chasuble, and returns to the right of the 
celebrant, the sub-deacon being on his left. 

8. After the celebrant has been incensed, he turns to- 
wards the altar, and sings in a ferial tone the prayer that 
follows ; after which he sings the Prcefatio. After this, 
standing at the Epistle side with the ministers, and bowing 
at the same time, he says in a low voice the Sanctus, which 
is sung by the choir. 

9. The celebrant, with his hands joined, sings in a ferial 
tone, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayers for the blessing ; 

19 



218 PALM-SUNDAY. 

when he makes the sign of the cross on the palms, he lays 
his left hand on the altar, and the deacon raises the border 
of his cope ; the same is to be observed when he makes use 
of the sprinkle or the censer. 

10. At the beginning of the prayers, the censer-bearer 
prepares the censer, and when they are ended, he goes to 
the Epistle side, having at his right the first acolyte, who 
carries the vessel with holy water. Both bow at the low- 
est step, and the censer-bearer goes up to the highest step ; 
and after the celebrant has put the incense into the censer, 
and blessed it, he retires ; the acolyte then takes his place, 
gives the sprinkle to the deacon, who, holding it in the 
middle of its handle, kisses it and presents it to the cele- 
brant, whose hand he also kisses. The celebrant sprinkles 
the palms three times, first in the middle, afterwards at the 
right, and lastly at the left, saying, at the same time, As- 
perges me ; the deacon returns the sprinkle to the acoly te, 
and receives the censer from the censer-bearer, kisses and 
gives it to the celebrant, whose hand he also kisses ; the 
celebrant incenses the palms also three times, in the same 
manner as has been said for the sprinkling, but without 
saying any words. 

11. The censer-bearer receives the censer from the dea- 
con, makes a genuflection with the acolyte, and both retire 
to place the censer and the vessel in their proper places. 

12. After incensing the palms, the celebrant sings Domi- 
nus vobiscum, and the prayer that follows. 

Article III. 
Of the Distribution of the Palms. 

1. After the prayer, the ministers and the celebrant pro- 
ceed to the middle of the altar, bow to the cross, and turn 
towards the people ; the first acolyte, at the Epistle side, 
holds the palms, which he gives to the deacon. 

2. The clergyman who is first in dignity amongst those 
who are present at the ceremony, when invited by the sec- 
ond master of ceremonies, goes in his usual choir-dress, 
without stole, to the highest step of the altar ; there, stand- 



DISTRIBUTION OF THE PALMS. 219 

ing, he receives from the deacon the palm, which he kisses 
and gives to the celebrant, without kissing his hand ; the 
celebrant also kisses the palm only, and gives it to the sub- 
deacon, who, having kissed the celebrant's hand and the 
palm, lays it on the altar. The celebrant having received 
from the deacon another palm, gives it to the clergyman 
who is first in dignity. He kneels on the platform to re- 
ceive it, and kisses both the celebrant's hand and the palm. 
(Deer. 8. B. C, 14th Feb., 1703.) After which, bowing 
and making a genuflection, he returns to his place, attended 
by the second master of ceremonies, who invites the clergy 
to go to the altar in proper order. 

3. When the distribution of the palms commences, the 
anthem Pueri Hebrceorum is sung by the chanters, and re- 
peated, if necessary, during the distribution. 

4. The deacon and sub-deacon then go to the highest 
step, and, kneeling on the platform, receive the palm from 
the celebrant, and kiss his hand and the palm ; afterwards 
they arise, and make a genuflection ; the sub-deacon re- 
turns to the right, and the deacon to the left of the cele- 
brant, to give him the palms that are to be distributed, 
having previously placed their own on the altar, or given 
them to the acolytes. The celebrant distributes the palms 
to the clergy, beginning by the priests and ending with 
the inferior clergy, who must come, two by two, and kiss 
first the palm, then the hand of the celebrant. 

5. After the distribution, the celebrant and the ministers 
turn towards the altar, bow to the cross, and go in the same 
order as before to the Epistle side, where the celebrant 
washes his hands, and sings the prayer, Omnipotens sempi- 
terne Deus, etc. 

The celebrant, where it is customary, may go to the rail- 
ing to distribute the palms to the people ; the men kiss the 
palm and the celebrant's hand, but the women kiss only 
the palm. After the distribution, the ministers return to 
the altar, make a genuflection on the lowest step, but the 
celebrant merely bows, if the Blessed Sacrament is not 
present, after which they all go to the Epistle side, as in 
the preceding number. 

Should the congregation be large, another priest, dressed 



220 PALM-SUNDAY. 

in surplice, and having on a violet stole, may assist the 
celebrant in distributing the palms; the same is to be ob- 
served with respect to the distribution of the candles and 
of the ashes. 

Article IV. 
Of the Procession. 

1. When the ministers go to the Epistle side, the censer- 
bearer prepares the censer ; after the prayer, he goes to the 
Epistle side, where the incense is put into the censer, and 
blessed by the celebrant. Then the sub-deacon kneels to 
the cross, and by the shortest way goes to the side-table, 
where, taking off, his maniple, he takes the processional 
cross, and, preceded by the censer-bearer, walks between 
the acolytes to the middle of the sanctuary, where he re- 
mains with his face turned towards the altar. 

2. In the meantime, the deacon having taken off his 
maniple, gives the palm to the celebrant, at the same time 
kissing it, and also the hand of the priest ; then he takes 
his own palm, and withdraws to the highest step behind 
the celebrant ; and at a signal given by the master of cere- 
monies, he turns towards the people, and sings, Procedamus 
in pace, to which the clergy answer, In nomine Christi. 
Amen. 

3. They then walk in procession out of the door of the 
church, in the following order : the censer-bearer, having 
made a genuflection, proceeds first; then come the acolytes, 
on each side of the cross-bearer, who make no genuflection; 
after them the chanters and the rest of the clergy, two by 
two, who all make a genuflection in the middle of the 
sanctuary, and carry their palms in their right or left hand, 
according to their position ; if they are on the left, they 
must carry them in their left hand; but if on the right, 
they must bear them in their right. Last of all, the deacon 
and the celebrant, who, at the signal given by the master 
of ceremonies, go down the steps, the celebrant bows, and 
the deacon kneels before the cross ; he then gives the cap 
to the celebrant, kissing it and the celebrant's hand ; and 
having received his cap from the master of ceremonies, he 



PROCESSION. 221 

goes to the left of the celebrant, whose cope he raises with 
his right hand, holding in his left his own palm. They 
follow the procession with their caps on. . 

4. As the procession goes out of the door of the church, 
all the clergy except the cross-bearer, the acolytes, the 
censer-bearer, and the master of ceremonies, put on their 
caps. The procession is made through the usual places 
round the church, and the chanters sing either all or only 
a part of the anthems that are in the Missal, according to 
the length of the way. 

5. On their return to the door of the church, some of tb"e 
singers enter the church, and shut the door ; the censor- 
bearer goes to the right of. the first acolyte, the cross-bearer 
stops between the acolytes near the door, and turns the 
crucifix towards the people. The clergy, as they arrive, 
keep their respective rows, but draw near the acolytes, and 
form a circle, which is completed by the celebrant, with 
the ministers at his side, who remain turned towards the 
door ; all may wear their caps. 

6. The singers within the church, turned towards the 
door, sing Gloria, laus, which is repeated by the clergy, 
who are without ; then the other strophes are sung by those 
within, the clergy alternately repeating Gloria, laus. 

7. When all the verses have been sung, the sub-deacon, 
turning the crucifix, knocks at the door with the foot of 
the cross; the door is immediately opened, the procession 
enters the church, and the anthem Ingrediente Domino is 
sung. 

If the procession cannot be made out of the church, it 
should be made within ; and should stop at the door of the 
sanctuary. 

8. As the clergy enter the church, all, with the excep- 
tion of the celebrant and ministers, uncover their heads, 
and proceed to the sanctuary. The censer-bearer arriving 
at the middle of it, makes a genuflection, and carries the 
censer to its place. The cross-bearer and acolytes, without 
making a genuflection, go to the side-table, the acolytes 
place their candlesticks on it, the sub-deacon leaves the 
cross near it and goes to the bench, waiting there for the 
celebrant and deacon. The clergy having made a genu- 



222 PALM-SUNDAY. 

flection in the middle of the sanctuary, go to their respective 
places, carrying the palms in their hands. 

9. The celebrant and deacon, as they enter the sanctuary, 
uncover their heads, go to the middle, make a genuflection, 
and go to the bench of the ministers ; there the deacon 
receives from the celebrant his palm, kissing it and the 
celebrant's hand, and gives it with his own to the master 
of ceremonies ; then, having turned towards the altar, the 
ministers take off the cope from the celebrant, and put on 
his maniple and chasuble ; after which, they put on their 
own maniples, and having bowed to the clergy as usual, go 
to the altar, and begin Mass, which ought to be celebrated 
by the same priest who blessed the palms, unless they were 
blessed by the bishop. 
* 

Article V. 
Of the Mass and Passion. 

1. Mass is celebrated as on other Sundays during Lent, 
with the following exceptions : the Psalm Judica is not 
said at the Confiteor, nor the Gloria Patri at the Introit and 
Lavabo. 

2. Only one prayer is said. Whilst the sub-deacon sings 
the Epistle, the clergy, deacon, and celebrant, unless the 
latter should actually be reading the Gradual or Tract, 
kneel at the words, In nomine Jesu omne genuflectatur, till 
the words Et infernorum are sung. 

3. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon waits till the cele- 
brant has read the Tract, he then receives his blessing, 
descends the steps, puts on his chasuble, and goes to the 
right of the deacon, as observed for the Introit. The 
celebrant and ministers sit at their seats, whilst the Tract 
is sung. 

4. During the Passion and Gospel, the celebrant and all 
the others, except the deacons who sing the Passion, the 
acolytes and the master of ceremonies, hold palms in their 
hands ; the same is to be observed by all, except the sacred 
ministers, when they return to the sacristy. 

5. The Gospel of St. John is read at the end of the 
High Mass. 



MASS AND PASSION. 223 

6. Whilst the Epistle is sung, the deacons, who are to 
sing the Passion, put on the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
maniple, and stole. The acolytes place in a straight line, 
at a little distance from each other, the three book-stands, 
in the place where the Gospel is usually sung. 

7. Towards the end of the Tract, the three deacons ap- 
pointed for the Passion, each holding in both hands his 
book, which lie lays against his breast, accompanied by the 
second master of ceremonies, bow to the cross, put on their 
caps, and go out of the sacristy in the following order : 
first, the master of ceremonies, with his hands joined ; 
next, the deacon, who sings the words of the Evangelist ; 
then he who sings the words of the multitude; and, lastly, 
the one who sings the words of our Saviour. 

8. When they enter the sanctuary, they uncover their 
heads, and give their caps to the master of ceremonies ; 
then the deacon, who sings the words of our Saviour, is 
placed in the middle ; he who sings the part of the Evan- 
gelist, at the right ; and he who sings the words of the 
multitude, at the left; they make a genuflection before the 
altar, bow to the celebrant, and the clergy go to the book- 
stands, place their books upon them, so that he who per- 
sonates the Evangelist, be in the middle ; he who sings the 
words of our Saviour at the right; and the one who repre- 
sents the multitude at the left. Then the Evangelist be- 
gins, Passio Domini, etc. ; during the Passion, they stand 
with their hands joined, and near them the second master 
of ceremonies. 

9. When he who is in the middle begins the Passion, 
the clergy take off their caps, rise, and stand during it; 
the celebrant and the ministers rise, and go by the shortest 
way to the Epistle side, place themselves as for the Introit; 
the deacon gives, as usual, the palm to the celebrant; the 
ministers receive it from the master of ceremonies, and all 
hold them in their hands ; then the celebrant, turning a 
little tow r ards the singers, reads the Passion at the Epistle 
side (Deer. S. R. C, 4 Aug., 1663), turning a little, as far 
as that part which is sung like, the Gospel, exclusively ; 
but when he arrives at the words Emisit Spiritum, he makes 
no genuflection. 



224 PALM-SUNDAY. 

10. When the celebrant has read the Passion, the minis- 
ters place themselves behind each other, and, with the 
celebrant, turn towards the singers. In their right hands 
they hold their palms, and place their left on their breast ; 
at the name of Jesus they bow to the cross ; at the words 
Emisit Spiritum they all kneel, where they are, but turned 
towards the altar; the deacons, however, who sing the 
Passion, kneel towards their books ; they all rise at the 
signal given by the master of ceremonies. 

11. At the end of the Passion, the clergy sit down, the 
deacons, by whom it was sung, go to the middle of the 
altar in the same order in which they came, kneel to the 
cross, bow to the clergy, receive their caps from the second 
master of ceremonies, and leaving the sanctuary, they 
cover their heads, go to the sacristy as they came out, and 
the acolytes remove the bookstands from the place where 
the Passion was sung. 

12. In the meantime, the sub-deacon gives his palm to 
the first master of ceremonies, and carries the Missal to the 
Gospel side. The celebrant gives his palm to the deacon, 
who gives it and his own to the master of ceremonies, goes 
to the middle of the altar, and says, Munda cor meum, Jube 
Domne Benedicere, as usual ; he then reads the Gospel, as 
in the Missal, without saying Dominus vobiscwn, or making 
the sign of the cross either on himself or on the book ; at 
the end, the sub-deacon answers, Laus tibi Christe. In the 
meantime, the deacon having taken off his chasuble, puts 
on the large stole, and carries the book to the altar. 

13. The celebrant having read the Gospel, everything 
is performed as usual, except that the acolytes do not carry 
the candlesticks, but they go, either with their hands joined, 
or, if it be customary, holding the palm in their hands ; 
the deacon does not say, Dominus vobiscum, neither does 
he make the sign of the cross on himself or on the book, 
but having incensed it, he begins by singing, Altera autem, 
etc., in the usual tone of the Gospel. In the meantime, 
the celebrant holds the palm in his right hand ; and at the 
end of the Gospel he kisses the Missal, which the sub- 
deacon presents at these words, Altera die, and Mass is 
continued as usual. 



OFFICE OF THE TENEBR^J. 225 



CHAPTER V. 

OFFICE OF THE TENEBRJE, 
ON WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY, AND FRIDAY, IN HOLY-WEEK. 

Article I. 
Preparations. 

1. At the altar, the carpet, violet altar- veil, six candle- 
sticks with brown wax candles ; the Blessed Sacrament is 
to be removed to another altar, in case it is usually kept 
at the principal altar. The altar-cards also should be 
removed. 

2. In the place where the Epistle is sung, a triangular 
candlestick, with fifteen candles of unbleached wax, and a 
rod with the proper instrument to extinguish them. 

3. In the middle of the sanctuary, a bookstand, for the 
lessons that are to be sung. 

Article II. 

From the Commencement to the End of the Office. 

1. At the stated hour, the candles of the altar and those 
of the triangular candlesticks being lighted, at the signal 
given by the master of ceremonies, the clergy leave the 
sacristy. When they are arrived at their places in the 
sanctuary, they all kneel down for awhile, to say in secret 
the Aperi Domine; then they arise, and say in secret, 
Pater, Ave, and Credo. 

2. At the signal from the presiding clergyman, the 
chanters sing the anthem, Zelus domus ; after which they 
begin the Psalm, and all sit down. 



226 OFFICE OF THE TENEBR^E. 

At the end of every Psalm, Gloria Patri is not said, but 
the anthem is immediately repeated. 

3. At the end of the first Psalm, the acolyte appointed 
to put out the candles, puts out the last candle of the 
triangle at the Gospel side ; at the end of the second, he 
extinguishes that on the Epistle side, and so on at the end 
of each Psalm alternately, leaving lighted only the candle 
at the top of the triangle. 

4. After the verses at the end of the third Psalm and 
anthem of each nocturn, the clergy rise, and say, Pater 
noster ; at the end of which, they sit down, and put on 
their caps. 

5. In the meanwhile, the second master of ceremonies 
invites the clergyman who is to sing the first lamentation, 
by bowing to him ; he then places himself at his left, ac- 
companies him to the bookstand, where both make a genu- 
flection, and bow to the. clergy. Then the lamentation is 
sung, without asking the blessing,' and ended without say- 
ing Tu autem Domine. Afterwards they make a genuflec- 
tion, bow to the clergy, and the master of ceremonies ac- 
companies the singer back to his place, and bows to him. 
The same is to be done for each lesson. 

6. Whilst the singers begin the Benedictus, all rise, and 
stand till they begin to sing Christus, etc. ; at the verse Ut 
sine timore, the same acolyte extinguishes the last candle 
of the altar at the Gospel side ; at the verse In sanctitate, 
that at the Epistle side, and so at each of the following 
verses alternately. 

Whilst the Benedictus is sung, all the lights in the 
church are put out, except the lamps before the Blessed 
Sacrament. 

7. When the anthem of the Benedictus is repeated, the 
top candle is taken from the triangular candlestick by the 
acolyte, who carries it to the Epistle side, and holds it 
lighted at the corner of the altar. When they begin 
Christus /actus est, he hides it behind the altar. 

8. At the beginning of Christus, etc., all kneel and say 
in secret, Pater noster; then the Psalm Miserere is either 
said or sung, at the end of which the presiding clergyman 



MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 227 

recites, without Oremus, the prayer, Respiee qucesumus, but 
says, iu a low and inaudible voice, Qui tecum vivit, etc. 

9. At the end of the prayer, the celebrant taps his book 
with his hand, as the others also do; then the lighted candle 
is brought from under the altar, and allrise and depart in 
silence, after the usual genuflection. 

10. The same is to be observed on the two following 
days, except that the altar is without a cloth, altar-veil, 
or carpet ; having only the cross and six candlesticks on it. 



CHAPTER YI. 

MAUNDY -THURSDAY. 

Article I. 

Preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, white vestments for High Mass; 
besides two violet stoles to be used when the priest strips 
the altars; also a third white tunic, with amice, alb, and 
cincture, but without maniple for the cross-bearer. The 
candlesticks for the acolytes, two censers, with their in- 
cense-boat, and a sufficient number of candles for the pro- 
cession ; also torches for the elevation. 

2. The principal altar is to be decorated with the most 
precious ornaments, with a white altar-veil, and if it has a 
tabernacle with the Blessed Sacrament, it is to be covered 
with a canopy of the same color • the cross on the altar is 
to be covered with a white veil. (Deer. S. B. C, 20 Dec, 
1783.) 

3. On the table, besides everything necessary for High 
Mass, a chalice for the repository, with pall, paten, and a 
white veil and ribbon ; on the paten used for the Mass, 
two Hosts, one of which should be of such a size that it 
may be put in the chalice prepared for the repository ; as 



228 MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 

man} 7 white stoles as will be sufficient for the priests who 
are to go to communion; a pyx with small Hosts; the 
communion-cloth, and a white cope for the celebrant ; near 
the table, a clapper, used instead of a bell. 

4. In any convenient place, the canopy and the proces- 
sional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

5. A proper place, or repository, should be prepared in 
some chapel, or on some altar of the church, and decently 
adorned with hangings, flowers, and lights. Above the 
altar, in the most conspicuous and elevated part, should be 
placed an urn, or tabernacle, that may be locked, with a 
corporal in it, that the Blessed Sacrament may be kept in 
for the following day. On the altar, an unfolded corporal, 
with the burse and the key of the urn. Near the altar, 
steps, or a stool, that the deacon may reach the door of the 
tabernacle. 

Article II. 

Of the Mass. 

1. This day, at Mass, the Psalm Judica me is not said; 
nor the Gloria Patri at the Introit and Lavabo. 

2. The celebrant having sung the words, Gloria in ex- 
celsis Deo, one of the acolytes rings the small bell till the 
celebrant has finished it; all the large bells of the church 
are rung, and the organ is played till the singers have 
chanted the whole of the Gloria in excelsis. 

3. At the Sanctus, and at the elevation, instead of bells, 
a clapper is used. 

4. The Pax is not given ; consequently, after the Agnus 
Dei the sacred ministers change places, the deacon goes to 
the left of the celebrant, near the Missal, and the sub- 
deacon to the right, to uncover and cover the chalice at the 
proper time, making the usual genuflections. 

5. Whilst the celebrant says the last of the three prayers 
that precede the communion, the master of ceremonies car- 
ries from the table to the altar the chalice, in which the 
consecrated Host is to be kept ; also the paten, pall, veil, 
and ribbon, prepared for that purpose. 



mass. 229 

6. After the celebrant has received the Sacred Blood of 
our Lord, the ministers make a genuflection, change places, 
make another genuflection together with the celebrant ; who, 
rising, takes the Host with reverence on the paten, and 
places it horizontally in the chalice, which is presented to 
him by the deacon, who covers it with the pall, over which 
he places the paten, with the inside part turned down, and 
covers it with the veil, fastening it with the ribbon near 
the knot of the chalice. 

7. Then the deacon places it in the middle of the cor- 
poral, and uncovers the pyx ; here all make a genuflection ; 
the ministers then retire to the two corners of the altar, 
bowing, and with their faces turned towards each other ; 
the celebrant turns towards the clergy ; the deacon sings 
the Confiieor ; after which, the celebrant says, Misereatur, 
etc., and having given the blessing, turns towards the altar, 
and makes a genuflection, whilst the deacon and sub-deacon 
kneel on the platform before him. 

8. Whilst the deacon sings the Confiteor, the second 
master of ceremonies and the censer-bearer go to each side 
of the altar, and make a genuflection there; they kneel, 
turned towards one another, and wait till the ministers 
have knelt before the celebrant; they then extend the com- 
munion-cloth, which the censer-bearer must have carried 
from the table, and hold it with both their hands. 

9. The celebrant, holding in his left hand the pyx, and 
in his right one of the small Hosts, turns towards the peo- 
ple, and having said Agnus Dei, etc., gives the communion 
to the ministers, who, having received it, make a genu- 
flection, go to the side of the celebrant, at the same time 
changing their places — viz., the deacon goes to the right, 
and the sub-deacon to the left ; the censer-bearer with- 
draws the communion-cloth, that they may have room to 
pass. Then the clergy receive the communion as usual; 
the priests, however, having on their stoles, which must be 
given them by an acolyte, receive it before the others in 
inferior orders. 

10. After the communion, the celebrant and the min- 
isters turn towards the altar, and make a genuflection. 
Should any Hosts remain, they are received by the cele- 



230 MAUNDY-THUESDAY. 

brant. The acolytes, who held the communion-cloth, make 
a genuflection, leave the cloth on the table, and retire to 
their places. 

11. The acolytes return to the sacristy with their torches, 
and distribute the candles to the clergy, who light them 
immediately. The censer-bearers prepare their censers, and 
the cross-bearer puts on the amice, alb, cincture, and white 
tunic. One of the acolytes carries the caps of the celebrant 
and ministers to the chapel of the repository. 

12. The celebrant receives both ablutions without leav- 
ing the middle of the altar. The ministers change places, 
and make a genuflection at each side of the celebrant, both 
before and after they change places. When they minister 
to the celebrant, they no longer kiss his hand, nor anything 
they present to him, or receive from him. The sub-deacon 
wipes the chalice, and covers it ; leaves room for the cele- 
brant when he says Dominus vobiscum; makes a genuflec- 
tion on the platform, and also on the lowest step, when he 
passes before the Blessed Sacrament ; carries the chalice to 
the table, and goes behind the deacon. 

13. The celebrant, having given the chalice to the sub- 
deacon, makes a genuflection, and goes to read the com- 
munion. He then returns to the middle, kisses the altar, 
makes a genuflection w T ith the deacon, turns towards the 
people from the Gospel side, so as not to turn his back to 
the Blessed Sacrament, and sings Dominus vobiscum. Af- 
terwards the celebrant makes a genuflection with the min- 
isters, goes to sing the prayer, then returns to the middle, 
kisses the altar, turns towards the people, as before, and 
sings Dominus vobiscum. In the meantime the deacon 
makes another genuflection, turns towards the people, as 
the celebrant also turns : he sings, lie, missa est, after w 7 hich 
they all make a genuflection. The celebrant says, Placeat, 
etc., and the ministers go to each side of the platform, and 
kneel down to receive the blessing. 

14. The celebrant, after the Placeat, kisses the altar, 
and having said Benedicat vos omnipotens Deus, instead of 
bowing, makes a genuflection, and turns in the same manner 
as for the Dominus vobiscum, and then without completing 
the circle, or repeating the genuflection, he turns on his 



PROCESSION. 231 

left to the Gospel side, to read the Gospel of St. John, 
without making the usual sign of the cross on the altar; 
he makes it, however, upon himself; when he pronounces 
the words, Et Verbum caro, he makes a genuflection to the 
Blessed Sacrament. 

15. The Gospel of St. John being ended, the ministers 
go up the platform to each side of the celebrant, and hav- 
ing made a genuflection, go to the bench by the shortest 
way. 

Article III. 
Of the Procession. 

1. When the ministers arrive at the bench, they assist the 
celebrant in taking off the maniple and chasuble, and put- 
ting on the cope ; they also take off their own maniples ; 
after which they go to the lowest step before the altar, 
kneel on both knees on the floor of the sanctuary, rise, and 
kneel on the lowest step, where they adore the Blessed 
Sacrament for a short time ; at a signal given by the master 
of ceremonies, they rise. Incense is then put into the 
censer by the celebrant, but not blessed. The celebrant, 
whilst the ministers raise his cope, incenses the Blessed 
Sacrament. Everything is prepared for the procession, 
which is to be made in the church, and not out of doors. 
(Deer. S. R. C, 6 Aug., 1591.) 

2. Whilst the celebrant incenses the Blessed Sacrament, 
the master of ceremonies brings the veil from the table, 
which he puts on the shoulders of the celebrant, as soon as 
he has returned the censer to the deacon. The censer- 
bearers go to each side of the altar, and the acolytes, ap- 
pointed for the purpose, give the canopy to the priests 
dressed in surplices, or to others, according to custom. 

3. The celebrant, having put on the veil, goes up to the 
second step, with the ministers at his side ; there the cele- 
brant and the sub-deacon kneel down, and the deacon goes 
upon the platform to the altar, makes a genuflection, takes 
the chalice, holding it with his right hand at the knob, 
and with his left at the foot, gives it to the celebrant, who 
takes it with his left at the knob, and places his right hand 



232 MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 

over it; then the deacon covers it with both extremities of 
the veil ; and having made a genuflection, goes to the right 
of the celebrant, who rises with the ministers, and goes up 
with them to the platform ; there they turn towards the 
people, the deacon standing at the right, and the sub-deacon 
at the left of the celebrant, and holding up the border of 
his cope. The singers begin the Pange lingua. 

4. The following order is to be observed in the proces- 
sion : first, the cross-bearer, a sub-deacon dressed in tunic, 
between the acolytes. All three should go to the middle 
of the sanctuary, near the rails, whilst the celebrant in- 
censes the Blessed Sacrament, and remain standing with 
their faces towards the altar. When the Pange lingua is 
intoned, they turn towards the people, without making any 
genuflection, and walk with gravity towards the chapel of 
the repository. Next to them, the rest of the clergy, hav- 
ing made a genuflection on both knees before the Blessed 
Sacrament, walk two by two, carrying lighted candles in 
their hands. 

5. Lastly, the sacred ministers descend the steps, place 
themselves under the canopy, and are preceded immediately 
by the censer-bearers, who keep their censers in continual 
and regular motion, and walk after the clergy. 

6. During the procession, the celebrant recites, alter- 
nately with the ministers, psalms and hymns, without say- 
ing Gloria Patri at the end, whilst the chanters continue 
to sing the Pange lingua. 

7. When the cross-bearer and the acolytes arrive at the 
door of the chapel, they retire a little aside, in order that 
the procession may pass, and they remain there standing, 
with their faces turned towards the procession. Those of 
the clergy who walked next to the cross-bearer stop, the 
first on each side of the chapel, and those who follow stop 
next to them, so that the clergymen who walked the last 
are the nearest to the altar of the repository ; having di- 
vided into two lines, the celebrant, with the sacred minis- 
ters, passes between them. The censer-bearers, on entering 
the chapel, keep their censers still. 

8. The celebrant and ministers having arrived at the 
altar, ascend the steps ; the deacon, kneeling on the plat- 



VESPERS — STRIPPING THE ALTARS. 233 

form, receives the Blessed Sacrament, rises, and after the 
celebrant has adored it, places it on the altar, makes a 
genuflection, and kneels at the right of the celebrant; then 
the singers begin the Tantum ergo. After the first two 
verses have been sung, incense is put into the censer, as 
usual ; the deacon, or a priest in surplice and stole, places 
the Blessed Sacrament in the urn, which he shuts at the 
end of the hymn. 

It is prescribed by the Ceremonial of the Bishops (1. 2, 
c. 23 and 1.3), that the deacon, on receiving the chalice, as 
has been said above, should not place it on the altar, but 
in the urn, which he should leave open till the sacrament 
is incensed, etc. 

Article IV. 

Of Vespers, and of the Stripping of the Altars. 

1. When the urn or tabernacle is shut, some acolytes 
take the candles from the clergy, who, having prayed for a 
short time, at a signal from the master of ceremonies make 
a genuflection on both knees, and return to the sanctuary, 
the first in dignity walking first, and so on. 

2. When they have come to the sanctuary, they make a 
genuflection in the middle, and return to their places ; 
where, standing, they say in secret the Pater and Ave; 
then the clergyman first in dignity, begins in a moderate 
tone of voice, the first antiphon of Vespers, and at the 
proper time, the Magnificat and the Miserere; after which, 
he recites the prayer, Respice, etc. 

3. The clergy having left the chapel of the repository, 
the ministers and the censer-bearers make a genuflection on 
both knees on the floor of the chapel, and, having received 
their caps, go to the sacristy, preceded by the censer-bearers 
and the cross-bearer, with the acolytes carrying the candle- 
sticks with lighted candles. The ministers, on each side 
of the celebrant, raise his cope. After they have entered 
the sacristy, they make a profound bow to the cross, take 
off their white vestments, and the celebrant and deacon 
put on violet stoles. 

4. Towards the end of the Psalm, Miserere, the cele- 

20 



234 MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 

brant, with the ministers walking after each other, and 
having their caps on, go out of. the sacristy, preceded by 
the acolytes, and attended by the master of ceremonies. 
On entering the sanctuary, the ministers walk on each side 
of the celebrant, and, having given their caps to the master 
of ceremonies, bow to the clergy, make a genuflection to 
the cross, with the exception of the celebrant, who merely 
bows ; they then go up the platform, and the prayer, Res- 
pice, being ended, the celebrant begins in a moderate tone, 
Diviserunt sibi, which is continued by the clergy, together 
with the Psalm, Deus, Deus meus, etc., which they should 
recite so slow as to finish them when the celebrant comes 
back to the sanctuary, after having stripped all the altars. 

5. The celebrant alternately with the ministers recites in 
a low voice the same Psalm, whilst they strip the altars. 
They first take off the upper cloth, then the others ; and 
the acolytes remove the front veil, the altar cards, the car- 
pet, and all the other ornaments, leaving only the cross and 
six candlesticks. Afterwards, the ministers descend the 
steps, and having made a genuflection with the acolytes, 
the celebrant only bowing, they bow to the clergy, put on 
their caps, and walk one after the other, preceded by the 
acolytes, and proceed to strip the other altars ; when they 
pass before the chapel of the repository, they make a genu- 
flection on both knees. 

In churches that haVe many altars, whilst the celebrant 
strips the high altar, other priests in surplice and stole may 
strip the others, reciting the same Psalm. 

6. After the stripping of the altars, the celebrant having 
returned to the high altar, waits there till the antiphon, 
Diviserunt, is repeated by the clergy ; then, after the usual 
genuflection, they go to the sacristy. 



GOOD FRIDAY. 235 



CHAPTER VII. 

GOOD FRIDAY. 

Article I. 
Preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, the black vestments, viz. : two folded 
chasubles for the deacon and sub-deacon ; a chasuble for 
the celebrant^ two stoles, three maniples, albs, cinctures, 
and amices. 

2. Also three albs, with cinctures and amices, as many 
black maniples, and stoles, and three Missals for the dea- 
cons, who sing the Passion ■> Besides, two censers and 
incense-boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs ; the 
torches and candles for the procession* 

3. The altar must be undressed, having, however, six 
candlesticks, and candles of Unbleached wax, and the cross 
covered with a black veil, fastened in such a manner as to 
be easily and gradually taken off. 

4. On the edge of the platform of the altar, three violet 
cushions, one on each side, and one in the middle, at a proper 
distance. 

5. On the side-table, a plain linen cloth, projecting only 
a little on each side ; and on it the cruets in their plate ; 
an altar-card ; a Lavabo; a bookstand with the Missal for 
the celebrant; another Missal for the ministers; a folded 
altar-cloth, and a large black stole for the deacon ; a small 
vessel with water, covered with a purifier, for the ablution 
of the fingers in case th^ priest should touch the Blessed 
Sacrament; a black burse, containing a corporal, and a 
purifier on it ; a black veil for the chalice, two candlesticks 
with brown wax candles for the acolytes. The candles 
should not be lighted. 



236 GOOD FRIDAY. 

6. In any convenient place, the processional cross, cov- 
ered with a violet veil, and the wooden clapper. 

7. At the Epistle side, in the sanctuary, a violet carpet, 
with a long white veil, and a violet cushion, on which the 
cross may be placed for the adoration. Also three book- 
stands for the Passion. The minister's bench must be 
without ornaments. 

8. At the chapel of the repository, besides the canopy, 
the white veil on the side-table. On the altar, the key of 
the urn, or tabernacle ; and near the altar, the steps, etc. 

Article II. 

From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Uncovering of the 

Cross. 

1. After the ministers are dressed, they proceed with the 
clergy to the sanctuary, as usual, except that the acolytes, 
without candlesticks, and with their hands joined, walk 
before the clergy. When they arrive at the altar, they 
make a genuflection and retire to their usual places. The 
ministers at the foot of the altar give their caps to the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, and make a genuflection with the cele- 
brant, without bowing to the clergy ; they prostrate them- 
selves, and lay their hands and faces on the cushions. 

2. At the same time the clergy kneel down, and bow 
their heads ; the acolytes having knelt and made a short 
prayer, rise, and with the assistance of .the second master 
of ceremonies, extend on the altar a cloth, which should 
hang down only very little on each side ; then the acolytes 
go to their places ; and the master of ceremonies places on 
the Epistle side of the altar the bookstand, with the Missal 
open. 

3. After a few minutes, the signal being given by the 
master of ceremonies, the sacred ministers and all the 
clergy rise. Immediately, the acolytes remove the cushions ; 
and the celebrant, with the deacon and sub-deacon, goes up 
to the altar ; the celebrant kisses it ; the deacon and sub- 
deacon make a genuflection, and they all go to the Epistle 
side, as for the Introit. 



VESTING — UNCOVERING OF CROSS. 237 

4. At the same time, one of the acolytes receives the 
Missal from the second master of ceremonies, goes, accom- 
panied by him, to the middle of the altar, makes a genu- 
flection, bows to the clergy, goes to the place where the 
Epistle is usually sung, and there sings the lesson in the 
tone of the prophecies. At the beginning of it the clergy 
sit down, and the celebrant reads it with a low voice; the 
ministers do not answer, Deo gratias, at the end, but the 
celebrant immediately reads the Tract. 

5. The acolyte having sung the prophecy, makes a genu- 
flection before the altar, bows to the clergy, and returns to 
his place. The singers chant the Tract, during which the 
celebrant and ministers may sit down.. 

6. When the choir sing the words, Operuit c&los, the 
deacon and sub-deacon go, one after the other, behind the 
celebrant. In case they be sitting, they should first return 
to the altar by the shortest way. 

7. After the Tract, the celebrant sings Oremus, and the 
deacon immediately subjoins, Fleetamus genua, kneeling, 
with all the clergy, the celebrant excepted ; then the sub- 
deacon answers, Levate, and all rise. 

8. Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer, with his hands 
extended, the second acolyte helps the sub-deacon to take 
off his chasuble. The latter, having received the Missal 
from the second master of ceremonies, kneels before the 
altar, bows to the clergy, and sings the lesson, without the 
title, in the usual tone of the Epistle. 

9. The lesson being ended, the sub-deacon kneels to the 
altar, bows to the clergy, and without asking the blessing 
from the celebrant, returns the Missal to the second master 
of ceremonies, puts on his chasuble, and returns to his place, 
as at the Introit. The celebrant having read the lesson 
with the Tract, goes with the ministers to sit down. 

10. Whilst the Tract is sung, three book-stands are pre- 
pared for the Passion, and everything is done as directed 
in the fourth chapter, with the following exceptions : the 
celebrant reads all the Passion at the Epistle side, even 
that part which is sung in the tone of the Gospel ; saying 
before it, Munda cor meum, in the same place, but pro- 
foundly inclined, and omitting Jube Domne, etc. 



238 GOOD FRIDAY. 

11. After the Passion, those who sang it having returned 
to the sacristy, the sub-deacon goes down the step before 
the altar, and the deacon to the Epistle side ; the latter 
takes off his chasuble, puts on the large stole, and carries 
the Missal to the altar, making the usual bows and genu- 
flection. Then kneeling on the platform, he says, Munda 
cor meum, without asking the blessing ; he rises, takes the 
Missal, goes down the steps at the right of the sub-deacon, 
and after the usual genuflection and bows, goes to sing the 
Gospel, at which neither the censer nor the candlesticks 
are used. 

12. The Gospel being sung, the sub-deacon does not 
carry the Missal to the celebrant, but shuts it, and gives it 
to the second master of ceremonies ; and all having made 
a genuflection in the middle, the acolytes go to their place ; 
the master of ceremonies lays the Missal on the table, and 
the ministers go, one after the other, behind the celebrant 
at the Epistle side. 

13. Then the celebrant begins to sing the first preamble, 
with his hands joined ; at the end of it, he extends and 
joins them, bowing to the cross, and sings, Oremus; then 
the deacon adds, Flectamus genua, and the sub-deacon, 
Levate, as in n. 7. 

The celebrant immediately sings the prayer in the ferial 
tone, with his hands extended. All the following pream- 
bles and prayers are sung in the same manner. 

14. At the prayer which begins with the words, Omni- 
potens sempiterne Bens, qui salvas, omnes, etc., the acolytes 
go to spread the violet carpet, covering the lowest step of 
the altar with one end of it, and extending the other on 
the floor of the sanctuary ; they also lay the cushion on the 
lowest step, and cover the whole with the white veil. 

15. All the prayers being ended, the ministers go by 
the shortest way to the bench, where the celebrant and the 
sub-dea'con take off their chasubles, go to the Epistle side 
and stop before the lowest step, turned towards the people. 

16. Then the master of ceremonies and the deacon go 
up to the altar, having first made a genuflection on the 
lowest step. The master of ceremonies takes the cross, 
and gives it to the deacon, who, having received it, rever- 



UNCOVERING OF THE CROSS. 239 

ently carries it by the shortest way to the celebrant, having 
the image of the crucifix turned towards himself; the cele- 
brant receives it with great respect, holding the crucifix 
turned towards the people. 



Article III. 

From the Uncovering of the Cross to the Procession. 

1. The celebrant, standing on the lowest step at the 
Epistle side, having the sub-deacon at his left, and the 
deacon at his right, turned towards the people, holds the 
cross in his left hand, and with the right uncovers the top 
of it, as far as the cross-piece, assisted, if necessary, by the 
ministers, raises it to the height of his eyes, and, with a 
grave and moderate voice, sings, Ecce lignum Crucis, from 
the book, which one of the acolytes holds open before him. 

2. At these words, the clergy, having uncovered their 
heads, rise ; the celebrant, with the ministers and the aco- 
lytes, continues to sing the whole anthem. At the end of 
it, the choir and the clergy, kneeling on both knees, and 
bowing, answer, Venite adoremus. The ministers also and 
all the others, the celebrant excepted, kneel at the same 
time, and bow to the cross. 

3. The words Venite adoremus being sung, the celebrant 
and the ministers ascend in the same order as before to the 
platform, and stop at the Epistle side. The celebrant 
uncovers the right arm and the head of the crucifix, and 
raising his voice one tone higher than the first time, sings, 
Ecce lignum, and everything is done as before. 

4. Then the celebrant and the ministers go to the middle 
of the altar, in the same order ; there he uncovers the whole 
cross, giving the veil to the sub-deacon, who gives it to 
one of the acolytes, by whom it is placed on the side-table ; 
afterwards, raising his voice one tone higher, he sings, 
Ecce lignum, and the rest is done as above. 

5. The clergy having risen, the celebrant, accompanied 
by the master of ceremonies, who raises his vestments as 
he goes up or down, carries the cross, without making any 



240 GOOD FRIDAY. 

bow, to the place prepared for it, and kneeling, puts it on 
the cushion and veil ; then rises, makes a genuflection, and 
goes to the bench. 

6. Whilst the celebrant kneels, the clergy rise, and the 
ministers, making a genuflection on the platform towards 
the cross, go by the shortest way to the bench. The second 
acolyte uncovers the processional cross, and another acolyte 
uncovers the other crosses that are in the church and in 
the sacristy, but not the images. 

7. When the celebrant and ministers arrive at the bench, 
they take off their maniples and their shoes. The minis- 
ters remain at the bench, and the celebrant, attended by 
the master of ceremonies, goes to venerate* the cross. 

8. Towards the extremity of the sanctuary, the cele- 
brant kneels before the cross, and makes a short prayer ; 
then rises, and about the middle of the sanctuary kneels 
again, and prays in the same manner ; he does the same 
for the third time at the foot of the cross, which he hum- 
bly kisses. Lastly, he rises, makes a genuflection to the 
cross, returns by the shortest way to the bench, puts on 
his shoes, with the assistance of the acolytes, and, assisted 
by the ministers, puts on his chasuble and maniple; then 
he sits down, and puts on his cap. 

9. The ministers bow to the celebrant, and, attended by 
the second master of ceremonies, go to venerate the cross, 
observing what has been said in regard to the celebrant, n. 
8. The deacon kisses the cross before the sub-deacon. 

10. After the ministers, the clergy go, two by two, first 
the priests, then those in inferior orders ; and lastly, the 
laymen, if custom allows them to enter the sanctuary. 

Otherwise, a priest, with a surplice and a black stole, 
carries another crucifix to some other place for the vene- 
ration of the people, laying it on the cushion, as above, 
and the same priest removes it, if it be in the way of the 
procession. 

Another method might be followed where the congre- 
gation is very numerous, viz., that one or two clergymen, 

* The; technical term is adoration ; but to prevent misconception, 
wo use the one less likely to be misinterpreted. 



UNCOVERING OF THE CROSS. 241 

in surplice and stole, should present the crucifix to be 
kissed at the railing. 

11. During the whole time of the veneration of the cross, 
the choir sings the Improperia. It is not necessary to con- 
tinue them after it, nor to sing them all, 

12. The ministers having returned to the bench, put on 
their shoes and maniples; the sub-deacon resumes also his 
chasuble, and both sit down at the side of the celebrant. 
Then one of the acolytes brings the Missal from the table, 
bows to the celebrant, opens it at the place where the 
Improperia are found, and holds it so that the celebrant 
and the ministers may read them alternately. 

13. When the acolytes have venerated the cross, the 
first of them lights the candles on the table and on the 
altar, and the second goes to hold the Missal before the 
ministers in the place of the censer-bearer, till they have 
finished the Improperia; then he shuts it, bows to the 
celebrant, puts it on the table, and returns to his place. 
The censer-bearers having venerated the cross, the second 
of them goes to assist the cross-bearer to put on the amice, 
alb, cincture, and chasuble, and the first prepares the 
censers. 

If there be no sub -deacon besides the one that ministers 
to the celebrant, any acolyte dressed in surplice may carry 
the cross. 

14. Towards the end of the veneration, the deacon rises, 
bows to the celebrant, and carries to the altar the burse 
with the corporal and purifier. When he has reached the 
platform he kneels to the cross, unfolds the corporal as 
usual, and places the purifier near it, at the Epistle side. 
At the same time the master of ceremonies carries the 
Missal with its stand to the Gospel side, kneeling to the 
cross. The deacon having unfolded the corporal, makes 
a genuflection to the cross, and returns by the shortest way 
to the right of the celebrant, sits down and covers his head. 

15. After the veneration, the deacon, invited by the 
master of ceremonies, takes oif his cap, rises, bows to the 
celebrant, and attended by the master of ceremonies, goes 
to the place in which the cross was laid, makes a genuflec- 
tion, takes it up with both his hands, and assisted by the 

21 



242 GOOD FRIDAY. 

master of ceremonies, carries it to the altar, and places it 
between the candlesticks, makes a genuflection, and returns 
to the side of the celebrant.^ At the same time the cele- 
brant, the sub-deacon, and all the clergy kneel down at 
their places. 

16. Then the celebrant, ministers, and clergy rise, and 
sit down. In the meanwhile an acolyte removes the veil, 
cushion, and carpet. 

Article IV. 
Of the Procession. 

1. The cross being placed on the altar by the deacon, 
the censer-bearers go to the middle of the sanctuary, fol- 
lowed by the cross-bearer, who walks between the acolytes 
with the candlesticks ; only the censer-bearers make a 
genuflection; then they all proceed to the repository by 
the shortest way ; the clergy follow them, first those in 
inferior orders, then the priests, lastly the ministers, one 
after the other, with their hands joined and their caps on, 
all making a genuflection before the cross. 

2. On arriving at the repository, the censer-bearers make 
a genuflection in the middle on both knees, and retire to 
the Epistle side ; the cross-bearer and the acolytes stop at 
the entrance of the chapel on the Epistle side, as yesterday ; 
all the others, after making a genuflection on both knees, 
place themselves as yesterday. 

3. The sacred ministers, at the entrance of the reposi- 
tory, give their caps to the master of ceremonies, who 
gives them to an acolyte to carry to the sanctuary, and 
place them on the bench of the ministers. Then the dea- 
con passes to the right, and the sub-deacon to the left of 
the celebrant. When they arrive before the altar, they 
make a genuflection on both knees, rise, kneel on the lowest 
step of the altar, and pray for a few moments ; in the mean- 
time candles are distributed to the clergy, w r ho light them. 

4. The signal being given by the master of ceremonies, 
the deacon rises, makes a genuflection, and goes to open the 
urn, or tabernacle, and having made another genuflection, 



BRINGING BACK THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 243 

returns to the right of the celebrant, who puts incense in 
both censers without blessing, and kneeling with the minis- 
ters, incenses the Blessed Sacrament. The canopy is given 
to be carried either to priests dressed in surplice, or to other 
persons, according to custom. 

5. After the incensing of the Blessed Sacrament, the 
master of ceremonies puts the veil on the shoulders of the 
celebrant ; the deacon takes the Blessed Sacrament from 
the urn, and gives it to the celebrant, as on yesterday, w 7 ho, 
having covered it with the lower parts of the veil, turns 
towards the people, having the deacon on his right and the 
sub-deacon on his left hand. The singers, still kneeling, 
intone Vexilla Regis, etc. The procession moves off ; first, 
the cross-bearer with the acolytes, without making any 
genuflection ; then the others, who make a genuflection as 
yesterday. When they are arrived at the sanctuary, the 
cross-bearer leaves the cross at the Epistle side, makes a 
genuflection, and goes to the sacristy to take off the sacred 
vestments. The clergy, on arriving at the sanctuary, go to 
their place, and remain there kneeling. 

6. The sacred ministers having arrived at the high altar, 
the deacon receives the Blessed Sacrament from the cele- 
brant, and having placed it on the corporal, unties the 
ribbon, and extends the veil, as at the beginning of Mass ; 
then he makes a genuflection, and returns to the right of 
the celebrant, from whose shoulders the veil should have 
been removed in the meantime by the sub-deacon. Incense 
is put into the censer, and the Blessed Sacrament should 
be incensed as usual. 

7. The clergymen who carried the canopy leave it aside, 
take candles, and kneel down before the altar, forming a 
semicircle, till after the communion. If the canopy is car- 
ried by laymen, they remain kneeling at the rails, holding 
lighted candles in their hands. 

8. The censer-bearers, after the incensing, make a genu- 
flection on both knees in the middle, and the second of 
them goes to the sacristy ; the first remains at the Epistle 
side. 



244 GOOD FRIDAY. 



Article V. 
Of the remaining part of the Office. 

1. When the celebrant has incensed the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, he goes up to the altar with the ministers. They 
make a genuflection, bending one knee ; the deacon takes 
the veil from the chalice, and gives it to the master of 
ceremonies; he removes also the paten and the pall from 
the chalice. Then he takes the paten with his right hand, 
raises it a little from the corporal, and the celebrant, taking 
the chalice, lets the consecrated Host fall gently on the 
paten, taking care not to touch it ; but should he happen 
to do so, he washes his fingers in the small vase prepared 
for this purpose, and the deacon presents to him the purifier. 
Then the celebrant receives with both his hands the paten 
from the deacon, who kisses neither it nor the celebrant's 
hand ; and without making any cross, or saying anything, 
the celebrant places the Host on the corporal, laying the 
paten also on the corporal at the Epistle side. 

2. The Host being placed on the corporal, the sub-deacon 
makes a genuflection, goes to the right of the deacon, makes 
another genuflection, and, receiving the cruets from an 
acolyte, takes that which contains wine, and gives it to the 
deacon, who puts some of the wine into the chalice, taking 
care not to place it on the altar, nor to wipe it with the 
purifier. Then the sub-deacon puts a little water into the 
chalice, without asking the blessing of the celebrant, who 
does not give it, nor say the prayer, Deus qui humance, etc. 
This done, the acolyte carries back the cruets to the side- 
table; the sub-deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, 
making the usual genuflections, and the deacon presents 
the chalice, without kissing it, to the celebrant, who, with- 
out making any cross, or saying any prayer, places it on 
the corporal, and it is covered with the pall by the deacon. 

3. Then the censer-bearer, having made a genuflection 
below the steps, goes to the platform, and the incense is 
put into the censer as usual, but without blessing or kissing 
the censer, or the hand of the celebrant. The sacred obla- 
tions are incensed as usual, with the words, Incensum istud ; 



REMAINING PART OF THE OFFICE. 245 

likewise, the cross and the altar, with the customary genu- 
flections, and with the words, Dirigatur Domine, etc., Ac- 
cendat, etc. At the Epistle corner the deacon receives the 
censer from the celebrant, and gives it to the censer-bearer, 
who carries it to the sacristy, as it is not used again.* 

4. The celebrant, having given the censer to the deacon, 
descends one step on the Epistle side, turned towards the 
people, and washes his hands, the sub-deacon pouring the 
water, and the deacon presenting him the towel ; the 
psalm, Lavabo, is not said ; the celebrant and the ministers 
go to the middle of the altar, and the acolytes carry every- 
thing back to the side-table. 

5. The celebrant and ministers arriving at the middle, 
make a genuflection ; the deacon goes to the left of the 
celebrant, near the Missal, and the celebrant, placing his 
hands joined on the altar, and bowing, says with a low but 
audible voice the prayer, In spiritu humilitatis, etc. He 
then kisses the altar, makes a genuflection, and turning his 
face towards the people, and his back to the Gospel side, 
says, Orate fratres; he continues what follows in a low 
voice, and without going round, returns to the middle. The 
ministers do not answer, Suscipiat, etc. 

6. The celebrant having said the Orate fratres, etc., 
sings, in a ferial tone, Or emus : Prceceptis salutaribus moniti, 
with his hands joined, and the Pater noster with his hands 
extended. At the beginning of the Pater, the deacon makes 
a genuflection, and goes behind the celebrant. The master 
of ceremonies takes his place by the Missal. 

7. At the end of the Pater noster the choir answers, Sed 
libera nos a malo, and the celebrant says, in a low voice, 
Amen, continuing to hold his hands extended, and not sign- 
ing himself with the paten. Then he subjoins in the same 
tone of voice, Libera nos qucesumus Domine, etc. After 
which, the choir answers, Amen. 

8. The celebrant makes a genuflection, places the paten 
under the Host, and holding with his left hand the paten 
on the altar, with his right raises the Host, so that it may 
be seen by all ; without, however, taking it out of the limits 
of the corporal. In the meanwhile the ministers kneel on 

* The deacon does not incense the celebrant. 



246 GOOD FKIDAY. 

the platform ; they do not raise the lower part of the cele- 
brant's chasuble; the Blessed Sacrament is not incensed. 
One of the acolytes sounds the clapper. 

9. Whilst the celebrant lays the Host on the paten, the 
ministers rise, go to his side, and with him make a genu- 
flection. Then the deacon uncovers the chalice, the cele- 
brant takes the Host, divides it as usual into three parts, 
without making the sign of the cross, or saying anything, 
and places the smallest part in the chalice. 

10. The deacon having covered the chalice, the celebrant, 
with the ministers, make a genuflection. The ministers 
change places, and make another genuflection. Then the 
celebrant, omitting the Agnus Dei and the first two prayers 
before the communion, says only the third, which begins, 
Perceptio Corporis, etc., holding his hands joined on the 
altar; when he has finished the prayer, he makes a genu- 
flection, with the ministers, and rising says, Partem cmlestem, 
then takes the paten and Host, and communicates, having 
previously said, as usual, Domine, non sum dignus. 

11. After the communion of the Sacred Body, the sub- 
deacon uncovers the chalice, the celebrant and ministers 
make a genuflection, the fragments are collected and put 
into the chalice by the celebrant, who, without saying any- 
thing, or making the sign of the cross, consumes the wine 
with the consecrated Particle, the ministers in the mean- 
time bowing profoundly. 

12. One of the acolytes carries the cruets to the altar; 
the sub-deacon gives the wine and water to the celebrant, 
who takes the usual ablutions without saying anything. 
In the meantime the clergy sit down, and put out their 
candles. 

13. After the ablution, the ministers change places, 
making a genuflection as they pass by the middle; the 
sub-deacon goes to the Missal, and the deacon to the side- 
table ; where, having taken off the large stole, and put on 
the folded chasuble, he returns to the platform at the right 
of the celebrant; who, having taken the last ablution, says 
in the middle, with a low voice, with his head inclined, 
and with his hands joined before his breast, the prayer, 
Quod ore sumpsimus. The sub-deacon, as usual, wipes the 



HOLY SATURDAY. 247 

chalice, and covers it with the veil, which one of the aco- 
lytes must have brought to the altar, and carries it to the 
side- table, making a genuflection to the cross as he passes 
by the middle; then he returns to the left of the celebrant, 
and closes the Missal. 

14. The signal being given by the master of ceremonies, 
the celebrant and the ministers bow to the cross, go down 
to the foot of the altar, make a genuflection, together with 
the master of ceremonies, and the acolytes, who do not 
carry the candlesticks ; and, having bowed to the clergy, 
put on their caps and go to the sacristy, where they take 
off the sacred vestments. 

15. The sacred ministers having left the sanctuary, Ves- 
pers are recited as yesterday. In the meantime, the censer- 
bearers remove from the altar the book-stand with the 
Missal, and the towel, so that it be left quite bare, with no 
other ornament than the cross and the six candlesticks. 
They carry everything to the sacristy. 

16. After Vespers, the clergy make a genuflection to the 
cross, and return to the sacristy. Then the candles on the 
altar are extinguished. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

HOLY SATURDAY. 

Article I. 

Things to be Prepared. 

1. At a convenient and proper time, the church is 
adorned with white and precious ornaments. The high 
altar is prepared as on the greatest solemnities. The relic- 
cases may be placed between the candlesticks, when the 
ministers put on white vestments. A white altar-veil 
should be under another of violet color, which is to be re- 
moved only before the beginning of Mass ; at that time, 
also, the carpet should be placed on the platform and steps 



248 HOLY SATURDAY. 

of the altar, which, during the first part of the sacred 
office, should be left bare. 

2. The lamps of the church should be so prepared as to 
be easily lighted at the proper time. The images of the 
church should be kept covered till the beginning of the 
litany. The tabernacle should have a white canopy under 
another of violet color, which latter ought to be removed 
when the violet veil is taken away from the front of the 
altar. 

3. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments of violet color 
for the ministers, viz., a cope, stole, cincture, alb, and 
amice for the celebrant ; two folded chasubles, with two 
maniples, a stole, two cinctures, albs, and amices for the 
ministers. Under the same, or in any other place, the 
usual white vestments for the celebrant and the ministers. 
The censer with the incense-boat, the vase for the holy 
water with the sprinkle, a plate with five large grains of 
incense, the processional cross, the candlesticks, with white 
candles for the acolytes. 

4. At the baptismal font, everything should be cleaned; 
any water remaining there ought to be put into the piscina. 
A table is to be placed near it, and covered with a linen 
cloth ; on it the vessels containing the oil of catechumens, 
and the sacred chrism in a plate ; a vessel with water, and a 
basin; a towel on a plate; some slices of bread and lemon, 
likewise on a plate; some cotton on another plate; an 
empty vessel for holy water, with the sprinkle. 

If it is customary to distribute among the people the 
water blessed on this day, a large vessel might be prepared 
and adorned before the baptismal font, and filled with 
water, which is, in that case, blessed; before the oils are 
mixed with the water, the baptismal fonts are filled with 
part of the water blessed in the large vessel, and then the 
oils are put into the water contained in the baptismal fonts, 
not into that contained in the large vessel. Some small 
vessels ought to be prepared to take the water from the 
large vessel, to put it into the fonts. 

5. The bench of the ministers must be adorned as on the 
greatest solemnities, and covered with a violet cloth, which 
is removed when the ministers change their vestments. 



BENEDICTION OF THE FIRE. 249 

On this second cloth is to be placed the violet chasuble 
and maniple for the celebrant, also another violet maniple 
for the deacon, and a cap for the sub-deacon. 

6. At the Gospel side, if there is a pulpit, the Exultet 
should be sung there; if not, a book-stand must be pre- 
pared ; and either the pulpit or book-stand must be covered 
with a white veil, and a cushion placed on it for the, Exultet. 
On the same side should be a stand for the Paschal candle, 
and there also near the altar the Paschal candle itself; 
also a stand for the triple candle, and, on the Epistle side, 
a book-stand, uncovered, for the prophecies. 

7. On the side- table, everything necessary for High 
Mass ; the burse and veil of the chalice, and over them the 
white veil, which must be covered with another violet veil. 
Near the table, three violet cushions for the ministers dur- 
ing the litany. 

8. In the porch, or if the church have none, in any other 
convenient place, a table covered with a white linen cloth, 
and on it a white dalmatic, stole, and maniple for the dea- 
con, a violet maniple for the sub-deacon, a Missal, a plate 
containing a small candle, and matches to light it. 

9. A large chafing-pan, with pieces of dry wood so ar- 
ranged that fire may be easily lighted, which must be done 
before the ceremony, and be struck from a flint ; near it, 
tongs to put the new fire into the censer. 

10. Near the table, the triple candle on its rod, adorned 
with flowers, at the place the stock of the candle is con- 
nected with the rod. The candle is to be made so as to 
have one common stock, out of which proceed three branches 
at the same distance from each other. 

Article II. 

From the Benediction of the New Fire to the Exultet. 

1. The sacred ministers being vested as in chap, iv, with 
this difference only, that they do not wear their maniples, 
and the signal being given by the master of ceremonies, 
the sub-deacon takes the processional cross, and the pro- 
cession for the benediction of the new fire is arranged in 
the following order : first, three acolytes ; the one who 



250 HOLY SATTJKDAY. 

is in the middle carries the vessel with holy water, and 
the sprinkle ; the one at the right carries the plate with 
the five grains of incense, and the one at the left carries 
the censer without fire, and the boat Avith incense, and the 
small spoon within it. The sub-deacon follows, carrying 
the cross ; after him the clergy, two by two ; lastly, the 
celebrant, with the deacon at his left. The latter, with all 
the clergy, must have their heads uncovered. As they 
pass before the cross of the high altar, they all make a 
genuflection, with the exception of the cross-bearer and 
the celebrant ; the latter only bows to the cross. 

2. When the procession arrives at the porch, the sab- 
deacon places himself by the table, turning his back to the 
door, or to the walls of the church, holding the cross, with 
the image of the crucifix turned towards the celebrant. 
The clergy divide into two lines, on each side of the sub- 
deacon, so that the highest in dignity amongst them may 
be nearest to the celebrant, who places himself opposite the 
cross, with the deacon at his right. The deacon receives 
the cap from the celebrant, kissing his hand and the cap, 
and assists him in raising the border of his cope when he 
makes the sign of the cross, or uses the sprinkle or the 
censer, and turning the leaves of the book. 

3. The first acolyte having placed on the table the vase 
with holy water, takes the Missal, and holds it open before 
the celebrant. The two other acolytes stand at the right 
of the deacon, but a little behind him, and the master of 
ceremonies at the left of the celebrant. 

4. All being so arranged, the celebrant, with his hands 
joined, says, in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, and the 
three prayers that follow, for the benediction of the new 
fire, which is to be made before any other. (Deer. S. R. 
C.j 12th April, 1755.) At the end of each prayer the 
clergy answer, Amen. 

5. Then the acolyte who holds the plate with the grains 
of incense comes before the celebrant, who says the fourth 
prayer for the blessing of tho five grains of incense ; and in 
the meanwhile the censer-bearer puts some of the new fire 
into the censer, and returns to his place. 

6. After the fourth prayer, the first acolyte shuts the 



BENEDICTION OF THE FIRE. 251 

book, and having placed it on the table, takes the vase 
with holy water, and joins the other acolytes. The cele- 
brant puts incense as usual into the censer, and blesses it, 
saying, Ab illo benedicaris, etc. Then the deacon, having 
received from the first acolyte the sprinkle, kisses it, and 
gives it to the celebrant, kissing his hand ; the celebrant 
thrice sprinkles, first the five grains of incense, then the 
fire, saying, Asperges me, without the Psalm and Gloria 
Patri, and having received the censer, incenses likewise, 
first the five grains, then the fire. 

7. After the incensing, the first acolyte leaves the holy- 
water vase on the table, and with one of the matches pre- 
pared for that purpose lights the small candle from the 
new fire ; the second acolyte, laying the plate w r ith the five 
grains of incense on the table, together with the second 
master of ceremonies, assists the deacon to take off his violet 
vestments, and put on the white, and carries the maniple 
to the sub-deacon, who puts it on. Then he takes again 
the plate with the five grains, and returns to the right of 
the censer-bearer. 

8. The deacon having put on the white vestments, goes 
to the right of the celebrant, to assist at the blessing of the 
incense for the procession and the Exultet, which is per- 
formed as usual. Then he takes the triple candle with 
both his hands, and at a signal given by the master of 
ceremonies, the procession advances in the following order : 

9. First the censer-bearer, slowly moving his censer, 
and at his right the second acolyte, who carries the five 
grains of incense; the sub-deacon follows with the cross; 
then the clergy, two by two ; after them the deacon, car- 
rying the triple candle, having at his left the first acolyte, 
with the lighted candle ; last of all, the celebrant, with his 
hands joined, and near him the master of ceremonies; all 
walk with their heads uncovered, the celebrant alone 
excepted. 

10. During the procession, an acolyte carries the cap 
and the violet vestments of the deacon to the bench of the 
ministers, and the other things to the sacristy. 

11. As the celebrant enters the church, the second mas- 
ter of ceremonies gives a signal to the clergy to stop ; and 



252 HOLY SATURDAY. 

the deacon bends the rod of the triple candle towards the 
first acolyte, who lights one of the three candles ; then the 
deacon raises the rod, and bends one knee, and all the 
clergy do the same, the cross-bearer excepted ; the celebrant 
uncovers his head before he makes the genuflection. The 
deacon sings Lumen Christi, in such a tone of voice that it- 
may be raised a tone higher twice, and the clergy answer, 
Deo gratias. Then they all rise, and the procession con- 
tinues to advance. When they reach the middle of the 
church, the same ceremony is again performed ; and it is 
repeated the third time before the steps of the altar. 

12. After the Deo gratias has been answered for the 
third time by the clergy, they all go to their places. On 
arriving before the altar, the censer-bearer stops at the 
Gospel side, the acolyte, with the grains of incense, at the 
Epistle side, and the cross-bearer at the right of the censer- 
bearer. The first acolyte, having extinguished the small 
candle, receives the triple candle from the deacon, and 
places himself at the left of the second acolyte ; and the 
deacon, retiring a little towards the Gospel side, and turn- 
ing from his right side, makes room for the celebrant, who 
goes up to the platform, and stands at the Epistle corner. 

Article III. 
From the Exultet to the Prophecies. 

1. The celebrant, on arriving at the Epistle side, turns 
towards the altar ; the second master of ceremonies gives 
the Missal to the deacon, who, kneeling on the platform, 
without saying Munda cor meum, asks as usual the bless- 
ing of the celebrant, who gives it, saying as usual, Domine 
sit in corde tuo, etc., but instead of saying Evangelium suum, 
says, Suum paschale prceconium, making the usual sign of 
the cross, but without giving his hand to be kissed. 

2. The deacon having received the blessing, goes down 
to the foot of the altar, between the cross-bearer and the 
acolyte who carries the triple candle, where, having made 
a genuflection with the acolytes (the cross-bearer should 
not make it), and bowed to the clergy, they go, one after 



PROPHECIES. 203 

the other, to the place prepared at the Gospel side, and 
place themselves in the following order : the deacon in the 
middle, having at his right the snb-deacon, who turns the 
image of the crucifix towards the celebrant, and the censer- 
bearer ; and at his left hand having the acolyte with the 
triple candle, and the acolyte with the grains of incense. 
The master of ceremonies places himself behind the deacon, 
who, with all the others, are turned towards the book. 

3. When they have arrived at the book-stand, and 
placed themselves in the order a-lready mentioned, the dea- 
con lays the book upon it, and opens it; then, without 
making the sign of the cross on himself, and without say- 
ing Dominus vobiscum, he incenses it as for the Gospel, and, 
with his hands joined, he sings the JExuItet; during which 
the clergy remain standing, as also the celebrant, who turns 
towards the deacon. 

4. The deacon having said the w T ords, Curvat imperia, 
stops, the clergy sit down, but not the celebrant, and the 
acolyte who holds the plate with the five grains approaches 
the deacon, who, assisted by the master of ceremonies, goes 
with them to place the five grains in the Paschal candle 
(which one of the acolytes holds), in the form of a cross, in 
this order, 1 which being done, they return to their 
place, and 4 2 5 the clergy rise. The acolyte places the 
plate in 3 which were the five grains on the side- 
table, and takes a small candle not lighted. 

5. The deacon having returned to the Missal, continues 
the Exuttet, and having sung the words Rutilans ignis 
accendit, the clergy sit down ; he goes with the acolyte 
that carries the triple candle, to light the Paschal candle 
with one of them, and returns to continue the Exultet. The 
clergy rise. 

6. The acolyte places the triple candle on the stand pre- 
pared for it near the altar, and the Paschal candle is fixed 
in its candlestick, so that the cross be turned towards the 
celebrant. 

7. The deacon having sung the words, Apis mater eduxit, 
stops awhile, and the first acolyte lights his small candle, 
either from the Paschal candle or from the triple candle, 
and lights the lamps of the sanctuary ; the deacon continues 
the Exultet, and bows at the name of the Pope. 



254 HOLY SATURDAY. 

8. After the Fxultet, the clergy sit down ; the sub-deacon 
leaves the cross at its place, the deacon immediately shuts 
the Missal, and leaves it on the stand, and both, with their 
hands joined, make a genuflection in the middle, and go to 
the bench — the celebrant also going thither at the same 
time ; the latter, assisted by the sub-deacon, takes off his 
cope, and puts on the violet maniple and chasuble. 

9. The deacon, assisted by the first acolyte, takes off his 
white vestments, and puts on violet ; then the celebrant 
and the ministers go by the shortest way to the Epistle 
side, as for the Introit. The second master of ceremonies 
prepares, in the middle of the sanctuary, a book-stand 
without any covering, and a Missal on it for the prophecies. 

Article IV. 

From the Prophecies to the Benediction of the Baptismal Font. 

1. When the ministers have arrived at the Epistle side, 
the second master of ceremonies invites the clergyman who 
is to sing the first prophecy, as in chapter v, except that, 
before he leaves the book-stand with the clergyman, he 
waits till the deacon has said, Flectamus genua (when there 
is no Tract), then they make a genuflection, with all the 
clergy, and rise at the word Levate. Whilst the celebrant 
sings the prayer, the second master of ceremonies invites 
him who is to sing the second prophecy, doing as has 
been already said ; and so likewise for all the other 
prophecies. 

2. The clergy sit down whilst the prophecies are sung, 
rise at the prayers ; the celebrant reads the prophecies in a 
low voice, and sings the prayers in .a ferial tone, with his 
hands extended, the ministers standing behind him, one 
after the other ; and the deacon, immediately after the cele- 
brant has said, Oremus, sings, Flectamus genua, and the 
sub-deacon, Levate. After the prayers, the ministers go 
up near the celebrant, as for the Introit. 

3. After the last prophecy and prayer, the second master 
of ceremonies removes from the middle of the sanctuary 
the book-stand with the Missal, and the celebrant, with 



BENEDICTION OF THE BAPTISMAL FONTS. 255 

the ministers, go by the shortest way to the bench, where 
the celebrant, assisted by the ministers, takes off his maniple 
and chasuble, and puts on the cope; and the ministers take 
off their maniples. 

Article V. 

From the beginning of the Benediction of the Baptismal 
Font, to the beginning of Mass.* 

1. The first acolyte, after the celebrant has put on his 
cope, takes the Paschal candle from its candlestick, and 
goes with it to the middle of the sanctuary ; likewise the 
sub-deacon takes the cross, and places himself immediately 
before the first acolyte ; the celebrant, with the deacon on 
his left, goes before the steps of the altar, in the middle. 
At a signal given by the master of ceremonies, the first 
acolyte makes a genuflection, turns towards the people, and 
walks slowly to the baptismal fonts ; the sub-deacon carry- 
ing the cross, without making the genuflection, follows 
him; then the singers; and after them the rest of the 
clergy make a genuflection in the middle, and follow them ; 
last of all, the celebrant, with his head covered, and the 
deacon at his left, accompanied by the master of ceremonies. 
On the way, the tract, Sicut cervus, is sung by the choir. 
Arrived at the font, the cross-bearer stops at one side, near 
the door or entry, the first acolyte at his left ; the clergy 
divide into two lines, those in inferior orders remaining 
near the door, and those in higher dignity near the font. 
Before the celebrant enters, he stops, takes off his cap, and 
the second acolyte bringing and holding before him the 
Missal, he says, in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiseum, etc., 
and the following prayer. Then he goes, with the deacon 
at his left, to the font, and places himself so as to be turned 
towards the cross, and the clergy. The second acolyte fol- 
lows him with the Missal, and having opened it, the cele- 
brant begins the blessing of the font, saying, in a ferial 
tone, Dominus vobiseum, with the following prayers ; in 
concluding it, he sings, Per omnia scecula, in the tone of 

* This article has been added by the translator. 



256 HOLY SATURDAY. 

the ferial preface, with what follows ; after the Avords, G-ra- 
tiam de Spiritu Sancto, the celebrant divides the water in 
form of a cross, the deacon holding up the side of his cope, 
and offering him the towel to wipe his hands, which one of 
the acolytes should have brought on a plate. 

2. After the words, Inficiendo corrumpat, the celebrant 
touches the water with his right hand, which he afterwards 
wipes, as before. At the words Per Deum 4" vivum, Per 
Deum *fr verum, Per Deum «f* sanctum, he makes the sign 
of the cross three times on the water. After the words 
Super teferebatur, he divides the water with his hand, and 
throws some of it out, towards the four parts of the world, 
in this form, 1 after the words Benignus adspira, he 
breathes thrice 3 4 upon the water, in the form of a cross. 
At the words 2 Jlentlbus efficaces, the first acolyte car- 
ries the Paschal candle to the deacon, that he may give it to 
the celebrant, w T ho dips it into the water at three different 
times, but each successive time he dips it deeper, and sings, 
one tone higher, the w T ords Descended in hanc. Then 
breathing thrice upon the water in this form >f< he goes on 
with the Preface. After the words Fcecundet effectu, the 
Paschal candle is taken out of the water, wiped, and given 
back to the first acolyte, who goes to his place near the 
cross-bearer. The celebrant continues what follows in the 
tone of the Preface, as far as the words Per Dominum, ex- 
clusively, which, with the following words, he only recites ; 
the minister answers, Amen. Then the people are sprinkled 
with water taken out of the font by a priest in surplice and 
stole. If the water is blessed in another vessel, the font is 
filled with it ; but if it is blessed in the font, some of it is 
taken out to satisfy the devotion of the people, and to bless 
their houses and other places. - 

3. After this, the celebrant receives from the deacon 
the oil of the catechumens, and pours some of it into the 
baptismal font, in form of a cross, saying, Sctndijicetur, etc. 
The ministers answer, Amen. Then he pours the chrism 
into it, in the same manner, saying, Infuslo, etc.; the min- 
isters answering also, Amen. Lastly, lie pours the oil and 
chrism both together into the water, in the form of a cross, 
saying. Commixtio, etc.; and the ministers answer, Amen. 



BENEDICTION OF THE BAPTISMAL FONTS. 257 

Then he mingles the oil with the water, and with his hand 
spreads it all over the font. This done, two acolytes bring 
everything necessary to wash the hands, also the slices of 
bread and lemon prepared on a plate ; the celebrant, assisted 
by the deacon, washes and wipes his hands. 

4. If any are to be baptized, they are solemnly baptized 
by the celebrant, as in the ritual. After the blessing of 
the font, they return to the high altar in the same order in 
which they came. Arrived there, the first acolyte makes 
a genuflection, replaces the Paschal candle on its candle- 
stick, and goes to the side-table, near which the cross- 
bearer leaves the cross, and goes to the bench. The clergy, 
having made a genuflection in the middle, go to their places 
and sit down. The celebrant having bowed, and the deacon 
having made a genuflection, go to the bench, where the 
celebrant, assisted by the ministers, takes off his cope, who 
also take off their chasubles, and, having bowed to the 
clergy, go to the altar. In the meanwhile, the acolytes 
should place on the border of the platform three violet 
cushions at equal distance ; the celebrant and the minis- 
ters, having made the usual reverence to the cross, pros- 
trate themselves, laying their hands and their heads on 
them. The clergy kneel down. The acolytes carry the 
chasubles to the sacristy. 

5. Two chanters, kneeling before two stools, behind the 
ministers, in the middle of the choir, begin to sing the 
Litany of the Saints, and the clergy repeat the same words 
sung by the chanters. The master of ceremonies and aco^ 
lytes kneel by the steps of the altar. 

6. Whilst the chanters sing Peccatorcs, which, with the 
rest of the Litany, ought to be sung very slowly, to give 
time to prepare what is necessary, the celebrant, the min- 
isters, and the acolytes, at a signal given by the master of 
ceremonies, rise ; the ministers receive their caps from him, 
and having made a genuflection (the celebrant bowing) to 
the cross, and bowed to the clergy, go to the sacristy ; the 
acolytes walking first, then the ministers, and lastly the 
celebrant, one after another, with their heads covered ; 
there they take off their violet stoles, and put on the white 
vestments. 

22 



258 HOLY SATURDAY. 

7. After the ministers have left the sanctuary, the aco- 
lytes appointed for it remove the cushions and the violet 
altar-veil and canopy from the altar, the violet veil from 
the side-table, and the violet cloth from the bench of the 
ministers; they also spread the carpet on the platform and 
steps of the altar, light the candles on the altar, and un- 
cover the images in the church. In the sacristy, the aco- 
lytes light their candles, and the censer-bearer puts fire 
into the censer. 

Article VI. 

The Mass. 

1. When the chanters have come to the Agnus Dei, or 
thereabouts, according to the greater or less distance of the 
sacristy from the altar, the ministers, preceded by the 
acolytes with their candles lighted, walk towards the altar, 
so as to be in the sanctuary at the end of Exaudi nos; 
which, being repeated by the choir, the clergy rise, the 
chanters go to the desk, to sing the Kyrie in a slow and 
solemn manner, as the ministers enter the sanctuary (be- 
cause to-day the Kyrie takes the place of the Introit, which 
the singers should not begin to sing before the ministers 
have arrived at the sanctuary). (Deer. S. R. G, 14 Apr., 
1753.) The ministers bow, as usual, to the clergy, make 
a genuflection (the celebrant profoundly bowing) to the 
cross, and Mass is begun. 

2. Mass to-day goes on as usual, till the end of the 
celebrant's communion inclusively, with the following ex- 
ceptions: the psalrn, Juclica me, with the Gloria Patri, is 
resumed. After the incensing there is no Introit, but the 
sacred ministers say, as usual, Kyrie eleison. 

3. The celebrant having sung the words, Gloria in exeelsis 
Deo, the first acolyte rings the bell by the side-table, the 
second rings another in the sacristy, and the large bells 
of the church are also rung, whilst the sacred ministers 
continue the Gloria to its end. At the same time the 
organ is played, as usual. 

4. The celebrant having given the blessing to the sub- 



THE MASS. 259 

deacon after the Epistle, sings thrice, Alleluia, raising every 
time his voice one tone higher; and the choir repeats it 
after each time in the same tone, the ministers standing by 
the celebrant, as for the Introit, who, having read the 
Tract, goes to read the Gospel, as usual. 

5. The acolytes, at the Gospel, go as usual with the min- 
isters, but do not carry their candlesticks. The Credo is 
not said, neither the Offertory, nor the Agnus Dei; the 
Pax is not given. 

6. The deacon, having covered the chalice after the 
celebrant has put into it the small particle of the conse- 
crated Host, immediately changes places with the sub- 
deacon. 

7. According to the decree of the S. C. R., 22 Mar., 1806, 
Communion may be given to the faithful at this Mass, by 
which, in parochial churches, they fulfil the paschal pre- 
cept. If it be given, the deacon and sub-deacon do not 
exchange places, and everything for the Communion should 
be done as on Holy Thursday. 

8. After the Communion of the celebrant, the censer- 
bearer goes to prepare the censer, puts fire into it, and the 
choir, instead of the Communio, sing Alleluia, and the 
psalm, Laudate Dominion, etc. 

9. The celebrant, having taken the last ablution, goes 
to the Epistle side, where he recites in a low voice the 
Alleluia, and the psalm, Laudate Dominum, alternately 
with the ministers who are near him, placed in the same 
position as at the Introit. The choir having repeated the 
anthevn Alleluia, the celebrant intones Vespere autem Sab- 
bati, and, with the ministers, continues it to the end, in a 
low voice, whilst the choir sing it. 

10. When the chanters begin the Magnificat, the cele- 
brant and the ministers make the sign of the cross, and go 
to the middle of the altar, the sub-deacon at the left and 
the deacon at the right of the celebrant, where he presents 
the incense. Then the altar is incensed, as usual at Ves- 
pers. 

11. The deacon having incensed the celebrant, goes to 
incense the clergy, as usual. In the meantime, the cele- 
brant and the sub-deacon remain at the Epistle side, as at 



260 HOLY SATURDAY. 

the Introit After the clergy, the sub-deacon is incensed 
by the deacon, for which purpose the sub-deacon turns 
towards him, without, however, turning his back to the 
celebrant. Then the deacon goes to the place where he 
usually stands at the Introit, and turns to the censer-bearer, 
who incenses him ; he also incenses the acolytes and the 
people. Afterwards he takes the censer to the sacristy, 
and returns to the altar. 

12. The antiphon, Vesper e autem, etc., being repeated 
by the choir, the celebrant goes to the middle, the ministers 
following him, one after the other, kisses the altar, says 
Dominus vobiscum, and finishes the Mass as usual. The 
deacon sings, Ite, Missa est, Alleluia, Alleluia, 



PART V. 



Ceremonies for Jjjftass and ©capera. 

SOLEMNLY CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP, 

OR IN HIS PRESENCE. 



CHAPTER I. 

SOLEMN PONTIFICAL VESPEES. 

Aeticle I. 
Things to be Prepared. 

1. The altar is to be covered with a long veil, which 
should not hang down before it, but only on the two sides. 
In the middle of the altar are placed the sacred vestments 
for the Bishop, viz., the amice, alb, cincture, stole, and 
cope ; on the Epistle side, the ornamented mitre ; on that 
of the Gospel, the golden mitre ; on the highest step near 
the Epistle corner, the crosier, and near the vestments, on 
the Gospel side, on a small plate, the pectoral cross and 
the ring. 

2. On the side-table, the two candlesticks for the aco- 
lytes, the Missal for the prayers to be sung by the Bishop, 
and the hand-candlestick. 

3. In the middle of the sanctuary, two or four stools for 
the cope-bearers, according to their number. 

4. In the sacristy, a cope for the assistant priest ; two 
dalmatics, stoles, albs, cinctures, and amices for the assist- 



262 PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 

ant deacons ; two or four copes for the chanters, according 
to their number ; and a sufficient number of copes, chasu- 
bles, and dalmatics, with amices, albs, cinctures, etc., for 
the clergy who assist at Vespers, dressed according to 
their order. 

5. In a convenient place, the censer with the incense- 
boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

Article II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the Church, 
to the Beginning of Vespers. 

1. The Bishop, preceded by the clergy, two by two, goes 
from the sacristy to the church, the assistant priest walking 
immediately before him, and the two deacons at his side ; 
having adored the Blessed Sacrament, he goes up to his 
seat. There he sits for a short time; then rising, he takes 
off his cape,* and puts on the amice, alb, cincture, pectoral 
cross, stole, and cope ; he sits down, the first deacon puts 
the mitre on his head, and the assistant priest the ring on 
his finger. 

2. Being thus vested, and having sat for awhile, his 
mitre is taken off by the second deacon. The Bishop then 
rises, and with him all the clergy ; he turns towards the 
altar, and says, secretly, Pater and Jive; then, making the 
sign of the cross on himself, he sings, Deus in adjutoriwn 
meum intende. Whilst the choir sings Gloria Patri, the 
Bishop and all the clergy bow towards the altar. 

Article III. 

From the Beginning to the End of Vespers. 

1. In the meanwhile, two or four chanters in copes, ac- 
companied by the second master of ceremonies, make the 
usual genuflection and bows, go to the Bishop's seat, and 
the first among them gives the tone of the first antiphon 

* The technical name is mozetta. It is regarded as a mark of juris- 
diction, and is therefore only to be worn by the diocesan, unless in 
Councils. 



PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 263 

to the Bishop, who repeats the same words aloud ; then 
having made the accustomed bows and genuflection, they 
all return to their places. At the beginning of the first 
psalm, the Bishop and the clergy sit down, and the first 
deacon puts the plain mitre on the Bishop. 

2. At the Gloria Patri, the Bishop, with his mitre on, 
bows towards the altar, and the clergy do the same, taking 
off their caps. 

3. Two of the singers, in copes, attended by the master 
of ceremonies, go to give the tone of the antiphons as fol- 
lows : the second antiphon to the first assistant deacon, the 
third to the assistant priest, the fourth to the clergyman 
who occupies the first place in the sanctuary, and the fifth 
to the second assistant deacon. Those to whom the tone 
is given, stand, *and with them, if they be assistants at the 
Bishop's seat, all the other assistants ; but if not, all the 
clergy who are in the sanctuary. 

4. All the psalms and antiphons being ended, the first 
chanter, in cope, or the sub-deacon, attended by the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, goes to the place where the epistle is 
usually sung, and, turning towards the bishop, sings the 
chapter; the bishop, with his mitre on, and all the clergy, 
with their heads uncovered, stand whilst it is sung. The 
choir having answered Deo gratias, the same one who in- 
toned the antiphon, accompanied by the master of cere- 
monies, goes to the bishop, who is still standing with his 
mitre on, to intone the hymn ; immediately after, the mitre 
is taken from the bishop, who repeats the same words of 
the hymn, and the hymn is continued by the choir. 

At the hymns, Veni Creator, or Ave Maris Stella, all the 
clergy kneel whilst the bishop intones them ; and the 
bishop himself, after the intonation, kneels either at the 
faldstool before the middle of the altar, or on a cushion 
near his seat. All rise after the first strophe. 

5. After the hymn, the verses having been sung by the 
four singers in copes, and answered by the choir, the 
antiphon of the Magnificat is intoned in the same manner 
as the hymn, to the bishop, who is still standing ; having 
repeated the first words, he sits down, receives the precious 
mitre, attended by the assistant priest, puts the incense into 



264 PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 

the censer, and blesses it. In the meanwhile, two acolytes 
go to each side of the altar, and fold in the middle the 
veil that covers it, so as to leave the half of it near the 
front uncovered. 

6. As the choir begins the Magnificat, the bishop rises, 
with his mitre on; all the assistants likewise rise; the 
bishop makes the sign of the cross, receives in his left 
hand the crosier from the assistant priest, and walks to the 
altar between the deacons, who raise his cope on each side ; 
when arrived before the lowest step, he gives the crosier 
to the assistant priest; the second deacon takes oif his 
mitre, he bows to the cross (the others making a genuflec- 
tion), and all go up to the altar, where the bishop, having 
received the censer from the assistant priest, incenses the 
cross and the altar ; the deacons who are at his side, raising 
the border of his cope, and reciting the Magnificat alter- 
nately with him. 

7. The bishop, having incensed the altar, goes to the 
middle, says the Gloria Patri, bowing to the cross, goes 
below the lowest step, makes a reverence to the altar, 
receives the mitre and crosier, and returns to his seat, where 
he is incensed by the assistant priest; then the deacon 
takes off his mitre, and the bishop, holding the crosier 
with both his hands, remains standing till the end of Sicut 
erat in prindpio, after the Magnificat. 

8. As soon as the bishop leaves the altar, the acolytes 
spread the veil over the altar. 

9. After the bishop has been incensed by the assistant 
priest, the clergy are incensed by the first of the four 
singers in copes, and the singer, the master of ceremonies, 
the acolytes, and the people, by the censer-bearer, as it has 
been said elsewhere. 

The Magnificat is to be sung, so as to give time for the 
incensing. 

10. Whilst the choir repeats the antiphon of the Magnifi- 
cat, the bishop gives up his crosier, sits down and receives 
the mitre. In the meantime, the master of ceremonies 
accompanies the acolytes, carrying the candlesticks with 
lighted candles, and the four chanters in copes, to the 
bishop's seat. After the antiphon, the bishop takes off the 



SOLEMN VESPERS. 265 

mitre, rises, and the assistant priest, holding the book be- 
fore him, he sings Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer, with 
his hands joined, during which all the clergy stand. While 
the bishop says Dominus vobiscum, after the prayer, the 
four chanters in copes, the acolytes, and master of ceremo- 
nies bow to him, and go to the middle of the sanctuary ; 
where, having made a genuflection, the acolytes go to the 
side-table, and the chanters sing the Benedicamus Domino. 

11. Whilst the choir answer, Deo gratias, the bishop 
sits down, receives the mitre, rises, sings Sit nomen Domini, 
etc., and gives the benediction, as usual, from his seat, if 
he can be seen thence by the people ; otherwise he gives it 
from the altar. 

If the celebrant be an archbishop, the cross is brought 
before him, he bows profoundly to it, and gives the bene- 
diction without mitre. 

Indulgences are never published at Vespers. 

12. After Vespers, the bishop puts off the sacred vest- 
ments as usual. 

13. The pontifical Vespers are sung in the manner here- 
tofore described, when the bishop is to celebrate a pontifical 
Mass the next day, or on the great solemnities of the year, 
such, at least, as Easter, Christmas, the Feast of the Patron 
Saint of the Diocese, the Titular of the Church, etc. 

14. On other occasions, Vespers are celebrated with less 
solemnity ; then all the clergy do not put on the sacred 
vestments ; four of them only are dressed in copes ; the 
antiphons are intoned, first to the bishop, then to the other 
clergymen in the sanctuary, according to their dignity and 
order. 



CHAPTER II. 

SOLEMN VESPERS IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP. 

1. When the bishop does not officiate at Vespers, he 
is vested as usual, with his rochet and cappa : he sits at 
his seat, having two clergymen in surplices at his side ; he 

23 



266 COMPLINES. 

puts incense into the censer and blesses it; he is incensed, 
immediately after the celebrant, by the assistant priest ; and 
after the Benedicamus Domino, and Deo gr atlas, the bishop 
gives the solemn blessing from his seat, if he can be seen 
thence by the people, otherwise from the altar. 

2. The officiating priest is dressed in cope, and sits in 
the usual place on the Epistle side. Before he begins Deus 
in adjutorium, he asks the bishop's leave by bowing to 
him ; every time he goes from the altar to his seat, or from 
it to the altar, he bows to the bishop ; he does not bless 
the incense, or put it into the censer; he is incensed only 
with two swings, and not at his seat, but at the Epistle 
corner near the altar. 

3. There may be four, or two chanters, in copes, who 
sit on their stools as usual, in the middle of the sanctuary ; 
two give the tone of the first antiphon, and that of the 
Magnificat, to the officiating priest; the others to the other 
clergymen, according to their dignity and order ; and sing 
the verses, Benedicamus Domino, etc. The two first amongst 
them accompany the celebrant to the altar for the incensing 
of it, raising his cope on each side; and the first of them 
incenses the celebrant and the clergy, including the three 
other singers. 

4. The acolytes carry their candlesticks as usual in other 
Vespers. 

5. The officiating priest, with the two or four chanters 
in cope, the acolytes, and master of ceremonies, must go to 
the sanctuary before the bishop, sit at their places till he 
enters it, as he enters, preceded by the rest of the clergy, 
they rise, and whilst he kneels, they kneel also. 



CHAPTER, III. 

COMPLINE, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 

1. For Compline, the bishop is dressed in rochet and 
cappa; he sits in his usual place. 



MATINS. 267 

2. When the chanter says, Jube Domne, etc., he answers, 
Noctcm quictam; after the Lesson, he says, Adjutorium nos- 
trum; then the Pater, the confession, and absolution, etc., 
Pens in adjutorium ; all of which are to be said standing. 
At the beginning of the psalms, he takes his seat. 

3. All the rest is said by the choir and by the priest who 
should have officiated if the bishop were not present, with 
the exception of the prayer and of the Benedicat et custo- 
diat nos, etc., which are to be sung by the bishop. 

4. When the bishop, although present at Compline, does 
not officiate, nothing is to be observed in particular, except 
that the officiating priest, at the words Indulgentiam, abso- 
lutionem, and at the Benedicat et custodial, bows profoundly 
to the bishop. 



CHAPTER IV. 

MATINS, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 

1. The bishop is dressed in rochet and cappa. He is 
seated at his usual place ; no clergymen sit by him. He 
is attended by the master of ceremonies. 

2. Whilst the Pater, Ave, and Credo are said, all stand ; 
the Credo being ended, the bishop, making with his thumb 
the sign of the cross on his lips, sings, Domine labia, and 
making the sign of the cross on himself as usual, he sings, 
Pens in adjictorium. He remains standing during the In- 
vitatorium, and the Psalm, Venite exultemus; at the words, 
Venite adoremus et proddamus, he kneels, then rises, and 
remains standing during the hymn, which he intones only 
in case he is to celebrate Mass, one of the chanters having 
intoned it. As the first psalm begins, the bishop and all 
the clergy take their seats. 

3. The antiphons are intoned by the chanters in surplices 
to the clergy, beginning with those who are first in dignity 
and order. At the Gloria Patri, all take off their caps 
and bow. 



268 MATINS. 

4. At the versicles, which are sung by two of the chant- 
ers, after the third antiphon of each nocturn, all rise. The 
bishop says, in a loud voice, the words, Pater noster; the 
rest is said secretly, as far as the words et ne nos, which are 
sung by the bishop, who also sings the absolution, and the 
words of the blessing, after the Jube Domne benedicere. 
The bishop does not rise to give the second and third 
blessing at each nocturn, but remains sitting. 

5. After the verses of each nocturn, the second master 
of ceremonies goes to invite, with a bow, the clergyman 
who is to sing the Lesson, beginning by those who are in- 
ferior in order or dignity. He accompanies him to the 
middle of the sanctuary before the desk prepared for the 
purpose ; there they make a genuflection to the altar, bow 
first to the bishop, then to the clergy on each side of the 
sanctuary ; after the absolution for the first Lesson of each 
nocturn, or the response for the two others, the clergyman 
who is to sing the Lesson bows profoundly towards the 
bishop, and sings, Jube Domne benedicere. After the words 
of the blessing, he sings the Lesson, at the end of which 
he kneels to the altar, on one knee, saying, Tu autem 
Domine, then bows profoundly to the bishop, who makes 
the sign of the cross towards him, and after having bowed 
to the clergy as before, he returns to his place. The same 
is done for all the other Lessons. The seventh and eighth 
Lessons are sung by those who are to officiate at Mass as 
assistant deacons, at the side of the bishop. Whilst the 
text of the Gospel is sung, at the seventh Lesson, the bishop 
and all the clergy should stand. 

6. The ninth Lesson is sung by the bishop at his seat, 
standing, with his face turned towards the altar. Before 
he begins it, the two assistant deacons, and one of the aco- 
lytes with the hand-candlestick, and another with the book, 
go to him ; the two former place themselves at his side, and 
the latter before him. The bishop, bowing profoundly to- 
wards the altar, sings, Jube Domine, not Jube Domne ; all 
the clergy rise, and answer, Amen. Then the bishop sings 
the Lesson, during which the clergy remain standing. At 
the end of it, the bishop, bowing profoundly towards the 
altar, says, Tu autem Domine, etc. The choir having an- 



PONTIFICAL MASS. 269 

swered, Deo gratias, the tone of Te Deurn is given to the 
bishop, who repeats the same words, and the choir continue 
the hymn. At the words, Te ergo qucesumus, the bishop 
and all the clergy kneel down. 



CHAPTEE V. 

LAUDS, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 

1. When the bishop has officiated at Matins, it is proper 
that he should officiate at Lauds also. Everything is to 
be done as directed for Vespers, when the bishop is not to 
celebrate Mass the next day. Soon after the Te Deum, the 
bishop, at his seat, puts on all the sacred vestments, as for 
Vespers, and four or six clergymen put on copes. 

2. The bishop begins, Deus in adjutorium, making the 
sign of the cross on himself. The antiphons are intoned 
as for Vespers, and everything else is done as directed for 
the same. 

3. At the Benedictus, everything is done as at the Mag- 
nificat; and after the Benedicamus and Deo gratias, the 
solemn blessing is likewise given by the bishop. 



CHAPTER VI. 

SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS. 

Article I. 

Things to be Prepared. 

There should be in Cathedral churches a place or chapel 
to answer the purpose of that which was formerly called 



270 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

the Secretarium. It should have an altar, the bishop's 
seat, seats for all the clergy, and a side-table. 

On the altar of this chapel, all the pontifical vestments 
should be prepared ; and the copes, chasubles, dalmatics, 
and tunics for the clergy, at their own seats. On the side- 
table, the bishop's sandals and stockings, the candlesticks 
for the acolytes, the incense-boat and censer, the book, and 
hand-candlestick, etc., should be placed ; to this chapel the 
bishop and all the clergy ought to go, immediately after 
having adored the Blessed Sacrament. There, the bishop, 
having begun Tierce, should make his preparation for Mass ; 
the clergy should put on the vestments suitable to their 
order and dignity ; the bishop should put on his sacred 
vestments, finish Tierce, and, after having taken off the 
cope, put on the dalmatic and chasuble ; and lastly, being 
preceded by the clergy, he should go in procession from 
this place to the high altar. 

Wherever there is not such a convenient place, every- 
thing is to be done in the sanctuary; we shall, therefore, 
in the present chapter, adapt the instructions to the ordi- 
nary construction of our churches. 

1. The altar is to be prepared with the best and richest 
ornaments ; three large candlesticks with candles on each 
side of the cross, and a seventh one behind it. This seventh 
candlestick with candle is to be placed behind the cross only 
when the bishop of the diocese celebrates a solemn Pontifi- 
cal Mass. Between the candlesticks, relic-cases of a suita- 
ble size may be placed. 

2. On the altar, the pontifical vestments, of suitable 
color, should be placed, one over the other, viz., imme- 
diately on the altar-cloth in the middle, the chasuble, then 
the dalmatic, tunic, cope, stole, cincture, alb, and over all 
the others the amice. On the Epistle side, near the vest- 
ments, the pectoral cross and the ring should be on a plate ; 
on the Gospel side, the gloves on another plate. On the 
Gospel side the precious mitre, and the golden mitre on 
the Epistle side, standing against the candlesticks, and the 
crosier at the same corner, against the angle formed by the 
altar and the pilaster near it. 

3. The Bishop's seat is to be on the Gospel side, against 



PONTIFICAL MASS. 271 

the side-walls of the sanctuary ; it should be on a platform, 
raised by three steps above the floor of the sanctuary ; the 
platform should be large enough to admit two wooden 
stools without backs, decently painted, for the two assistant 
deacons, on each side of the Bishop's chair, which should 
have a high back and convenient arms, and be covered 
with silk cloth ; there should be a third stool, of the same 
form with the others, near that of the second assistant 
deacon, but projecting more towards the front of the plat- 
form - , for the assistant priest. Over the Bishop's chair 
there should be a canopy, with hangings all around ; the 
walls behind the chair, and the assistants' stools, should 
likewise be covered with hangings, which ought to be of a 
color suitable to the festival. 

4. The side-table ought to be placed on the Epistle side 
of the altar, and covered all around and on the top with 
white linen cloth. It should be sufficiently large. 

On this table there should be two candlesticks with 
candles for the acolytes, the chalice with its purifier, paten, 
host, pall, and burse, containing the corporal ; the Missal, 
for the Epistle and Gospel ; behind the chalice, standing 
against the wall, the cruets on a plate, the basin and ewer 
for washing the Bishop's hands, two or three fine towels 
on a plate, the book containing the canon, the Missal for 
the Bishop, with his maniple in it, the hand-candlestick, 
the Bishop's sandals and stockings on a plate, covered with 
a veil. Over the chalice, the long veil, the two extremi- 
ties of which ought to hang down on each side of the table. 

5. The bench of the ministers should be on the Epistle 
side, below the table, and against the side-walls of the 
sanctuary. It should be covered with baize. On it the 
maniples of the deacon and sub-deacon should be placed. 

6. A sufficient number of seats for the clergy should be 
placed on each side of the sanctuary; they ought not to 
be the usual chairs, but benches with a back, covered with 
drapery. 

7. There should be a number of acolytes in surplices, no 
fewer than eight. The first of them carries the book, and 
holds it when the Bishop reads out of it ; but when he 
sings, the book must be held by the assistant priest. The 



272 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

second holds the hand-candlestick whenever the Bishop 
reads or sings anything, either at his seat or at the altar. 
The third acolyte, who, besides the surplice, wears a cope, 
is to carry the crosier. The fourth, if he is not dressed in 
cope, wears on his surplice a long veil, hanging from his 
neck before him, in order to cover his hands with it when 
he holds the mitre. The fifth is the censer- bearer. The 
sixth and the seventh are to carry the candlesticks. The 
eighth carries the apron, which is a rich cloth that is spread 
on the lap of the Bishop, when seated. 

8. The faldstool is a kind of folding seat, sufficiently 
large, the four corners of which project about a foot above 
the cushion, when laid on it ; these corners are connected 
together only on the two sides, six inches above the cushion, 
with two cross-pieces, which, as well as the projecting cor- 
ners, should be of gilt metal. Thus it remains open be- 
hind and before. It is covered with a silk cloth of the 
color of the vestments, which hangs down to the ground 
on the four sides. It is used as a praying desk for the 
Bishop, and as a chair, when, for ordinations or other cere- 
monies, he is to sit at the altar. Two cushions covered 
with the same cloth are to be prepared ; one on the seat 
and another before it, to kneel or stand on. It is to be 
placed in the middle of the sanctuary, whenever the Bishop 
is to kneel. 

9. We suppose in the following instructions that the 
Cathedral church has no Secretarium or chapel, as men- 
tioned in the beginning of this chapter; but in case it 
should have one, the Bishop and clergy vest and sing 
Tierce in it. 

10. In the sacristy, the following things are to be pre- 
pared : a cope for the assistant priest, who puts it on over 
his surplice, without stole ; two amices, albs, cinctures, and 
dalmatics for the two assistant deacons. They wear neither 
stoles nor maniples. Also two amices, albs, and cinctures 
for the deacon and sub-deacon ; also a stole for the deacon. 
Their maniples are to be placed on their seats in the sanc- 
tuary. The clergy are to be in sacred vestments. Some 
of them, the first in dignity, wear copes over their sur- 
plices; some, chasubles over their albs; no maniples or 



VESTING OF THE CLERGY AND BISHOP. 273 

stoles are to be used by them. The clergymen who are 
not priests are to be dressed in dalmatics over their albs, 
but without stoles and maniples. A sufficient number of 
these vestments ought to be prepared in the sacristy. In 
order to have a sufficient number of clergymen in towns 
and cities, where there are several congregations besides 
that of the Cathedral, the service ought to be performed in 
those earlier than usual, so that all the clergy may go to the 
Cathedral. This custom is observed in other countries, 
and it is conformable to what was practiced in remote an- 
tiquity. The Bishops can and ought to introduce it into 
this country. 

Article II. 
Of the Vesting of the Clergy and of the Bishop. 

1. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy, 
before the Bishop arrives. Those who are to officiate as 
assistant priest and assistant deacons, preceded by the in- 
ferior clergy, who wear no sacred vestments, all in surplices, 
accompany the Bishop from his house to the sacristy, if 
there be no street between it and the church ; otherwise, 
from the room where he has put on the rochet and cappa 
magna, and, two by two, walk before him ; lastly, the 
deacon and sub-deacon ; the assistant priest walks alone 
immediately before the Bishop, and the two assistant dea- 
cons at each side of him. 

2. The Bishop having arrived at the sacristy, and bowed 
to the cross, the clergy go to the sanctuary, first those in 
surplices, then those in dalmatics, chasubles, and copes. 
The assistant priest goes immediately before the Bishop, 
and the two assistant deacons on each side of him. As the 
clergy arrive at the middle of the sanctuary, they make a 
genuflection, bow to one another, and go to their places on 
each side of the sanctuary ; the inferior clergy towards the 
railing, and those in superior grades towards the altar. 
The deacon and sub-deacon go to their bench. The Bishop 
bows to the cross, and kneels for awhile at the faldstool. 
All the clergy kneel and rise with him. After a short 



274 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

prayer he goes to his seat, having at his side the assistant 
deacons in surplices. 

3. The Bishop, standing with his head uncovered, turn- 
ing towards the altar, says secretly, Pater and Ave. Then 
making the sign of the cross on himself, he sings, Deus in 
adjutorium, etc.; then he intones the hymn, Nunc Sancte, 
etc.; one of the singers intones the antiphon, then the 
Psalm, Legem pone ; which having been begun, the Bishop 
and the clergy sit down and put on their caps ; the assist- 
ant priest and deacons alone remaining standing by the 
Bishop. 

4. The acolytes bring the book and the hand-candle- 
stick to the Bishop ; the book-bearer kneels down. The 
Bishop reads the anthem Ne reminiscaris, and the Psalms 
for the preparation of Mass. The sub-deacon, accompanied 
by the second master of ceremonies, brings from the table 
the plate with the sandals and stockings covered with the 
veil ; six acolytes follow him and surround the Bishop's 
seat ; the sub-deacon, assisted by the second master of 
ceremonies, takes off the Bishop's shoes and puts on him 
the stockings and sandals ; afterwards the sub-deacon and 
acolytes retire to their places. 

5. The Psalms having been read, and the anthem, Ne 
reminiscaris, repeated by the Bishop, he rises, with his head 
uncovered, and turning towards the altar, says, Kyrie eleison, 
with the verse and prayers that follow. Then he takes 
off the cappa, saying the appropriate prayer. The aco- 
lytes bring the basin, ewer, and towels, and the Bishop 
washes his hands, saying the prayer, Da, Domine. The 
assistant priest takes off the Bishop's ring before he washes 
his hands, and puts it on after he has washed them, and 
presents him the towel to wipe them. 

6. When the Bishop rises, after having read the Psalms, 
the second master of ceremonies goes up to the altar, fol- 
lowed by the acolytes, who, one after another, make first a 
genuflection before the lower step, go up, receive severally 
one of the vestments, make another genuflection on the 
platform, go down and place themselves in a line, begin- 
ning at the Gospel side. When all have received the vest- 
ments, that is, the amice, alb, cincture, pectoral cross, stole, 



VESTING OF THE CLERGY AND BISHOP. 275 

cope, and mitre, at a signal given by the master of cere- 
monies, they make a genuflection, and walk one after 
another in a line to the Bishop's seat. When the first who 
carries the amice is arrived before the last step of the Bishop's 
seat, he and all the others stop one behind another. The 
second master of ceremonies stops at the left hand of the 
first acolyte, who, having given the amice, gives his place 
to the next, goes to his right hand ; they both bow to the 
Bishop, and the first acolyte returns to his place ; the 
others do in like manner. 

7. Whilst the Bishop is washing his hands, the deacon 
and sub-deacon go to the throne, and as soon as he has 
washed his hands, the assistant deacon and priest go down, 
where, having with the deacon and sub-deacon bowed to 
the Bishop, the assistant priest and deacons go to put on 
their vestments in the sacristy ; the deacon goes to the 
Bishop's right, and the sub-deacon to the left. The dea- 
con receives from the acolytes all the vestments, with the 
assistance of the sub-deacon, that is, the amice, alb, cinc- 
ture, pectoral cross, stole, cope, and mitre. After which 
the Bishop takes his seat. The deacon and sub-deacon go 
down, and having made a bow to the Bishop, together with 
the assistant priest and deacons, retire to their bench ; the 
assistant priest and deacons go up to their usual places, and 
seat themselves. 

8. When all the Psalms, with the anthem, have been 
sung, which ought to be done slowly, to give sufficient 
time for the vesting of the Bishop, the second master of 
ceremonies accompanies the sub-deacon to the place where 
the Epistle is sung, and the latter turning towards the 
Bishop, sings the chapter. The bishop, before the sub- 
deacon begins it, rises with his mitre on ; the clergy like- 
wise rise with their heads uncovered. The sub-deacon 
having sung the chapter, returns to his place. The chant- 
ers chant the responses and verses ; which being ended, 
the acolytes with the candlestick, and those with the book 
and hand-candlestick, go to the Bishop's seat ; the second 
assistant deacon takes off the mitre, and the Bishop sings 
the Dominus vobisciim, and the prayer from the book, which 
the assistant priest holds before him. 



276 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

9. The singers having sung Benedicamus Domino, and 
the choir answered Deo gratias, the deacon and sub-deacon 
return to the Bishop's side, exchanging places with the two 
assistant deacons ; they take off the cope from the Bishop, 
and give it to an acolyte, who carries it to the sacristy. In 
the meanwhile, the second master of ceremonies gives to 
the acolytes, in the same manner as in n. 6, the tunic, 
dalmatic, the plate with the gloves, the chasuble, and the 
crosier, and the plate with the ring. The acolytes with 
the book and the candle, go to the Bishop's seat, and the 
acolytes with the vestments also go at a signal given by 
the master of ceremonies. 

10. The deacon and sub-deacon vest the Bishop, who 
reads the prayers appointed for each vestment. 

If he be an Archbishop, after he has put on the chasuble, 
a sub-deacon brings from the altar the pallium, gives it to 
the deacon, who, assisted by the sub-deacon, puts it on 
him. 

Then the Bishop sits, and the deacon puts on him the 
mitre, and the assistant priest the ring on his finger. 

11. The Bishop having thus put on all the sacred vest- 
ments, the deacon and sub-deacon retire to their bench, and 
give their places to the two assistant deacons. 

If Tierce has been sung in the chapel, or Secretarium, 
the censer-bearer comes to the Bishop with the censer 
and boat, gives it to the assistant priest, and the Bishop 
puts the incense into the censer and blesses it. Then they 
go to the high altar in procession, in the following order : 
the censer-bearer first, the cross-bearer in sub-deacon's 
dress, between the acolytes carrying the candlesticks, the 
clergy in surplices, those in dalmatics, the priests in chasu- 
ble, those in cope, all two by two. Then the sub-deacon, 
who is to officiate at Mass, carrying before his breast the 
Missal closed, with the Bishop's maniple in it ; after him 
the deacon, at the left of the assistant priest, in cope ; last, 
the Bishop, between the two assistant deacons, with the 
crosier in his left, and blessing the people with his right 
hand. After the Bishop follow the acolytes, who carry the 
cross, mitre, book, hand-candlestick, etc., two by two. 

As the clergy arrive in the sanctuary, they make a genu- 



BEGINNING. 277 

flection in the middle, bow to one another, and go to their 
places. The Bishop goes to the altar and begins Mass, as 
will be said hereafter. 

If the pontiff be an Archbishop, the archiepiscopal cross 
is carried by the cross-bearer, in sub-deacon's dress, imme- 
diately before the clergy in sacred vestments. 

Article III. 
The Pontifical Mass. 

1. The Bishop rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, 
and with his right blesses the clergy (who arise and bow 
to him) and the people as he goes to the altar between the 
two assistant deacons. The deacon and sub-deacon put on 
their maniples. The second master of ceremonies gives the 
Missal with the Bishop's maniple in it to the sub-deacon, 
and all go to the altar. 

2. The Bishop having arrived before the lower step, in 
the middle, the two assistant deacons give place to the as- 
sistant priest, who goes to the Bishop's right, and to the 
deacon, who goes to the left, and place themselves at a 
little distance behind them ; the sub-deacon goes to the left 
of the deacon, and remains a little behind him, giving the 
book to the master of ceremonies. The acolytes who carry 
the crosier and the mitre place themselves a little behind 
the two assistant deacons. The Bishop, after his mitre has 
been taken off by the deacon, makes a profound bow to the 
cross, and all the others make a genuflection. Then the 
Bishop begins Mass, In nomine Pair is y etc. ; at the words 
Et vos fratres, he turns himself towards the ministers, and 
they, at the words Tibi, pater, etc., bow to the Bishop. 

3. After the prayer, Indulgentiam, absolutionem, etc., the 
sub-deacon, taking the maniple out of the Missal, gives it 
to the Bishop to kiss, and puts it on his arm. 

4. Whilst the Bishop makes the confession, all the clergy 
in sacred vestments standing, make it alternately, two by 
two. The inferior clergy kneel down during the confes- 
sion. After it, the Bishop goes up to the altar as usual, 
but the assistant priest passes to his left, and the deacon to 



278 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

his right hand. The sub-deacon at the Gospel side goes up 
with the Missal, which he with the assistant priest present 
open to the Bishop, who, after having kissed the altar, 
touching it with both his hands, kisses it at the beginning 
of the Gospel to be read on that day. 

5. The incense is then put into the censer and blessed, 
the deacon offering the boat, and presenting the censer 
to the Bishop, who incenses the altar, as usual ; and after 
it, standing with his mitre on, by the corner of the altar, 
at the Epistle side, he is incensed by the deacon ; then, 
having received the crosier, and made from the same place 
a reverence to the cross, he goes, between the two assistant 
deacons, to bis seat. The deacon and sub-deacon go to their 
bench on the Epistle side. The Bishop, standing, without 
mitre, making the sign of the cross on himself, reads the 
Introit, from the book which the acolyte holds open before 
him ; another acolyte holding near him the hand-candle- 
stick, and the assistant deacons and priests turning the 
leaves of the book when necessary. Then he says, alter- 
nately with them, Kyrie eleison. The same is said likewise 
by the deacon and sub-deacon, and by all the clergy, two 
by two, alternately. Afterwards the Bishop sits down, and 
the first deacon puts on him the lighter mitre and the 
apron. All the clergy also sit at their places. 

6. After the Kyrie is sung by the choir, all rise, and the 
Bishop, without mitre, turned towards the altar, sings, 
Gloria in excelsis Deo, the assistant priest holding the book 
before him, whilst he sings those words; but whilst he 
reads the rest, the book is held by the acolyte. The same 
is to be observed on all other occasions, viz. : when the 
Bishop sings, the assistant priest holds the book; but when 
he reads, the acolyte holds it, and the assistant deacons 
point out what is to be read, and turn the leaves of the 
book. The assistants say with the Bishop, in a low voice, 
the rest of the Angelical Hymn, likewise the deacon and 
sub-deacon, and all the clergy. 

The hymn having been recited, the Bishop and the 
clergy sit down, and the deacon puts the plain mitre on 
the Bishop, and the apron on his lap. The choir having 
sung the Gloria, the deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre 



GOSPEL. 279 

and the apron ; all rise ; and the Bishop, turned towards 
the people, sings, Pax vobls, and the prayer; after which 
all sit down, and the deacon puts on the Bishop the mitre, 
and the apron on his lap. 

7. The sub-deacon, having received the Missal from the 
second master of ceremonies and holding it on his breast, 
goes, attended by the same, to the middle, makes a genu- 
flection to the altar, bows to the Bishop and to the clergy, 
goes to the Epistle side, and, turned towards the Bishop, 
sings the Epistle ; after it, he makes the usual genuflection 
and bow, goes to the Bishop, kneels before him, lays the book 
on his knees, and kisses the Bishop's hand, placed on the 
book, and having received his blessing, returns to his place, 
where he gives the book to the master of ceremonies. 

8. After the sub-deacon has kissed the Bishop's hand, 
the acolytes, with the book and the hand-candlestick, go 
before him ; and the Bishop sitting, with his mitre on, 
reads the Epistle, Tract, and says the Munda cor meum, etc., 
and reads the Gospel, with his hands joined, the assistant 
deacons remaining standing, and answering, Et cum spiritu 
tuo, and Laus tibi Christe. 

9. Towards the end of this, the deacon having received 
the Missal from the second master of ceremonies, carries it 
raised before him to the altar, bowing to the Bishop and to 
the clergy, and making a genuflection before the lower step, 
places it in the middle of the altar, goes down, makes a 
genuflection, goes to the Bishop, kisses his hand, returns to 
the altar, kneels on the lower step, says, in a low voice, 
Munda cor mcum, rises, goes up to take the Missal, comes 
down, and places himself below the lower step a little to- 
wards the Epistle side, with the sub-deacon, who, at the 
same time, goes to his left, they being exactly in the middle, 
where they wait. In the meantime, the censer-bearer hav- 
ing gone to the Bishop's seat, with the censer and boat, the 
incense is put in and blessed, as usual. The censer-bearer, 
accompanied by the second master of ceremonies, goes be- 
hind the deacon ; the master of ceremonies behind the sub- 
deacon ; and the two acolytes, with their candlesticks and 
lighted candles, behind them. At a signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, they all make a genuflection, bow to 
the Bishop and to the clergy, and go to the Bishop's seat, 



280 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

walking in the order in which they are, the deacon and 
snb-deacon first. Having arrived before the Bishop's seat, 
they all kneel and remain so ; the deacon saying, Jube 
Domne, benedicere, receives the blessing, Dominus sit, etc., 
and kisses the Bishop's hand. Then they all rise, and go 
to the place where the Gospel is to be sung. 

10. The master of ceremonies walks first, after him the 
censer-bearer, then the two acolytes with the candlesticks, 
the sub-deacon, and last the deacon. The sub-deacon 
places himself with his face towards the Epistle side, be- 
tween the two acolytes, and holds the book resting on his 
head. The deacon turns towards the book, and the master 
of ceremonies and censer-bearer are at his side. The dea- 
con sings, Dominus vobiscum, Sequentia, etc., making the 
sign of the cross ori the book and himself, etc., incenses the 
book thrice, towards the middle, the right and the left of 
the same. The Bishop, at the beginning of the Gospel, 
rises, without mitre, receives the crosier, which he keeps 
between both his hands, makes the sign of the cross on 
himself, bows at the names of Jesus and Mary, kisses the 
book, which, after the Gospel, is brought to him by the 
sub-deacon, and says, Per evangelica dicta, etc. ; and lastly 
is incensed by the assistant priest. The deacon and all the 
others return to their places, making the usual genuflections 
and bows. 

11. If the Bishop preach, he should do it from his 
throne. But should this be so placed as to prevent the 
people from seeing or hearing him, the faldstool should be 
placed on the platform of the altar in the middle, and five 
other seats, viz., three at the right, and two at the left of the 
faldstool. The assistant priest sits at his right; near the as- 
sistant priest, the deacon of the Gospel ; and near him, the 
first assistant deacon. At the left of the Bishop, the sub- 
deacon, and near him the second assistant deacon. If the 
Bishop should not preach, a priest may do it from the pulpit ; 
but first he should go to kiss the Bishop's hand, ask the 
blessing, saying, Jube Domne. benedicere, and ask the Indul- 
gences. After the sermon, the deacon of the Gospel sings 
the Confiteor, near the Bishop, if the Bishop has preached 
at the altar, otherwise before the lowest step of the Bishop's 
seat; the assistant priest publishes the Indulgences, and the 



OFFERTORY. 281 

Bishop, standing without mitre, says, Precihus et merit-is, 
then puts on his mitre, and gives the benediction. In case 
the sermon has been delivered by a priest, the preacher 
publishes the Indulgences in place of the assistant priest. 

12. After the benediction, the Bishop returns to his seat; 
or if there has been no sermon, after having been incensed, 
he intones, Credo in unum Deum, the assistant priest hold- 
ing the book till these words are sung ; then he gives it to 
the acolyte, who remains there with the other, holding the 
hand-candlestick, till the* Bishop and the assistants have 
finished the Credo, which is also recited by the deacon and 
sub-deacon, and all the clergy, two by two, at their respec- 
tive places. At the words, Et incarnatus, they all kneel. 
The Creed being said, they all sit down, and the first as- 
sistant deacon puts the plain mitre on the Bishop, and 
spreads the apron upon his knees. When the choir sings 
the words, Et incarnatus, the Bishop, with his mitre on, 
and all the clergy in sacred vestments, uncovering their 
heads, bow profoundly towards the altar; the rest of the 
clergy kneel. However, on Christmas day, and on the 
festival of the Annunciation, the Bishop and all the clergy 
kneel. 

13. After the Incarnatus has been sung, the deacon and 
the sub-deacon rise; the deacon, attended by the second 
master of ceremonies, goes to the side-table, receives the 
burse from the master of ceremonies, and, having made the 
usual bows and genuflections, carries it to the altar, extends 
the corporal in the middle of it, places the burse on the 
Epistle side, makes a genuflection, and returns to his place. 
Then he and the sub-deacon sit down. 

14. Towards the end of the Creed all the ministers rise; 
the Bishop rises when it is ended, the mitre and the apron 
having been previously taken from him. Then standing, 
he sings Dominus vobiscum and Oremus, and reads the Offer- 
tory out of the book, which is held before him by one of 
the acolytes, attended by the other, who holds the hand- 
candlestick. Afterwards he sits down, the deacon puts on 
him the precious mitre, the assistant priest takes off his 
ring, and the deacons his gloves. The two acolytes bring 
him the basin and ewer to wash his hands, and the towel 

24 



282 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

to wipe them ; the assistant priest presents one of them, 
after he has washed his hands, and having wiped them, 
puts the ring on his finger. Then the assistant priest hav- 
ing received from the master of ceremonies the Missal with 
its cushion or stand, attended by the same, carries it to the 
altar, and puts it, opened at the proper place, near the cor- 
poral, on the Gospel side, and waits for the Bishop, retir- 
ing to the further corner of the same side of the altar. 

15. The Bishop having put on the ring, rises, takes the 
crosier in his left hand, and between the two assistant dea- 
cons, followed by the acolytes of the mitre and of the cro- 
sier, goes to the altar, blessing on his way the people and 
the clergy ; when he has arrived before the lower step, he 
lays aside the crosier and puts otf the mitre, makes a pro- 
found bow to the cross, goes up to the altar, assisted by the 
deacon of the Gospel at his right, and the assistant priest 
at his left, kisses the altar in the middle, placing his hands 
on each side. The clergy sit down. The assistant deacons 
stand on the second step on each side. The crosier and 
mitre-bearers stand at a certain distance from the lowest 
step, behind the two assistant deacons. 

16. The sub-deacon, after the Bishop has washed his 
hands, goes to the side-table, attended by the second master 
of ceremonies and acolytes, who put on his shoulders the 
long veil, with which the chalice and other things on the 
table were covered, leaving it to hang lower on his right 
side. The sub-deacon takes, with his left hand, the chalice 
with the paten, particle, and pall, extends the longest part 
of the veil over it, places his right hand on the veil and 
chalice, lest anything should fall, and thus goes to the altar, 
followed by the acolyte who carries the cruets with wine 
and water; when arrived there, at the same time with the 
Bishop, he places the chalice on the altar at the Epistle 
side, and removes the veil from it. 

1 7. The deacon receives from, the sub-deacon the paten 
with the particle, kisses it, and gives it to the Bishop, kissing 
his hand; the Bishop, as usual, raises it before his breast, 
says, Suscipe Sancte Pater, etc., places the particle on the 
cprporal, and the paten under it at his right. In the mean- 
while, the deacon wipes the chalice with the purifier, 



OFFERTORY. 283 

receives the cruet with the wine from the sub-deacon, who 
had received it from the acolyte, puts some wine into the 
chalice, and the sub-deacon, raising the cruet with water 
a little towards the Bishop, says, Benedicite, Pater Rever- 
end issime, and the Bishop having made towards it the sign 
of the cross, whilst the sub-deacon puts some drops of water 
into the chalice, says the prayer, Deus qui humance. Then 
the deacon gives the chalice to the Bishop, kissing it first, 
then the Bishop's hand ; the Bishop receives it at the knob, 
with his right hand, and at the foot with his left, and offers 
it together with the deacon, who, with his left hand, sup- 
ports the Bishop's elbow, and with his right the foot of the 
chalice, saying with the Bishop the prayer, Offerimus tibi, 
etc. ; afterwards, the sub-deacon having extended the lower 
part of the veil hanging on his right on the altar, and put 
his right hand on it, the deacon gives him the paten, which 
he covers with a veil, goes down below the steps, and hold- 
ing the paten raised, remains behind the Bishop till the 
Pater is said. 

18. Mass is continued as usual, and after the Bishop has 
said the words Benedic hoc sacrijicium tuo sa,ncto nomini 
prwparatum, the censer-bearer goes to the altar ; incense is 
put into the censer, the deacon holding the censer, and say- 
ing Benedicite, Pater Peverendissime, the Bishop blesses it, 
saying, Per inter •cessionem, etc. ; then, having received the 
censer from the deacon, the Bishop incenses the Oblata, 
saying, Incensum istud — the cross, saying, Dirigatur, 
Domine — the relics, saying nothing; and continues the 
other prayers, as he incenses the altar ; which being done, 
he gives back the censer to the deacon, saying, Accendat; 
then having received the precious mitre from the first assist- 
ant deacon, standing at the Epistle corner, he is incensed 
by the deacon of the Mass, who incenses the assistant priest, 
the two assistant deacons, the clergy in the sanctuary, ac- 
cording to their rank and order, lastly the sub-deacon; 
afterwards he gives back the censer to the censer-bearer, 
who incenses the deacon, then the master of ceremonies, 
the acolytes, and the people. 

19. After the Bishop is incensed, the first assistant dea- 
con takes off his mitre; he continues Mass as usual, the 



284 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

assistant priest and the acolyte with the hand-candlestick 
remaining by the Missal. The deacon standing on the 
second step behind the Bishop, being incensed, remains 
there till the Sanctus, then he goes up to the right of the 
Bishop, and says it with him and the assistant priest. 
Likewise, all the clergy in the sanctuary, two by two, say 
the Sanctus at the same time. After the Sanctus, the dea- 
con goes down to the second step behind the Bishop. 

20. At the Sanctus, four or six acolytes, accompanied 
by the second master of ceremonies, go from the sacristy to 
the sanctuary, holding in their hand large candles lighted ; 
when they reach the middle of the sanctuary, they make a 
genuflection, bow to the clergy at each side of the sanc- 
tuary, kneel in a line at a convenient distance from one 
another ; those who, are at the Epistle side hold their candle 
in their right, and those at the Gospel side in their left 
hand, keeping their arm extended, and the end of the 
candle resting on the floor. They remain there till after 
the elevation, unless the Bishop give the communion; in 
which case they remain kneeling during the communion of 
the clergy, which is given at the altar, and accompany the 
Bishop to the railing, where he gives the communion to 
the people. After the communion, they go back to the 
sacristy. 

21. After the Sanctus has been recited by the Bishop 
and the clergy, all in the sanctuary and in the church 
kneel down, except the ministers assisting at the altar. 
When the Bishop says Quam oblationem, the deacon goes 
up to his right during the consecration and elevation, 
kneels down, raises with his left hand the Bishop's chasuble 
on his side ; after the elevation of the consecrated Host, 
he rises, uncovers the chalice, kneels again, raises the 
Bishop's chasuble as before, and after the elevation of the 
chalice, rises, covers the chalice, and makes a genuflection 
with the Bishop. The two assistant deacons, the sub- 
deacon, and the assistant priest remain kneeling at their 
places during the elevation. The assistant priest, with his 
right hand, raises the chasuble of the Bishop on his side 
during the elevation. The master of ceremonies rings the 



AGNUS DEI. 285 

bell at the elevation, and the censer-bearer incenses thrice 
the Blessed Sacrament at each elevation. 

22. During the elevation, nothing should be sung ; but 
some devout and harmonious tunes may be played on the 
organ. After the elevation, the choir sings Benedictus, 
qui venit, and all rise, and stand until the communion. 
The celebrant continues Mass as usual ; the deacon makes 
a genuflection and goes to his place behind the Bishop. At 
the words Benedicts et prcestas nobis, the deacon goes to the 
right of the Bishop, makes with him a genuflection, and 
uncovers the chalice; at the words Per ipsum, he places 
two fingers on the foot of the chalice, and after the words, 
Omnis honor et gloria, he covers the chalice, makes a genu- 
flection with the Bishop, and goes to his place behind him. 

23. At the Pater Noster, when the Bishop says Et dimitte 
nobis, the deacon and sub-deacon, having made a genuflec- 
tion, go up to the altar, the deacon to the right of the 
Bishop, and the sub-deacon to the right of the deacon ; 
there, the sub-deacon, placing his hand on the altar, the 
deacon uncovers the paten, receives it from the sub-deacon, 
cleans it with the purifier, kisses it, and puts it into the 
Bishop's hand, which he also kisses, whilst the Bishop says, 
Libera nos qucesumus, etc. As the Bishop places the paten 
under the Host, the deacon uncovers the chalice, makes a 
genuflection, and rises with the Bishop, who puts the par- 
ticle of the Host in the chalice ; the deacon then covers it, 
and again makes a genuflection. The sub-deacon, having 
given the paten to the deacon, takes offhis veil, gives it to the 
second master of ceremonies, and having made a genuflec- 
tion, returns to his place at the foot of the altar ; he does 
not go up to say the Agnus Dei, but he goes to the right 
of the Bishop, whilst the deacon remains at his left, in 
place of the assistant priest. 

24. The assistant priest and the officiating deacon say 
the Agnus Dei, with the Bishop ; the rest of the clergy say 
it at the same time, at their places. After the Agnus Dei, 
the assistant priest and the deacon make a genuflection, 
exchange places, and again make a genuflection ; the dea- 
con remains near the Missal, and the assistant priest kneels 
down whilst the celebrant says the prayer, Domine Jesu 



286 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

Christe qui dixisti; after which, he rises, kisses the altar at 
the same time with the Bishop, receives from him the Pax, 
approaching his left cheek to the left cheek of the cele- 
brant, placing his two hands under the celebrant's elbows 
and answering, Etcumspiritutuo. Then rising, he carries 
the Pax to the clergy, giving it to the first of them on each 
side of the sanctuary ; on returning teethe foot of the altar, 
he gives it to the master of ceremonies, by whom he was 
accompanied, and goes up to the left of the Bishop. The 
first assistant deacon, after the assistant priest has received 
the Pax, goes to the Bishop's right, and receives it in the 
same manner ; then the second assistant deacon, the officiat- 
ing deacon, and lastly the sub-deacon. 

When the Bishop is to give communion, after he has 
received the Precious Blood, the deacon and sub-deacon at 
his left, kneel on the platform before the Bishop, who, 
without saying Misereatur, etc., or Ecce Agnus Dei, etc., 
gives them Holy Communion. They then receive the Pax, 
kissing the Bishop's left cheek. The officiating deacon then 
sings the Conjiteor for the communion of the clergy. 

25. The deacon, after the communion, goes to the right 
of the Bishop, receives the cruets from the acolyte, serves 
the wine for the first ablution, and the wine and water for 
the second, after which he places the purifier on the Bishop's 
fingers. After the Bishop has taken the first ablution, the 
assistant priest carries the Missal, on its cushion or stand, 
from the Gospel to the Epistle side, followed by the aco- 
lyte with the candlestick. The deacon puts the mitre on 
the head of the Bishop, who washes his hands, two acolytes 
having brought the basin and ewer, with water and the 
towel. The assistant priest takes off his ring, presents him 
the towel to wipe his hands, and replaces the ring on his 
finger. Then the officiating deacon takes off the Bishop's 
mitre. Tn the meantime, the sub-deacon, having folded 
the corporal, and put it in the burse, and placed the puri- 
fier, paten, pall, and burse on the chalice, carries it to the 
side-table, and places himself below the lower step behind 
the deacon, who stands on the middle step, behind the 
Bishop, who, attended by the assistant priest, and remain- 
ing near the Missal, ou the Epistle side, reads the commu- 



AGNUS DEI. 287 

nion, goes to the middle, followed by the deacon and sub- 
deacon, says, Dominus vobiscum, and finishes Mass as usual. 
After the last prayer and Dominus vobiscum, the Bishop 
remains turned towards the people, towards whom the 
deacon also turns, and sings, Ite, Missa est. Then both 
turn to the altar towards the Epistle side. The Bishop 
having said, Placeattibi, etc., gives the solemn blessing, as 
usual. 

If the celebrant is an archbishop, he gives the blessing 
without mitre, bowing first to the cross which is held be- 
fore him. Then he lays his pallium on the altar, and says, 
Initium Sancti Evangeiii. 

When the Indulgence has not been already published, 
in consequence of no sermon having been preached, the 
assistant priest publishes it as usual, from the Epistle side. 

26. The Bishop then takes off his mitre, begins the 
Gospel of St. John, at the Gospel side, puts on the mitre, 
takes the crosier in his left hand, and continues the Gospel 
while going to his seat, where he finishes it. 

27. The Gospel being ended, the two assistant deacons 
give their places to the deacon and sub-deacon, and retire 
to the ministers' bench. The Bishop, having disrobed, 
washes his hands, and puts on the cappa and pectoral 
cross ; then two acolytes bring the book and candle, and 
the master of ceremonies brings the Bishop's shoes to 
his seat, who reads the thanksgiving, whilst the acolytes 
take off his sandals and put on his shoes. Which being 
done, and the thanksgiving ended, the clergy and Bishop 
return to the sacristy, and thence the Bishop is accompanied 
to his house, or to his room, where he may put on his rochet 
and cape. 



288 SOLEMN MASS IN PRESENCE 



CHAPTER VII. 

SOLEMN MASS CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP 
DRESSED IN COPE. 

1. On solemn festivals, when the Bishop does not cele- 
brate a Pontifical Mass, it is proper that he should assist 
at the divine service in mitre and cope. On such occasions, 
what follows is to be observed : 

2. The Bishop's vestments should be placed on the 
altar, viz., amice, alb, cincture, pectoral cross on a plate, 
stole and cope; two mitres, one on each side, and the 
crosier. 

On the side-table, besides everything necessary for High 
Mass, a Missal for the Bishop, the hand-candlestick with 
a candle, the basin and ewer, and a towel on a plate. 

3. The celebrant and ministers go to the church before 
the Bishop, and seat themselves at the bench, waiting for 
him. 

4. The Bishop, accompanied by the clergy, goes to the 
church, and having arrived at the middle of the sanctuary, 
kneels before the faldstool, rises, after having said a short 
prayer, and with him all the clergy rise. Then, between 
the two assistant deacons, preceded by the assistant priest, 
who are all dressed in surplices, he goes to his seat, where 
he puts on all the vestments before mentioned. Thus 
vested, with his mitre on, and the crosier in his left hand, 
he goes to the altar, whither the celebrant and ministers 
have gone before him. 

5. On arriving before the altar, the Bishop takes off his 
mitre, bows to the cross, the others making a genuflection, 
and, having the celebrant on his right, the deacon on the 
right of the celebrant, the assistant priest on his left, and 
the sub-deacon at the left of the assistant priest, and the 
two assistant deacons behind the celebrant and the assist- 
ant priest, and the acolytes, with the mitre and crosier, 



OF THE BISHOP IN COPE. 289 

behind the assistant deacon, he makes the Confession, say- 
ing, as usual, In nomine Patris, etc., the celebrant and the 
ministers answering. After the prayer, Indulgentiam, abso- 
lutionem, the Bishop makes a profound bow, receives the 
mitre and the crosier from the first assistant deacon, and 
returns to his seat; the celebrant having bowed to the 
Bishop, goes to the middle and continues Mass. 

6. The Bishop, on arriving at his seat, gives the crosier 
into the hands of the assistant priest, sits with his mitre on ; 
then the censer-bearer, presenting the censer, and giving 
the boat to the assistant priest, the Bishop puts incense into 
the censer, and blesses it, as usual. The celebrant incenses 
the cross and altar, as usual; then he is incensed with two 
swings only, by the deacon, who gives the censer to the 
censer-bearer, by whom it is carried to the Bishop's seat, and 
given to the assistant priest, who is below the lowest step, 
where he incenses the Bishop with three swings. After- 
wards, the Bishop's mitre is taken off by the second assist- 
ant deacon, and the Missal and candlestick are brought by 
the acolytes before the Bishop, who commences the Introit, 
when the celebrant begins to read it at the altar. After 
the Introit, the Bishop says the Kyrie alternately with the 
assistants and the priests who are present at Mass in the 
sanctuary dressed in surplices. They go before the Bishop's 
seat, placing themselves in a semicircle ; after having bowed 
to him, they say the Kyrie and Gloria with the Bishop ; at 
the end of the Kyrie, they bow and return to their places. 
The Bishop, as they bow, gives them his blessing. If the 
choir has not finished singing the Kyrie, the Bishop sits, 
receives the mitre, and the assistants also sit and cover their 
heads ; otherwise, he remains standing. At the Gloria, he 
rises without his mitre ; the book is not held before him 
during the Gloria, but he says it by heart with his assist- 
ants, standing. He sits, with his mitre on, after the Gloria. 
During the Dominus vobiscum and the Collects, the Bishop 
stands with his head uncovered. After the Collects, he 
sits with his mitre on. The sub-deacon, turned towards 
the Bishop, sings the Epistle, and, having sung it, goes to 
kiss the Bishop's hand, and to receive his blessing. Then 
the acolytes come to him with the Missal and candlestick, 

25 



290 SOLEMN MASS IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP. 

and the Bishop reads the Epistle and Tract, says, Munda 
cor meum, and reads the Gospel. 

7. A little before the Bishop finishes reading the Gospel, 
the deacon, having placed the Missal on the middle of the 
altar, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand ; he then returns to 
the altar, and says, kneeling, Munda cor meum. In the 
meantime, the censer-bearer carries the censer to the Bishop's 
seat, and the incense is put in, and blessed by the Bishop, 
as usual. Afterwards, the deacon and sub-deacon, with the 
master of ceremonies, censer-bearer, and acolytes, go to the 
Bishop's seat, as has been said elsewhere, and kneel down ; 
the deacon asks and receives the blessing, and sings the 
Gospel, as usual. After it, the sub-deacon carries the book 
to the Bishop to be kissed ; and the assistant priest incenses 
the Bishop. The celebrant is not incensed. 

If there is a sermon, the preacher asks the Bishop's 
blessing. 

8. At the Credo, the Bishop rises, the priests go before 
his seat, as at the Kyrie and Gloria, say it with him, and 
kneel also with him, at the words Inearnatus est. The 
book is not carried to the Bishop, who says the Credo by 
heart. At the Offertory, the Bishop, standing, with his 
head uncovered, reads it out of the Missal, which the acolyte 
holds open before him ; and then sits, with the mitre on. 
The sub-deacon carries the cruet with water to the Bishop, 
and says, Benedicite, Reverendissime Pater; the Bishop 
then blesses the water. Afterwards he puts incense into 
the censer and blesses it. The celebrant incenses the obla- 
tion, the cross, and the altar, as usual, then he is incensed 
twice only by the deacon, who carries the censer to the 
Bishop's seat; and the assistant priest, coming down to the 
foot of the throne, receives the censer, incenses the Bishop 
thrice, returns the censer to the deacon, who incenses the 
assistant priest, the first and second assistant deacons, and 
afterwards the clergy in the sanctuary, and the sub-deacon. 

9. At the Preface, the Bishop stands with his head un- 
covered ; he recites the Sanctus by heart, with the assistants 
and the priests, who go before his seat as at the Kyrie and 
Gloria. After the Sanctus, the Bishop goes to the middle 
of the sanctuary, between the two assistant deacons, and 



SOLEMN MASS. 291 

followed by the acolytes carrying the crosier and mitre, and 
there kneels at the faldstool, till after the elevation ; he 
then returns to his seat, and stands till after the communion 
of the priest. 

10. At the Agnus Dei, the priests go to the Bishop's seat, 
and say it with him ; then they return to their places. The 
assistant priest goes to the right of the celebrant, and, with 
the usual ceremonies, receives from him the Pax, and goes 
to give it to the Bishop, who gives it to the first and second 
assistant deacons. The celebrant gives it also to the deacon. 
But the sub-deacon receives it from the assistant priest, and 
then gives it to the first clergyman on each side of the 
sanctuary, as in other High Masses. If the celebrant gives 
communion, the Bishop kneels as at the elevation ; after 
Communion, the Bishop reads the communion in the Missal, 
and sits with his mitre on. 

11. At the Dominus vobiscum, the Bishop and the clergy 
rise, and stand during the prayers. The celebrant does not 
give the blessing, but the Bishop gives it solemnly, as 
usual ; after which the celebrant publishes the Indulgence, 
and finishes Mass, as usual. 

12. After Mass, the celebrant, with the deacon and sub- 
deacon, and the acolytes, with their candlesticks, having 
made a genuflection to the cross, and bowed to the Bishop 
and clergy, go to the sacristy. The Bishop takes off the 
sacred vestments, puts on the cape and pectoral cross, and 
having prayed a short time before the altar, retires, accom- 
panied by the clergy. 



CHAPTER VIII. 



OF SOLEMN MASS, 

CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP, NOT DRESSED IN COPE 
AND MITRE, BUT ONLY IN ROCHET AND CAPE. 

1. Everything is to be observed as in the preceding 
chapter, with the following exceptions : 



292 VESPERS FOR THE DEAD. 

2. The Bishop is incensed only at the Offertory. 

3. The celebrant is incensed, as usual, at the beginning 
of Mass, after the Gospel, and at the Offertory, twice only 
on each occasion. 

4. The Bishop may go from the sacristy to the sanctuary, 
at the same time with the celebrant, but behind him, im- 
mediately preceded by the assistant priest, and having at 
his side the two assistant deacons ; he may likewise return 
to the sacristy behind the celebrant in the same manner. 



CHAPTER IX. 

VESPERS FOR THE DEAD. 

CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop at these Vespers w r ears the cape, or the 
pontifical mantle,* over his rochet. He sits in his stall in 
the choir, or on his seat, but without assistant priests and 
deacons. 

2. Vespers are begun with the antiphon, Placebo Domino, 
sung by the choir, during which the Bishop and the clergy 
stand with their heads uncovered. When they begin the 
Psalm, Dilexiy they all sit and put on their caps. When 
the Magnificat is begun, they all take them off, and rise. 
They sit down again, whilst the choir repeats the antiphon 
after the Magnificat; after which the Bishop says, in an 
audible voice, Pater noster, which is secretly continued and 
finished by all, kneeling. 

3. At the same time, two acolytes, with their candlesticks 
and lighted candles, and a third one with the book, come 
before the Bishop, who says, still kneeling, Et ne nos indu- 
cas, etc., with the other verses, as in the Breviary. When 
he says Dominus vobiscum, he rises, and says the prayer, 

* The cappa magna is a full robe with a train. 



MATINS AND LAUDS FOR THE DEAD. 293 

Requiem ceternam. Then the chanters sing Requiescant in 
pace. 

4. Should the Bishop sit at the usual place, at the Rater 
noster, etc., he kneels before the faldstool, and there fin- 
ishes the prayers. The same thing is to be observed of 
Matins. 



CHAPTER X. 

MATINS AND LAUDS FOR THE DEAD. 

CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop at these Matins is vested, and sits as at 
Vespers. 

2. Having sat for a short time, the Bishop rises, and 
with him all the clergy. The choir begins the Invitatorium: 
Regem, cui omnia vivunt, etc., during which, and the Psalm, 
Venite exultemus, all stand. When the Psalm of the first 
nocturn is begun, they all sit, and put on their caps. After 
the verses of the first nocturn, they all rise, with their 
heads uncovered, and say in secret the Rater noster; after 
which, the Bishop and the clergy sit down. The Lessons 
are sung by the clergy in the middle of the sanctuary at 
the desk. The same is done in the other nocturns. 

3. After the ninth response, Lauds are said, the Bishop 
and the clergy sitting. When the Benedictus is begun, they 
all rise, with their heads uncovered. Whilst the antiphon 
is repeated after.it, they sit and cover their heads. 

4. After the antiphon, they rise, the acolytes go with the 
candlesticks and the book before the Bishop, and every- 
thing is done as at Vespers. 



294 PONTIFICAL MASS 



CHAPTER XL 

SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

Article I. 
Things to be Prepared. 

1. The altar should be dressed in the plainest manner, 
having on it the cross and six candlesticks with candles of 
unbleached wax ; before it a black antipendium. The 
canopy on the tabernacle, if there is the Blessed Sacrament, 
should be of purple color. 

It is contrary to the Rubrics to put about the altar vest- 
ments, stools, or books, any representation of death, or 
white crosses.* 

2. On the side-table, two candlesticks with candles of 
unbleached wax; the basin and ewer, and a plate with 
some towels; the Missal, a vase with holy water and a 
sprinkle, the chalice, with everything necessary for Mass. 

3. On the bench of the ministers, the maniples for the 
deacon and sub-deacon. 

4. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., a black 
chasuble, dalmatic, tunic, stole, and maniple, cincture, alb, 
and amice. The pectoral cross and ring on a plate ; and 
a plain white mitre. 

The Bishop does not use sandals, gloves, or crosier at 
this Mass. 

The tabernacle may be covered with purple, or not 
covered. 

5. In the sacristy, a black cope for the assistant priest ; 
two black dalmatics, two cinctures, albs, and amices, for 
the two assistant deacons; also a black dalmatic and stole, 
with a cincture, alb, and amice, for the officiating deacon; 

* Cteremoniale Episc, chap, ii, lib. ii. 



FOR THE DEAD. 295 

and a tunic, cincture, alb, and amice, for the sub-deacon. 
Moreover, as many black copes, chasubles, dalmatics, and 
tunics, with amices, albs, and cinctures, as may be required 
for the clergy, who assist in sacred vestments at the Pon- 
tifical Mass. Lastly, a cope for the Bishop, to be taken to 
him by an acolyte after Mass. 

6. A black carpet and four candlesticks must be kept 
ready, in a convenient place, to be extended before the 
Bishop's seat after Mass, for the absolution, unless a ceno- 
taph or monument be erected in the middle of the church; 
in this case, the processional cross is to be prepared at the 
Epistle side. 

Article II. 
From the Beginning to the End of Mass. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as usual. 

2. The clergy should put on their respective vestments 
before the Bishop arrives at the sacristy. 

3. They all go from the sacristy to the sanctuary. 

4. The Bishop, having arrived at his seat, attended by 
the deacon and sub-deacon, and the assistant priest (the 
assistant deacon remaining at the ministers' bench whilst 
the Bishop is dressing), does not say the anthem, Ne re- 
minisearis, nor the Psalms which follow; but he takes off 
his cape, reading, from the book which is held open before 
him by an acolyte, the prayer, JExue, etc. ; he then washes 
his hands, puts on the vestments prepared on the altar, as 
in Art. 1, n. 4, saying the respective prayers, and having 
received the mitre, sits for a short time ; the assistant dea- 
cons go to his side, and the deacon and sub-deacon go to 
put on their maniples. 

At this Mass, whenever the ministers give anything to 
the celebrant, or receive it from him, they do not kiss it, 
nor the celebrant's hand. 

During the Collects, the clergy in the sanctuary, with 
the exception of the Bishop's assistants, kneel down, as 
also from the Sanctus till the Pater noster. 

5. The Bishop being vested, he, and the assistants and 



296 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

ministers, go to the altar, and take their places, as directed 
above. The Psalm, Judica, is not said. After the Con- 
fession, he says the usual prayers, goes up to the altar with 
the assistant priest, deacon, and sub-deacon ; he then kisses 
the altar, but not the Missal ; neither does he incense the 
cross or the altar ; having kissed the altar, he returns to 
his seat between the assistant deacons ; and the deacon and 
sub-deacon go to their seat. 

6. The Bishop having returned to his seat, takes off the 
mitre ; the acolyte holding the book before him, he reads 
the Introit, and says the Kyrie, alternately with his assist- 
ants, which last is said likewise by the deacon and sub- 
deacon, and all the clergy in the sanctuary. 

7. After the choir has finished singing the Kyrie, the 
Bishop rising, his head being uncovered, sings, Dominus 
vobiscum, and the Collect. He then sits with his mitre on. 
The sub-deacon sings the Epistle as usual ; but after it, he 
does not go to the Bishop to receive his blessing. The 
Bishop, after the sub-deacon has sung the Epistle, reads it, 
with the Tract and Sequentia; says, Munda cor meum, etc., 
but not Jube Do7nne, etc., and reads the Gospel. The 
deacon and sub-deacon sit at their bench. About the end 
of the Sequentia, the deacon carries the book to the altar, 
and without going to kiss the Bishop's hand, kneeling on 
the highest step, says, Munda cor meum, etc. The sub- 
deacon, at the same time, places himself before the lowest 
step, so as to be at the left of the deacon when he goes 
down ; two acolytes place themselves behind them, without 
candlesticks. At a signal given by the master of cere- 
monies, they go to sing the Gospel. The book is not in- 
censed before the Gospel is sung, nor the celebrant after it ; 
nor does the sub-deacon carry the book to the Bishop ; 
who, immediately after the Gospel, sings Dominus vobiscum 
and Oremus, reads the Offertory, and washes his hands. 

8. The Bishop, having washed his hands, goes to the 
altar, and everything is done as before, except, 1st, the 
sub-deacon, before he puts water into the chalice, does not 
say Benedicite, etc., and the Bishop does not bless it ; 2dly, 
the sub-deacon does not put on the veil, nor hold the 



THE ABSOLUTION AFTER MASS. 297 

paten ; 3dly, after having incensed the altar, the Bishop 
alone is incensed by the deacon. 

9. At the Sanctis, four acolytes go from the sacristy 
into the sanctuary with four torches, as directed above, and 
remain kneeling till after the communion. 

10. The sub-deacon, at the elevation, kneels on the 
lowest step of the altar at the Epistle side, and incenses 
the Blessed Sacrament. 

11. The Pax is not given. 

12. At the end of Mass, the blessing is not given. The 
deacon, turned towards the altar, sings, Bequiescant in pace. 
The Bishop, having said, Placeat tibi, begins, at the Gos- 
pel side, the Gospel of St. John, receives the mitre, and 
continues the Gospel in going to his seat. 

Article III. 
The Absolution after Mass. 

1. The Bishop, having finished the Gospel at his seat, 
takes off the mitre, maniple, chasuble, dalmatic, and tunic, 
and puts on the cope, previously brought by one of the 
acolytes from the sacristy, then receives the mitre, and sits 
down. The deacon and sub-deacon take off their maniples 
before they help the Bishop to disrobe. If a funeral ora- 
tion is to be delivered, the preacher, dressed in his cassock, 
without surplice, after a short prayer before the altar, 
without asking the Bishop's blessing, but having made a 
profound reverence to him, goes into the pulpit, which is 
to be dressed with black hangings ; and having there made 
again a profound bow to the Bishop, he makes the sign of 
the cross, and begins his discourse. 

2. After the funeral oration, or if there be none, after 
Mass, a large black cloth is spread before the Bishop's 
seat, and four candlesticks placed at its corners. In the 
meantime, the Bishop sits down, and the choir sings 
Libera me, etc. ; whilst this response is repeated, two aco- 
lytes, one with the censer and boat, the other with the 
holy-water vase, go to the Bishop, who, whilst the assistant 
priest holds the boat, puts incense into the censer and 



298 THE ABSOLUTION AFTER MASS. 

blesses it; then he rises, his head being uncovered, and 
after the last Kyrie has been sung, he says the words Pater 
noster, in an audible voice; continues the prayer in silence, 
and having received the sprinkle from the assistant priest, 
sprinkles the black cloth three times ; he then gives him 
back the sprinkle and receives the censer, and incenses the 
cloth thrice also ; the assistant deacons holding, during all 
this time, the extremities of his cope on each side. Two 
acolytes, with candlesticks and lighted candles, now come 
to the foot of the Bishop's seat, and another, with the book 
immediately before him, and the Bishop sings, ffi ne nos, 
etc., with the other verses, and the prayer ;* after which he 
repeats, Requiem ceternam, and the chanters sing, Bequies- 
cant in pace, etc. ; the Bishop makes, at the same time, the 
sign of the cross towards the cloth. 

If there be a monument, or cenotaph, in the middle of 
the church, the absolution should be made there. All go 
thither in procession in the following order : two acolytes, 
one with the censer and boat, and the other with the holy- 
water vase ; the sub-deacon carrying the cross between two 
acolytes with candlesticks and lighted candles ; then the 
clergy, two by two, according to their order ; the deacon 
at the left of the assistant priest ; the Bishop between the 
two assistant deacons, followed by the acolytes, who wait 
on him with the mitre, book, etc., etc. ; when they reach 
the place, the two acolytes, with the censer and holy-water 
vase, stop at the head of it on the right side, and the sub- 
deacon, with the acolytes at his side, goes to the foot of the 
same place; the clergy divide into two lines, one on each 
side of the monument, and the Bishop sits on the faldstool 
in the middle, at the head of the same, where he performs 
what has been directed above. 

On particular occasions, for instance at a funeral service 
for the Pope, etc., besides the Bishop, there are four other 
prelates or priests, who, after Mass, put on copes, and per- 
form four absolutions before that performed by the Bishop ; 
they walk two by two, immediately before the assistant 
priest, and when they come to the cenotaph, sit on seats 
placed at each corner of it. Then all rise, and the assistant 
priest holds the book before the Bishop, who reads, Kon 



SOLEMN MASS FOR THE DEAD. 299 

intrcs; the choir afterwards sings the response, Subvenite, 
and the prelate first in dignity, who is placed at the right 
corner at the head of the monument, attended by the dea- 
con, puts incense into the censer, blesses it, says, at the 
proper time, Pater noster, sprinkles the monument thrice 
at each corner, going round it, beginning on his right side, 
incenses it in the same manner, says, Et ne nos, and the 
verses and prayer as in the Roman Pontifical. Then the 
prelate second in dignity, who is placed at the left corner, 
at the foot of the monument, does the same ; so also the 
prelate third in dignity, placed at the left corner at the 
head of the monument. The same is done by the prelate 
fourth in dignity, who is placed at the right corner, at the 
foot of the monument. Last of all, the Bishop performs 
the same, after the Libera has been sung, as is to be found 
in the Roman Pontifical. But if there are no other prel- 
ates present, the Bishop alone is to bless the incense. 



CHAPTER XII. 

SOLEMN MASS FOR THE DEAD, CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE 
OF THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop may assist at solemn Mass for the dead, 
either with cap and cape, or with black cope and plain 
mitre. 

2. Should he assist in cope and mitre, his vestments are 
placed on the altar,, and he puts them on, as mentioned 
above ; but he does not use the crosier. 

3. He makes the Confession at the beginning of Mass ; 
but he does not say the Psalm, Judica. 

4. He puts incense into the censer ; but he is incensed 
by the assistant priest at the Offertory only, after the dea- 
con has incensed the celebrant twice. 

5. At the Collects, he goes to the middle of the sanc- 
tuary, and kneels during them at the faldstool between his 
assistant deacons. 



300 INSTRUCTIONS FOR 

6. After the Sanctus, he goes likewise to the middle, and 
kneels till the Agnus Dei, which he says at his seat ; but 
the priests in the sanctuary do not go before his seat. 

7. At the Post Communion, he goes again to the middle, 
and kneels as before ; he then returns to his seat, but he 
does not give the blessing. 

8. After Mass, he performs the absolution, observing 
what has been said in the foregoing chapter. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

PARTICULAR INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE DIFFERENT 
OFFICERS WHO ATTEND THE BISHOP. 

Article I. 

Instruction for the Assistant Priest. 

Section I. — His Quality, Dress, and Place. 

1. The assistant priest, who, in the Pontifical, is some- 
times called by the name of archdeacon, is the first amongst 
all the ministers of the Bishop. Therefore this office should 
generally be exercised by the most conspicuous clergyman, 
who holds the first rank in the diocese. 

2. His dress, when the Bishop officiates pontifically, is 
the amice over his surplice (or rochet, if he be entitled to 
wear it), and the cope. 

3. He sits on a stool placed on the platform of the pon- 
tifical chair, and at the left of the second assistant deacon ; 
however, should the place not allow this arrangement, he 
may sit at the right of the first assistant deacon ; in either 
case, his stool must not be on the same line with those of 
the assistant deacons, but a little forward towards the steps 
of the platform. 



ASSISTANT PRIEST. 301 



Section II. — His Office in general. 

1. The assistant priest, after the Bishop is dressed, puts 
the ring on his finger; he also takes it off every time the 
Bishop is to wash his hands, and puts it on his finger again, 
and presents to him the towel ; he holds the book before 
the Bishop, whenever he sings anything out of it at Vespers 
or High Mass ; but when the Bishop reads, the book is to 
be held by an acolyte; he holds the incense-boat, and 
presents the spoon to the Bishop every time the Bishop is 
to put the incense into the censer, and says, Benedicite, 
Pater Reverendissime ; but at Mass, only when he is at 
his pontifical chair, for the deacon is to present it when he 
is at the altar at Mass. He incenses the Bishop when he 
is at his chair. 



Section III. — His Office at Pontifical Vespers. 

1. The assistant priest holds the book before the Bishop 
when he intones the first antiphon. 

2. Standing at his place he intones the third antiphon. 

3. He holds the book when the Bishop intones the 
hymn; after the antiphon of the Magnificat has been 
intoned, he presents the spoon to the Bishop, to put in the 
incense, kissing, as usual, both the spoon and the Bishop's 
hand, and saying, Benedicite, etc. When the Magnificat 
is begun, he walks before the Bishop to the altar ; on ar- 
riving there, after the Bishop has kissed it, he gives him 
the censer with the usual kisses ; after the incensing, he 
takes it back, and gives it to the censer-bearer; returns to 
the Bishop's seat, walking before him, and there standing 
below the lowest step, he incenses the Bishop with three 
swings, goes up to his seat, is incensed with two swings, 
holds the book before the Bishop whilst he sings the 
prayer, then returns to his place, and after Vespers takes 
off his cope as usual. 



302 PONTIFICAL MASS. 



Section IV. — The Office of the Assistant Pried at 
Pontifical 3fass. 

1. As the assistant priest particularly attends the Bishop 
at the book, it is his duty to prepare, find, and mark, with 
the usual ribbons in the Missal, the Mass of the day, the 
commemorations, and whatever is to be read or sung by 
the Bishop, to w T hom he is to point out everything, and 
suggest what he has to sing or read. 

2. The assistant priest puts on the cope over the amice, 
which he puts over the surplice, or rochet, if he be entitled 
to wear it. Whilst the Bishop reads the Psalms for the 
preparation of Mass, standing near the first or second as- 
sistant deacon, he answers together with them, and alter- 
nately with the Bishop ; then he offers the towel to the 
Bishop, when he washes his hands ; holds the book before 
the Bishop at the prayer of Tierce ; puts the ring on the 
Bishop's finger after he is vested, offers the spoon, when 
the Bishop puts incense into the censer, walks to the high 
altar at the right of the officiating deacon, places himself 
near the Bishop, and at his right below the lowest step, 
makes a genuflection, answers to the confession, making a 
profound bow to the Bishop, when he says Et tibi Pater, 
and Et te Pater. 

3. When the Bishop has kissed the altar, the assistant 
priest holds the Missal, whilst the Bishop kisses it, and 
retires on the Gospel side, below the steps, during the in- 
censing ; after it, he walks to the Bishop's chair before 
him ; there he stands at his place, whilst the Bishop reads 
the Introit and Kyrie, to which he answers with the assist- 
ant deacons ; after it, he sits. He holds the Missal whilst 
the Bishop sings Gloria in excelsis Deo; gives it to the 
acolyte after the Bishop has sung those words ; holds it 
a^ain before him whilst he sings the prayers ; and incenses 
the Bishop after the Gospel. During the sermon, if the 
Bishop preaches at his seat, he sits at his usual place ; but 
if he preaches at the altar, he sits at the right of the Bishop, 
and the deacon at the left. After the deacon has sung the 
Confiteor, the assistant priest publishes the Indulgences. 



ASSISTANT PRIEST. 303 

But if the assistant priest preaches (for he that preaches at 
the Pontifical Mass, ought to perform the office of assistant 
priest), after the Gospel, having incensed the Bishop, he 
asks his benediction, saying, Jube, Domne benedicerc, kisses 
his hand, preaches dressed as he is in cope, and after the 
Confiteor, sung by the deacon from the pulpit, publishes 
the Indulgences. 

4. The Bishop having read the Offertory, the assistant 
priest attends him with the towel, when he washes his 
hands, puts the ring on his finger, carries the Missal to the 
altar, goes to the altar walking before the Bishop; in case, 
for greater convenience, the Missal was carried thither by 
an acolyte, the assistant priest attends the Bishop, standing 
at his left near the book, and turns the leaves, when neces- 
sary ; when the Bishop incenses the sacred offerings and 
the altar, the assistant priest takes the Missal with its stand 
from the altar, and retires with it to the Gospel side, below 
the steps; after the incensing, he puts it back in the same 
place, and remains near it to attend the Bishop. He 
says Sanctiis, with the Bishop, kneels only at the elevation, 
and makes a genuflection whenever the Bishop makes it. 
He says with him, Agnus Dei; after it, he exchanges 
place with the deacon, and when the Bishop says the first 
prayer, JDomine Jesu Christe, he kneels at his right ; after 
it, he rises, kisses the altar at the same time with the cele- 
brant, receives from him the Pax, approaching his left 
cheek to the celebrant's left cheek ; and when he has said 
Pax tecum, the assistant priest answers, Et cum spiritu tuo. 
Then he makes a genuflection, and attended by the master 
of ceremonies, gives the Pax to those of the clergy on each 
side of the sanctuary who occupy the first places or stalls 
on each row, making no reverence before he gives it, but 
only after he has given it. Lastly, he gives it to the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, by whom he was accompanied. 

5. The assistant priest, after having given the Pax to 
the master of ceremonies, returns to his place, at the left of 
the Bishop; after the ablution, he carries the Missal from 
the Gospel side to the Epistle side, attends the Bishop, 
when he washes his hands, presenting to him the towel, 
goes near the book at the right of the Bishop, and when 



304 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

the Indulgences have not been published, if there has not 
been any sermon, he publishes them after the Bishop has 
given the blessing. 

Section V. — The Office of the Assistant Priest, when the 
Bishop does not celebrate himself, but only assists at Mass 
or Vespers celebrated by others. 

1. When the Bishop does not celebrate, but assists, either 
in cope, or in his large mantle, or in cape, the assistant 
priest attends him in his usual choral dress, viz., in sur- 
plice, or in rochet, if he be entitled to use it. 

2. The assistant priest presents the incense-boat to the 
Bishop, incenses him, if he assists in cope and mitre, after 
the Introit, after the Gospel, and at the Offertory ; after the 
Agnus Dei, he goes to the altar, kneels, rises, kisses the 
altar, receives the Pax from the celebrant, gives it to the 
Bishop, who gives it to his assistant deacons, and on re- 
turning to his seat he gives it to the sub-deacon, by whom 
it is given to the clergy ; but if Mass be celebrated by a 
prelate who has his own assistant priest, the latter receives 
it from the Bishop's assistant priest, and gives it to the 
others. 

Article II. 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TWO ASSISTANT DEACONS. 

Section I. — Their Quality, Dress, and Place. 

1. Whenever the Bishop officiates pontifically, either for 
Mass or for Vespers, two clergymen, the highest in dignity 
next to him that performs the office of assistant priest, ought 
to attend the Bishop. 

2. They ought to be dressed in rochet or surplice amice 
and dalmatic ; they wear neither maniples nor stoles. 
Custom permits them to wear albs, instead of rochet or 
surplice; and this use prevails throughout this country; it 
may, therefore, be followed. 

3. The assistant deacons sit on each side of the Bishop, 
on two stools placed on the platform, whereon stands the 



ASSISTANT DEACONS. 305 

Bishop's chair. They walk at his side, and if he is dressed 
in cope, they raise it, each on his own side. 

4. A bishop officiating out of his diocese is not entitled 
to have the two assistant deacons. 

Section II. — The Office of the Two Assistant Deacons at 
the Pontifical Vespers. 

1 . Whenever the Bishop kneels before the altar at the 
faldstool, the assistant deacons adjust the sides of his cope. 

2. The second assistant deacon, at the Bishop's left, 
takes off the mitre, and gives it to the acolyte ; the first 
assistant deacon at his right takes off his cap, and gently 
presses down his hair, every time the Bishop is to take off 
his mitre. 

3. The first assistant deacon, at the Bishop's right, hav- 
ing first put on him his cap, puts also the mitre on him, 
and the second assistant deacon helps him, and fixes behind 
him the mitre-bands every time the Bishop is to put on 
the mitre. Every time the Bishop raises his hand, either 
to make the sign of the cross on himself, or to bless some 
person or thing, or to put incense into the censer, or to 
strike his breast, or to incense the altar, or to do anything 
else, the first assistant deacon raises the celebrant's cope on 
his side; likewise, whenever the Bishop raises both his 
hands, when he has to read anything out of the book, or 
to give the solemn blessing, both assistant deacons, on each 
side of him, raise his cope. Whenever the Bishop sings, 
or reads anything from the book, the two assistant deacons, 
on each side, put their hands on the book, the first assist- 
ant deacon turns the leaves of the book, and the second 
points out what he has to sing or read. 

Section III. — The Office of the Assistant Deacons at the 
Pontifical Mass. 

1. The assistant deacons go to the side of the Bishop, 
as soon as he is dressed for Tierce, and sit there till the 
chapter is sung. Then they rise, the second assistant dea- 
con takes off the Bishop's mitre, and they both attend him 

26 



306 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

standing till Tierce is finished; then they give their places 
to the deacon and sub-deacon. When the Bishop has put 
on all the vestments for Mass, they return to his side, 
walk with him to the altar, where, being arrived, the sec- 
ond assistant deacon takes off his mitre, and they make a 
genuflection ; the first assistant deacon gives his place to 
the assistant priest, the second assistant deacon to the offi- 
ciating deacon, and retiring each behind him to whom he 
gave way, remain there answering, and bowing profoundly 
at the Confiteor ; during the incensing, they go up to the 
second step, the first assistant deacon towards the Epistle 
side, and the second assistant deacon towards the Gospel 
side, and remain there till it is finished ; then the first 
assistant deacon puts the mitre on the Bishop ; after the 
Bishop has been incensed, they both go at his side to the 
pontifical chair, the second assistant deacon takes off his 
mitre, they both attend him standing whilst he reads the 
Introit and Kyrie, to which they answer; then the first 
assistant deacon (if the choir have not done singing the 
Kyrie) puts on him the mitre, and both seat themselves. 
The Kyrie being sung, they rise; the second assistant 
deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre; they attend him 
whilst he reads the Gloria, and when he has finished it, 
and seated himself, the first assistant deacon puts the 
mitre on him. After the Gloria has been sung by the 
choir, they both rise, the second assistant deacon takes off 
the Bishop's mitre, and* both attend him, whilst he sings 
the prayer and the Collects ; after which, the first assistant 
deacon puts on him the mitre, and they both sit, whilst 
the Epistle is sung ; they rise after it, and, standing, attend 
the Bishop, whilst he reads the Epistle, Tract, etc., and 
Gospel, and whilst he puts the incense into the censer; 
they then sit ; when the Bishop has given the blessing to 
the deacon, and the latter is about to begin the Gospel, 
they both rise; the second assistant deacon takes off the 
Bishop's mitre, and they stand whilst the Gospel is sung ; 
after the Bishop has been incensed, if there is a sermon, 
the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on him, and they 
sit during the sermon ; after it the second assistant deacon 
takes off the Bishop's mitre before he sings the absolution ; 



ASSISTANT DEACONS. 307 

after it, the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on him ; 
at the blessing, they both bow profoundly and make the 
sign of the cross on themselves ; after the blessing, the 
second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre ; they 
both standing attend him, and with him say the Credo ; 
they kneel at the Incarnatus ; the Creed being ended, the 
first assistant deacon puts the mitre on the Bishop ; whilst 
the Incarnatus is sung, they make a profound bow. The 
Creed being sung, they rise, the second assistant deacon 
takes off the Bishop's mitre, and standing they attend him 
whilst he says the Offertory ; after it, the first assistant 
deacon puts the mitre on him, takes off his glove from his 
right hand, and the second assistant deacon from his left, 
and they give them to the master of ceremonies. After 
he has washed his hands, they go at his side to the altar, 
but the officiating deacon takes off the mitre, they make a 
genuflection, go up to the second step, remain there whilst 
the Bishop is at the altar ; the first assistant deacon puts 
on him the mitre before he is incensed, and takes it off 
after the incensing ; at the elevation they both kneel down 
at their place, and likewise at the blessing. After the 
assistant priest has received the Pax, they go to the 
Bishop's right, make a genuflection without kissing the 
altar, and receive from the Bishop the Pax. Mass being 
ended, they accompany the Bishop to his seat, where, hav- 
ing made him a profound bow, they give their places to 
the deacon and sub-deacon, go to the sacristy, disrobe, put 
on their surplices, and go to accompany the Bishop to his 
house, or to the sacristy* 

. Section IV. — The Office of the Assistant Deacons, when 
the Bishop does not celebrate. 

1. In this case, they attend the Bishop in their choral 
dress, viz., in surplice, or rochet if they have the privilege 
of using it ; they do what has been said in the preceding 
article, with regard to the mitre, the incense, and the place 
where they must remain. When the Bishop, at Mass, 
goes to kneel down before the faldstool or desk, in the 



308 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

middle of the sanctuary, they go with him, and kneel at 
his side. 

The two assistant deacons are to attend only the Bishop 
in his own diocese ; not even Legates have the right of 
their attendance. However, if the Ordinary should be 
willing to confer this honor on any Bishop, whom he has 
invited to officiate in his place, he may give him the two 
assistant deacons. 

Article III. 

INSTRUCTION FOR THE OFFICIATING DEACON. 

1. The officiating deacon puts on all the sacred vest- 
ments belonging to his order, except the maniple. 

2. During Tierce, he sits at his usual place, at the right 
of the sub-deacon, until the Bishop has read the Psalms 
and prayers for the preparation of Mass. 

3. After the Bishop has read the prayer above men- 
tioned, the officiating deacon goes with the sub-deacon to 
the Bishop's seat, and having made to him a profound 
bow, goes to his right, and there standing, after he has 
washed his hands, receives every one of the Bishop's vest- 
ments from the acolytes who carry them, and vests the 
Bishop, assisted by the sub-deacon. 

4. The Bishop being vested, the deacon returns, with 
the sub-deacon, to the bench, where they remain till after 
Tierce is over. 

5. After Tierce, the officiating deacon goes again with 
the sub-deacon to the Bishop's seat, and at his right takes 
off from him the cope, and puts on him the other vest- 
ments for Mass ; then he returns with the sub-deacon to 
the bench, and puts on his maniple. 

6. The officiating deacon goes to the altar for the begin- 
ning of Mass; if Tierce has been sung, and the Bishop has 
put on the sacred vestments in the chapel, prepared for this 
purpose, he walks in procession to the high altar, at the 
left of the assistant priest, immediately before the Bishop ; 
otherwise, from the bench, he goes before the last step of 
the altar, at the left of the Bishop, and there answers him 



OFFICIATING DEACOX. 309 

at the Confession as usual ; goes up to the altar, and stand- 
ing at the Bishop's right, presents the incense-boat and the 
spoon, with the usual kiss of the latter, and of the Bishop's 
hand, and says, Benedicite, Pater Reverendissime, receives 
the censer from the censer-bearer, gives it to the Bishop, 
kissing the upper part of the chain, which he puts into the 
Bishop's left hand, and the lower part near the cover into 
his right hand, which he kisses, attends the Bishop, kneels 
whenever he kneels, and makes a profound bow when the 
Bishop bows, raises with his left hand the Bishop's chasuble 
on his side, and supports his arm whenever he makes a 
genuflection. After the incensing, he receives with the 
usual kiss the censer from the Bishop, goes below the last 
step on the Epistle side of the altar, and after making a 
profound bow to the Bishop, he incenses him with three 
swings, and makes again a profound bow to him. 

7. When the Bishop goes to his chair, the officiating 
deacon returns to the bench, where he stands till the 
Bishop has said Kyrie eleison, which he also says alternately 
with the sub-deacon. Then he sits, rises when the Bishop 
says, Gloria in excelsis Deo, which likewise the officiating 
deacon continues together with the sub-deacon. Having 
finished it, he sits. He rises at the Pax vobis, or Dominits 
vobiscum ; stands during the prayer and collects, and sits 
again during the Epistle sung by the sub-deacon. 

8. Whilst the choir sings the gradual, or Alleluia, the 
officiating deacon receives from the master of ceremonies 
the Missal, carries it shut before his breast to the altar, 
saluting the clergy, making a profound bow to the Bishop, 
and a genuflection on the last step ; lays it on the middle 
of the altar ; goes to the Bishop, making the usual rever- 
ences, kisses his hand, returns to the altar, kneeling on the 
lowest step, in the middle, says with a low voice, Munda 
cor meum, rises, takes the book from the altar, returns to 
the Bishop at the right of the sub-deacon, after having 
made a genuflection, and salutes the clergy, first on the 
Epistle side, then on the Gospel side, kneels down with the 
sub-deacon and acolytes, and says Jube, Domne, benedicere. 
After receiving the blessing, he goes to the place where the 
Gospel is sung, puts the book open into the hands of the 



310 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

sub-deacon, and turned towards the wall of the sanctuary, 
on the Gospel side, with his hands joined before his breast, 
sings Dominus vobiscum ; when he says Sequentia, or Initium 
8. Evangelii, he makes with his thumb the sign of the cross 
on his forehead, mouth, and breast. Whilst the choir an- 
swers, Gloria tibi, etc., he receives the censer from the mas- 
ter of ceremonies or the censer- bearer, incenses the book 
with three swings, one in the middle, the second on the 
right, the third on the left side of the book, gives back the 
censer, and, with his hands joined, sings the Gospel. 

9. The officiating deacon, having sung the .Gospel, and 
made a genuflection before the altar, returns to his place. 
If the Bishop preaches from the altar, immediately after 
the sermon, the officiating deacon, at the left of the Bishop, 
bowing a little towards him, sings the Confiteor, and at the 
words Et tibi Pater, and Et te Pater, makes a profound 
bow. But when any other besides the Bishop preaches, 
the officiating deacon goes to the Bishop's chair, and stand- 
ing below the lowest step, sings the Confiteor, as before 
directed. 

10. At the Credo, the officiating deacon rises, and con- 
tinues it together with the sub-deacon, reciting it at the 
same time with the Bishop, and kneeling likewise with him 
at Incarnatus est; and whilst the same verse is sung by 
the choir, he remains profoundly inclined ; then he goes to 
the side-table, takes the burse with the corporal, which he 
carries to the altar supported by both his hands, raising it 
to the height of his eyes, walking slowly, and saluting the 
clergy, making a bow to the Bishop, and a genuflection to 
the cross, he goes up, spreads the corporal in the middle, 
places the burse on the Gospel side, makes a genuflection, 
returns directly by the side steps to his place, and sits 
down. 

11. After the Creed has been sung, the officiating deacon 
goes to the altar at the same time with the Bishop, places 
himself at his right, takes off his mitre, makes a genuflec- 
tion, goes up to the altar with him, raising a little his vest- 
ments in front, goes to the corner of the altar at the Epistle 
side, takes off one of the particles from the paten, gives the 



OFFICIATING DEACON. 311 

paten with the other particle, after having kissed it, to the 
Bishop, kissing also his hand. 

12. Whilst the Bishop says Suscipe, Sancte Pater, the 
officiating deacon takes the chalice, wipes it with the puri- 
fier, puts wine into it, and after the sub-deacon has put in 
some drops of water, he wipes with the purifier all the drops 
that may be within on the sides of the chalice, kisses the 
foot of the chalice, holding it with his left hand, and the 
knob under the cup with his right ; gives it to the Bishop, 
kissing his hand, then supporting the Bishop's arm with 
his left hano\., and touching the chalice with his right, he 
says with the Bishop, Offerimus tibi, Domine, etc., and when 
the Bishop has placed the chalice on the corporal, the offi- 
ciating deacon covers it. 

13. When the censer-bearer comes to -the altar, the 
officiating deacon receives from him the incense-boat, 
attends the Bishop whilst he puts in the incense, gives him 
the censer, assists him at the incensing, as directed above ; 
observing, moreover, at the incensing of the sacred offer- 
ings, to hold with his left hand the Bishop's vestments, to 
prevent their embarrassing him, or touching the offerings, 
and with his right the foot of the chalice; which he also 
removes from the middle, at the incensing of the cross, and 
replaces afterwards. 

14. After the Bishop has incensed the altar, the deacon 
receives from him the censer, and incenses him as directed 
in n. 6 ; then he incenses the assistant priest, the first and 
second assistant deacons, with two swings (but in case other 
Bishops and prelates are present in the sanctuary, they 
should be incensed with three swings immediately after the 
Bishop who celebrates) ; afterwards he incenses with one 
swing, the clergy in the sanctuary. On returning to the 
altar, he incenses the sub-deacon with two swings, gives 
the censer to the censer-bearer, goes to his place on the 
highest step behind the Bishop, turns towards the censer- 
bearer, by whom he is incensed. 

15. The officiating deacon remains there till after the 
Preface is sung ; then he goes up to the right of the Bishop, 
and says with him Sanctus, etc., after which he returns to 
his place. At the words Quam oblationem, he goes up to the 



312 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

right of the Bishop ; if there be a pyx with small particles 
to be consecrated, he places it before the Bishop, and un- 
covers it, kneels on the edge of the platform during the 
consecration and elevation of the Host, raising the Bishop's 
chasuble ; and when he has placed the Host on the altar, 
the officiating deacon rises at the same time with him; after 
he has made the genuflection, he covers the pyx, and places 
it behind the chalice, uncovers the chalice, kneels again, 
and raises the chasuble during the elevation. When the 
Bishop lowers the chalice on the altar, the officiating dea- 
con rises, covers it, makes a genuflection with him, and 
returns to his place behind him. Every time the Bishop 
makes the sign of the cross, either on the sacred offerings 
or on himself, the officiating deacon takes care that his 
vestments should not touch the offerings. 

16. When the Bishop says Benedicts et prcestas nobis, the 
officiating deacon goes up to his right, uncovers the chalice, 
making a genuflection every time he uncovers it, with the 
Bishop, before and after. When the Bishop makes the 
sign of the cross on the sacred offerings, saying, Per ipsum 
et cum ipso, the officiating deacon puts two fingers of his 
right hand on the foot of the chalice ; and when the Bishop 
puts the Host on the corporal, he covers the chalice, and 
returns to his place behind the Bishop. 

17. Towards the end of the Pater, when the Bishop 
says Et dimitte nobis, the officiating deacon goes up to his 
right, having previously made a genuflection ; receives 
from the sub-deacon the paten, wipes it with the purifier, 
kisses it, and when the Bishop says Libera 7ios, puts it 
into the celebrant's right hand, which he kisses; when the 
Bishop places the paten under the Host, the officiating 
deacon uncovers the chalice, and covers it again, after the 
Bishop has put into it the small part of the Host, making 
a genuflection, which he always does when at his side. 

18. The officiating deacon says the Agnus Dei, with the 
celebrant, then makes a genuflection, exchanges place with 
the assistant priest, by going to the Bishop's left; there he 
makes a genuflection, and attends the Bishop at the Missal. 
If the officiating deacon does not receive the communion, 
after the second assistant deacon has received the Pax from 



OFFICIATING DEACON. 313 

the Bishop, he goes to receive it, making a genuflection 
first at the Bishop's left, then at his right ; but he does not 
kiss the altar. Having received the Pax, he returns to his 
place, making a genuflection on each side of the Bishop. 

19. When the assistant priest returns to the Bishop's 
left, after having given the Pax to the clergy, the officiating 
deacon returns to the Bishop's right. There he presents 
wine for the ablution of the chalice, and wine and water 
for the ablution of the Bishop's fingers, and puts the puri- 
fier on his fingers over the chalice. 

20. But if communion is to be given by the Bishop, and 
if the deacon and sub-deacon are to receive it, immediately 
after the Bishop has consumed the Precious Blood, the 
officiating deacon covers the chalice, makes a genuflection, 
places the pyx with the consecrated Hosts before the chal- 
ice, uncovers it, makes a genuflection, kneels at the right 
of the sub-deacon on the edge of the platform, receives from 
the Bishop first the Pax, and answers, Et cum spiritu tuo, 
then the communion, rises, goes to the Epistle side, bows 
somewhat, having his face turned to the Gospel side, and 
sings the Confiteor, making a profound bow towards the 
Bishop at the words Et tibi Pater, and Et te Pate?-. When 
he does not receive communion, he says the Confiteor before 
the celebrant takes the first ablution, as directed above ; 
after the celebrant has said Indulgentiam, etc., he changes 
place with the sub-deacon, and going to the Gospel side, 
he makes a genuflection in the middle ; takes the paten, 
holds it under the sacred Host, and accompanies the hand 
of the Bishop, as he gives the communion, going with the 
paten to the railing, if the people are to receive the com- 
munion; after it he returns to the altar, goes to the Epistle 
side, and presents the wine and water for the ablutions. 

21. After the ablutions, the officiating deacon puts the 
mitre on the Bishop, and, after he has washed his hands, 
takes it oif, and goes behind him, follows him to the mid- 
dle, and then back to the Epistle side, returns again behind 
him to the middle, and when the Bishop has sung Dominus 
vobiscum, after the last prayer, the officiating deacon, turned 
to the people, sings, Ite, Missa est, or, if the Mass so re- 

27 



314 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

quire, remaining turned to the altar, he sings Benedicamus 
Domino. 

22. Before the Bishop gives the solemn blessing, the 
officiating deacon puts the mitre on him ; unless the cele- 
brant be an Archbishop, who does not wear it. In this 
case, after the Archbishop has given the blessing, and the 
Indulgences have been published, the officiating deacon 
takes off the pallium, and lays it on the altar, receives the 
blessing standing, but bowing profoundly ; accompanies 
the Bishop to the Gospel side, where he begins the Gospel 
of St. John, or reads it entirely, goes below the steps of 
the altar, makes a genuflection ; accompanies the Bishop 
to his seat, and assists him in taking off the sacred vest- 
ments. When the Bishop has washed his hands, he puts 
on him the cape, gives his place to the first assistant deacon, 
or to one of the two other clergymen who come to the side 
of the Bishop, and returns to the sacristy, where he dis- 
robes, and then retires. 

Aeticle IY. 
Instruction for the Sub-deacon officiating at Pontifical Mass. 

1. The sub-deacon, at a proper time, puts on all the 
vestments belonging to his order, except the maniple. 

2. During Tierce, he sits at the bench as usual, at the 
left of the deacon, until the master of ceremonies comes 
to invite him to go to the side-table ; he lays his cap on the 
bench, takes the plate on which are the Bishop's stockings 
and sandals, carries them, covered with a veil, and raised to 
the height of his eyes, and, assisted by some acolytes, puts 
them on the Bishop's right and left foot. Then he returns 
to the bench, and remains there till the Bishop has read 
the Psalms and prayers of the preparation for Mass. 

3. After the Bishop has read them, the sub-deacon goes 
with the deacon to the Bishop's seat, and having made to 
him a profound bow, goes to his left, and there standing, 
after he has washed his hands, helps the deacon to vest the 
Bishop. 

4. The Bishop being vested, the sub-deacon returns 



SUB-DEACON. 315 

with the deacon to the bench, and remains there till after 
Tierce is over. 

5. After Tierce, the sub-deacon goes again with the 
deacon to the Bishop's seat, and standing at his left, assists 
the deacon to take off the Bishop's cope, and to put on him 
the other vestments for Mass ; then he returns with the 
deacon to the bench, and puts on his maniple. 

6. When the Bishop is ready to proceed to the altar, the 
sub-deacon receives from the master of ceremonies the 
Missal, with the Bishop's maniple in it, and carrying it 
shut before his breast, walks to the altar before the deacon, 
either from the chapel or Secretarium in procession, or from 
his bench goes to the Gospel side, at the left of the deacon, 
but a little behind him, makes a genuflection, gives the 
Missal to the master of ceremonies, answers the Bishop at 
the confession, as usual, making him a profound bow at 
the words Et tibi Pater, and Et te Pater; and while the 
Bishop says Indulgentiam, etc., takes the Bishop's maniple 
from the book, kisses it on one side, and offers it to the 
Bishop to kiss, puts it on his left arm, and kisses the 
Bishop's hand. When the Bishop goes up to the altar, he 
follows him with the Missal, and on the Gospel side, with 
the help of the assistant priest, offers the Bishop the Missal 
open, and pointing out the beginning of the Gospel of that 
day to be kissed. The sub-deacon gives it to the master 
of ceremonies, remains at the left of the Bishop, and attends 
him, whilst he puts incense into the censer, and incenses 
the altar, raising with his right hand the Bishop's chasuble 
on his side, and making a genuflection every time he passes 
before the middle. 

7. After the incensing of the altar, the sub-deacon goes 
below the steps by the Epistle side, and remains at the left 
of the deacon, whilst he incenses the Bishop, making with 
him the usual bows ; then he goes with him to the bench, 
stands there at his left, whilst the Bishop reads the Introit, 
and says the Kyrie, which he says alternately with the 
deacon ; sits till the Kyrie is finished by the choir ; rises at 
the Gloria in exeelsis, says the rest of it together with the 
deacon ; afterwards he sits at the same time as the deacon, 
and all the others, whilst it is sung j makes a bow, and 



316 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

takes off his cap at the words Adoramus, gr edicts, suscipe, 
Jesu Christe; at the end of it, he rises, and stands during 
the Collect. When the Bishop says Per Dominium nostrum, 
or the words of the conclusion of the last prayer, the sub- 
deacon receives the Missal from the master of ceremonies, 
goes to the middle, holding it with both his hands, and 
leaning it towards his breast, he makes a genuflection to 
the altar, a profound bow to the Bishop, and a moderate 
bow to the clergy, first on the Gospel side, then on the 
Epistle side; goes to his place below the last step, and 
turned to the Bishop, without turning his back to the altar, 
he sings the Epistle, supporting with both his arms the 
book open. 

8. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon goes again to the 
middle, makes a genuflection to the altar, a bow to the 
Bishop, and to the clergy on the Epistle side, and the Gos- 
pel side, goes to the Bishop, kneels before him, rests the 
book on his knees, and kisses his hand, as he puts it on 
the book, rises, returns to the bench, and gives the book to 
the master of ceremonies ; then he goes to the middle, at 
the left of the deacon, makes a genuflection, salutes the 
clergy at the Epistle side, and at the Gospel side, walks, at 
the left of the deacon, to the Bishop's seat, and makes a 
profound bow. On arriving before it, he kneels whilst the 
deacon says, Jub'e Domne, etc., and during the blessing ; 
then he rises, makes a profound bow to the Bishop, walks 
to the place where the Gospel is sung, receives the book in 
his hand, and supports it on his head open before the dea- 
con ; and whilst the deacon sings, he remains without 
moving. 

9. When the deacon has done singing the Gospel, the 
sub-deacon, still holding the book open, without making 
any bow, carries it to the Bishop to kiss the beginning of 
the Gospel. When the Bishop has kissed it, the sub-deacon 
shuts the book, bows to the Bishop, and returns to the 
bench, making a genuflection to the altar as he passes 
before it. 

10. At the Credo, the sub-deacon rises, says it together 
with the deacon, and at the same time with the Bishop, 
kneels at the Inearnatus; and having finished the Credo, 



SUB-DEACON. 317 

sits with the rest of the clergy. Whilst the Ineamatus is 
sung, the sub-deacon remains profoundly inclined. After 
the Ineamatus, he rises, standing, waits till the deacon 
returns from the altar, and sits. 

11. At the Offertory, the sub-deacon rises, goes to the 
side-table, puts on his shoulder the long veil, and lets it 
hang lower on his right side, takes hold of the chalice with 
his left hand, covers it with the longest part of the veil 
hanging on his right, and places his right hand open over 
it ; then he goes to the altar, whither he should arrive at 
the same time with the Bishop, uncovers the chalice, gives 
it to the deacon ; then he gives also to the deacon, the 
wine-cruet which he has received from the acolyte, and 
having received the water-cruet, he presents it to the Bishop, 
saying, Benedicite, Peverendissime Pater, and puts a few 
drops of water into the chalice. 

12. After the oblation of the chalice, the sub-deacon 
receives the paten from the deacon in his bare hand, and 
covers it with the longest part of the veil hanging on his 
right ; then he goes down below the lowest step in the 
middle, holding the paten against his breast; but when he 
has arrived there, he keeps it raised to the height of his 
eyes, supporting his elbow with his left hand. There he 
remains without moving, except only to kneel in the same 
place, and on the lowest step, for the elevation. When the 
celebrant says those words of the Pater Noster, Et dimitte 
nobis, etc., the sub-deacon makes a genuflection, goes up to 
the altar at the Epistle side, gives the paten to the deacon, 
takes off the long veil, makes a genuflection, returns below 
the steps in the middle, takes the place of the deacon at the 
Bishop's right, whilst the same deacon keeps that of the 
assistant priest at the left, and uncovers the chalice when 
required, kneeling with the Bishop. The sub-deacon re- 
ceives the Pax after the deacon at the usual time. When 
the deacon sings or recites the Conjiteor, the sub-deacon 
goes to the Gospel side, and remains turned to the opposite 
side, till the Bishop has said Indulgentiam, etc., then he 
changes places with the deacon, and goes to the Epistle 
side, remaining by the Bishop, and accompanying him to 
the railing for the communion of the people. Returning 



318 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

to the altar, the sub-deacon goes to the Epistle side, puts 
wine and water into the chalice for the ablutions ; puts the 
purifier on the Bishop's fingers, unless the deacon has 
already returned to that side, and is there ready to minister 
for the ablutions; then he goes to the Gospel side, wipes 
the chalice, puts on it the purifier, paten, pall, veil, and 
burse with the corporal ; takes hold of it with his left, and 
places his right hand on it, goes down, makes a genuflec- 
tion on the last step, and carries it to the side-table, returns 
to his place, below the last step, behind the Bishop, whom 
he follows, when he goes to the middle. At the blessing 
the sub-deacon goes up on the highest step, receives it, 
profoundly bowing, takes in his hand the book, or the 
altar card, and presents it to the Bishop, to read the Gos- 
pel of St. John. After the Bishop has read this, the sub- 
deacon goes to his left side and helps the deacon to disrobe 
him. Which being done, he goes to the sacristy, puts off 
the sacred vestments, and retires. 



Article V. 

INSTRUCTION FOR THE INFERIOR MINISTERS WHO AT- 
TEND THE BISHOP AT PONTIFICAL MASS AND OTHER 
FUNCTIONS. 

Section I. — The Master of Ceremonies. 

1. There should be two masters of ceremonies ; the first, 
if possible, should be either a priest, or at least in sacred 
orders. 

2. The office of the first master of ceremonies, is to direct 
and conduct the whole ceremony ; he should, therefore, be 
perfectly acquainted with what is to be done by the cele- 
brant and all the officers. He ought to be familiar with 
all the instructions given in the present work, which he 
ought to read frequently ; and especially he ought to re- 
fresh his memory, by looking at the particular ceremonies 
to be performed, the day before. 

3. He ought to take especial care of what is to be per- 



CROSIER-BEARER. 319 

formed by the Bishop, either at his seat or at the altar, or 
in any other place, and always be near him. 

4. The second master of ceremonies assists the first ; he 
ought to be likewise well conversant with this book ; and 
his particular duty is to attend the ministers, and he should 
therefore remain near them. 

5. During Mass, the masters of ceremonies never sit, 
except during the sermon. They must stand, with their 
heads uncovered, whilst the rest of the clergy sit, the first 
master of ceremonies below the steps of the Bishop's seat, 
the second near the bench of the ministers ; and a little 
before a reverence is to be made, or a genuflection, they 
ought to give a signal to the clergy. At the Incarnatus, 
and at the blessing, they kneel down. 

6. At the procession, and when the clergy go from the 
sacristy to the church, and from the church to the sacristy, 
the masters of ceremonies never wear their caps, neither do 
they carry them. 

7. At Vespers they may sit during the Psalms; but they 
must rise before the Gloria Patri, to give the signal to the 
clergy to bow. 

8. The second master of ceremonies, at the altar, gives 
the Bishop's vestments to the acolytes when he is to be 
vested, and receives them back likewise at the altar, when 
he takes them off. 

Section II. — Instruction for the Crosier-bearer, 

1. The crosier-bearer, when the Bishop celebrates Mass, 
or Vespers, pontifically, may be dressed in surplice and 
cope ; at least, he must be in surplice. 

2. He holds continually in his hand the Bishop's crosier, 
whenever the Bishop does not use it. He must watch the 
time, in which he is to give or receive the crosier, and be 
always ready. 

3. The crosier-bearer sits either on the steps of the Bish- 
op's chair, or at any other convenient place near it. He 
must stand whenever the Bishop stands. 

4. When the Bishop walks, either from the chair to the 
altar, or from the sacristy to the sanctuary, the crosier- 



320 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

bearer walks after him, at the right hand of the mitre- 
bearer ; . he likewise stands at the right of the mitre-bearer, 
at a certain distance from the lowest step, when the Bishop 
is at the altar, and kneels there at the elevation and com- 
munion. 

5. In processions, when the Bishop uses the crosier, and 
carries it, the crosier-bearer walks behind him ; but at the 
procession of the blessed Sacrament, when the Bishop does 
not carry the crosier, and on similar occasions, the crosier- 
bearer walks alone in the middle, immediately before the 
clergy, dressed in sacred vestments, and carries the crosier 
erect with both hands. 

Section III. — Instruction for the Mitre-bearer. 

1. The mitre-bearer may wear the cope over his surplice, 
when the Bishop celebrates Mass or Vespers pontifically ; 
at least, he ought to be in surplice, and wear a long white 
silk veil, hanging from his neck ; with the lower part of 
which he covers his hands, whenever he holds the mitre. 

2. He goes to receive it at the altar, from the master of 
ceremonies, when the Bishop is to be dressed ; goes with 
the others before him to his seat, and carries it back to the 
altar, after the Bishop is disrobed. 

3. He sits either on the steps near the Bishop's chair or 
in any other convenient place ; he holds the mitre when- 
ever the Bishop does not use it ; he must watch the moment 
in which he is to give or receive it, and be always ready ; 
he gives it to the deacon that is at the Bishop's right hand, 
and receives it from the deacon that is at his left. 

4. The mitre-bearer must stand whenever the Bishop 
stands. When the Bishop walks, either from his chair to 
the altar, or from the sacristy to the sanctuary, the mitre- 
bearer walks after him, at the left hand of the crosier- 
bearer ; he likewise stands at his left, at a certain distance 
from the lowest step of the altar, and kneels there at the 
elevation and communion. 

5. As the Bishop generally uses two mitres, the precious 
and the plain mitre, the mitre-bearer must give the precious 
mitre whenever the Bishop first puts it on, after having 



BOOK-BEARER. 321 

vested ; at Vespers, after the first Psalm has been com- 
menced, the mitre-bearer places the precious mitre on the 
altar, at the Epistle side, and carries the lighter mitre to 
the deacon. At the beginning of the antiphon, before the 
Magnificat, he carries the lighter mitre to the altar, and the 
precious mitre to the deacon. At Mass, the mitre-bearer, 
at the beginning of the Gloria in excekis, carries the pre- 
cious mitre to the altar, and the lighter mitre to the deacon, 
which the Bishop uses till the end of the Credo. Then the 
mitre-bearer carries the precious mitre to the deacon, and 
the lighter mitre to the altar. The Bishop uses the precious 
mitre till the end of Mass, whenever he has to put it on ; 
therefore, the mitre-bearer holds it in his hand while the 
Bishop is at the altar, standing or kneeling, as has been 
said before. When he holds the mitre, the bands must al- 
ways be outside, and hang down. 

6. In processions, the mitre-bearer walks always behind 
the Bishop. 

Section IV. — Instruction for the Book-bearer. 

1. The book-bearer is dressed in surplice. He should 
take care that the marks be at the proper place in the Mis- 
sal, and hold it. 

2. He sits in a convenient place by the candle-bearer ; 
watches the moment in which the book is necessary, and at 
the first token given by the master of ceremonies, he car- 
ries it to the Bishop. When the Bishop reads standing, 
the book-bearer holds it likewise standing; when the Bishop 
sings anything out of the book at his chair, the book-bearer 
gives it to the assistant priest, who is to hold it only dur- 
ing that time; then he receives it back; when the Bishop 
reads anything sitting, the book-bearer holds it kneeling 
down. Holding the book, he places the upper end of it 
on his forehead, and holds the lower on his hands. He 
never kneels nor bows whilst he is holding the book before 
the Bishop. 



322 PONTIFICAL MASS. 



Section V. — Instruction for the Candle-bearer. 

1. The candle-bearer, who carries and holds the hand- 
candlestick, which is used whenever the Bishop officiates, 
is dressed in surplice ; he sits, and remains at the right of 
the book-bearer; accompanies him whenever he carries the 
book to the Bishop's chair, and remains at his side with 
the candlestick in his hand, but always standing whilst the 
Bishop reads or sings anything. 

2. The book-bearer, moreover, goes to the altar, and 
there, always at the side in which is the Missal, stands by 
the assistant priest, holding the candle near the book. 



PART VI. 



'iher Solemn ©flkes, 



AT WHICH THE BISHOP OFFICIATES 

OR IS PRESENT. 



CHAPTER I. 

COMMEMORATION OF ALL THE FAITHFUL DEPARTED. 

1. On All-Saints' Day, for the second Vespers, a black 
altar veil is to be placed under the white one ; the latter 
is to be removed by the acolytes, soon after the solemn 
Vespers of the day. 

2. After these Vespers, the Bishop and the clergy take 
off the sacred vestments, the Bishop at his seat, and the 
clergy (as quickly as possible) in the sacristy ; the latter 
return to the sanctuary, and the Bishop goes to his choir- 
stall, if there be such, otherwise he remains in his seat, 
without an assistant priest and deacon. 

3. Vespers for the dead are sung as directed in Part V 
of this book, chapter ix. 

4. After Vespers, in Cathedral churches, Matins and 
Lauds for the dead are sung, as directed in Part V, 
chapter x. 

5. The next day, a Pontifical Mass is celebrated by the 
Bishop, as in Part V, chapter xi. 

6. After Mass, the absolution is made by the Bishop, 
either at his seat, or at the cenotaph, as directed in Part V, 
chapter xi. 



324 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

CHAPTER II. 

SUNDAYS IN ADVENT. 

1. If the Bishop officiates on these Sundays, the assist- 
ant deacons, the officiating deacon, and sub-deacon, instead 
of dalmatics, use folded chasubles, which have the same 
form as the usual chasubles, but that part which hangs be- 
fore is shorter, and does not hang further than the cincture. 
Where there are none for this purpose, the others may be 
used, if folded. The same are used by the ministers for all 
High Masses celebrated either in the presence or in the 
absence of the Bishop. However, on the third Sunday in 
Advent, the ministers use dalmatics and tunics of rose color. 
If the fourth Sunday falls on Christmas Eve, dalmatics of 
violet color are also used. 

2. The Bishop, instead of Pax vobis, says Dominus 
vobiscum. 

3. The sub-deacon, whilst the celebrant sings the last 
Collect, takes off his folded chasuble, sings the Epistle 
without it, and having received the Bishop's blessings, puts 
on the folded chasuble again. 

4. The deacon also, before the first Alleluia is sung, takes 
off his chasuble, puts on the large stole over the other, and 
remains so till after the celebrant's communion ; he then 
takes off the large stole, and puts on the folded chasuble. 

5. What has been said above, n. 3 and 4, is to be ob- 
served also in other High Masses, celebrated either in the 
presence or in the absence of the Bishop. 



CHAPTER III. 

CHRISTMAS. 

1. On Christmas Eve, the first Vespers are sung as 
directed, page 262. 



CHRISTMAS. 325 

2. The following night, Matins are song as directed, 
page 267. 

3. What follows is to be particularly observed for these 
Matins. 

4. The church and sanctuary must be illuminated with 
a sufficient number of candles. 

5. Another table, besides the usual side-table, is to be 
prepared, and all the sacred vestments for the Pontifical 
Mass should be placed on it ; also a cope to be worn by 
the Bishop during the Te Deum. 

6. At the third nocturn, whilst the choir sings the Psalm, 
Misericord ias Domini, the Bishop, attended by the two 
assistants in surplice, reads the antiphon and Psalms for 
the preparation of Mass, out of the book, which is held 
open before him by an acolyte, who has at his side another 
acolyte with a candlestick ; and in the meantime the 
Bishop's stockings and sandals are put on. The deacon 
and sub-deacon go also, at the beginning of the third 
nocturn, to the sacristy, where they put on the sacred vest- 
ments. The Bishop ought to finish the preparation in time 
to be ready to sing, A vinculis, etc., before the lessons. 
The two assistants, after the preparation, return to their 
seats ; but they go again to the side of the Bishop, when 
he sings the last Lesson ; after which, having intoned the 
Te Deum, the deacon and sub-deacon go to his side, and 
the two assistants go to put on the sacred vestments ; the 
acolytes, with the book and candlestick, go before the 
Bishop ; the master of ceremonies, having given the Bishop's 
vestments to the acolytes, goes also with them before the 
Bishop, who, after having put on the stole, receives the 
cope, and remains standing till the end of the Te Deum; 
he then sings Dominus vobiscum and the prayer; after 
which he repeats Dominus vobiscum, and whilst the singers 
sing, Benedicamus Domino, the Bishop takes off the cope, 
puts on the other vestments for Mass, which he celebrates 
as usual. During the Te Deum, the clergy put on the 
sacred vestments. 

7. At the Incarnalus, the Bishop and all the clergy 
kneel. 

8. The Bishop does not take the ablutions, because he 



326 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

is to sing the third Mass • he washes his fingers in another 
chalice or vessel. 

9. Lauds are sung as directed, page 269. 



CHAPTER IV. 

FESTIVALS BETWEEN CHRISTMAS AND CANDLEMAS. 

1. The Bishop may celebrate these festivals with more 
or less solemnity, as he thinks proper. 

2. However, on New Year's day, he ought to assist at 
Mass in cope, as directed, page 288. 

3. On the Epiphany, he ought to celebrate pontifically, 
as directed, page 269. 

On the same day, after the Gospel has been sung, a 
clergyman in cope goes to the pulpit, and publishes the 
movable feasts, singing what is prescribed for this purpose 
in the Roman Pontifical. 

4. On other festivals, the Bishop may assist at Mass in 
cope or in his long robe, as directed, page 288. 



CHAPTER V. 

CANDLEMAS. 

Things to be Prepared. 

1. In the sanctuary, between the Bishop's seat and the 
altar, a table entirely covered with a white linen cloth, 
and on it a sufficient number of candles for the Bishop and 
clergy. 

2. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for 
High Mass celebrated in presence of the Bishop, the holy- 
water vase, the basin, ewer, towels on a plate, and some 



CANDLEMAS. 327 

slices of bread on another plate, for cleansing the Bishop's 
hands ; an apron beautifully embroidered, to be put on the 
Bishop's knees at the distribution of the candles. 

3. Near the side-table, the processional cross ; and in a 
convenient place the censer with the incense-boat, a chafing- 
dish, with fire and tongs. 

4. In front of the altar, a violet veil over another of a 
white color, to be removed after the procession, unless the 
Mass be not of the Blessed Virgin. 

5. On the altar, the Bishop's ornaments, viz., the violet 
cope and stole, the pectoral cross, the cincture, alb, amice, 
and mitre, besides the crosier , at the angle between the 
altar and the steps. 

6. In the sacristy, a violet cope for the assistant priest, 
two violet chasubles folded, with two cinctures, albs, and 
amices for the assistant deacons, and violet vestments for 
all the clergy, as before directed. 

7. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy ; the 
Bishop goes thither as before directed. 

They go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary, as 
directed, page 273. 

The Bishop is vested as prescribed at page 274. 

8. The Bishop being vested, takes off the mitre, and 
rises ; the acolytes go before him with the book and the 
candlestick, and the Bishop, standing turned a little towards 
the candles, blesses them, singing in the ferial tone what 
is prescribed in the Missal for this purpose. When he 
begins the last prayer, the two acolytes go before him with 
the censer and incense-boat, and the holy-water vase. 

9. After the prayers, the Bishop puts incense into the 
censer and blesses it; then having received the sprinkle 
from the assistant priest, he sprinkles the candles three 
times ; afterwards he incenses them also thrice, after which 
he sits, and puts on the mitre. Then the priest first in 
dignity, having been previously invited by the master of 
ceremonies, goes before the Bishop, makes a bow to him, 
and gives him the candle, which he kisses as well as the 
hand of the Bishop, who gives the candle to the master of 
ceremonies to be kept by one of the acolytes. 

10. Then the apron, prepared for the purpose, is put on 



328 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

the Bishop's knees. One of the acolytes brings the candles 
to be distributed, gives them, one by one, to the second 
assistant deacon, who presents them to the Bishop, who 
distributes them, first to the priest from whom he received 
the candle, then to the assistant priest, the assistant dea- 
cons, and all the clergy, who go to receive them, according 
to their order and rank; all receive them kneeling, and 
kiss, first the candle, then the Bishop's hand. In the 
meantime, the candles are distributed to the people by one 
or two priests ; and during the distribution the choir sings, 
Lumen ad revelationem. 

11. After the distribution, the Bishop washes his hands. 
The antiphon, i^r^e, having been repeated, the Bishop 
takes off his mitre, rises and sings Or emus ; the first dea- 
con sings Flectamiis genua, and the second, Levate, only 
after Septuagesima, but not on Sunday, and the Bishop sings 
the prayer, Exaudi qucesumus, after which he sits, puts on 
the mitre, puts the incense into the censer and blesses it. 

12. In the meantime, the candles are lighted, and every- 
thing is arranged for the procession around the church. 
The censer-bearer, with his censer, goes to the middle of 
the sanctuary, behind the sub-deacon, in his folded chasu- 
ble, carrying the cross, and having the acolytes, with their 
candlesticks and lighted candles, at his side. The first dea- 
con sings Procedamus in pace, the choir answers, In nomine 
Christi, Amen. Then the procession moves from the sanc- 
tuary in the following order : first, the censer- bearer, then 
the cross-bearer with the acolytes, afterwards the clergy, 
two by two, according to their order, all carrying their 
candles; lastly, the Bishop, between the assistant deacons, 
carrying the candle in his left hand, and blessing the people 
with his right. 

13. During the procession, the priest who is to sing Mass, 
and the deacon and the sub-deacon, go to the sacristy, and 
put on their respective vestments, — white, if Mass is of the 
Blessed Virgin ; violet, if of the Sunday. Also the violet 
altar-veil is removed, if Mass is of the Blessed Virgin. 

14. After the procession, the clergy take off their sacred 
vestments in the sacristy, and extinguish their candles. 
The Bishop goes to his seat, takes off the violet cope and 



ASH WEDNESDAY. 329 

stole, and puts on the white, which an acolyte should bring 
thither in time. But if Mass is of the Sunday, the Bishop 
does not change his vestments. 

15. Then the celebrant, preceded by the deacon and sub- 
deacon, goes to the altar, and Mass is celebrated as directed, 
page 277. 

16. The clergy hold in their hands lighted candles, from 
the beginning to the end of the Gospel, and from the con- 
secration to the communion, except the Mass of Sunday be 
said. 



CHAPTER VI. 

ASH WEDNESDAY. 

Article I. 
Things to be Prepared. 

1. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for 
High Mass, the following should be prepared : the holy- 
water vase, the ewer with the basin, a plate with some 
tow r els, another with slices of bread to cleanse the Bishop's 
hands, a towel to be placed on the Bishop's knees during 
the distribution of the ashes, a Missal for the Bishop, the 
candlestick, and a large stole for the deacon. 

2. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., a violet cope 
and stole, pectoral cross, cincture, alb, amice, mitre, and 
crosier ; also a vase containing the ashes to be blessed, made 
of branches blessed on Palm Sunday the year preceding. 

3. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the cele- 
brant, deacon, and sub-deacon (the two latter make use of 
folded chasubles), also two folded chasubles for the assist- 
ant deacons, a cope for the assistant priest, and a sufficient 
number of sacred vestments for the clergy, according to 
their order and dignity, the censer with the incense- boat, 
a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

28 



330 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 



Article II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop into the sacristy, to the end 
of the blessing and distribution of the ashes. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy, attended as before 
directed. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy ; 
they go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary, as directed, 
page 273, except that the celebrant, preceded by the dea- 
con and sub-deacon, walks immediately before the assistant 
priest! 

2. On arriving at the sanctuary, the clergy go to their 
usual places, the celebrant, with the deacon and sub-deacon, 
to their bench, and the Bishop, with his assistants, to his 
seat, after having respectively made the usual genuflections 
and bows. The Bishop is vested as directed, page 274. 

3. The sub-deacon, attended by the second master of 
ceremonies, goes up to the altar, and taking, with both 
hands, the vase containing the ashes, carries it, raised be- 
fore his face, to the throne, and holds it there, kneeling at 
the right of the Bishop, till the end of the blessing. 

4. The acolytes, with the book and the candlestick, go 
before the Bishop, who, sitting with the mitre on, reads 
the antiphon, Exaudi nos; which being repeated after the 
Psalm by the choir, the Bishop rises, with his head un- 
covered, and sings, in the ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, 
Oremus, and the four prayers as in the Missal. 

5. After the prayers, the Bishop puts incense into the 
censer and blesses it, sprinkles and incenses the ashes 
three times. 

6. Then he sits with his head uncovered ; the celebrant, 
accompanied by the master of ceremonies, goes to the Bishop, 
and having bowed to him, puts ashes on his head, saying, 
Memento homo, etc. 

7. The Bishop puts on the mitre, the apron is placed on 
his knees, and he puts ashes on the head of the celebrant, 
who stands inclined before him ; to whom he says, Me- 
mento, etc. 

8. Then the Bishop puts ashes on the heads of the 



ASH WEDNESDAY. 331 

assistant priest, assistant deacons, officiating deacon, and 
all the clergy, who go for this purpose to receive them, 
according to their respective rank and order, kneeling 
whilst the ashes are put on. Last of all, he puts ashes on 
the people at the railing ; in doing which, he may be 
assisted by a priest, if the number of people is great. 

9. Afterwards,' he returns to his seat and washes his 
hands as usual ; then rises, with his head uncovered, and 
sings, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer as in the Missal, 
during which two acolytes remain before him, with their 
candlesticks and lighted candles. 

10. After the prayer, the clergy go to take off the sacred 
vestments ; the Bishop keeps his on, and assisted and vested 
as before, does everything at Mass as directed, page 173, 
observing what follows. 

11. At the collects, the Bishop kneels at the faldstool or 
praying desk, in the middle of the sanctuary, between his 
assistants. Again, he kneels in the same place, but with 
his mitre on, during the whole verse, Adjuva, sung by the 
choir. Also the celebrant, with his ministers, kneels before 
the altar during the same. 

12. The deacon and sub-deacon observe what has been 
said before. 

13. The preacher, after the Gospel has been sung, goes 
to ask the Bishop's blessing, and announces the Indul- 
gences. 

14. The Bishop, having said the Sanctus, kneels as for 
the Collects, till the Per omnia scecula, before the Agnus 
Dei. So also all the clergy in the sanctuary. At the Post 
Communion, the Bishop kneels in the same manner; after 
the celebrant has sung the last Or emus, the deacon, turned 
towards the people, sings, Humiliate capita, etc. The rest 
is done as usual. What has been said in particular for 
this Mass, is to be observed in all ferial Masses during 
Advent and Lent* 



332 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

CHAPTER VII. 

SUNDAYS IN LENT. 

1. For the Sundays in Lent, everything is to be ob- 
served as directed for Sundays in Advent. 

2. What has been said for the third Sunday in Advent, 
is to be observed also for the fourth Sunday in Lent. 

3. Before the first Vespers of Passion Sunday, all the 
crosses and images on the altar and in the church are to 
be covered. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

PALM SUNDAY. 

Article I. 

• Things to be Prepared. 

1. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, as directed, 
page 270. 

2. On the side-table, everything as there directed ; also 
the large stole for the deacon. 

3. By the side-table, as there stated. The processional 
cross is to be covered with a violet veil. 

4. Between the Bishop's seat and the altar, a table 
covered all over with a white linen cloth, and on it the 
palms to be blessed, and that of the Bishop adorned with 
flowers. 

5. In the sanctuary, on the Gospel side, three stands for 
the deacons who are to sing the Passion. 

6. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the celebrant, 
deacon, and sub-deacon, as directed in chap. vi. Also 



PALM SUNDAY. 333 

three violet stoles and maniples, with three cinctures, albs, 
amices, and books, for the three deacons who are to sing 
the Passion. 

Article II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the Church 
to the beginning of Mass, 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy, attended as directed, 
page 273. 

2. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy. 

3. All go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary. 

4. The Bishop puts on the sacred vestments. All is 
done as directed, page 274. 

5. The Bishop being vested, the choir sings Hosanna, 
which the Bishop reads in the meantime, and then sings, 
in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer as in the 
Missal. The sub-deacon sings the Epistle with the usual 
ceremonies, and the Bishop reads it as well as the Gradual, 
Munda cor meum, and the Gospel. The deacon sings the 
Gospel with the usual ceremonies. After the Gospel, the 
sub-deacon carries the book to the Bishop, who kisses it, 
and is afterwards incensed by the assistant priest. 

6. Then the Bishop sings Dominus vobiscum, and the 
prayer, Auge, as in the Missal, and after it the Preface ; 
which being ended, the choir sings, and the Bishop says 
the Sanctus. Afterwards the Bishop sings the five prayers, 
as in the Missal. Whilst he is singing the last prayer, 
two acolytes go before him with the censer and incense- 
boat, and with the holy-water vase and sprinkle. The last 
prayer being ended, the Bishop puts incense into the censer, 
blesses it, sprinkles thrice the palms, saying, Asperges me, 
without the Psalm, and incenses them thrice. Then he 
sings Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer, Deus, qui Filium 
tuum; and having finished it, he sits down, and puts on 
the mitre. 

7. The first in dignity amongst those who are presen. 
on' invitation from the master of ceremonies, goes to the 
Bishop, and gives him the palm, kissing it and the Bishop's 



334 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

hand. The apron, prepared for this purpose, is then put 
on the Bishop's knees, and one of the acolytes furnishing, 
one by one, the palms to the second assistant deacon, the 
deacon gives them to the Bishop, who distributes them, 
first to the priest from whom he received it, then to the 
assistant priest and assistant deacon, to the deacon and sub- 
deacon, and all the -clergy, who go to receive them, two by 
two, and kiss both the palm and the Bishop's hand, making 
the usual reverences. The choir, during the distribution, 
sings, Pueri Hebrceorum. 

8. After the distribution, the Bishop washes his hands. 
Then two acolytes, with their candlesticks and lighted 
candles, go before the Bishop, who, standing with his head 
uncovered, sings Dominus vobiscum,, and the prayer, Om- 
nipotens sempiterne JDeus; at the end of which he sits down, 
puts on the mitre, and puts incense into the censer, as 
usual. 

In the meanwhile, everything is prepared for the proces- 
sion. The first assistant deacon sings, Procedamus in pace. 
They all carry the palms in their hands. The Bishop, be- 
tween the assistant deacons, holds the palm in his left, and 
blesses the people with his right. The officiating deacon 
walks at the left of the assistant priest. The choir sings 
the antiphons as in the Missal. 

9. The procession moves out of the church ; there they 
divide and place themselves as directed, page 220 ; two or 
four of the singers remain within the church ; the doors 
are shut, the Gloria, laus, is sung, and after it, when the 
sub-deacon knocks at the door with the foot of the cross, 
it is opened, the procession enters the church, the choir 
singing Ingrediente Domino. 

10. The procession having returned to the sanctuary, the 
Bishop goes to his seat, and remains for Mass in his sacred 
vestments ; but the others take them off. The celebrant 
comes from the sacristy to the sanctuary, and Mass is cele- 
brated, as directed in page 222 and page 324. 

11. "What follows, is particularly to be observed at Mass. 

12. When the sub-deacon, at the Epistle, sings the words, 
Ut in nomine Jesu omne genuflectatur, the Bishop and all 
the clergy kneel till after the words, Et infernorum. 



PALM SUNDAY. 335 

13. Whilst the Epistle and Tract are sung, three deacons 
go to the sacristy, put on amices, albs, cinctures, maniples, 
and stoles, and at the end of the Tract, preceded by the 
master of ceremonies, go to the sanctuary in the following 
order, carrying the Book before their breast. First the 
deacon, who sings the words of the Evangelist ; second, he 
who sings the words of the crowd ; third, he who sings the 
words of Christ. They are followed by three acolytes, 
without candlesticks, and without the censer; after having 
made the usual genuflection and bows, they go to kiss the 
Bishop's hand, without asking the blessing. They go to 
the place where the Passion is to be sung, and place them- 
selves as directed, page 223, the acolytes holding the books. 

14. When they begin to sing the Passion, the Bishop and 
all the clergy rise, with their heads uncovered, and stand 
w T ith the palms in their hands till the end of it. The cele- 
brant reads it at the Epistle side, and when he has done 
reading, he turns towards the deacons of the Passion, and 
stands at the corner of the altar, the deacon also on the 
middle step, and the sub-deacon before the lowest step, 
with palms in their hands ; at the words Emisit spiritum, 
the Bishop and all the clergy kneel at their places. 

15. After the Passion, the Bishop sits, says Munda cor 
meum, and reads the Gospel ; the deacon takes off his 
folded chasuble, puts on the large stole, carries the book to 
the altar, kisses the Bishop's hand, goes to the altar, kneels, 
and says Munda cor meum ; at the same time, the Bishop 
puts incense into the censer as usual ; then the deacon and 
sub-deacon, with the censer-bearer, and two acolytes, with- 
out candlesticks, go to the Bishop's seat, the deacon asks 
his blessing, the Gospel is sung as usual, and the Bishop, 
having kissed the book, is incensed by the assistant priest. 

16. At the elevation, the Bishop alone holds the palm 
in his hand. The rest is done as in other Masses. 



336 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

CHAPTER IX. 

MATINS OF THE TENEBRJ3. 

1. For these Matins, everything is to be prepared as 
directed, page 225, and when the Bishop officiates at them, 
everything is done as there specified. 

2. If the Bishop occupies his usual seat, he has no other 
assistant than the master of ceremonies, who sits in some 
place near ; but it is advisable that the Bishop should sit 
in a choir-stall with the other clergymen. 

3. The Bishop rises with the clergy, and kneels and re- 
cites the prayer, Respice. 

4. On Maundy Thursday, and on Good-Friday, for 
the Tenebrse, the altar, the Bishop's throne, and faldstool 
should be quite bare. 



CHAPTER X. 

MAUNDY THURSDAY. 

Article I. 

Things to be Prepared. 

1. A chapel for the repository. 

2. The high altar, as on the greatest festivities, with 
white altar veil, etc. 

3. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, with the excep- 
tion of the cope. A chalice, with a purifier, for cleansing 
the Bishop's fingers. 

4. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for the 
Pontifical Mass, two particles on the paten, one of which 
should be of a size to fit the chalice in which it is to be 
placed ; a second chalice, with its paten, pall, veil, and a 



MAUNDY THURSDAY. 337 

white ribbon to fasten the veil round the chalice; a pyx, 
with a sufficient number of small particles, for the commu- 
nion of the clergy and people ; a long linen cloth for the 
communion of the clergy. 

By the side-table, the processional cross. 

5. In a convenient place, in or near the sanctuary, the 
canopy for the procession. 

6. In the sanctuary, in the middle towards the railing, 
a table covered with fine linen cloth, two candlesticks and 
candles, and the Pontifical on a cushion or stand on it, on 
that side which corresponds to the Gospel side. Behind 
the table, a chair for the Bishop, with three stools for the 
assistant deacons on each side, and for the assistant priest 
on the Gospel side. On each side of the table, six seats, 
or a bench sufficient for six persons, covered with suitable 
cloth. Behind the Bishop's chair, placed near the table, 
seats for the seven deacons and seven sub-deacons, who as- 
sist at the consecration of the oils. 

7. In the sacristy, besides the usual white vestments for 
the assistant priest and deacons, and for the officiating dea- 
con and sub-deacon, twelve white chasubles, stoles, and man- 
iples, with as many cinctures, albs, and amices, for twelve 
priests ; also seven white dalmatics, stoles, and maniples, 
with as many cinctures, albs, and amices, for seven deacons, 
and seven white tunics and maniples, with seven cinctures, 
albs, and amices, for seven sub-deacons, who are all to 
assist at the consecration of the oils ; besides, a sufficient 
number of sacred vestments for the other clergy, according 
to their order and rank, if there be any more. Moreover, 
two censers and incense-boat, and a wooden clapper. Can- 
dles in sufficient number for the procession. 

8. In a suitable place, either in the sacristy, or near the 
baptismal font, three metal vases, large enough to contain a 
sufficient quantity of oil for all the churches of the diocese. 
On one of them there should be engraven at least the 
initials of these words, Oleum Infirmorum, on another, 
Oleum Catechumenorum, and on the third, Sanctum Chrisma. 
The first and second should be covered with silk cloth of 
any color, the third with white silk cloth. Near them, 
should be prepared tw T o long veils for the deacons, who are 

29 



338 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

to carry the vases containing the oil of catechumens and 
the chrism. Also near the vase, a plate, and in it a small 
vessel containing the palm, and a spatula to mix it. 

9. For the washing of the feet, should be prepared the 
necessary vessels to hold the water, which should be a little 
warm ; and basins for washing the feet ; also, a sufficient 
number of towels to wipe them ; the ewer, basin, and towels 
for the Bishop to wash and wipe his hands ; also a large 
towel with strings, which the Bishop puts before him, 
when he washes the feet ; two benches, capable of contain- 
ing six persons each, higher than usual, before which there 
should be a step ; the book of the Gospel, a violet stole, 
and cope, for the Bishop ; and white dalmatic, tunic, stole, 
and maniples, for the deacon and sub-deacon ; the candle- 
sticks, with lighted candles, for the acolytes, and the censer 
and incense-boat. 

Article II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the sanc- 
tuary, to the beginning of Mass. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as before directed. 

2. As soon as the Bishop and clergy arrive at the sacristy, 
they go into the sanctuary before they put on the sacred 
vestments. After a short prayer, they all rise, and say 
None, which is not to be sung. The Bishop, at the same 
time,. reads the Psalms for the preparation of Mass, without 
Gloria Patri, and they put on him the stockings and 
sandals. The Psalms of None being ended, the Bishop 
goes to the middle, kneels before the faldstool, and all the 
clergy kneel at their places, during Christus, Pater, and 
Miserere, etc. ; at the end of which the Bishop says the 
prayer Respice. 

3. The prayer Respice being ended, the clergy who have 
to put on the sacred vestments, go for this purpose to the 
sacristy. The Bishop goes to his seat ; the deacon and sub- 
deacon, who should take their sacred vestments during 
None, go to the Bishop's side, and help to take oflP his cape, 
wash his hands, and put on the sacred vestments as before 
directed. 



MAUNDY THURSDAY. 339 



Article III. 

From the beginning to the end of Mass. 

1. As soon as the clergy have put on their vestments, 
they go to their places in the sanctuary, and the Bishop 
being vested, the deacon and sub-deacon put on their mani- 
ples, the assistant deacons go to the side of the Bishop, and 
Mass is celebrated as usual, with the following exceptions. 

2. At the Confession the Psalm, Judica, is omitted. The 
organ is not played, nor the bells rung any more after the 
Gloria in excelsis; instead of bells a wooden clapper is 
used. 

3. Before the Bishop says the words, Per quern haw 
omnia, Domine, semper bona creas, having made a genuflec- 
tion to the Blessed Sacrament, he retires to the Epistle side, 
near the altar, where he washes his fingers in another 
chalice, and wipes them, makes again a genuflection to the 
Blessed Sacrament, goes to the first step of the altar, puts 
on the mitre, takes the crosier in his hand, and between 
the two assistant deacons, preceded by the assistant priest, 
goes to the seat near the table, prepared as in Art. I, n. 6, 
of this chapter, sits, turned towards the altar, having the 
table before him, and his assistants at his side, all the 
others remaining at their places ; then the assistant priest 
says, with a loud voice, in the tone of a Lesson, Oleum 
infirmorum. Immediately after, one of the seven sub- 
deacons, having at his side two acolytes, goes to the sacristy, 
takes the vessel with the oil to be consecrated for the sick, 
covered as it is, and holding its foot in his right hand, and 
having his left arm round it, carries it to the Bishop, and 
gives it into the hands of the assistant priest, saying, Oleum 
infirmorum. The assistant priest presents it to the Bishop, 
saying the same words, and puts it on the table. 

4. The Bishop, with his mitre on, rises, and reads the 
exorcisms in a 1ow t voice, loud enough, however, to be 
heard by the priests who are round him ; after the ex- 
orcisms, the clergy answer, Amen; the Bishop, having taken 
off his mitre, says Dominus vobiscum, and reads also, in a 



340 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

low voice, the prayer, Phnitte, qucesumus; after which, the 
vessel is brought back to the sacristy by the sub-deacon, 
accompanied by two acolytes. The Bishop puts on the 
mitre, seats himself, and washes his hands ; then, rising 
with his mitre on, returns to the altar attended by his 
ministers, and on arriving before the lowest step, takes off 
his mitre, makes a genuflection, goes up to the altar, and 
continues Mass from the words, Per quern hwc omnia, etc., 
as far as the communion of the Sacred Body and Blood 
inclusively. 

5. The Bishop having communicated, places the con- 
secrated Host to be reserved for the following" day in the 
chalice prepared for the purpose, which the master of 
ceremonies should have previously carried to the altar, with 
its veil and ribbon ; the deacon covers it with the pall and 
the paten ; over them he places the veil, which he fastens 
with the ribbon round the foot of the chalice, and places 
in the middle of the altar. 

6. Then the deacon sings the Confiteor, and the celebrant 
gives the communion, first to the deacon and sub-deacon, 
and afterwards to the rest of the clergy, according to their 
rank, beginning with the priests, who should wear the stole. 
To-dav, the Pax is not given to the deacon and sub-deacon 

J 7 © 

by the Bishop before the communion. 

7. The communion being ended, the Bishop having 
taken not only the usual ablutions, but also that which 
had been previously left in the other chalice, makes a genu- 
flection to the Blessed Sacrament, goes down to the second 
step, puts on the mitre, takes the crosier, and attended by 
the ministers as before, goes to the seat near the table. 

8. The Bishop having seated himself, the assistant priest, 
standing near him, says in a loud voice, and in the tone of 
a lesson, Oleum ad Sanctum Chrisma, and immediately 
after, Oleum Catechumenorum ; then the Bishop puts incense 
into the censer and blesses it. This being done, they go to 
the sacristy for the oils in the following order: the censer- 
bearer, the two acolytes with their candlesticks and lighted 
candles, the seven sub-deacons, two by two, and in the 
third row three ; the seven deacons likewise ; and, lastly, 



MAUNDY THUKSDAY. 341 

the twelve priests, also two by two. The Bishop, and his 
assistants and ministers, remain at their places. 

9. The procession comes out of the sacristy in the fol- 
lowing order : the censer-bearer, the sub-deacon with the 
processional cross, between the acolytes with their candle- 
sticks, two chanters singing the verses, Redemptor ; six 
sub-deacons, two by two • five deacons, in the first row two, 
in the second three ; a sub-deacon, carrying the vase with 
the balm, two deacons carrying the vases with oil, having 
a long veil hanging from their neck before their breast, 
holding the vases with their left arms round them, and 
covering the lower part of the vases with that part of the 
veils which hangs on their right ; the deacon carrying the 
oil for the chrism, walks at the right, and he that carries 
the oil of catechumens at the left ; last of all, the twelve 
priests, two by two. As they move from the sacristy, the 
chanters begin to sing the verses, O Redemptor, etc., which 
are immediately repeated by the choir ; as also after each 
strophe sung by the chanters. 

10. When the procession arrives at the sanctuary, the 
censer-bearer and the sub-deacon with the cross, between 
the acolytes, place themselves near the altar at the Epistle 
side ; the twelve priests, six on each side of the assistant 
deacons, with their faces turned towards the altar, the dea- 
cons behind the Bishop, and the sub-deacons behind the 
deacons. The sub-deacon with the balm, and the deacons 
with the oil, stop until the others have taken their places. 
Which being done, the deacon with the oil for the chrism 
goes before the Bishop, and the assistant priest, receiving 
from him the vase wrapped in the veil, which the deacon 
had round his neck, presents it to the Bishop, and lays it 
on the table before him. In the meanwhile, the other 
deacon holds the vessel of the oil of the catechumens on 
his arm. Then the sub-deacon with the balm gives the 
vase which contains it to the assistant priest, who, having 
presented it to the Bishop, lays it on the table. The Bishop 
takes off his mitre, rises, and turned towards the altar, 
blesses the balm, saying, Dominus vobiscum, and the two 
prayers, as found in the Roman Pontifical. The second 
prayer being ended, the Bishop, still standing, puts on the 



342 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

mitre, and mixes in a paten, or in another vessel, the balm 
with some oil, which is taken from the vase, saying the 
third prayer. 

11. After the third prayer, the clergy having answered, 
Amen, the Bishop sits with his mitre on, breathes thrice in 
the form of a cross over the mouth of the vase, which is 
yet kept wrapped in the veil. Then the twelve priests 
breathe over it in the same manner as the Bishop, one 
after another, making genuflections to the Blessed Sacra- 
ment on the altar, and bowing to the Bishop both before 
and after. Which being done, the Bishop rises, and, with 
his mitre on, reads the exorcism ; at the end of which, he 
takes off his mitre, and with his hands extended before his 
breast, he sings the Preface as in the Pontifical, and having 
concluded it with the words, Per eumdem Dominum, etc., 
which he reads, the clergy answer, Amen. 

12. Then the Bishop puts into the vase for the chrism, the 
mixture of balm and oil, saying, Hcee commixtio, etc., and 
the deacon, who carried the vase of the chrism, removes 
from it the long veil in which it was wrapped. Then the 
Bishop bowing, sings, Ave, Sanctum Chrisma, three times, 
but the second time he raises his voice a tone higher, and 
the third he raises it another tone higher. After the third 
time, he kisses the border of the vessel, sits down, and puts 
on his mitre. 

13. The twelve priests, one after the other, make a genu- 
flection to the Blessed Sacrament and a reverence to the 
Bishop, kneel on both knees, in the middle, at a distance 
from the table, and sing, Ave, Sanctum Chrisma, then rise, 
go nearer the table, kneel again, sing, Ave, Sanctum 
Chrisma, a tone higher ; rise, approach the table, kneel, 
sing Ave, Sanctum Chrisma, another tone higher; then rise 
and kiss the border of the vase. They then return to their 
places, having made a genuflection to the Blessed Sacra- 
ment on the altar, and a bow to the Bishop. This being 
done by the twelve priests, the vase with the chrism is 
placed on one side of the table. 

14. The deacon who holds the vase of the oil of cate- 
chumens goes before the Bishop, and gives it (without the 
veil, which he retains) to the assistant priest, who, having 



MAUNDY THURSDAY. 343 

shown it to the Bishop, places it on the middle of the table 
before the Bishop, who immediately after breathes over it 
thrice in the form of a cross. The twelve priests, one after 
the other, do in like manner. Then the Bishop rises, with 
his mitre on, and reads in a low voice, the exorcisms ; at 
the end of which, the clergy answer, Amen. The Bishop 
takes off his mitre, and standing, says in a low voice 
Dominus vobiscum, etc., Or emus, and the prayer, Deus, in- 
crementorum, for the blessing of the oil of catechumens, 
which being ended, the clergy answer, Amen. Afterwards, 
the Bishop sings thrice, Ave Sanctum Oleum, as has been 
said, n. 12, for the chrism, and kisses the brim of the vase; 
the same is done likewise by the twelve priests, as directed 
in n. 13. 

15. All this being done, the deacons take the vases in 
their arms, and the procession is arranged, as in n. 9, to 
bring back to the sacristy the consecrated oil and the chrism, 
the chanters singing the verses, TJt novetur, and the choir 
repeating after each strophe, Redemptor. 

16. Whilst they go to the sacristy, the Bishop, sitting, 
washes his hands, returns to the altar, and continues Mass 
as usual ; but every time he goes to or from the middle of 
the altar, he makes a genuflection to the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, and when he says Dominus vobiscum, does not turn 
his back to the Blessed Sacrament, but draws back a little 
towards the Gospel side. After the Ite, Missa est, the 
Bishop standing, without mitre, on the Gospel side, with- 
out turning completely round, gives the solemn blessing. 
But the Indulgences are to be published in the chapel of 
the repository. 

17. The Bishop, at the words In principio erat Verbum, 
should not make the sign of the cross, as usual, on the altar , v 
but only on himself. 

Article IV. 

The Procession to the Repository. 

1. After the Gospel of St. John, he goes to his seat, takes 
off the sacred vestments as far as the stole exclusively, and 
puts on a white cope. In the same time, another sub- 



344 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

deacon in tunic, takes the processional cross, covered with 
a violet veil, and the acolytes their candlesticks: candles 
are distributed to the clergy, and lighted ; the canopy is 
brought outside of the railing, and given to those who are 
to carry it. 

2. The Bishop, at his seat, with his mitre on, puts in- 
cense into the two censers, but he does not bless it, neither 
does the assistant priest kiss the spoon, nor the Bishop's 
hand. Then the Bishop, with his assistants, goes to the 
altar, takes off his mitre, and kneeling on a cushion on the 
lowest step of the altar, he incenses thrice the Blessed 
Sacrament ; the long veil is put on his shoulders, and fast- 
ened before his breast. The first assistant deacon goes up 
to the altar, and after the usual genuflections, takes the 
Blessed Sacrament, and, standing, presents it to the Bishop, 
kneeling down on the highest step ; who, having received 
it, rises, and the deacon makes a genuflection, and the choir 
begins to sing Pange Lingua. The assistant deacons, on 
each side of the Bishop, raise the extremities of his cope, 
and the master of ceremonies raises up his vestments in 
front, when he goes up or down the steps. The procession 
walks to the repository in the following order : the sub- 
deacon between the acolytes with their candlesticks, the 
chanters, the inferior clergy, the acolyte carrying the 
crosier, the sub-deacons, the deacons, the priests in chasu- 
bles, the deacon and sub-deacon, the assistant priest, the 
two censer-bearers, moving slowly and regularly .their 
censers ; the Bishop, between the two assistant deacons, 
under the canopy, followed by the acolytes, with the mitre, 
book, candle, etc. 

3. The cross-bearer and the acolytes, on arriving near 
the door of the chapel, retire a little on one side to make 
way for the procession, and remain there standing and 
turned towards the procession. Those of the clergy who 
walk next to the cross-bearer stop, the first on each side of 
the chapel, and those who follow stop next to them, so that 
the clergymen who walked the last may be the nearest to 
the altar of the repository, and divide into two lines, and 
the Bishop, with the assistant ministers, passes between 
them. The censer-bearers, on entering the chapel, keep 



MAUNDY THURSDAY. 345 

their censers motionless. Those who carry the canopy, 
stop at the door of the chapel. 

4. The Bishop, on arriving at the highest step of the altar, 
stops, and the deacon kneeling down, receives from him 
the Blessed Sacrament, and immediately places it in the 
urn, or tabernacle, prepared for the purpose, leaving the 
door opened. Then the Bishop goes down to the second 
step, puts incense into the censer, kneels down, and incenses 
thrice the Blessed Sacrament. The deacon shuts the door 
of the urn, and the Bishop goes up to the altar, makes a 
genuflection, kisses the altar, takes in his left hand the 
crosier, and standing at the Gospel side, without mitre, 
gives the solemn blessing ; after which, the assistant priest 
publishes- as usual the forty-days' Indulgences. 

5. The procession returns to the sanctuary in the same 
order as it came ; the Bishop, on arriving at his seat, takes 
oif the sacred vestments. The clergy likewise take theirs 
off in the sacristy. Then Vespers are recited, and the 
altars stripped. 

Article V. 

The Mandatum, or Washing of the Feet. 

1. At a convenient hour, the Bishop and clergy meet in 
the place prepared for the washing of the feet. The Bishop 
puts on the amice, alb, cincture, with a violet stole and 
cope, and plain mitre. The deacon and sub-deacon, with 
the assistant priest, put on white vestments as for Mass. 

2. Thirteen poor men, or thirteen clergymen, sit on high 
benches, with a high step in front ; the covering of their 
right feet should be so arranged as to make it easy to 
remove it, when they are to be washed. 

3. The Bishop, attended as usual by his assistants, at 
his seat or faldstool, puts incense into the censer and blesses 
it. Then the deacon holding the Missal before his breast, 
with the sub-deacon, the two acolytes carrying their candle- 
sticks, go before the Bishop, kneel down, and the deacon 
asks the blessing, saying, Jube Domne, etc., which the 
Bishop gives him as usual, saying, Dominus sit, etc. The 



346 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

Gospel is afterwards sung with the usual ceremonies ; the 
book is carried to the Bishop by the sub-deacon, and the 
Bishop is incensed by the deacon. 

4. After the Gospel, the choir sings Mandatum novum, 
and what follows as in the Missal ; the Bishop takes off 
his cope, receives the gremiale, and with his mitre on, goes 
before the first poor man, or clergyman, kneels on a cushion, 
which for this purpose is moved by an acolyte, as he passes 
on, and the ewer and basin being brought by the attending 
clergymen, the Bishop washes the right foot, wipes it with 
a towel, and kisses it; and if a poor man, he gives him 
some alms. He does in like manner to the other twelve. 

5. After having washed his feet, the Bishop returns to 
his seat, washes his hands, takes off the gremiale which he 
had tied on him, puts on the cope, and takes off his mitre. 
The two acolytes with their candlesticks, and a third one 
with the book, and a fourth with the candlestick, go before 
him, and rising, he says, Pater Noster, etc., Et ne nos, etc., 
with the following verses and prayers as in the Missal. 
After which, the Bishop, raising his hands, makes the sign 
of the cross towards those who are present. Lastly, he 
takes off the sacred vestments, and retires. 



CHAPTER XL 

GOOD FRIDAY. 

Article I. 

What is to be Prepared. 

1. The altar, the seat intended for the Bishop, the sacred 
ministers' bench, and all the sanctuary, should be quite 
bare, without any ornaments. 

2. On the altar, the cross, covered with a black veil, but 
in such a manner as to render it easy to uncover its differ- 



GOOD FRIDAY. 347 

ent parts successively ; six plain candlesticks, with un- 
bleached wax candles; the Bishop's vestments, viz., an 
amice, alb, and cincture, with a black maniple, stole, dal- 
matic, tunic, and chasuble, the pectoral cross, and the plain 
white mitre. The sandals, gloves, and crosier are not used 
on this day. 

3. On the small table should be spread a linen cloth, 
which ought not, however, to hang down ; and on this 
table should be placed the ewer and basin, with a towel on 
a plate ; the cruets, a book-stand with a Missal, another 
Missal, an altar-cloth folded, a large black stole for the 
deacon, a black burse with a purifier and a corporal, a black 
veil for the chalice, two candlesticks, with unbleached wax 
candles, for the acolytes. 

4. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the deacon 
and sub-deacon, viz., two amices, albs, and cinctures, and 
a stole ; a black cope for the assistant priest ; also two 
folded chasubles of the same color, with cinctures, albs, and 
amices, for the two assistant deacons. Likewise, a sufficient 
number of sacred vestments for the clergy. Also, three 
amices, albs, cinctures, with as many black maniples and 
stoles, and three Missals, for the deacons who have to sing 
the Passion. Two censers with incense-boats, a chafing- 
dish with fire and tongs, the tapers and candles for the 
procession. 

5. At the Gospel side in the sanctuary, a violet carpet, 
with a long white veil, and a violet velvet cushion, adorned 
with gold-lace and embroidery, for the veneration of the 
cross. Also, three bare book-stands or desks, for those, 
who are to sing the Passion. 

6. Before the middle of the altar, and at the foot of the 
lowest step, the praying-desk bare, and five cushions, to be 
placed on the highest step of the altar, for the prostration 
of the Bishop's assistants and ministers, three on the Epistle 
side, and two on the Gospel side. 

• 7. In any convenient place, the processional cross, covered 
with a violet veil, and the wooden clapper. 

8. At the chapel of the repository, besides the canopy, 
the white veil on the side- table, and the key of the taber- 



348 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

nacle on the altar ; also near it, the steps (if necessary) to 
reach the door of the tabernacle. 

9. On the ministers' bench, the folded chasubles, and 
maniples for the deacon and sub-deacon. 



Article II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and clergy into the sanc- 
tuary, to the beginning of the Office. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as directed in the first 
part of this book. 

2. From the sacristy, the clergy, before they put on the 
sacred vestments, go with the Bishop to the sanctuary : 
only the deacon and sub-deacon remain in the sacristy, and 
put on the sacred vestments, the folded chasubles and 
maniples excepted. The Bishop and clergy having entered 
the sanctuary, kneel, pray for a short space of time, and 
rise. The Bishop goes to his seat ; they all say Pater and 
Ave, in a low voice, and when the Psalm Mirabilia is begun, 
they sit down, and continue None. At the end of this 
canonical hour, the Bishop goes to the praying-desk, and, 
with the clergy, kneels during the Christus and Miserere; 
the Bishop says the prayer Respice, at the end of which 
they all rise ; the Bishop goes to his seat ; the deacon and 
sub-deacon come from the sacristy, go to his side and assist 
him to put on his vestments. 

At the same time, the clergy put on their sacred vest- 
ments in the sacristy. The two assistant deacons go to 
the side of the Bishop, and the deacon and sub-deacon go 
to their bench, and put on their maniples and folded 
chasubles. 

Article III. 
From the beginning of the Office to the end of it. 

1. The Bishop, being vested, goes to the middle, and 
taking off his mitre, kneels before the praying-desk ; at the 
same time the assistant priest and deacons, with the offi- 



GOOD FRIDAY. 349 

dating deacon and sub-deacon, prostrate themselves on the 
cushions, which the acolytes place on the steps as directed 
above. All the clergy kneel, and remain praying for some 
time. Meanwhile, two acolytes unfold the altar-cloth. 

2. The Bishop and ministers rise, go up to the altar, 
and kiss it. An acolyte places the faldstool on the 
platform, at the Epistle side, and the Bishop sits on it, 
turned towards the Gospel side (for to-day he does not go 
to his seat, before the end of the office) ; the assistant priest 
sits on the first step, at the feet of the Bishop, and behind 
him, on the same step, the deacon and sub-deacon ; and 
near these, the two assistant deacons. The clergy si't at 
their usual places. 

3. One of the acolytes, attended by the master of cere- 
monies, having made the usual genuflection and reverences, 
goes to the place where the Epistle is usually sung, and 
there sings the Lesson in the tone of a Prophecy. He does 
not kiss the Bishop's hand ; but, leaving the book in the 
hand of the master of ceremonies, makes the usual genu- 
flection and reverences, and returns to his place. Whilst 
the Tract is sung by the choir, the Bishop, still sitting, 
reads the Lesson and the Tract from the book, which an 
acolyte holds before him ; but he is not accompanied by 
the other, nor do the acolytes carry the candlesticks on this 
day. The Bishop's assistants and ministers stand by him 
whilst he reads. 

4. After the Tract, the Bishop takes off his mitre, rises, 
and turning towards the altar, sings Or emus. The deacon 
sings Flcctamus genua ; and the sub-deacon, Levate ; stand- 
ing, one after the other, behind the Bishop. At the words, 
Flectamus, etc., all, except the Bishop, kneel, and at the 
word Levate they rise. Then the Bishop sings the prayer ; 
during which the sub-deacon takes off his folded chasuble, 
and at the end of the prayer sings the second Lesson in the 
tone of the Epistle, during which the Bishop, with his 
assistants and the clergy, sit as before. After the Epistle, 
the sub-deacon does not kiss the Bishop's hand ; but he 
resumes his chasuble, and returns to his place. The Bishop 
sits, and whilst the choir sings the Tract, he reads the 
Epistle and the Tract, attended as usual. 



350 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

5. Whilst the Tract is sung, the three deacons, who are 
to sing the Passion, go to the sacristy, put on the sacred 
vestments, and towards the end of the Tract go out to the 
sanctuary, and sing the Passion. Everything is done as 
at page 335, except that they do not kiss the Bishop's hand. 

The Bishop, attended by his assistants, reads the Passion 
out of the Missal placed on the altar at the Epistle side, 
and makes a genuflection there at the words Et inclinato 
capite. 

6. After the Passion, the Bishop and the clergy seat 
themselves ; the officiating deacon takes off his chasuble, 
puts on the large stole, carries the book to the altar, kneels, 
says, Munda cor meum, takes the book, and without asking 
the blessing, goes with the sub-deacon, and the acolytes 
without candlesticks, and without the censer, to sing the 
last part of the Passion, in the tone of the Gospel ; which 
being done, they all return to their places. 

7. If there is a sermon, the preacher, accompanied by 
the master of ceremonies, goes to the Bishop, and asks the 
Indulgences, without, however, asking the blessing ; and 
having made the usual genuflection, and reverences, goes to 
the pulpit and preaches. The Bishop sits at the Epistle 
side, but turned towards the preacher. All the clergy sit 
during the sermon. After the sermon, the preacher pub- 
lishes the Indulgences. Then the Bishop immediately 
takes off the mitre, and rises ; the chair is removed, and 
the prayers are sung as in the Missal ; the Bishop singing 
Oremus, the deacon Flectamus genua, and the sub-deacon, 
Levate. Whilst the last prayers are sung, the acolytes 
spread the carpet on the steps of the altar, and put the 
cushion on the lower steps, and over it the veil on which 
the cross is to be laid. 

8. After all the prayers, the Bishop takes off his chasuble, 
and goes to the back corner of the altar, at the Epistle side, 
and turns towards the people. The sacristan, taking the 
cross from the altar, gives it to the deacon, and the deacon 
to the Bishop, who, having received it respectfully, with 
his right hand uncovers the top as far as the cross-piece, 
and raising it with both hands, sings, Ecce lignum Cruris, 
out of the book which the assistant priest holds before 



GOOD FRIDAY. 351 

him; the deacon being at the Bishop's right and the 
sub-deacon at the left. All rise with their heads uncov- 
ered ; the Bishop, assisted by the ministers, continues to 
sing, In quo salus mundi pependit; and the choir and all 
the clergy, the Bishop only excepted, kneeling on both 
knees, and bowing their heads, answer, Venite, adoremus; 
after which, the Bishop, with the assistant priest and min- 
isters, goes up to the platform, and stops at the Epistle 
side, where he uncovers the right arm and head of the 
crucifix, and raising his voice one tone higher, sings again, 
Ecce lignum Cruris; and everything is done as before. 
Afterwards he goes to the middle of the altar with all his 
assistants ; there he uncovers the whole cross, giving the 
veil to the sub-deacon, by whom it is given to an acolyte, 
who carries it to the small table; and the Bishop then 
sings, one tone still higher than the second time, Ecce lignum 
Cruris; and everything is done the third time as before. 

The Bishop goes alone to the place prepared for the 
cross, carrying it raised up with both hands, and lays it on 
the cushion. He then goes to the chair, takes off his shoes, 
and without mitre, goes between the two assistant deacons 
to venerate the cross, kneeling the first time near the com- 
munion rail, and praying a little ; the second time, at half 
the distance from it to the place where the cross is ; and 
the third time, close to the cross, which he reverently kisses, 
after having prayed, and returns to the chair, where he puts 
on his shoes, chasuble, and mitre. He afterwards sits and 
reads, Popule metis, etc. 

9. After the Bishop, the assistant priest, the two assistant 
deacons, the deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, 
according to their respective order and dignity, go to ven- 
erate the cross, in the same manner as the Bishop. During 
the veneration of the cross, the choir sings, Improperia ; 
and about the end of it the candles are lighted. The dea- 
con and sub-deacon unfold the linen cloth, which had been 
extended by the acolytes on the altar. The deacon carries 
from the small table to the altar the corporal and the 
purifier, and having taken the corporal out of the burse, 
unfolds it in the middle of the altar ; the master of cere- 
monies carries the book-stand and the Missal to the altar, 



352 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

and places it at the Gospel side. The veneration being 
ended, the deacon carries back the cross to the altar, with- 
out making any reverence, and all the clergy kneel as he 
passes. The Bishop sits down and washes his hands. 

10. Then the procession is arranged in the following 
order : the two censer-bearers with their censers and incense- 
boat ; the cross-bearer in sub-deacon's vestments, between 
the two acolytes with their candlesticks ; the clergy ; the 
assistant priest between the deacon and sub-deacon, and 
the Bishop between the two assistant deacons. As they 
move from the middle of the altar, they all make a genu- 
flection to the cross. 

11. When the procession arrives at the repository, all 
place themselves as yesterday ; the Bishop, on arriving at 
the door or entry of the chapel, takes off his mitre ; on 
coming to the altar, he kneels, with all the clergy ; and, 
having prayed for some time, the Bishop rises ; the assist- 
ant priest presents to him the incense-boat. The Bishop 
puts incense into the censer ; but does not bless the incense ; 
the sacristan, if in Holy Orders, opens the tabernacle, and 
the Bishop having knelt down, incenses the Blessed Sacra- 
ment thrice ; the long veil is put on the Bishop's shoulders, 
and the first assistant deacon takes the Blessed Sacrament 
from the tabernacle, and gives it to the Bishop, who is yet 
kneeling. The deacon makes a genuflection, and the Bishop, 
having covered the chalice with the veil hanging from his 
shoulders, holds it with both hands, rises, and all go in 
procession, as yesterday, to the altar ; at the same time the 
choir sings, Vexilla Regis, etc. Those, who carry the canopy, 
stop at the chancel, the others form a double semicircle 
before the altar, and kneel down till after communion, 
holding the lighted candles in their hands. 

12. The Bishop, on arriving at the steps of the altar, 
standing, gives the Blessed Sacrament to the officiating 
deacon, who receives it kneeling, and places it on the altar. 
The Bishop, having taken off the veil, kneels on a cushion, 
on the lowest step. Pie afterwards rises, and being attended 
by the assistant priest, puts incense into the censer without 
blessing it. He incenses the Blessed Sacrament thrice, goes 
up to the altar, takes the Blessed Sacrament out of the 



GOOD FRIDAY. 353 

chalice, and taking care not to touch it, places it on the 
paten which is held by the officiating deacon ; and having 
received the paten from the hands of the same, lays the 
Sacred Host on the corporal, without saying anything. If 
he happen to touch the Blessed Sacrament, he washes his 
fingers in some vessel prepared for this purpose; the dea- 
con puts wine into the chalice, and the sub-deacon water, 
which is not blessed by the Bishop, who does not say the 
usual prayer; but having received it from the deacon, 
places it on the altar, and the deacon covers it with the 
pall. 

13. The Bishop, having received the incense-boat from 
the assistant priest, puts incense into the censer, without 
blessing it, and incenses first the sacred offerings, saying, 
Incensum istud ; secondly, the cross, and thirdly, the altar, 
saying, Dirigatur, Domine, etc., making a genuflection 
before and after, and every time he passes before the Blessed 
Sacrament ; and having incensed the altar, he gives the 
censer to the deacon, saying, Accendat in nobis, Domine, etc. 
The Bishop is not incensed. 

14. After the incensing, the Bishop retires a little towards 
the Epistle side of the altar, and washes his hands, without 
saying anything ; then he goes to the middle of the altar, 
bows, and joins his hands, saying, In spiritu humilitatis; 
afterwards receding a little towards the Gospel side, he 
turns towards the people, and says, Orate, fr aires, taking 
care not to make a complete circle, turning his face towards 
the people, and back again, towards the altar. He imme- 
diately sings in a ferial tone, Oremus, Prceceptis salutaribus 
moniti, etc., and having said in a low voice, Amen, says the 
prayer, Libera nos, etc., in the same tone of voice in* which 
he said the Pater. Having finished it, he makes a genu- 
flection, puts the paten under the Blessed Sacrament, and 
taking the latter in his right hand, raises it so that it may 
be seen by the people ; then he divides the Sacred Host in 
three parts as usual, and puts the smallest of them into the 
chalice, without' making the sign of the cross. He does not 
say Pax Domini, nor Agnus Dei; neither does he give the 
Pax. 

15. The Bishop, having put the particle into the chalice, 

30 



354 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

makes a genuflection, and having said only, Perceptio cor- 
poris, makes again a genuflection, takes the paten with 
the Blessed Sacrament, says, Partem coelestem accipiam, etc., 
signs himself with the Blessed Sacrament, saying, Corpus 
Domini nostri, etc., and communicates ; he immediately 
consumes the wine with a part of the Host in the chalice, 
without saying anything ; afterwards he washes his fingers 
(the deacon pouring, as usual, the w T ine into the chalice), 
takes the ablution, and bowing, with his hands joined, in 
the middle of the altar, says only, Quod ore sumpsimus, 
Domine, etc. After this, he goes to the Epistle side, puts 
on the mitre, washes his hands, and goes to his seat ; where, 
having taken off his vestments, and put on the cape, he 
says Vespers with the clergy, who have by this time taken 
off the sacred vestments, and put on their surplices. The 
caudles are extinguished, and after the antiphon of the 
Magnificat has been repeated, the Bishop goes to the middle, 
kneels at the faldstool during the Christus and the Miserere; 
after which, he says the prayer, Res pice, and retires, as 
usual. 



CHAPTER XIL 

HOLY SATURDAY. 

Article I. 
Things to be Prepared. 

1. The church, the high altar, and the baptismal font 
should be prepared as directed, page 247. Likewise, the 
triple candle, the paschal candle, the new fire, the grains of 
incense, and everything else, as there directed. 

2. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments should be pre- 
pared as usual for the assistant priest, the two assistant 
deacons, the deacon and sub-deacon ; for the clergy accord- 
ing to their order and dignity ; with this difference, that 



HOLY SATURDAY. 355 

to-day violet vestments must be prepared ; the deacon and 
sub-deacon make use of folded chasubles. Under the violet, 
white vestments must be prepared. 

3. On the altar, two front veils, white and purple ; the 
sacred vestments for the Bishop must be double, that is, 
white vestments should be placed immediately upon the 
altar, and over them violet vestments. 

4. The Bishop's chair should be adorned with white 
ornaments, and then covered with purple cloth. 

Article II. 

The Blessing of the New Fire. 

1. The Bishop, unless prevented by some urgent cause, 
ought to bless the new fire ; for this purpose he puts on the 
amice, alb, cincture, violet stole and cope; wearing the 
mitre ; and holding the crosier in his hand, attended by the 
deacon and sub-deacon, and the two assistant deacons in 
folded chasubles, and the assistant priest in cope, and 
preceded by the cross and the clergy, he goes to the porch, 
where the new fire has been lighted, and blesses it as directed, 
page 252, and in the Roman Missal. After which, he takes 
off his vestments, and puts on the cape. 

Article III. 

The Exultei, and the Blessing of the Paschal Candle. 

1. The Bishop, dressed in cape, sits on his pontifical chair, 
having at his side the two assistant deacons, and the assist- 
ant priest, and puts incense into the censer and blesses it, 
the assistant priest presenting to him the incense-boat. 

2. The sub-deacon in violet folded chasuble, taking the 
processional cross, goes with the deacon, who is habited in 
a white dalmatic, with a sufficient number of attending 
clergymen, to the place where the triple candle and other 
necessary things have been prepared. The Bishop, with 
his assistants, remains at his seat, and the rest of the clergy 
in the sanctuary. 



356 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

3. The master of ceremonies walks first ; then the censer- 
bearer, having at his left an acolyte ; after them a sub- 
deacon carrying the cross ; the deacon follows ; and, lastly, 
four acolytes, two by two. 

4. On arriving at the place prepared, the master of cere- 
monies lights a candle from the new fire ; the deacon takes 
the triple candle, and one of the acolytes the plate with the 
grains of incense; after this, they go back in the following 
order : first the acolyte, carrying with both hands the plate 
with the grains of incense ; on his left, the censer-bearer, 
swinging the censer gently ; second, the sub-deacon carry- 
ing the cross ; third, the deacon with the triple candle, and 
on his left, the master of ceremonies with the lighted candle; 
lastly, the four acolytes, two by two. 

5. As the deacon enters the church, he lowers the triple 
candle, that one of the branches may be lighted by the 
master of ceremonies, then he raises it again ; and he, as 
well as all the others in the procession, together with the 
Bishop and all the clergy, kneel on one knee, when Lumen 
Christi is sung by the deacon ; and rise when Deo gratias 
is answered by the clergy. The same is done a second 
time when they arrive at the middle of the church, and a 
third time when they arrive before the altar ; but the dea- 
con, at each time, raises his voice one tone higher. 

6. Then the Bishop and all in the sanctuary sit down. 
Those of the procession rise, and place themselves as directed 
in the preceding Book, chapter viii. The deacon having 
left the triple candle in the hands of one of the acolytes, 
receives from the master of ceremonies the Missal ; and 
having made the usual genuflection to the altar, and rever- 
ences to the Bishop and the clergy, goes to the Bishop, and 
without kissing his hand, says, Jube, Domne, etc.; the 
Bishop makes the sign of the cross towards him, using the 
accustomed form, Dominus sit, etc., saying, however, Pas- 
chale prceconium, instead of JEvangelium. 

7. The deacon, having received the blessing, goes from 
the Bishop's seat to the middle before the altar, between 
the cross-bearer and the acolyte, who carries the triple 
candle, and having there made a genuflection, and the usual 
reverences, as directed in page 252, he goes to sing the 



HOLY SATURDAY. 357 

Preface, which begins by the word Exultet, and performs 
everything as directed in the same place. 

8. When the deacon commences, the Bishop and all the 
clergy in the sanctuary rise, and during it stand with their 
heads uncovered. 

Article IV. 

From the end of the Exultet to the Benediction of the Baptis- 
mal Font. 

1. The Exultet being ended, the deacon shuts the Missal, 
leaves it on its stand, goes to the bench of the sacred min- 
isters, takes off his white maniple, dalmatic, and stole, and 
puts on the violet stole ; the sub-deacon leaves the cross by 
the side-table, and takes off his folded chasuble and mani- 
ple, and with the deacon goes to the Bishop's seat, and the 
acolyte places the triple candle on its stand at the Gospel 
side. 

2. The Bishop and all the clergy, standing with their 
heads uncovered, say, Pater et Ave, secretly, and then sit 
down, and None is recited. After the last Psalm, the 
Bishop kneels at the faldstool, the clergy kneeling likewise 
during the Christus and the Miserere; after which, the 
Bishop says the prayer, Respice. Then having returned to 
his seat, he reads the Psalm, Quam dileda, etc., with the 
Gloria Patri, and the other verses with the following pray- 
ers ; at the same time he puts on the white sandals ; after 
the prayers he washes his hands, and puts on the pontifical 
vestments of violet color, including the maniple and the 
plain mitre, reading the appropriate prayers. The clergy 
likewise put on their sacred vestments ; and the Bishop 
being vested, the two assistant deacons in violet folded 
chasubles^ and the assistant priest in violet cope, go to the 
Bishop's chair, and the deacons to their bench, where they 
put on their violet chasubles and maniples, and sit down. 

3. The Bishop rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, 
and attended by his assistants, and the deacon and sub- 
deacon, goes up to the altar, which he kisses, after having 
taken off his mitre. Then having made a reverence to the 



358 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

cross, he puts on the mitre, takes the crosier in his left 
hand, and attended by the assistant deacons and priest, 
goes to his chair, where he sits ; the deacon and sub-deacon 
go to their bench. All in the sanctuary sit down. 

4. A book-stand is placed in the middle of the sanctuary ; 
a clergyman, attended by the master of ceremonies, goes to 
it, makes a genuflection to the altar, and the usual rever- 
ences to the Bishop and to the clergy, on each side of the 
sanctuary, and reads the first prophecy, without the title. 
In the meantime, the Bishop reads the same prophecy out 
of the book, which an acolyte holds open before him. 
Whilst he reads, his assistants stand near him. The singer, 
having finished the prophecy, and made the usual genu- 
flection and reverences, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand, and 
to receive his blessing. Then the Bishop rises, sings Oremus, 
the first assistant deacon, Flectamus genua. At these 
words, all in the sanctuary (the Bishop only excepted) make 
a genuflection, and the second deacon sings, Levate; then 
all rise, and the Bishop sings the prayer out of the book, 
which the assistant priest holds open before him. The 
same is done in regard to all the other prophecies, with the 
exception, that after the fourth, eighth, and eleventh prophe- 
cies, the choir sings the Tract, and the Bishop reads it. 
After the twelfth prophecy, Flectamus genua and Levate 
are not sung. 

Article V. 

Blessing the Baptismal Font. 

1. After the prayer which follows the last prophecy, the 
Bishop takes off the maniple, chasuble, dalmatic, and tunic, 
and puts on a violet cope ; then, with his mitre on, and 
the crosier in his left hand, preceded by the cross, carried 
by the sub-deacon and all the clergy, arranged as directed 
at page 255, between two assistant deacons he goes to the 
baptismal font, the assistant priest walking immediately 
before him at the right of the deacon, and he does every- 
thing as directed in the same place, and in the Roman 
Missal. 



HOLY SATUEDAY. 359 

2. If any child or adult is to be baptized, the Bishop 
baptizes them, as directed in the Roman Ritual. 

3. After the blessing of the font, they return to the 
sanctuary in procession, in the same order as they came to 
the font. 

Article VI. 

From the Benediction of the Font to the beginning of Mass. 

1. The Bishop, on arriving at the high altar, takes off his 
cope and mitre, and kneels, leaning on the faldstool ; the 
assistants, deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, like- 
wise kneel ; and the Litany is sung by two chanters kneel- 
ing before two stools behind the Bishop. 

If there is an ordination, those, who are to be ordained, 
prostrate themselves during the Litany, which the singers 
interrupt at the proper place when the Bishop is to say, Ut 
hos electos, etc. 

2. When the chanters sing the verse, Per mysterium 
sanctce incarnationis tuce, the deacon and sub-deacon go to 
the sacristy, take off their violet vestments, and put on 
white, and come out immediately. 

3. At the verse, Peccatores, the Bishop rises with the 
assistant deacons and priests ; the latter go to the sacristy 
to take off the violet vestments, and put on white; the 
Bishop, standing in the same place, assisted by the deacon 
and sub-deacon, takes off the violet vestments, and puts on 
the white ; all the clergy in sacred vestments do the same. 
In the meanwhile the acolytes remove from the altar the 
violet front- veil, and from the tabernacle the canopy of the 
same color, and from the small table the violet veil that 
covered the white ; the candles are lighted, the relic cases 
are placed between the candlesticks, and the carpet is spread. 
The chanters should take care to sing the Litany very 
slowly from the verse Peccatores. 



360 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

Article VII. 

From the beginning to the end of Mass. 

1. The Bishop, having put on the white vestments, when 
the singers begin Kyrie, makes the Confession with his 
ministers, saying the Psalm Judica and the Gloria Patri; 
goes up to the altar, kisses both it and the book of the 
Gospels ; puts incense into the censer and blesses it ; in- 
censes the cross and altar, and is incensed, as usual, by the 
deacon. Then he goes to his seat, where, having said the 
Kyrie, he sings, Gloria in exeelsis Deo. Then all the bells 
are rung, and the organ is played. 

2. After the hymn, Gloria in exeelsis, the Bishop rises 
without mitre, turns towards the people, and sings, Pax 
vobis, and the prayer, Deus, qui hane sacratissimam noctem, 
etc. The rest is done as usual. 

3. The sub-deacon, having sung the Epistle, leaves the 
Missal in the hands of the master of ceremonies, and forth- 
with going to the Bishop, says in an audible voice, Reveren- 
dissime Pater, Annuntio vobis gaudium magnum, quod est 
Alleluia, and kisses his hand ; then, either the sub-deacon 
or a chanter intones Alleluia to the Bishop, who, rising 
without mitre, sings thrice, Alleluia, raising every time his 
voice one tone higher, and the choir every time repeats it; 
and after the third Alleluia, sings the verse, Confitemini ; 
then the Bishop sits down and continues Mass as usual. 

4. At the Gospel, the acolytes do not carry the candle- 
sticks, but the book is incensed as usual, and the deacon 
asks the blessing. Pax Domini sit semper vobiscum is said ; 
but the Pax is not given. Agnus Dei is not said, neither 
the Communio. 

5. The Bishop, after the communion and the usual ablu- 
tions, washes his hands, goes to his seat, seats himself, and 
the choir begins Alleluia, in place of Vespers. At the 
Magnificat, the sub-deacon intones the antiphon to the 
Bishop, which he repeats, standing ; then he sits with his 
mitre on, puts incense into the censer, and when the Mag- 
nificat is begun, he goes to the altar, takes off his mitre, 



CEREMONIES. 361 

makes the reverence, kisses the altar, incenses the cross and 
the altar, returns to his seat, is incensed, as well as all the 
clergy, as usual, and stands till the end of the Magnificat. 
Whilst the antiphon is repeated, he sits, pats on the mitre, 
returns to the altar at the end of the antiphon, sings Dom- 
inus vobiscum, and the prayer ; the deacon sings, Bene- 
dicamus Domino, Alleluia, Alleluia; the Bishop gives the 
solemn blessing, and the Indulgences are published. 
Then the Bishop disrobes and retires, as usual. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

CEREMONIES TO BE OBSERVED IN PROVINCIAL COUNCILS.* 

Article I. 

What is to be done before it opens. 

1. Previous notice should be given of the celebration 
of the Provincial Council to all the Bishops of the prov- 
ince, and others who are to attend. 

2. On the feast of the Epiphany, when the movable 
feasts are published, as directed in the Roman Pontifical, 
Part III, Tit. De publicatione festorum mobilium in JEpi- 
phania Domini, adding to the usual formula before the 
publication of the movable feast, immediately following 
the day of the celebration of the Council, these words, Die 
. . . mensis . . . hujus anni, quce erit dominica . . . Con- 
cilium provinciale Deo adjuvante in Metropolitana Ecclesia 
inchoabitur. 

3. On. the three Sundays immediately preceding the 
opening of the Council, it should be published from the 
pulpit before the sermon, in all the churches of the prov- 
ince, and the prayers of the people requested for its success. 

* Ex Cseremoniali Episcoporum, L. i, c. 31, et ex Pontificali Ko- 
mano, Part III, Tit. Ordo ad Synodurn. 

31 



362 PONTIFICAL CEEEMONIES. 

It is usual on such occasions, that the Bishop of each 
diocese order the Collect, De Spiritu Sancto, to be added at 
Mass every day till the conclusion of the Council. 



Article II. 

How the Metropolitan Church is to be adorned and 
arranged. 

1. The Metropolitan, or any other church in which the 
Council is to be celebrated, should be adorned as for the 
greatest festivals. On the evening before, the bells, with 
festive peals, should announce the opening of the Council. 

2. The Archbishop's seat is placed at the altar ; those 
of the Bishops on each side of the sanctuary : those nearest 
to the altar are to be occupied by the senior bishops, accord- 
ing to priority of consecration ; they should be raised on a 
platform by one or two steps. The other clergymen may 
sit against the railing of the sanctuary; the vicars-general 
of any diocese, if present, taking precedence, according to 
priority of ordination ; next, the superiors of clerical con- 
gregations ; next, the provincials of religious orders ; next, 
the theologians, according to priority of ordination. The 
first place is on the Gospel side. This arrangement is not 
quite conformable to that prescribed by the Roman Pon- 
tifical, in which it is required that the Bishops should sit in 
a semicircle before the Archbishop, and behind them the 
priests ; but we have adapted ours to suit best the sanc- 
tuary of our churches. 

3. The Archbishop's usual chair should be likewise pre- 
pared and adorned as on great festivals, with stools on 
each side for the two assistant deacons ; also a third one for 
the assistant priest. 

4. The seats for the deacon and sub-deacon are to be 
placed, as usual, at the Epistle side, where also the side- 
table should be placed. 

5. On those days on which one of the bishops sings 
High Mass, a faldstool should be prepared on the Epistle 
side, on a small platform, where the officiating Bishop will 



THE OPENING. 363 

sit, with his face turned towards the people ; on the same 
side, near the side-wall of the sanctuary, and in the same 
direction with it, a bench should be placed, where the dea- 
con and sub-deacon with the assistant priest sit. 

Article III. 

THE OPENING OF THE COUNCIL. 

Section I. — What is to be prepared for it 

1. In one of the rooms of the Archbishop's house, the 
following vestments are to be prepared : 

For the Archbishop, sandals and stockings, amice, alb, 
cincture, with red stole and cope, crosier, and mitre. 

For the Archbishop's assistant priest, a red cope, which 
he puts over his surplice or on his rochet, if he is entitled 
to use it. 

For the Archbishop's assistant deacons, red vestments 
suitable to their order. 

For each of the bishops, an amice, cope, and mitre ; they 
put the amice over their rochet. 

For the officiating deacon and sub-deacon, the sacred 
vestments of their order. 

For priests, sacerdotal vestments. 

If other deacons and sub-deacons be present, besides 
those who officiate, a sufficient number of sacred vestments 
suitable to their order. 

For the Archbishop, on the altar, a chasuble, the dal- 
matic, and tunic and gloves, which he puts on immediately 
before he begins Mass, having taken off the cope ; also the 
pallium. 

If the Archbishop does not celebrate Mass, he remains 
in cope, and assists at the Mass celebrated by the senior 
Bishop of the Province — who, in this case, puts on the 
pontifical dress in the Archbishop's house, and is attended 
by the deacon and sub-deacon, and an assistant priest. 



364 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 



Section II. — The Procession. 

1. All the prelates and clergy being dressed, the proces- 
sion moves from the Archbishop's house in the following 
order : 

The censer-bearer and the second master of ceremonies. 

The cross-bearer, between the acolytes carrying their 
candlesticks. 

The inferior clergy in surplices, two by two. 

Those in sacred orders in dalmatics, two by two. 

The priests in chasubles, two by two. 

The Bishops in mitre and cope, two by two, according 
to the time of consecration, those last consecrated going 
before. 

The senior Bishop — pontifically dressed to celebrate 
Mass, preceded by his assistant priest, and between the 
deacon and sub-deacon, in case the Archbishop does not 
sing it — should walk after the other bishops. 

The sub-deacon. 

The assistant priest at the right of the deacon. 

The Archbishop's cross. 

The Archbishop between the two assistant deacons, and 
followed by the crosier and mitre bearers. 

2. During the procession, the bells ring continually, and 
the clergy sing psalms. 

3. The organ is played as the procession enters the 
church. 

4. The clergy, as they arrive at the sanctuary, make a 
genuflection, bow to each other, and go to their places, 
where they remain standing. 

5. When the Archbishop has arrived at his seat, all the 
clergy sit down ; and he takes off his cope, and puts on the 
other vestments for Mass, if he celebrate. 

Section III. — Ilass. 

1. The Mass is to be of the Holy Ghost, with Gloria 
and Credo, without any commemoration of the current 
Feast, or Sunday ; the last Gospel is that of St. John. The 
Archbishop wears the pallium. 



mass. 365 

2. The Mass is sung as usual. The Bishops and priests 
in sacred vestments do not kneel at the Confession ; they 
make it two by two ; the one that is at the right, begins, 
the other at the left answers, at the Confession, and at the 
Kyrie. They bow to one another before they begin, and 
after they have finished, not only for the Confession and 
Kyrie, but also for the Gloria, Credo, Sanctus, and Agnus 
Dei, which they recite together. 

3. The deacon incenses the Bishops with three swings, 
and the priests in sacred vestments with two, in the order 
that will be pointed out for the Pax in the following 
number. 

4. The Pax is carried by the assistant priest, first to the 
senior Bishop, who sits first at the Gospel side, then to the 
second senior Bishop, who sits first at the Epistle side ; 
afterwards to the priest who sits first at the Gospel side, 
then to the other, who sits in the first place at the Epistle 
side. 

5. The Archbishop does not give the blessing at the end 
of Mass, but, as it will be said below, at the end of the 
Session. 



Section IV. — The Ceremonies for the first Session, or the 
Opening of the Council. 

1. It is more convenient that the sermon, which is chiefly 
intended for the instruction of the people, should be preached 
after Mass ; during this time the Archbishop takes off the 
chasuble and tunic, and puts on the cope, either in the sac- 
risty, or in the church at his seat. 

2. The faldstool is prepared below the lowest step of the 
altar, in the middle. The Archbishop, attended by the 
assistant priest and deacon, goes to the middle, salutes the 
Bishops on each side, and kneels before the faldstool; hav- 
ing taken off his mitre, he intones the antiphon, Exaudi nos, 
Domine, which is continued and chanted by the choir; after 
the antiphon, the chanters intone the 68th Psalm,* Salvum 
me fac, Deus, quoniam intraverunt aquce usque ad animam 

* It is found at the beginning of Matins of the V. Feria. 



366 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

meam, which is alternately sung by the clergy. After the 
first verse, all rise, the Archbishop sits on the faldstool, 
which is placed in the middle of the platform of the altar, 
having at his side the two assistant deacons and the assist- 
ant priest at the right of the first assistant deacon, the book- 
bearer and the candle-bearer holding respectively the book 
and the candle before him. The Bishops likewise, with 
their mitres, and the clergy, with their caps on, sit during 
the Psalm. 

3. After the Psalm is ended, and the anthem Exaudi 
repeated, all rise, and the Archbishop and Bishops take off 
their mitres. The Archbishop, turned towards the altar, 
sings the prayer, Adsumus, Domine Sancte Spiritus, etc., at 
the end of which the clergy answer, Amen. Then the Arch- 
bishop sings Or emus, and the prayer, Omnipotens, sempiterne 
Dens; after which the clergy answer, Amen. 

4. Then the Archbishop, with his mitre on, kneels before 
the faldstool ; the Bishops likewise kneel with their mitres 
on, and all the clergy kneel at their places. The two chant- 
ers, kneeling in the middle of the sanctuary, sing the Litany 
of the Saints, to which the clergy answer. 

5. When the chanters have sung the verse, Ut omnibus 
fidelibus defunetis, etc., and the clergy answered, Te roga- 
mus, audi nos, the Archbishop alone rises, takes the crosier 
in his left hand, and turned towards the clergy, sings, Ut 
hane prcesentem Synodum visitare, disponere, et benedicere 
digneris ; the clergy answer, Te rogamus, audi nos. The 
chanters continue the Litany to the end, viz., as far as Kyrie 
eleison, Ghriste eleison, and Kyrie eleison, inclusively. 

6. The Litanies being ended, they all rise, the Arch- 
bishop and Bishops take T)ff their mitres, the Archbishop, 
turned towards the altar, sings, Or emus ; the first deacon, 
Flectamus genua, and the second, Levate. The Archbishop 
sings the prayer, Da, qucesumus, ecclesiw tuo3, .etc. 

7. The prayer being ended, the Archbishop goes up to 
the altar, sits on the chair or faldstool placed in the middle, ' 
turning his back to the altar. The clergy sit in the mean- 
time, and the Archbishop puts the incense into the censer 
and blesses it, as usual. The deacon carries the Missal, and 
lays it on the altar, kneels, says, Munda cor meum, asks the 



mass. 367 

Archbishop's blessing, and goes with the sub-deacon, mas- 
ter of ceremonies, censer-bearer, and acolytes, to the place 
where the Gospel is usually sung ; having first made the 
genuflection to the altar, and bowed to the Archbishop, 
Bishops, and clergy, he sings in the usual manner the Gos- 
pel, which is taken from St. Luke, c. 9, from v. 1 to 6. 

8. After the Gospel, the sub-deacon carries the Missal 
to the Archbishop, who kisses it ; and the deacon incenses 
him, as usual. 

9. After the Archbishop has been incensed, he takes off 
his mitre, and kneels before his chair, or faldstool; the 
Bishops likewise, having taken off their mitres, and all the 
clergy, kneel at their places. The Archbishop intones the 
hymn, Veni, Creator Spiritus, and the choir continues to 
sing it ; after the first strophe, they all rise, and stand till 
the end of the whole hymn. 

10. After the hymn, all sit, and the Archbishop makes a 
Latin allocution to the Council, either as it is in the Roman 
Pontifical, or any other, as he pleases. Should he choose 
to have another discourse addressed to the Council by some 
one else, it may be made at this time. 

11. The Archbishop addresses the Fathers of the Coun- 
cil to this effect : Reverendissimi Patres, venerabiles fratres, 
placetne vobis ad Dei gloriam et honorem, et ad Catholicce 
Ecclesio3 amplificationem Concilium provinciate .... legit- 
ime convocation, et hie congregatum hodierno die aperiri et 
inchoari. The Bishops severally reply, Placet, aperiatur. 
Then the Archbishop, in his own name and that of his col- 
leagues, turning towards the people, says, Christi nomine 
invocato, decernimus Sanctam Synodum provincialem .... 
esse apertam et ita judicamus.* 

12. The Archbishop then orders his secretary to read the 
names of those whom he proposes as officers of the Council ; 
which being read, he says, Placetne vobis, venerabiles fratres, 
hosce in Concilii officiates eligendos. The Bishops severally 
answer, Placet. The Archbishop's secretary then reads the 
Decree in these words : Reverendisaimus D. Archiepisco- 
pics .... una cum Episcopis in hoc sacro Concilio Pro- 

* Ex Concil. Rheniensi, an. 1583. 



368 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

vinciali congregatis decernit hosce Peverendos vivos in offici- 
ates hujus sancti Concilii eligendos esse, et legitime jam electos, 
nempe Promotorem .... Secretarios .... Magistros Cce- 
remoniarum .... Cantores. 

13. The Promoter addresses the Archbishop : lllustris- 
sime ac PeverendissimeDomine,peto ut legantur Sacro-sancti 
Concilii Tridentini deer eta de Professionefidei, et de residentia. 
The Archbishop, addressing the Bishops, says: Venerabiles 
fratres, placetne vobis ut legantur deer eta Concilii Tridentini 
de Professione fidei et de residentia f The Bishops sever- 
ally reply, Placet legantur. Then the Archdeacon reads the 
decrees. 

14. Then, such of the Bishops as have not in a former 
Council made the profession of faith, approach to the front 
of the altar, take off their mitres, make a genuflection on 
the lowest step, salute the Archbishop, and kneeling on the 
step, simultaneously recite the Profession of Faith, as in the 
Roman Pontifical. In saying the last words, Sic me Deus 
adjuvet, etc., each Bishop places his right hand on the 
Book of the Gospel. After having made the usual genu- 
flection and salutation, they retire to their places. 

15. The Archbishop then gives the solemn pontifical 
blessing, which the Bishops receive standing, with their 
heads uncovered, and profoundly inclined. After this, 
they all retire as usual to the sacristy, where they disrobe. 

Article IV. 

Mode of procedure of the Council. 

1. Each day, two meetings, called Congregations, are 
usually held ; the one private, consisting of the Bishops 
alone, with the secretaries of the Council, in the sacristy 
of the Metropolitan church, or in the Archbishop's house, 
in the morning, from about nine till twelve; the other 
public, in the afternoon, held in the Metropolitan church, 
from about four to six. To this latter are invited the 
Theologians of the Archbishop and Bishops, with the Su- 
periors of the Religious Orders and Clerical bodies, and 
all the officers of the Council. The chief matters, which 



MODE OF PROCEDURE. 369 

each prelate intends to submit to the consideration of the 
Council, are usually made known by him to the Arch- 
bishop, within a reasonable time before the holding of the 
Council, and by the Archbishop communicated to the 
Bishops generally. The Promoter, after the opening of 
the Council, appoints select committees, called also Con- 
gregations, of the inferior clergy there assembled, to whom 
such matters as the Bishops deem proper are referred for 
examination. They assemble in the morning at conve- 
nient places to investigate the matters submitted to them 
respectively, and their written reports are read in the public 
Congregations ; after the reading of the reports, the Pro- 
moter suggests that any clergyman, who dissents therefrom, 
or who wishes to propose any amendment, or to make any 
observation, may freely, but respectfully, deliver his senti- 
ments. If no one rises to speak, the Promoter proposes 
that the report be referred to the Bishops for private con- 
sideration. Should any one choose to speak, the reference 
is made after the sentiments have been delivered. In 
speaking, the clergy follow the order in which they are 
seated. No clergyman speaks a second time on the same 
subject, unless he obtains special leave. 

2. In the private Congregations of the Bishops, the 
matters to be submitted to the consideration of the clergy 
are designated ; the reports of the clergy are subsequently 
read, and the matters finally decided. Each prelate, ac- 
cording to priority of consecration, is free to express his 
sentiments on the respective matters treated of in the Coun- 
cil. After the matters have been canvassed, the question 
is put by the Archbishop, and the decision made by the 
majority of suffrages, which are given according to the 
order of consecration. 

3. It is usual in Councils, that all propositions be ex- 
pressed in the Latin language and given in writing, and 
that the decrees be in the first instance drawn up in that 
language. 

4. No special exercise of devotion is prescribed for the 
various Congregations. It is usual, however, to begin by 
the recital of the hymn Veni Creator Spiritus. The evening 
Congregation is opened by the recital of the Veni, Sancte 



370 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

Spiritus, etc., and closed by reciting the Sub tuum pre- 
sidium. In this article we have stated the usages of the 
Baltimore Councils. 

Article V. 

Second solemn Session. 

1. On some day during the holding of the Council, a 
second solemn session is celebrated; High Mass for the de- 
ceased Bishops and clergy is sung by one of the prelates, 
the other prelates assisting in their pontifical robes ; a dis- 
course is usually pronounced after Mass, by a prelate or 
priest appointed for that purpose. 

2. A faldstool or chair for the celebrant is placed on a 
small platform in front of the altar, at the Epistle side, so 
that the celebrant when sitting has his face towards the 
people. A bench for the assistant priest, deacon, and sub- 
deacon, is placed near the faldstool, parallel to the side- 
wall of the sanctuary. The assistant priest takes his seat 
on it, nearest to the Bishop's left hand; next to him sits 
the deacon on the same bench ; the sub-deacon sits at the 
side of the deacon. 

3. The prelates dress in the sacristy, and proceed thence 
to the church, in the same order as on the first day, except 
that the celebrant with his assistants follows the other 
prelates, and walks immediately before the Archbishop. 

4. The prelates go to their respective seats, and the cele- 
brant with his assistants, having made a genuflection before 
the altar, salutes the Archbishop and the prelates, and then 
begins Mass as usual. 

5. The ceremonies of the Mass are the same as on other 
occasions, with the following exceptions. After the Con- 
fession the Bishop ascends to the altar and kisses it, and 
then, having received the mitre, makes a profound bow to 
the cross, and goes directly, per breviorem, to the faldstool, 
where the sub-deacon, having taken off the mitre, the cele- 
brant and assistants standing with their faces turned to the 
altar, the celebrant reads the Introit, and says the Kyrie; 
he turns to the people to say, Dominus vobiscum, and turns 



SECOND SOLEMN SESSION. 371 

again to the altar to say the prayer. He sits whilst the 
sub-deacon sings the Epistle, which being terminated, he 
himself reads it with the Tract, Sequentia, Munda cor meum, 
and the Gospel. The Offertory is read by him standing 
with his face towards the altar, which posture is observed 
whenever he reads or sings anything standing. 

6. At the end of the Mass, the celebrant with his assist- 
ants retires to the sacristy, and the Archbishop from his 
chair performs the absolution of the dead as usual. 

7. After the absolution, the black ornaments are laid 
aside, and the prelates put on copes. The ceremonies of 
the session are performed as prescribed in the Roman Pon- 
tifical, — for the second day of the synod, beginning with 
the anthem, Propitius estopeccatis nostris, Domine, nequando 
dicant gentes : ubi est Deus eorumf and the Psalm 78, Deus, 
venerunt gentes in hcereditatem tuam, etc., which may be 
found in the Breviary, at Fer. V. ad Matutin. The prel- 
ates and clergy kneel while the anthem and first verse of 
the Psalm are sung, and then resume their mitres, and sit 
until the end of the Psalm, as directed in the first session. 
The prayers are then sung by the Archbishop, after which 
he resumes his seat on the platform of the altar, and puts 
in and blesses the incense, and gives the blessing to the 
deacon ; then all the prelates and clergy rise, and stand 
with their heads uncovered, while the deacon sings the 
Gospel, Designavit Dominus, Luke x, from the 1st verse 
to the 9th inclusive, with the usual ceremonies. 

8. Afterwards, all kneel with their heads uncovered, 
whilst the first verse of the hymn, Veni, Creator tSpiritus, 
is sung, which being intoned by the Archbishop, is con- 
tinued by the choir and clergy. After the first verse, all 
rise, and stand until the termination of the hymn. Then 
all resume their seats, and the Archbishop addresses them 
in the Avords of the Pontifical, or others, if he thinks proper. 
Such decrees, as have been already agreed on, may be then 
read, and the assent of the Fathers asked, after which the 
pontifical blessing is given, and all depart. 



372 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

Article VI. 

Third solemn Session. 

1. On the last clay of the Council the third solemn ses- 
sion is held. The prelates wear copes and mitres as in the 
other sessions. Solemn Mass is celebrated by the Arch- 
bishop, or by one of the Bishops. 

2. When one of the Bishops celebrates, he proceeds be- 
fore the Archbishop to the sanctuary, as before expressed, 
and observes the other peculiar ceremonies stated in the 
preceding article. On ascending to the altar, after the Con- 
fession, he makes the usual incensing, and then, having 
received the mitre^ he stands at the Epistle side of the 
altar, with his face turned towards the side-wall, and is in- 
censed by the deacon. He then retires to his faldstool and 
reads the Introit. The censer-bearer, in the meantime, 
carries the censer to the assistant priest of the Archbishop, 
who incenses the Archbishop. After the Gospel, the cele- 
brant is incensed by the deacon, and then the Archbishop 
by his assistant priest. After the Offertory, the celebrant 
is incensed by his deacon, the Archbishop by his assistant 
priest, and the prelates by the deacon, with three swings, 
the clergy in sacred vestments, with two, and the inferior 
clergy with one. 

3. The Pax is given by the celebrant, first to the assist- 
ant priest of the Archbishop, who, advancing to the altar, 
kneels down as usual, whilst the previous prayer is recited. 
The deacon and sub -deacon then receive the Pax from the 
celebrant. In the meantime, the assistant priest of the 
Archbishop gives the Pax to the Archbishop, who imme- 
diately gives it to his assistant deacons. The assistant 
priest of the celebrant, after the deacon and sub-deacon 
have received the Pax, goes to the assistant priest of the 
Archbishop, and from him receives thePa.i-, which he sub- 
sequently gives to the first prelate on each side, and to the 
first among the clergymen. The Bishop, who receives from 
him the Pax, gives it to the next, and so on. 

4. The celebrant does not give any blessing at the end 
of Mass, but having secretly said the prayer, Placeat, etc., 



THIRD SOLEMN SESSION. 373 

recites the Gospel of St. John, and, with his attendants, 
retires to the sacristy. 

5. The Archbishop advances towards the altar and kneels 
by his faldstool below the lowest step. He begins the 
anthem, Exaudi nos, JDomine, quoniam benigna est miseri- 
cordia tua, et secundum midtitudinem miserationum tuarum 
respice nos, Domine; which is chanted as the Psalm, Salvum 
me fac, Deus, on the first day. Then three prayers are 
sung by the Archbishop, and the Gospel is sung, taken 
from the xviii chap, of St. Matthew, from the 15th to the 
22d v. The hymn, Veni, Creator, is sung as in the preced- 
ing sessions. The Archbishop, seated on his faldstool on 
the platform of the altar, addresses his brethren in the 
words of the Pontifical, or in such other terms as he deems 
expedient. A sermon is delivered by a prelate, or priest, 
appointed by the Council, unless it has been already deliv- 
ered during Mass, or subsequently. The secretary of the 
Council, by order of the Archbishop, reads the decrees 
which have been prepared in the private Congregations of 
the prelates, and the Promoter solicits that they be publicly 
approved of and confirmed by the Council, in these words : 
JReverendissime Pater, ego N. hujus Sancti Concilii promoter, 
peto ut decreta hcee quo3 lecta sunt, a patribus hujus Concilii 
approbentur et confirmentur , ad ecclesio3 Catholicoz augmentum. 
Then the Archbishop proposes them to the judgment of 
the prelates, in these words : Placetne vobis, Venerabiles 
Fratres, hcec quce lecta sunt decreta approbare et confirmare. 
The Bishops severally reply, Placet, approbamus, confirm- 
amus. Then the secretary reads the decree in these words : 
Nos N. N. Archiepiscopus aliique episcopi in hoc Sacro 
Concilio adunati, decreta ho3C, quaz mox lecta sunt, appro- 
bamus, et conjirmamus. Then the prelates sign the decrees, 
which are placed by the secretary on the altar ; the Arch- 
bishop first subscribes, in these words, Ego N. Archiepis- 
copus definiens subscripsi. The Archbishop, hav- 
ing retired from the altar to his seat, the other Bishops, 
according to priority of consecration, successively advance 
towards the high altar, and, having made a genuflection 
and saluted the Archbishop, severally subscribe the decrees 
in these words, Ego N. epis. N. definiens subscripsi. 



374 PONTIFICAL, CEREMONIES. 

6. The Archbishop having returned to the faldstool, on 
the platform of the altar, the Promoter solicits that the 
Council be terminated, in words of this import : Reveren- 
dissime Pater, ego N. hujus S. Concilii Promoter, peto ut hide 
Concilio Provinciali finis jam fiat. The Archbishop inquires 
into the wishes of the Fathers in words to this effect : 
Venerabiles Fratres, placetne vobis ad Dei Omnipotentis 
laudem hujus Concilii Provincialis finem jam fieri. The 
Fathers severally answer, Placet. The secretary then reads 

the decree in these terms : Nos N. Archiepiscopus 

aliique Patres, qui hide Concilio Provinciali intersumus, cum 
absoluta sint, quo3 pro temporis ratione agi gerique posse 
videbantur, cumque pastoralis cura ad ecclesiarum nostra- 
rum status et pastorales vigilias revocet, propter ea huic Sancto 
Concilio finem imponi censuimus. 

7. The prayer, Nulla est, Domine, as in the Roman Pon- 
tifical, is then sung by the Archbishop. 

8. Afterwards the Acclamations are sung by the arch- 
deacon, the prelates and clergy singing the responses. 

9. After the Acclamations, the Te Deum is sung, and 
after it the prayer, P?*o gratiarum actione; Deus cujus 
misericordio3 non est numerus, etc. The Archbishop then 
having returned to his seat, gives the Pax to each of the 
bishops ; each of them, as he advances to receive it, retain- 
ing his mitre, salutes the Archbishop. Each Bishop sub- 
sequently gives the Pax to ail of his brethren in their 
respective places. 

The Session closes with the solemn blessing of the 
Archbishop. The deacon sings, Recedamus in pace, and 
the clergy respond, In nomine Christi. Amen. They then 
return to the sacristy, and disrobe as usual. 



DIOCESAN SYNODS. 375 

CHAPTER XIV. 

CEREMONIES TO BE OBSERVED IN DIOCESAN SYNODS. 

1. The priests and clergymen of every grade, who by 
right or custom are bound to come to the Synod, assemble in 
the city, or such other place as the Bishop may prescribe. 

2. On the first day of the Synod, at a very early hour 
in the morning, the Bishop in his ordinary episcopal dress 
(cappam indutus), accompanied by all the clergy in sur- 
plice, goes to the church, puts on the pontifical vestments 
at his seat, celebrates the Mass of the Holy Ghost, and 
gives communion to the clergy. At the end of Mass the 
faldstool or seat is placed on the floor of the sanctuary, 
near the lowest step, about the middle of the altar ; and 
another seat on the platform of the altar ; (the faldstool, 
however, may suffice, and be placed on the platform at the 
proper time). 

3. The Bishop, over his rochet, or over his surplice, if 
he be a regular, puts on the amice, stole, red cope, and 
precious mitre, and bearing his pastoral staff, goes before 
the altar ; the deacon and sub-deacon, in red ornaments, 
such as they use at Mass, accompanying him, one on each 
side. Kneeling there before the faldstool, and having 
laid aside the mitre, he begins the antiphon, Exaudi nos, 
Domine, etc., which the choir continues. The Psalm 68, 
Salvum me fac Deus, is then sung. After the first verse, 
the Bishop sits with the mitre, and so remains until the 
antiphon is repeated, after the conclusion of the Psalm. 

4. The Bishop rises, and turning towards the altar, 
after the mitre has been taken off, says the prayer, Ad- 
sumus Domine, etc., to which all reply, Amen. He then 
says, Or emus, Omnipotent sempiterne Deus, etc., as in the 
Pontifical.' 

5. At the end of this latter prayer, the Bishop, having 
put on the mitre, kneels, leaning on the faldstool, and all 



376 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

the clergy kneel, whilst the chanters sing the Litany. 
After the verse, Ut omnibus jidelibus defunetis, etc., J;he 
Bishop rises, and holding his crosier in his left hand, 
standing with his face towards the Synod, says, Ut hanc 
prcesentem Synodum visitare, disponere, et benedicere digneris, 
JR. Te rogamus, audi nos. In saying this, he makes the 
sign of the cross over all ; and then he again kneels as 
before until the end of the Litany. 

6. The Litany being sung, all rise, and the Bishop, 
laying aside his mitre, says, with his face turned towards 
the altar, Or emus. The deacon says, Flectamus genua; 
the sub-deacon, Levate. Then the Bishop recites the 
prayer, Da, quwsumus, etc. This being finished, he re- 
sumes the mitre, ascends to the seat prepared for him 
on the platform of the altar, and sits with his back to- 
wards the altar. He puts incense into the censer, and 
blesses it, as usual. The deacon, in red dalmatic, preceded 
by the censer-bearer and acolytes, and by the sub-deacon 
in tunic, after the pontifical blessing, sings the Gospel, 
Luke ix, 1, 6. The sub-deacon then presents the book 
of the Gospels to the Bishop to kiss, and the deacon sub- 
sequently incenses him. The Bishop then putting off his 
mitre, kneels before the seat, with his face towards the 
altar, and all the others kneel at the same time, in their 
respective places. The hymn, Veni, Creator Spiritus, is 
begun by the bishop, and continued by the choir. After 
the first verse, the Bishop rises, and stands without his 
mitre, and with his face towards the altar, until the end 
of the hymn ; and in like manner all the others rise with 
the Bishop. Then all sit, and the Bishop having resumed 
the mitre, and seated himself on the platform of the altar, 
addresses them in the words of the Pontifical, or others, at 
discretion. 

7. After the address, or before, as the Bishop may think 
proper, a discourse is delivered by some learned priest, 
who in it treats of ecclesiastical discipline, of the divine 
mysteries, and of the correction of abuses, according as the 
Bishop may think fit. After the discourse, any complaints 
that the clergy may think fit to put forward may be made. 

8. Then the Archdeacon reads aloud from the pulpit the 



DIOCESAN SYNODS. 377 

Decrees of the Council of Trent, regarding residence and 
the profession of the faith, which all who are bound to it 
make in the hands of the Bishop, according to the form 
prescribed in the Pontifical. 

Finally, all are charitably admonished to conduct them- 
selves with edification in all respects during the Synod. 
The Bishop, after the admonition, gives the* solemn bless- 
ing. 

9. On the second day of the Synod, the clergy assemble 
again in the church, and Mass being ended, the Bishop, 
dressed as on the first day, proceeds to the foot of the 
altar, accompanied by the deacon and sub-deacon, who 
likewise are dressed as on the preceding day ; then kneel- 
ing before the faldstool, and having laid aside his mitre, 
he begins the antiphon, Propitius esto, which is continued 
by the choir. The LXXVIII Psalm, JDeus, venerunt 
gentes, is then sung. After the first verse the Bishop sits 
down, resumes his mitre, and remains seated, until the 
antiphon is repeated at the end of the Psalm. 

10. The antiphon having been repeated, the Bishop lays 
aside the mitre, rises, and turning towards the altar, says 
the prayer, Nostrorum tibi, etc., and the other prayers 
marked in the Pontifical. 

11. Then the Bishop ascends to the seat prepared for 
him on the platform of the altar. After this, the deacon 
presents the censer. The Bishop puts incense into the 
censer, then gives his blessing to the deacon, who after- 
wards proceeds to sing the Gospel, with the accustomed 
ceremonies ; the Bishop having taken off his mitre, stands 
at his seat turned towards the deacon. 

12. When the Gospel has been sung, the Bishop kisses 
the book, and is incensed. Then the Bishop kneels before 
his seat, and the clergy kneeling also at their places, he 
intones the hymn, Vend, Creator, which is continued by 
the choir till the end, as on the first day. After the first 
verse, the Bishop rises, and stands with the mitre on, his 
face being towards the altar ; the clergy likewise stand 
until the end of the hymn. The hymn being sung, they 
sit in silence. Then the Bishop being seated, and having 

32 



378 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

received the mitre, addresses the clergy in the words of 
the Pontifical ; or others, at his discretion. 

13. After the address, or before it, if the Bishop thinks 
proper, a discourse is delivered by some learned priest, who 
treats of ecclesiastical discipline, or of other subjects at the 
pleasure of the Bishop. After this, the Archdeacon reads 
the decrees of the Holy See, or of Provincial Councils, which 
have not yet been promulgated, or any others the Bishop 
may direct. Afterwards the Diocesan Constitutions are 
read, which are to be approved of by the Synod. Then the 
suffrages are taken, and those which are approved of are 
confirmed. This being done, the Bishop rises, and gives 
his solemn blessing, as on the preceding day. Then all 
retire. 

14. On the third day, the clergy being assembled in the 
church, at the end of Mass, the Bishop dressed as on the 
preceding days, accompanied by the deacon and sub-deacon, 
makes a genuflection on the lowest step, in the middle of 
the altar, and laying aside his mitre, commences the anti- 
phon, .Exaudi nos, Deus, which is continued by the choir. 
Then is intoned the LXVIII Psalm, Salvum mefac, Deus, 
as on the first day, and the antiphon is repeated at the end 
of it. After the first verse the Bishop takes his seat in the 
middle of the altar, resumes his mitre, and remains sitting 
until the antiphon is repeated. When this is sung, he puts 
aside his mitre, rises, and turning towards the altar, says, 
Oremus, Ad te, Domine, and the other prayers mentioned 
in the Pontifical. When these are said, he resumes his 
mitre, and sits on the faldstool prepared for him. Then 
the deacon, with the censer-bearer, comes to him, and the 
Bishop puts incense into the censer. Then he gives his 
blessing to the deacon, who proceeds to sing the Gospel 
at the accustomed place, with the usual ceremonies ; the 
Bishop standing before his seat, without his mitre, and 
turned towards the deacon. 

15. After the Gospel, the book is brought to the Bishop 
to be kissed, and the deacon incenses him. The Bishop, 
having taken off his mitre, kneels before his seat, turned 
towards the altar, and all the others likewise kneeling, he 



DIOCESAN SYNODS. 379 

intones the hymn, Veni, Creator Spiritus, which is con- 
tinued by the choir to the end. The first verse having 
been sung, the Bishop rises, turned towards the altar, with- 
out his mitre, and remains standing till the end. The 
hymn being ended, all sit in silence. Then the Bishop, 
being seated with his mitre, addresses the Synod, if he 
pleases, in the words which follow — Venerabiles fratres, 
etc. ; or he may direct that some learned priest should de- 
liver a discourse on the topics herein mentioned. 

16. Then the constitutions are read, which are to be ap- 
proved by the Fathers ; which being approved, if it seems 
good to them, and all things being concluded, the Bishop 
being seated, and having his mitre on, recommends himself 
to the prayers of all. When the names of those who 
ought to be present are read out, each one rises and answers 
Adsum. A fine is inflicted on the absent. Then the Bishop, 
being still seated with his mitre on, admonishes those who 
are present, in the words of the Pontifical, Fratres dilectis- 
simi, etc., or in other words at discretion. 

17. Then the Bishop lays aside his mitre, and rising, 
turned towards the altar, says the prayer, Nulla est, etc. ; 
afterwards, he gives his solemn blessing. After this, the 
Archdeacon, standing by his side, says Procedamus in pace, 
to which all answer, In nomine Christi. Amen. Then all 
rise, and accompany the Bishop to his house. 

18. If either on the first or second day all the business 
of the Synod be terminated, the Synod may be concluded 
in the manner here prescribed for the third day. 



380 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 



CHAPTEE XV. 

SOLEMN ADMINISTRATION OF THE SACRAMENT OF 
CONFIRMATION. 



Article I. 
Things to be Prepared. 

1. On the Gospel side of the sanctuary, the Bishop's 
chair raised on a platform by two or three steps, with a 
canopy over it, and hangings behind it. 

2. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., the amice, 
stole, cope, mitre, and crosier. 

3. On the side-table, the Pontifical book, the candlestick 
with a candle, the vessel containing the holy chrism, on a 
small plate, a sufficient quantity of cotton to wipe the fore- 
head (this cotton should be divided in small balls for greater 
convenience), a ewer and basin, to wash the Bishop's hands, 
clean towels on a plate, some slices of bread, neatly cut and 
arranged on another small plate, for the same purpose. 

4. Outside of the sanctuary, but near the rails, some 
benches for those who are to be confirmed ; all the men at 
the Epistle side, and the women at the Gospel side. 

5. Those, who are to be confirmed, should have been 
previously instructed and prepared by the sacrament of 
Penance ; and it is advisable that they receive on the same 
day the Holy Communion, w T hich may be done either at 
the Bishop's Mass, or at the High Mass, as may be deemed 
most convenient. Each ought to have a ticket, on which 
should be written the Christian and family name, which 
each should hold in the hand, w 7 hen he kneels to receive 
Confirmation, and give to the clergyman who attends the 
Bishop. This will answer the double purpose of suggest- 
ing the Christian name to the Bishop, and of recording it, 
together with the family name, in the Register. 



CONFIRMATION. 381 

6. Where it is customary to have sponsors, these should 
be placed behind the persons to be confirmed, and should 
be no more than one for each, and of the same sex as the 
person to be confirmed. 

7. It is customary in some places to add another name 
on this occasion, especially if that which they have be not 
of some saint. The adopted name ought to be written 
after the name received at baptism, and called with it by 
the Bishop. 

8* It is proper that the solemn administration of Con- 
firmation should be made at High Mass, either before it 
commences, or, as it seems more convenient, especially if 
the persons to be confirmed receive communion at it, after 
Mass. 

9. There should be four boys dressed as those who usu- 
ally attend at High Mass, one to hold the mitre, another 
the crosier, another the book, and another the candlestick. 



Article II. 

The Administration of the Sacrament of Confirmation. 

1. At the stated hour, the Bishop, attended by the clergy 
and preceded by the acolytes, goes to the church ; on ar- 
riving before the altar, he makes a genuflection, kneels on 
the lowest step, and prays for awhile with the clergy ; then 
he goes to his seat ; there he takes off his cape, washes his 
hands, puts on the above-mentioned vestments, which are 
carried before him by the acolytes, puts on the mitre, and 
having taken the crosier in his left hand, goes to the altar. 

If Confirmation be given after High Mass, the Bishop 
might assist at it in mitre and cope ; in this case, after he 
has been vested, he goes to the altar to begin Mass ; the 
priest who celebrates Mass ought to come to the sanctuary 
in his sacerdotal dress, walking immediately before the 
Bishop ; having made a genuflection, when the Bishop goes 
to his chair, the celebrant should go to his seat, and remain 
there sitting, until the Bishop is vested, then he goes to 
the altar, places himself at the left of the Bishop, and does 



382 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

everything as directed for High Mass celebrated in presence 
of the Bishop. 

2. On arriving at the altar, the Bishop kneels, and 
although it is not prescribed by the Pontifical, the hymn, 
Veni, Creator Spiritus, and the prayer, Deus qui cor da 

fidelium, are generally sung. Then, either the Bishop or 
some other clergyman, if the Bishop chooses, gives an in- 
struction on the holy sacrament of Confirmation. 

3. After the instruction, the persons to be confirmed are 
directed to kneel at the rails, holding the tickets in their 
hands; then the Bishop, turned towards them, takes off 
his mitre, sings, Spiritus Sanctus, etc., and all the rest as 
in the Roman Pontifical, with the prayer, Omnipotens, 
semipterne Deus, extending his hand on them, 

4. The prayer being ended, the Bishop puts on the mitre, 
takes the crosier in his left hand, and goes to the rails, 
where he anoints the foreheads of the persons whom he 
confirms, and having said, In nomine Patris, etc., and 
touched the cheek, says, Pax tecum. Et cum spiritu tuo 
is not said. One of them, at his right, holds the vessel with 
the chrism, the other, at his left, wipes the foreheads of 
those who have been anointed, with the cotton, which an 
acolyte holds on a plate near him ; and either he or another 
clergyman takes the tickets from the hands of the persons 
to be confirmed, and suggests their Christian name to the 
Bishop. 

5. When the Bishop has confirmed the men at the Epistle 
side, and as he continues to confirm the women at the Gos- 
pel side, if there be more than one row of them, the men 
already anointed are directed to retire, walking one after 
the other, behind the last row, and those of the second row 
take the place of the first at the rails, those next to them 
advancing forward ; the same is done when the women 
at the Gospel side are anointed ; and so on successively. 

6. The Bishop having anointed all those who were to be 
confirmed, goes to his seat; the acolytes carry to him the 
ewer with the basin, the towel and the plate with slices of 
bread ; he washes his hands, and in the meanwhile the 
choir sings, Confirma hoc, Deus, etc., or if there be no choir, 
the Bishop's attendants read it; then he returns to the 



VISITATION OF PARISHES. 383 

altar, and turned towards it, sings the verses, Ostende, etc., 
the prayer, Deus, qui apostolis, etc. ; afterwards, he turns 
towards the confirmed, blesses them, as in the Pontifical, 
gives them the admonitions suggested by the Roman Pon- 
tifical, and tells them to say once, I believe in God, Our 
Father, and Hail Mary. 

7. It is proper that the pastor of the congregation should 
say aloud, w T ith the confirmed, the above prayers enjoined 
by the Bishop, before they leave the church. 

8. The Bishop returns to his seat, takes off the sacred 
vestments, puts on the cape, and accompanied by the clergy, 
after a short prayer before the altar, retires. 



CHAPTER XVI. 

EPISCOPAL VISITATION OF PARISHES.* 

Article I. 

The Bishop's Reception, when he visits the Parishes of his 
Diocese. 

1. As it would be incovenient in this country to make 
the solemn procession as directed in the Roman Pontifical, 
the essential part of the ceremony might be performed 
when he goes to the church to administer Confirmation, or 
the first time the faithful meet in it after his arrival in the 
parish. 

2. He proceeds, accompanied by the clergy, from the 
priest's house, if near the church, or from the sacristy to 
the church. On entering it, the clergy or the choir sing 
the response, Ecce Sacerdos magnus, qui in diebus suis 
placuit Deo, etc., in the office, Confessoris Pontificis; and 
the parish priest offers to the Bishop the sprinkle with holy 

* £x Pont. Bom., Part 3. 



384 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

water ; the Bishop having received it, first applies to his 
own forehead, and then sprinkles the others; then the 
priest presents to him the boat, and the Bishop puts incense 
into the censer, and the parish priest incenses him. After- 
wards, they all go before the high altar, there the Bishop 
kneels before the faldstool, or the praying-desk, placed 
below the steps, in the middle ; the clergy likewise kneel, 
and pray for a short time. In the meantime, the parish 
priest standing with his head uncovered, at the corner of 
the altar, on the Epistle side, sings what follows : 

V. Protector noster, aspice, Deus. 

R. Et respice in faciem Christi tui. 

V. Salvum fac servum tuum. 

R. Deus meus, sperantem in te. 

V. Mitte ei, Domine, auxilium de Sancto. 

R. Et de Sion tuere eum. 

V. Nihil proficiat inimicus in eo. 

R. Et filius hominis non apponat nocere ei. 

V. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. 

V. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

O REMUS. 

Omnipotens sempiterne Deus, qui facis mirabilia magna 
solus, prsetende super hunc famulum tuum et cunctas con- 
gregationes illi commissas spiritum gratise salutaris, et, ut 
in veritate tibi complaceat, perpetuum ei rorem. tuse bene- 
dictionis infunde. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. R. 
Amen. 

3. The choir sings an antiphon in honor of the patron 
Saint ; and whilst the verses are sung, the Bishop rises, 
goes up to the altar, kisses it in the middle, then goes to 
the Epistle side, and there standing, turned towards the 
altar, sings the prayer of the same saint. 

4. When the visit is the first that the Bishop makes to 
the parish, instead of the above prayer, Omnipotens, etc., 
the parish priest sings the following : 



VISITATION OF PARISHES. 385 



Oremus. 

Deus, omnium fideliura pastor et rector, famulum tuum 
N. quern Ecclesias tuse prseesse voluisti, propitius respice, 
da ei quaesumus verbo et exemplo, quibus praeest proficere, 
ut ad vitam una cum grege sibi credito perveniat sem- 
piternam. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. P. Amen. 

On the subsequent visits which the Bishop makes to 
the parishes of his diocese, instead of the above prayer, the 
following is said : 

Oremus. 

Deus, humilium visitator, qui eos paterna dilectione 
consolaris, pnetende societati nostra? gratiam tuam ; ut 
per eos, in quibus habitas, tuum in nobis sentiamus ad- 
ventum. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. 

5. After the prayer, the Bishop gives the solemn bless- 
ing to the people, saying as usual, Sit nomen Domini 
benedictum, etc., and the Indulgences are published. 

6. He then addresses the people, or, if he chooses, after 
the Gospel at High Mass. 

7. High Mass is then celebrated as usual, with the 
ceremonies to be performed when the Bishop is present. 

8. After Mass, the Bishop puts on the amice, alb, 
cincture, and the black stole and cope, with the plain 
mitre, and standing near the altar, turned towards the 
people, intones the anthem, Si iniquitates, and says alter- 
nately with the clergy, the Psalm, De profundis, etc., and 
after it, Requiem, etc., repeats the anthem, Si iniquitates 
observaveris, Domine, Domine, quis sustinebit f Then hav- 
ing taken off the mitre, he says : 

Kyrie eleison. 
R. Kyrie eleison. 
Kyrie eleison. 

Pater noster, etc., which is continued secretly. 
Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 
P. Sed libera nos a malo. 
V. In memoria seterna erit Justus. 
P. Ab auditione mala non timebit. 

33 



386 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

Y. A porta inferi. 

R. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. 

Y. Requiem seternam dona eis, Domine. 

R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. 

Y. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. 

Y. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Oremus. 

Deus qui inter Apostolicos sacerdotes famulos tuos 
pontificali fecisti dignitate vigere; prsesta qusesumus, ut 
eorum quoque perpetuo aggregentur consortio. Per Chris- 
tum Dorninum nostrum. R. Amen. 

9. The prayer being ended, if the grave-yard be ad- 
jacent to the church, the Bishop, preceded by the cross, 
the acolytes with the candlesticks, and two others with 
the censer, and the holy-water vase and sprinkle, and all 
the clergy, two by two, go in procession to the grave- 
yard ; but if it be not convenient to the church, they go 
to the middle of the church, where a cenotaph, with at 
least four candles, is placed, and the Bishop makes the ab- 
solution of the dead. The choir and clergy, while going, 
sing, Qui Lazarum resuscitasti a monumento foetidum, Tu 
eis, Domine, dona requiem et locum indulgentice. V. Qui 
venturus es judicare vivos et mortuos, et scecuhcm per ignem, 
Til eis, etc. Then the anthem Si iniquitates is intoned, the 
Psalm De profundis is sung, and the anthem repeated. 

10. On arriving at the grave-yard, or at the cenotaph, 
the response Libera me Domine is sung, and repeated as 
usual ; the Bishop puts incense into the censer ; after the 
Kyrie eleison has been sung thrice, the Bishop sings Pater 
noster, which is continued secretly, sprinkles and incenses 
as usual, and says : 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 
R. Sed libera nos a malo. 
Y. In memoria seterna erunt justi. 
R. Ab auditione mala non timebunt. 
Y. A porta inferi. 



VISITATION OF PARISHES. 387 

R. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. 

V. Requiem seternam dona eis, Domine. 

R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. 

V. Domine, exaudi oratioiiem meam. 

R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. 

V. Dominus vobiscum. 

V. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Oremtjs. 

Deus qui inter Apostolicos sacerdotes famulos tuos 
sacerdotali fecisti dignitate vigere, prsesta qusesumus ut 
eorum quoque perpetuo aggregentur consortio. 

Deus venise largitor, et humanse salutis amator, qusesu- 
mus clementiam tuam, ut nostras congregation is fratres, 
propinquos, et benefactores, qui ex hoc sseculo transierunt, 
Beata Maria semper virgine intercedente, cum omnibus 
Sanctis tuis, ad perpetua? beatitudinis consortium pervenire, 
concedas. 

Deus, cujus miseratione animse fidelium, requiescunt, 
famulis et famulabus tuis omnibus, hie et ubique in 
Christo quiescentibus, da propitius veniam peccatorum, 
ut, a cunctis reatibus absoluti, tecum sine fine lsetentur. 
Per Christum Dominum nostrum. R. Amen. 

V. Requiem seternam dona eis, Domine. 

R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. 

Then two singers sing Requiescant in pace. R. Amen. 

The Bishop, raising his hand, makes the sign of the 
cross on the grave-yard, or on the cenotaph, puts on his 
mitre, and returns to the sanctuary, saying alternately 
with the clergy the Psalm Miserere. 

11. On arriving before the altar, the Bishop takes oif the 
mitre, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, and stand- 
ing before it in the middle, turned towards the altar, says : 

Eyrie eleison. 

Christe eleison. 

Kyrie eleison. 

Pater noster, etc. 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 

R. Sed libera nos a malo. 



388 



PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 



V. A porta inferi. 

K. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. 

V. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. 

V. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 



Oremus. 

Absolve, qusesumus, Domine, animas famulorum, famu- 
larumque tuarum ab omni vinculo delictorum, ut in resur- 
rectionis gloria inter sanctos et electos tuos resuscitati res- 
pirent. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. R. Amen. 

12. This being ended, the Bishop takes off his black 
cope and stole, and puts on a white cope and stole, and 
begins the visitation by the tabernacle, where the Blessed 
Sacrament is kept; then proceeds to the baptismal font, to 
the place where the sacred oils are kept, also to that where 
the relics are kept ; visits and inspects the altars, chapels, 
sacristy, the sacred vestments, the confessionals, and every- 
thing relating to the divine worship ; also the parish reg- 
isters, the grave-yard, etc. 



THE THINGS SUBJECT TO THE EPISCOPAL VISITATION ARE THE 
FOLLOWING: 



Tabernacle. 
Veil, and how many. 
Interior lining. 
Corporal spread out. 
Ciborium: bowl silver, gilt 

within. 
Processional canopy. 



Of the Holy Eucharist. 

Veil of ciborium. 

Particles. 

Fragments. 

Renewed, how often. 

Key. 

Lamp, always burning. 

Umbrellino for processions. 



Pyx, for the sick. 

BursH, etc., for communion 

of the sick. 
Monstrance. 
Throne, for benediction. 
Portable lanterns. 
Humeral veil. 



Font. 
Cover. 
Rails. 



Of the Baptistery. 

Water. 
Drain. 

Shell. 



Holy oils. 

Salt. 

Cloths. 



Ambry on the Gospel side 

of Sanctuary. 
Inscription (exterior and 

interior). 



Of the Holy Oils. 

Vessel for holy oils. 
Cotton wet with oil, dry 
cotton above. 
1 Purple burse, or cover. 



How brought from the ca- 
thedral. 
Renewal. 
Burning the old. 



VISITATION OF PARISHES. 



389 



Of the Confessionals. 



In a public position. 


Thick veil. 


Doors with bolt. 


Pierced grating. 


Pictures. 

Of the Holy Relics. 




Ambry. 


Names. 


Key. 


Lining. 


Approbation. 


Proper Offices. 


Reliquaries. 


Exposition. 

Of the Altars. 


Festivals. 


High Altar. 


Candlesticks. 


Canopv. 


Steps up to it. 


Statues. 


Predella. 


Steps upon it. 


Pictures. 


Credence. 


Stone Altar. 


Altar-cards. 


Piscina. 


Consecration. 


Covering. 


Screen, or rails. 


Wax-cloth. 


Cloths for changing. 


Bell. 


Altar-cloths. 


Antependiums, and how 


Endowment. 


Their blessing. 


many. 


Obligations. 


Crucifix. 


Of the Church itself. 




Choir. 


Alms-chests. 


Use of bells. 


Large Crucifix, in a promi- 


Holy-water stoups. 


Subterranean chapels. 


nent place. 


Doors. 


Patron. 


Bishop's throne, steps, and 


Churchyard. 


Improper epitaphs. 


canopy. 


Cross therein. 


Burying-place for the 


Nave and aisles. 


Trees. 


clergy 


Walls. 


Bell-tower. 


And for children. 


Images of saints. 


Bells. 


Titulars of church. 


Pulpit. 


Their blessing. 


Dedication. 


Windows. 


Ladders, ropes. 


Both festivals. 


Vaults. 


Roof. 


Office, how held. 


Seats. 


Spire. 


Other festivals. 


Division of sexes. 


Weathercock. 


Indulgences. 


Roof. 


Pavement. 


Forty hours' Prayer. 


Pavement. 


Door. 


Benediction, how often. 


Ambry. 


Key. 

Of the Sacristy. 


Lights, how many. 


Ambries. 


Chalices. 


Lavabo-dishes. 


Lavatory. 


Pat<ns. 


Bells. 


Towels." 


Purificators. 


Thurible and boat. 


Kneeling-desk. 


Corporals and palls. 


Processional Cross. 


Prayers before and after 


Veils. 


Holy-water vessel and as- 


Mass. 


Burses. 


persory. 


PraV'-rs for vesting. 


Amices. 


Pax. 


Altar-cloths. 


Albs. 


Banners. 


Finger-cloths. 


Girdles. 


Flower-vases. 


Communion-cloths. 


Stoles,maniples,and chasu- 


Triangular candlestick. 


Altar-breads, where made. 


bles, of five colors, for 


Paschal candlestick. 


Cottas. 


feast-days, for ferias. 


Door. 


Missal-markers. 


Dalmatics. 


Key. 


Birr. 


Tunics. 


Safe. 


Pall. 


Copes of different colors. 


Pavement. 


Book-stands. 


Humeral veils. 


Windows. 


Books. 


Altar-cushions and book- 


Wall. 


Supplement to Missal. 


stands. 


Roof. 


Ordo eelebrandi. 


Devout images. 


Table of obligations. 


Ritus servandus. 


Cruets. 


Inventory of the aforesaid 


Missals, binding. 







390 



PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 



INDEX OBSERVANDORUM IN VISITATIONE PERSONARUM. 



Name. 

Surname. 

Country. 

Age. 

When appointed, 

Profession of faith. 

Income. 

Obligations satisfied. 

Divine office. 

Faculties. 

Parish books and papers. 

Residence. 

Mass, how often. 

Sermons. 

Publication of feasts, fasts, 

pastorals. 
Catechism. 
Vespers. 
Processions. 



Proper feasts. 

Customs. 

Monthly conferences. 

Servers at Mass. 

Blessing of ashes, candles, 

palms. 
Holy Week. 
Blessing houses. 
Holy sepulchre. 
Blessing font and Paschal 

candle. 
Pious pictures. 
The long litanies. 
Ceremonies in High and 

Low Mass. 
The administration of the 

Sacraments. 
Baptism, how long delayed. 



Given in private houses. 

Godfathers and godmoth- 
ers. 

Confessions, where, at what 
time. 

Instructions for first Com- 
munion. 

Sick persons, and how 
often. 

Visiting sick, commenda- 
tion. 

Marriages, how, where. 

Other functions. 

Lent sermons. 

Funerals. 

Moral and dogmatic the- 
ology. 

Books, what studied. 



13. He gives Confirmation at the time he deems most 
convenient, as directed in the foregoing chapter. 

14. When the Bishop has completed the visitation, he 
goes in his usual dress to the church, and, standing before 
the altar, at the Epistle side, he says the Psalms De pro- 
fundis, Requiem ceternam, the anthem, Si iniquitates, Pater 
noster. 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 

R. Sed libera nos a malo. 

V. A porta inferi. 

R. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. 

V. Requiescant in pace. 

R. Amen. 

V. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. 

V. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 



Oremus. 

Deus cujus miseratione animse fidelium requiescunt, fa- 
mulis et famulabus tuis omnibus hie et ubique in Christo 
quiescentibus, da propitius veniam peccatorum, ut, a eunc- 
tis reatibus absoluti, tecum sine fine lsetentur. Per Chris- 
tum Dominum nostrum. 

R. Amen. 



APPENDIX, 



CHAPTER I. 

EOUKS' EXP 

Article I. 

Things to be Prepared for the Mass of the Exposition. 

1. The picture or image of the high altar, as well as the 
walls near it, should be covered with precious drapery ; but 
representing nothing profane. 

2. The altar ought to be prepared as well as possible. 
No statues or relics of saints should be placed on or about 
it. In the most conspicuous place of it, should be erected 
the throne, or exposition place for the Blessed Sacrament, 
with a pall or corporal on it. It should be surrounded 
with a sufficient number of candles near it, besides those 
that are on the steps of the altar. The front altar-veil 
must always be white, although the Mass may require an- 
other color. 

3. On the side-table, besides what is usually necessary for 
High Masses, should be a cope of the color of the vest- 
ments for the celebrant, the book containing the Litany 
and prayers, the remonstrance covered with a white veil, 
the large particle to be consecrated fixed in the little half- 
moon that holds it, and a stole for the priest, who is to 
expose the Blessed Sacrament. 

4. In the sanctuary, a bench covered with a cloth or 
carpet for the clergy who remain at the adoration. 

5. In the sacristy, the usual vestments for the celebrant 
and ministers. 



392 APPENDIX. 



6. In any convenient place, the processional canopy, the 
ombrellino, the processional cross, two censers, with their 
boats, candles for the procession, and two books with the 
Litany for the chanters. 



Article II. 

Of the Mass for the Exposition. 

1. The Mass for the exposition and reposition, is to be 
snng at the altar where the exposition is made. The Mass 
should be the solemn Votiva of the Blessed Sacrament, with 
the Gloria and Credo, and with the commemoration of the 
Sunday, and of the feasts of either double or semi-double 
rite. But on Sundays of first or second class, on festivals 
of double rite of first or second class, on Ash Wednesday, 
on Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday in Holy Week, dur- 
ing the whole octave of Easter, Pentecost, and Epiphany, 
on the vigils of Christmas and Pentecost, and within all 
privileged octaves, that exclude the celebration of festivals 
of first and second class, either translated or falling on those 
days, the Mass of the Blessed Sacrament cannot be sung, 
but the Mass occurring on that day is to be celebrated with 
the prayer of the Blessed Sacrament, Sub unica conclusione, 
with the Preface, de Nativitate, if the Mass of the day has 
not a proper preface ; and should those festivals fall on 
Sunday, the prayer of the Blessed Sacrament is to be said, 
Sub unica conclusione, with that of the Saint, and the 
commemoration of the Sunday is to be made afterwards 
under its proper conclusion. 

2. This Mass is celebrated as other High Masses, hav- 
ing nothing particular, except that another large particle is 
to be consecrated with that of the Mass. 

3. The acolytes, who hold the candles for the elevation, 
must not leave the sanctuary, before the consecrated Host 
is placed in the remonstrance ; and before they go, they 
must make a genuflection on both knees. 

4. The acolytes should light all the candles of the altar, 
prepared for the exposition before the elevation. 

5. After the celebrant has consumed the Precious Blood, 



EXPOSITION. 393 

the deacon and sub-deacon make a genuflection, exchange 
places, make another genuflection ; the master of ceremo- 
nies carries the remonstrance to the altar; and the cele- 
brant, assisted by the deacon, places the Sacred Host in the 
remonstrance, the deacon shuts it and. places it in the 
middle of the corporal; the deacon and sub-deacon again 
exchange places. During the remaining part of the Mass, 
the ministers omit the usual kisses in giving or receiving 
anything from the celebrant. 

6. The celebrant in the usual place makes the ablution 
of his fingers ; after which, the ministers make a genuflec- 
tion and exchange places ; the sub-deacon wipes the chalice, 
and covers it as usual, leaving the corporal spread on the 
altar, taking care to retire a little, whilst the celebrant sings, 
Dominus vobiscum; he then makes a genuflection on the 
platform, and on the lowest step, as he passes before the 
Blessed Sacrament, and having brought the chalice to the 
side-table, goes to his place behind the deacon. 

7. The celebrant having given the chalice to the sub- 
deacon, makes a genuflection, and goes to read the Com- 
munio; then he returns to the middle, kisses the altar, 
makes a genuflection with the deacon, turns to the people 
from the Gospel side, so as not to turn his back to the 
Blessed Sacrament ; sings, Dominus vobiscum, makes again 
a genuflection with the ministers, goes to sing the prayers ; 
after having sung them, returns to the middle, kisses the 
altar, makes a genuflection with the ministers, turns to the 
people as before, sings, Dominus vobiscum; in the mean- 
while, the deacon makes another genuflection, turns to the 
people in the same manner as the celebrant, and sings, lie, 
missa est. Then the celebrant and the ministers make a 
genuflection ; the celebrant says, Placeat, etc., and the min- 
isters kneel on the platform for the benediction. 

8. The celebrant having said the Placeat, kisses the altar, 
says, Benedicat vos ; instead of bowing, makes a genuflec- 
tion, turns as for the Dominus vobiscum, blesses the people, 
without completing the circle, and without making another 
genuflection, turns on his left, says the Gospel, does not 
make the sign of the cross on the altar, but he makes it on 



394 APPENDIX. 

his forehead, mouth, and breast, and saying, Et verbum 
caro, he makes a genuflection to the Blessed Sacrament. 

9. After Mass, the ministers go up to the platform at 
the side of the celebrant, and having made a genuflection 
on one knee, go directly by the side steps to the bench. . 

10. Towards the end of Mass, the acolytes give the can- 
dles to the clergy and light them ; the two censer-bearers 
prepare their censers, and whilst the celebrant reads the 
last Gospel, the latter go to the altar and make a genuflec- 
tion on both knees. 

Article III. 

Of the Procession for the Exposition. 

1. The celebrant and the ministers, on arriving at the 
bench, take off their maniples ; the celebrant, moreover, 
takes off his chasuble and puts on the cope, puts incense 
in both censers, without blessing it, the deacon presenting 
the incense-boat, and goes with them to the middle, below 
the steps, where he makes with them a genuflection on 
both knees, kneels on the lowest step, and incenses the 
Blessed Sacrament, with three throws. 

2. In the meantime, the master of ceremonies brings 
from the side table the long veil, and puts it on the cele- 
brant, after he has given the censer to the deacon. The 
censer-bearers go to each side of the altar, and the acolytes 
give the canopy to those who are to carry it. 

3. The celebrant, having incensed the Blessed Sacrament, 
goes up to the second step with the deacon and sub-deacon ; 
the celebrant and the sub-deacon kneel, and the deacon 
goes up to the altar, makes a genuflection on one knee, 
takes the Blessed Sacrament without bowing, and standing 
gives it to the celebrant ; then the deacon makes a genu- 
flection, and at the same time bows, goes to the celebrant's 
right, who, with the ministers, goes up to the platform, and 
they turn towards the people in such a manner that the 
deacon be at the right, and the sub-deacon at the left of 
the celebrant, whose cope they raise on each side ; a priest 



EXPOSITION. 395 

in surplice holds the ombrellino opened over the Blessed 
Sacrament, and the singers intone the Pange, lingua. 

4. The procession moves in the following order : the 
cross-bearer, in surplice, having on each side the acolytes 
with their candlesticks, goes to the lower part of the sanc- 
tuary near the railing, and stands turned to the altar. 
When the chanters intone the Pange Lingua, they turn 
towards the people, without making any genuflection, and 
begin to move ; the clergy, two by tw r o, make a genuflec- 
tion on both knees, follow them, carrying their candles 
outside — that is, those who are at the right carry them in 
their right hand, and those at the left side, in their left 
hand. 

5. The celebrant, between the deacon and sub-deacon, 
who raise his cope on each side, preceded by the two censer- 
bearers, who gently swing their censers, and surrounded 
by four or six acolytes, who carry lighted candles on each 
side of the canopy, w r alks in the last place, reciting, in a 
low voice, psalms and hymns alternately with the minis- 
ters, and the choir continues to sing the Pange Lingua. 

6. The procession having returned, the acolytes put their 
candlesticks on the side-table, and the cross-bearer leaves 
the cross at its place, the clergy divide in two lines at each 
side of the altar, and as the Blessed Sacrament approaches, 
they all kneel down. The censer-bearers, on arriving near 
the altar, do not swing their censers any more, but stop at 
each side of it, and remain there standing. The celebrant 
stops at the lowest step of the altar, and there standing, 
gives the Blessed Sacrament to the deacon, who receives it 
kneeling on both knees, and turned a little to the Epistle 
side. Then the celebrant kneels, and takes off the long 
veil. The deacon places the Blessed Sacrament on the 
altar, if there be no other priest to place it on the throne ; 
otherwise the deacon himself places it thereon, makes a 
genuflection on the platform, without bowjng his head, and 
goes down by one side to the right of the celebrant. 

7. Those who carried the canopy, having left it at a con- 
venient place, receive candles and kneel down, forming a 
semicircle before the altar, if they be clergymen ; but if 
laymen, they kneel outside of the chancel. 



396 APPENDIX. 

8. After the deacon has placed the Blessed Sacrament on 
the throne, and returned to the right of the celebrant, the 
chanters intone Tantum ergo. At the verse Genitori, the 
celebrant rises with the ministers, puts incense into the 
censer, without blessing it, the deacon presenting the in- 
cense-boat, and the sub-deacon raising the celebrant's cope 
at his right, while he incenses the Blessed Sacrament with 
three throws. After the incensing, the censer-bearer, hav- 
ing received the censer from the deacon, goes to the middle, 
makes a genuflection, with the second censer-bearer, and 
both carry their censers back to the sacristy. 

9. After the Tantum ergo, the chanters do not sing the 
verse Panem de coelo, but they go in the middle, kneel, and 
sing the Litany. At the end of it the celebrant intones 
Pater noster, the rest of which being recited secretly, the 
chanters intone the Psalm Deus in adjutorium ; after it, the 
celebrant, kneeling, sings in a ferial tone the verses from 
the book which the ministers hold on each side; he then 
rises, and standing, sings with his hands joined, Dominus 
vobiscum, and the prayers that follow ; these being ended, 
he kneels, says Domine exaudi orationem meam, and the 
chanters, Exaudiat nos omnipotens et misericors Dominus; 
the choir answers, Amen; the celebrant subjoins, Fidelium 
ammo?., etc., without making the sign of the cross; the 
choir answers, Amen. Then all the clergy pray for a short 
time in silence ; the acolytes go to the middle with their 
candlesticks, kneel on both knees, rise, and walk to the 
sacristy, followed, as usual, by the clergy and the sacred 
ministers, who all make in the middle a genuflection on 
both knees ; the latter, when at a proper distance from the 
Blessed Sacrament, put on their caps. 

If, for want of a sufficient number of persons, or for any 
other cause, the procession cannot be made, the celebrant, 
and the deacon and sub-deacon, after Mass, go to the bench, 
as has been said above, take off their maniples, the cele- 
brant taking off also his chasuble, and putting on the cope, 
go to the altar, make a genuflection on both knees below 
the last step, then kneel on it, and after a short prayer, 
rise; the celebrant puts incense into the censer, and kneel- 
ing, incenses with three throws the Blessed Sacrament; 



EXPOSITION. 397 

then the deacon, or another priest in surplice and stole, 
making the usual genuflections, places it on the throne ; 
the choir sings Pange, lingua; at the verse Genitori the 
celebrant puts incense again into the censer, and incenses, 
as usual, the Blessed Sacrament. After the hymn is fin- 
ished, the chanters sing the Litany immediately. The same 
is to be done at the reposition of the Blessed Sacrament, 
except that the hymn, Pange, ling*aa is sung after the verse 
Domiue, exaudi orationem meam, and the benediction is 
given as usual. 

10. After the clergy have left the sanctuary, the bench 
or stool prepared for the purpose is placed near the last step 
of the altar in the middle, and the two clergymen destined 
to begin the adoration, dressed in surplice (and stole if they 
be priests), kneel before it, and remain there for the space 
of an hour, after which two others go to take their place, 
and so on till the exposition is finished. 

11. There should be constantly, day and night, during 
the exposition, at least twenty lights ; and when the church 
is shut in the night, at least ten of them should be candles 
and ten lamps. 

Article IV. 
Of the Mass pro pace. 

1. Everything is to be prepared for this Mass as for 
others, but the color of the vestments is to be violet. 

2. This Mass ought to be sung on the second day of the 
forty hours' exposition, with the assistance of deacon and 
sub-deacon. It should not be sung at the altar where the 
Blessed Sacrament is exposed, or where it is usually kept 
in the tabernacle. However, as in most of our churches in 
this country, there is but one altar, the Mass here spoken 
of must necessarily be celebrated at the altar of the exposi- 
tion. The assistance of the deacon and sub-deacon must 
be dispensed with where there is only one clergyman. 

3. The Mass, pro pace, is sung without Gloria and Credo, 
and with the commemoration of the Blessed Sacrament, 
sub iinica conclusione, and according to the rules given 
above for the votive Mass of the Blessed Sacrament. At 



398 APPENDIX. 

the elevation, the little bell is not to be rung. However, 
if it is celebrated on a Sunday, the Credo is to be said. 

4. The days on which this Mass, pro pace, cannot be said, 
are the same as mentioned above for that of the Blessed 
Sacrament, n. 1, art. ii. When any other is said in its 
place, the prayer, pro pace, is to be said, sub unica conclu- 
sione, with that of the current Mass, and the commemora- 
tion of the Blessed Sacrament is then said sub propria con- 
clusione, should the rite of the day allow it. 

5. All private Masses celebrated during the exposition 
are of the current office, with the commemoration of the 
Blessed Sacrament after the others prescribed for that day 
by the Rubrics ; and if a feast of the first or second class 
be then celebrated, the commemoration of the Blessed 
Sacrament is omitted; the little bell is not to be rung; if, 
on the days of the exposition, votive Masses are permitted 
by the Rubrics, it is proper that all private Masses should 
be of the Blessed Sacrament, without Gloria and without 
Credo, with the Preface de Nativitate. 

Article V. 
Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Reposition. 

m 

1. In the sacristy and on the side-table, everything as for 
the first day. 

2. On the altar, the key of the tabernacle, the Missal on 
its stand, the cards and the cross, according to the established 
custom. All the candles are to be lighted before Mass. 

3. In the sanctuary, the bench or ' stools placed in the 
middle for the adoration are to be removed. 



Article VI. 

Of the Mass for the Reposition. 

1. We think it proper to mention here some general 
rules, before we speak of the ceremonies to be observed in 
Masses celebrated at the altars on which the Blessed Sacra- 
ment is exposed. 



exposition. 399 

2. These rules are the following : During Mass, the 
genuflections are made only on one knee, except when 
the priest first arrives at the altar, and when he leaves it 
to return to the sacristy ; in both these cases, he makes 
the genuflection on both knees. 

The usual reverences to salute the clergy are omitted, 
by the celebrant and ministers, and by every one else.* 

The ministers and all others in giving anything to the 
celebrant, or receiving it from him, do not kiss it or his 
hand : but the sub-deacon, after the Epistle, kisses the 
hand in receiving his blessing ; likewise the deacon when 
he goes to receive his blessing before he sings the Gospel ; 
at the Offertory, when he presents the paten and chalice to 
the celebrant, he kisses both the paten and chalice, and his 
hand, as also when he gives him the paten at the end of 
the Pater noster. The celebrant, at the end of the Gospel, 
sung by the deacon, kisses the Missal, as usual. 

3. The sacred ministers being vested, go from the 
sacristy to the sanctuary as usual ; the acolytes arriving 
before the altar, make a genuflection on both knees, and 
a profound bow, retire on each side, and wait for the 
ministers. The clergy, as they arrive at the middle make 
likewise a genuflection on both knees, with a profound 
reverence, and go to their respective places, without bow- 
ing to each other. The sacred ministers uncover their 
heads, as soon as they can see the Blessed Sacrament, 
carry their caps till they enter the sanctuary, then they 
give them to the master of ceremonies, and, on arriving 
before the last step of the altar, they, with the acolytes and 
the master of ceremonies, make a genuflection on both 
knees, and a profound bow, and Mass is begun as usual. 

4. Having made the confession, they go up to the altar, 
without making a genuflection, where they make a genu- 
flection on one knee. The deacon and sub-deacon should 
observe, that in making the genuflections, they must not 
place their hands on the altar, this being allowed only to 
the celebrant. When the latter has said, Oramus te, 
Domine, they retire a little to the Gospel side, turned to 

* The deacon, however, salutes the choir before incensing them. 



400 APPENDIX. 

the Epistle side, to put incense into the censer ; and before 
the censer-bearer goes up for this purpose, he makes below 
the last step a genuflection, bending one knee ; the deacon 
does not kiss the spoon, nor the celebrant's hand, as has 
been observed before for all similar cases. 

5. The incense having been blessed, the censer-bearer 
retires to his place, making a genuflection, and the cele- 
brant and ministers go down to the second step, taking 
care not to turn their backs to the Blessed Sacrament ; on 
which account the celebrant and the sub-deacon go down 
by the Gospel side, and the deacon by that of the Epistle, 
kneel on the edge of the platform; there the celebrant, 
having received the censer from the deacon, without the 
usual kisses, and made a profound bow, incenses the 
Blessed Sacrament with three throws, the ministers raising, 
in the meanwhile, his chasuble on each side. Then they 
rise, go up to the altar, making a genuflection on one knee, 
and incense the altar, as usual. 

If, according to the custom established in some churches, 
the cross has been placed on the altar, it must not be in- 
censed. (Deer. 8. R. C, 29 Sept., 1738.) 

6. After the incensing, the celebrant goes down to the 
first step, or below them all, according to the construction 
of the altar, and there, turned towards the people, is in- 
censed by the deacon, who turns towards him. Then he 
goes to read the Introit, etc. 

7. After the choir have done singing the Kyrie, the 
celebrant with the ministers goes to the middle as usual, 
makes with them a genuflection, and intones the Gloria; 
the ministers make again a genuflection, go to his side, re- 
cite the rest of the hymn, make a genuflection, and by the 
side steps go to the bench, where they sit without their 
caps ; after it is sung, they go to the middle, make a genu- 
flection below the steps, and go, one behind the other, with- 
out making any other genuflection. The celebrant, after 
arriving on the platform and kissing the altar, genuflects, 
and turned a little towards the Gospel side, sings the 
Dominus vobiscum ; then he returns to the middle, makes 
a genuflection with the ministers, and goes to sing the 
prayers as usual ; after which, the sub-deacon sings the 



FORTY HOURS' EXPOSITION. 401 

Epistle, having made the usual genuflections before the 
altar, then asks the celebrant's blessing, kisses his hand, 
and carries the Missal to the Gospel side, as usual. 

8. During this time, the celebrant says the Munda cor 
meum, makes a genuflection before and after, then reads the 
Gospel ; and the deacon takes the book to the altar, having 
made a genuflection in the middle on the lowest step, and 
again on the platform. 

9. When the celebrant has read the Gospel, he turns in 
his place, and puts in the incense as at n. 4 • then all three 
go to the middle on the platform, the sub-deacon descends 
to the bottom of the steps, and the deacon kneels to say the 
Munda cor meum. The celebrant, at the proper time, gives 
him his blessing, who, having kissed his hand, rises, both 
make a genuflection, the celebrant goes to the Epistle side, 
the deacon goes to the floor, makes a genuflection with the 
others, and. proceeds as usual to sing the Gospel. At the 
end, the sub-deacon takes the Missal to the celebrant to 
kiss, without making a genuflection before, comes down 
from the altar (which he must do without turning his 
jack to the Blessed Sacrament), and the deacon incenses 
the celebrant as usual. 

10. After incensing the celebrant, all three go to the 
middle, one behind the other, make a genuflection, and the 
celebrant intones the Credo ; at the end, the ministers make 
a genuflection, and go to recite it with the celebrant. Then 
all three make a genuflection and go to the bench, as was 
mentioned at n. 7. 

11. At the Crucijixus, the deacon takes the burse from 
the side- table, bows to the celebrant only, goes to the 
middle, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, and again 
on the platform, and spreads the corporal in the usual 
manner, makes a genuflection, and returns by the side of 
the altar to the right of the celebrant. 

12. At the end of the Credo, the ministers go to the 
altar, as at n. 7. The celebrant sings the Dominus vobis- 
cum, makes a genuflection, and sings Oremus. After which 
the deacon and sub-deacon make a genuflection, and go, 
the first to the celebrant's right, and the other to the 
side-table, in the usual manner, for the chalice, which he 



402 APPENDIX. 

brings to the altar, making there a genuflection. The 
deacon presents the paten and chalice with the usual kiss. 
In like manner the sub-deacon presents the cruets, then 
takes the paten, and makes a genuflection, first on the plat- 
form, and again on the lowest step.* He does not, however, 
make a genuflection when the celebrant kneels on the plat- 
form to incense the Blessed Sacrament. S. C. R. y 11 Feb., 
1764. 

13. After the oblation of the chalice, the deacon gives 
the incense as at n. 4. And the celebrant, without mak- 
ing a genuflection, incenses the offerings ; the deacon does 
not remove the chalice from the middle of the corporal. 
When this is done, they descend to the second step, kneel 
on the edge of the platform, and incense the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, the altar as at n. 5, and the celebrant as at n. 6, and 
in the same place he washes his hands according to the 
Rubric of the Missal on Good Friday, and the S. C. R., 
22d August, 1682 ; then he returns to the middle, makes 
a genuflection, and says the Suscipe, Sancta Trinitas, etc. 

14. When the deacon has incensed the celebrant, he in- 
censes the choir as usual, then the sub-deacon, who makes 
a genuflection, and then turns for this purpose a little to- 
wards the gospel side. This done, the deacon gives the 
censer to the censer-bearer, goes up to the second step, makes 
a genuflection, and turns in the same manner as the sub- 
deacon, to be incensed, and again makes a genuflection. 

15. When the celebrant has said the Suscipe, Sancta 
Trinitas, he kisses the altar, makes a genuflection, and turns, 
as at the Dominus vobiscum, to say the Orate, Fratres; b\\i 
he does not make a perfect circle ; then he returns to the 
middle, makes a genuflection, and continues Mass. 

16. At the Sanctus, the acolytes approach with torches, 
and without bowing, kneel down till after communion, as 
they did on the first day. From this to the end of Mass, 
they observe exactly what is prescribed for the first day, 
and make preparations towards the end for the procession. 

* The sub-deacon does not kiss the cruets. 



EXPOSITION. 403 

Article VII. 

From the Litany to the end of the Forty Hours. 

1. At the end of Mass, the celebrant goes to the bench 
with the ministers, receives the cope, and without putting 
in incense, returns to the middle, makes a genuflection on 
both knees, and kneels on the lowest step ; then the chanters 
sing the Litany, as on the first day, to Domine, exaudi 
orationem, etc., inclusive. 

2. At Feccatores, the acolytes give the candles to the 
clergy, and light them ; the censer-bearers prepare their 
censers, and approach the altar with the usual genuflections. 

3. After the celebrant has said the Domine, exaudi, etc., 
he rises with the ministers, puts incense into the censers, 
without blessing it, and kneeling, incenses three times the 
Blessed Sacrament ; and the master of ceremonies gives him 
the veil. 

4. After incensing the Blessed Sacrament, the censer- 
bearers place themselves on each side of the altar, and the 
deacon or a priest with surplice and stole, with the usual 
genuflections, takes it from the repository ; if it is the deacon, 
without placing it upon the corporal, he places it in the 
celebrant's hands, who receives it after a genuflection ; and as 
soon as he has delivered it, the deacon makes in turn a genu- 
flection. If another priest takes it from the repository, he 
places it upon the corporal, makes a genuflection and re- 
tires ; then the deacon goes upon the platform, and takes 
it as said above, and as to the remainder, observes what is 
prescribed in the ceremonies and rite of the procession. 

5. When the procession has returned, and the celebrant 
has arrived at the lowest step of the altar, the deacon makes 
a genuflection, receives from him the Blessed Sacrament ; 
the celebrant then immediately makes a genuflection, and 
the veil is taken off. The deacon places the remonstrance on 
the corporal, in the middle of the altar, and returns to the 
right of the celebrant, making the usual genuflections. 

6. As soon as the deacon returns to the right of the cele- 
brant, the singers intone the Tantum ergo; at the Genitori 



404 APPENDIX. 

incense is given, and the Blessed Sacrament is incensed ; 
and after the verse Panem de coelo (to which an Alleluia is 
added during paschal time, and the octave of Corpus Christi, 
according to the Decree, S. C. R., 10 Jan., 1705), the cele- 
brant rises without making another genuflection, or saying 
Dominus vobiscum (Decree, S. C. R., 16th June, 1663; 
28th Sept., 1675 ; 2d Aug. and 6th Sept., 1698), and sings 
the prayers with his hands joined, and the ministers hold 
the book. 

7. After the prayers, he kneels, and after saying Fidelium 
animce, as on the first day, the deacon adjusts the veil on 
his shoulders, and the sub-deacon ties it in front. Then 
the celebrant with the ministers goes up to the altar and 
gives the Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament in the usual 
manner. The celebrant and sub-deacon go down to the 
foot of the altar (the deacon, if there is no assisting priest, 
remaining on the jpredella to replace the Blessed Sacra- 
ment) and genuflect, and. the master of ceremonies re- 
moves the humeral veil. The deacon immediately, or a 
priest with a stole, observing the usual ceremonies, puts the 
Blessed Sacrament in the tabernacle, which must be on the 
altar where the exposition is made, and the consecrated 
Host must be consumed during Mass, either the same 
morning or the following. [Instruct. Clement.) 

8. Whilst the Blessed Sacrament is put away, the aco- 
lytes take their candles from the side-table, and go to the 
middle ; the master of ceremonies takes the ministers' caps, 
and at the end of the function gives them a signal to rise; 
all make a genuflection together on the floor; he presents 
the caps, and they go, preceded by the censer-bearers and 
acolytes, to the sacristy, to disrobe as usual. 

As it frequently happens that not the celebrant, but a 
Bishop, terminates the function, it may be necessary to 
point out what is to be observed after Mass. At the end 
of the last Gospel, the celebrant, with the ministers at each 
side of him, goes to the middle of the altar, makes a genu- 
flection on one knee, without bowing the head, and then 
goes down to the floor, in such a manner as not to turn his 
back to the Blessed Sacrament. When they are at the bot- 
tom of the steps, they all make a genuflection together on 



FORTY HOURS' EXPOSITION. 405 

both knees, together with a prostration ; the acolytes with 
their candles, and the master of ceremonies, do the same as 
they did in the beginning of Mass. Then they all depart 
with their heads uncovered, and do not take their caps until 
they are out of sight of the Blessed Sacrament. When they 
arrive in the sacristy, the ministers take oif their maniples ; 
and if they are to assist the Bishop, and their vestments be 
not white, they take them oif and put on white. (Decree, 
S. C. R., 20th Sept., 1806.) Then they assist the Bishop 
to vest, and proceed to the altar, preceded by the acolytes 
with their candles, and followed by the train-bearer and 
mitre-bearer. When they come in sight of the Blessed 
Sacrament, the deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and 
after making a genuflection on both knees, both kneel on 
the first step, on which the master of ceremonies will put 
a cushion for the Bishop. The function is then continued 
as prescribed above, and the mitre-bearer during the bene- 
diction kneels down. 

9. The greater part of the ceremonies prescribed in this 
chapter, have been taken from the ()th volume of the Col- 
lection of Decrees of the S. C. R., Part II, in which Gar- 
dellini explains the instructions of Clement XI on the 
Forty Hours. 



406 DIFFERENT INTONATIONS 



CHAPTER II. 
different intonations for vespers and solemn 

MASS. 

It was deemed advisable to add, at the end of this 
Manual, the different intonations for Vespers and Solemn 
Mass. 

It may be well to remark that the priest who officiates 
or celebrates, if capable of regulating his voice, or intoning 
Deus in adjutorium, &c, or in commencing a prayer, &c, 
should take a moderate pitch, neither too high nor too low 
— such a note, for instance, that would answer that of sol 
or la of the organ, would suit the generality of voices of 
the choir that is to sing the responses. 

Deus in adjutorium, &c. 

For Festivals. 



5= 


-a ■ — i- 
















v. 


De - us 


in ad-ju-to - ri-um me- una in -ten -de. 


h» 




-J* 




™ ™ 1 <? V ■■ »■]■!•■ g ™ " 












R. 


Do - mi 


-ne ad ad-ju-van-dum me fes-ti - na. 


J* 






— 


=P 












Glo - ri - 


a Pa-tri, et Fi - li - o, et Spi - ri - tu - i 


h 


r 


_ 








Sanc-to. 


Si -cut e - rat in prin-ci - pi - o, et nunc 


D«s- 






1 


=pt 


■..J ... m 




i 


' 



et semper, et in saec-u-la ssec- u-lo-rum. Ameu. 



Al - le- lu-ia. 



FOB VESPERS AND SOLEMN MASS. 407 

During Septuagesima and Lent. 



S 



l ■ ♦ 



— - ^- "-^ j: 



La - us ti - bi Do - mi-ne, rex ae - ter-nse glo - ri - ae. 

Ferial Intonation. 



♦ — B-4 



V. De-us in ad - ju - to - ri -um me-um in-ten-de. 



♦ — ♦ 



Do -mi-ne ad ad-ju-vandum me fes - ti - na. 



Glo - ri - a Pa - tri, &c. Al - le - lu - ia. 

Laus tibi Domine, as above. 

The Chapter 

is sung on the note Do, recto tono, all the way through, 
except the last word, which is sung on la, sol, la. 









- i -, ▼ - i 




Ec-ce sa-cer-dos magnus, *&c. 


et 


in tern -po- re 










T m .. _u m 




' 




3 ♦ * ' 1 





i - ra-cun - di - ae fac-tus est re-con-ci-li-a - ti-o. 



R. De-o gra-ti-as. 



The Verses 

Immediately after the Hymn. 



-g — ■ — ♦— a — ■ -H--B- 



V. Glo-ri-a et ho-no-re co-ro-nas-ti e-um, Do-mi-ne 



408 



DIFFERENT INTONATIONS 



35=i 


,»"i H -. B -i: 


e. 


*=i 


:*"m - . 


=»-1- 



+— B- 



R. Et con-sti-tuisti 



tu - 



^=3 



The Verses 

For the Commemorations. 



^3E 



V. Di - ri - ga - tur, Do - mi - ne, 



ra - ti 



me - a. 



R. Si -cut in - cen-suin in con-spec -tu tu - o. 

The tones for Dominus vobiscum and for the prayers are 
marked hereafter at page 409: and, as the different intona- 
tions for Benedicamus are to be found in every missal, 
we abstain from noting them here. 

After the Deo gr alias, in response to the Benedicamus, 
the priest sings in the low note do, FideUum animce, in the 
following manner: 



^ 



MlZfZX 



V. Fi-de-li-um a - ni-mse 



pa - ce. R. A - men. 



After the prayer that follows the Antiphon of the Blessed 
Virgin, the officiating priest sings, in a low note of voice: — 



i 



V. Di-vi-num au-xi-li-um ma-ne-at semper no-bis-cum. 



£-■ , II 



A - men. 



In the Festival tone the prayers are sung on one note, 
do, with the exception of two variations, do, si, la, do, do, 



FOR VESPERS AND SOLEMN MASS. 409 

and do, si. The former of these variations is made on a 
principal point, the second on a semi-point. 

It will be observed that in every prayer there is the 
address to God, the petition through the mystery, or the 
intercession of a saint whose mass is celebrated, and the 
conclusion. The end of the address is generally marked 
by a semicolon; and on the word preceding it the principal 
point is sung. If in the petition, the sentences are divided 
so as to admit a semicolon, the semi-point is then sung on 
the last word of the first part of the sentence. In the con- 
clusion the semi-point is sung first, and the principal point 
in the second place, as will be seen in the following ex- 
ample : — 

Prayers. 



=e=? 



Do - mi-nus vo-biscum. Et cum spi - ri - tu tu - o. 



-a * 



O - re - mus. De - us qui ho - di - er-nam di -em, 



A-pos-tu-lo-ruru tu - o - rum Pe - tri, et Pau-li, 

Principal Point. 



mar-ty-rio con - se-cras-ti; Da Ec-cle-si-ae tu-ae 

Semi-point. 



P^ 



e - o-rum in om - ni-bus se-qui prse-cep-tum : per 



g — a ■ — ■ — ♦ — a — a — ■ ■ — i — a — a ♦ — ■ — H — ■ — |-*- 



quos re - li-gi - o - nis sump-sit ex - or - di-um. Pei 



^ 



Do - mi-num nosftrum Je-sum Christum Fi-li-um tu-um, 

35 



410 



DIFFERENT INTONATIONS 



±r»- 



qui te-cum vi - vit et reg-nat in u-ni-ta-te 



jg- , » - 



Spi-ri-tus Sancti De-us, per oin-ni-a sa^c-u-la 



ssec - u - lo-rum. A-men. 



Ferial Tones. 

The ferial tone is more simple, and is used in the 
prayers of ferial Masses, and in the Mass of Requiem. 
The inflection is from Do to Re, and is made at the end of 
the prayer, and at the conclusion. When there is more 
than one prayer, the inflection is made at the end of the 
first, at the end of the last, and at the conclusion. 

Example. 



-N — ■ — ■ — a — j — a — m 4 — ■ — 1 — ■ — ■--]—■ — ■ — ♦ — ■ a — 


* 




Con-ce-de, mi-se - ri-cors De-us, fra-gi-li- ta - ti 






— »- 




1 * 1 nji' 






V 

nos-trse prse-sid - i - urn. ... Re - sur - ga - mus. Per 






— h — a — 


— 




p - 9 a ■ a b b t ■ 1 ■ B 











e-undem Christum Do - minum nostrum. A-men. 

Epistle. 

The Epistle is intoned and continued throughout on the 
note Do. A prolonging of the voice is made on the fourth, 
fifth, or sixth syllable before the end of a period, according 
as the accents may require an inflection of the voice, from 
Do to Si. Another inflection, sanctioned by custom, may 
be made at the end, as it may suit the accents. 



FOR VESPERS AND SOLEMN MASS. 411 

Example. 



^ . _ Am An 


■ ■ a ™" ■ 


C ■ ♦ ■ |- ■ ■ 








* 






Lec-ti - o Li-bri 


Sa - pi-en - ti - se. Be - a - tus 


vir- 
















qui in-ven-tus 


est si-ne ma-cu-la, et qui 


post 




I* ■ n m m 


C ■ ■!■,'■, 










au-rum non a - 


bi it, nee spe - ra - vit in 


pe- 








C ■ ♦ ■ ! " 


1 - -, -, 1 


■ | ■ j ■ 


■ 








cu - ni - a et 


the -sau - ris. Quis est hie, 


et 






I ■ B ' B ■ A ■ 


K ■ ■• * "IB B ■ ' I 


1 ■ H- ■ , ■ f 


■ i 




1 ~ ~ 1 


1 



lau-da - bimus e - um. 



Omnis ec-cle - si - a 



^ 



sancto-rum. 



The Gospel 



is sung on the note Do, as its dominant, with three vari- 
ations. At the end of a period the voice is lowered to 
La in the fourth, fifth, or sixth syllables, returning imme- 
diately to Do. The interrogation point is sung as at the 
Epistle. At the close of the Gospel the voice descends to 
La on the fourth, fifth, or sixth last syllable, which are 
sung on three notes, La, Si, Do, the remaining syllable 
being sung in Do. 

Example. 



3^ 



♦— ■ 



Do - minus vo-bis- cum. Et cum spi-ri-tu tu - o. 



412 



DIFFERENT INTONATIONS 



S=5: 



■ ■ i * g_q— +-t 



^EE* 



Se-quen-ti - a Sancti E-van-ge - li - i se-cundum 



^♦E-Ep 



Mattheum. Glo - ri - a ti - bi Do-mi-ne. In il - lo 

iZ^Hi-a-hHi— ■ — 4— ■ ! ■ m- \-m- 
tem-po-re dix-it Jesus dis-ci - pu-lis su-is: vos 



£=3=iT 



»- - ■ I ■ 



-Pi 



es - tis sal ter - rae. Quod si sal e - va-nu - e - rit, in 



quo sa - li - e - tur? . . Hie magnus vo-ca- bi-tur, in 



^ 



-a— }—*— ♦- 



reg - no cse-lo-ruin. La-us ti-bi Christe. 

CONFITEOR. 



Con-fi-te-or De - o om-ni - po-ten - ti, Be-a-tse 



Ma-ri - se semper Vir-gi - ni, be - a - to Michae- li 



jjzzjj-tzizjm^: 



Arcban-ge-lo, be -a -to Jo-an-ni Baptis-tse, Sanctis, 



A-pos-to-lis Petro et Paulo, om-ni-bus Sanctis 



j-'=rjp=»_Lji ■ "-f 



et ti - bi Pa -ter: qui -a pec-ca-vi ni - mis 



FOR VESPERS AND SOLEMN MASS. 413 



k 


■ 


A _ 


A ■ 


B i 


— 






1 . 






f* 










a < 7a | 


B 




1 ■ 


■ 


















1 








CO 


-gi-ta- 


ti - o - 


ne, 


ver-bo, 


et 


o - pe-re: 


me 


-a 




=t 


-m- 


1 a 






I n 




■ Lx 




1 




a 1 






a 1 




■ 7f. a 


■ 


-i=t 






, ■ 






I " 










cul 


-pa, me -a 


cul- 


pa, me 


■ a 


max-i - ma 


cul- 


pa. 












| H 










1 




H5 












B ! 






















■ r 






I- 


de-o prsecor 


Beatam Ma- 


ri-am 


semper Virgi] 


aem, 








-■— ■ — 


— ■ — 








1 B 








K 






A _ 1 B 








r" i v u | i- 




be 


a -turn 


Mi-cha- el 


- em Archan- 


ge-lum, be 


- a- 


turn 






fe 










i - - 


i ■ 






- i 








Jo- 


an-nem 


Bap-tis-tam, sanctos A 


-pos - to-los 


Petrum 










■ la 






1 - 














1 






1 ■ 








1 








J 






1 











et Pau-lum, om-nes sanctos, et te Pa - ter, 



rfct 



o - ra - re pro me ad Do-mi-mim De-um nostrum. 



35* 



414 APPENDIX. 



(Martinucci Manuale Sac. Caerem., Lib. I, Cap. XXXV.) 

DEFECTUUM QUI FKEQUENTIUS IN MISS^E CELE- 
BRATIONE ADMITTI SOLENT, DEMONSTRATIO. 

I. Ut majoris emolamenti fiant documenta, quae pro 
celebratione Missse tradidimus, defectus seu menda qua? 
pracipue in re divina conficienda incidere solent, enu- 
merare juvat, quibus aute oculos ordinatim propositis, ea 
quse superius descripta sunt, in mentem revocari facile 
poterunt. 

II. Nisi qua jnsta caussa adsit Matutinum saltern et 
Laudes non recitasse ante Missam defectus est. 

III. Item convenientem praparationem in Ecclesia et in 
Sacrario, bono etiam aliorum exemplo,- non pramittere, 
prasertim si in Sacrario adsint laici homines, in quibus 
admiratio gigni possit. 

IV. Post praparationem commorari in Sacrario tempus 
terendo sermonibus futilibus, loquendo de nugis aut novi- 
tatibus, multo autem magis alios obtrectando pracipue 
hiemis tempore circa focum. 

V. Lavare man us antequam Missam in Missali reperiat, 
aut postquam Calicem disposuerit, vel etiam postquam se 
paraverit. 

VI. Non praparare Calicem per seipsum, aut saltern, si 
jam in promptu esset, non inspicere an regulariter prapa- 
ratus sit. 

VII. Ponere corporal e extra bursam vel super aut infra 
ipsam ac tali modo ad Altare afferre illud et referre in 
Sacrarium. 

VIII. Loqui cum aliis dum sacra paramenta induet sibi, 

IX. Se paramentis induere capite cooperto, Calici vel 
Missali imponere linteolum, biretum, pileolum, conspicilla. 

X. Inclinationem facere priusquam sibi imponat amic- 
tum, aut sc crucis signo munire cum amictu ipso. 

XI. Siuistram sibi albse manicam primo induere, deinde 
dexteram; partem dexteram amictus et stolse non super- 
imponere sinistra; adjicere Amen ad unamquamque ora- 
tionem statutam pro paramentis, quum ad ultimam tantum 
id prascribatur. 



APPENDIX. 415 

XII. Linteolum coloratum et sordidum cingulo alligare, 
idque adeo negligenter ut extra planetarn appareat. 

XIII. Manipulum ad cubitum apponere; stolam dejicere 
per humeros, non earn aptare circa colluin, ut crux, quae est 
in medio, prodeat e planeta. 

XIV. Albam aut planetarn osculari. 

XV. Nescire orationes secretas, quae in Missa sunt 
memoriter recitandse. 

XVI. Vagari in Sacrario quum paramentis indutus sit 
tarn ante, quam post Missam. 

XVII. Reverentiam efficere ad crucem vel ad imaginem 
praecipuam Sacrarii biretum manu gestando ; biretum 
ipsum capiti detrahere quum genuflectendum sit ante SS. 
Sacramentum in tabernaculo reconditum, vel quum reveren- 
tia facienda sit ad Altare maximum transeundo ante ipsum. 

XVIII. Calicem ferre nimium sublime ferine ad oris 
altitudinem, aut nimium demissum et non ad pectus, vel 
earn sustinere sinistra tan turn, non superimposita dextera. 
Ire aut red ire ab Altari citato gradu oculis sublimibus. 

XIX. Post genuflexionem ad Altare, in quo adsit SS. 
Sacramentum, reverentiam quoque ad Crucem adjicere. 

XX. Sinistra manu applicare bursam ad candelabrorum 
gradum ; jubere aut permittere ministro ut Missale aperiat 
et occludat : corporale super mensa non totum explicare, 
sed unam vel plures partes plicatas relinquere. 

XXI. Morari in medio Altari intuendo Crucem aut 
orando priusquam de gradibus in planum descendat ad 
Missam exordiendam. 

XXII. Tergum ad Crucem vertere, eo quod pigeat 
paullum recedere versus cornu Evangelii, in descendendo 
turn in principio Missse turn in fine. 

XXIII. Xon servare debitam gravitatem, tergere oculos, 
scalpere aures, nasUm, capillos aptare atque his similia. 

XXIV. Missam incipere antequam sint accensse can- 
delaB, aut sinere ut extinguantur antequam perlectum sit 
Evangelium ultimum. 

XXV. Quum manits jungendse erunt, non extendere et 
conjungere digitos, nee pollicem dexterum sinistro super- 
imponere in modum crucis. 

XXVI. Se signare signo crucis extra seij3sum aut dimi- 
diato et imperfecto. 



416 APPENDIX. 

XXVII. Negligere inclinationum qualitatem profun- 
dam, mediocrem et simplicem et alteram pro altera exsequi. 

XXVIII. Non pati ut minister responsiones suas ex 
toto compleat, neque earn opportuno tempore de inconsid- 
erantiis et mendis admonere. 

XXIX. Addere particulam et in repetenda antiphona 
Introibo post psalmnm Judica me, Deus. 

XXX. Pectus ad Confiteor percutere cum strepitu et 
vehementer ; se vertere ad ministrum in dicendis verbis 
vobis fratres et vos fratres ; respondere Amen postquam 
ille recitaverit Confiteor; addere verbum omnibus vel 
omnium in precibus misereatur et Indulgentiam, aut dicere 
in hac peccatorum vestrorum pro nostrorum. 

XXXI. Ad orationem aufer a nobis non inclinari tem- 
pore prsescripto, aut post osculatum Altare inclinationem 
facere priusquam perveniat ad librum. 

XXXII. Exsequi caeremonias ante aut post tempus 
assignatum. 

XXXIII. Legere aut recitare nimium festinanter et 
verba etiam per syncopem contrahere ; alta voce proferre 
quod secreto dicendum est et vicissim. 

XXXIV. Simulare Altare osculari, nee reipsa osculari, 
vel osculari e latere, non vero in medio aut osculandi gratia 
contorquere membra vel caput. 

XXXV. Incipere Kyrie Eleison priusquam se sistat in 
medio Altaris, et prsescriptas inclinationes omittere. 

XXXVI. Convertere se ad populum dum dicit Dominus 
vobiseum manibus disjunctis, intuendo adstantes, non depo- 
sits conspicillis. 

XXXVII. Dicere Or emus antequam veniat ad Missale, 
duplicare literam ita ut pro Or emus dicat fere Ooremus. 
Intueri crucem dicendo Or emus. 

XXXVIII. Recitare orationes non junctis manibus 
aut non apertis ante pectus manibus, aut uti ad legendum 
parvo conspicillo, quo in casu manus non possent esse 
apertse. 

XXXIX. Oculos ad Crucem aut in coelum non inten- 
dere quum a rubrica prsescribitur, contra autem attollere 
quum non priescribitur. 

XL. Ad Munda cor meum dicere Jube Domne pro Jube 
Domine, aut osculari Altare post hanc precationem. 



APPENDIX. 417 

XLI. Manibus insistere Altari ad Munda cor meurn, ad 
Sanctus et ad Agnus Dei. 

XLII. Incipiendo Evangelium manum sinistram non 
imponere Missali, ut Crucis sigimm super textum signet, 
nee, quum se pollice signabit, manum eamdem infra pectus 
ponere, nee digitos tenere extensos. 

XLIII. Inclinationem facere versus Crucem in legendo 
Evangelio, aut genuflectere Crucem non librum versus, 
quum genuflexio prsescripta sit. 

XLIV. Ad et incarnatus genuflectere utroque genu, vel 
morari in genuflexione, aut caput etiam inclinare. 

XLV. Inchoare Crucis signum prius quam verba et 
vitam venturi sceculi. 

XL VI. Detegere Calicem dum recitatur Credo aut quum 
legitur qffertorium. 

XLVII. Pecitare eumdem versum extensis manibus. 

XLVIII. Dum Hostise net oblatio intueri Crucem, aut 
tres digitos inferiores sub patena non extendere. 

XLIX. Detecto Calice, velum post ipsum utcumque 
impiicare. 

L. Calicem tergere violenter, aut dum e medio Altari 
transibit in cornu Epistolse : incipere orationem Deus qui 
humance substantice dum vinum in Calicem infundet, aut 
priusquam ampullam vini deponat. 

LI. Patenam cum Hostia vel Calicem in offertorio nimis 
elevare, aut utrumque demisse nimis sustinere. 

LII. Inclinare caput proferendo nomen Jesu et Marice 
in oration e suscipe Sancta Trinitas, itemque in reliquis ante 
communionem orationibus. 

LIII. Crucis signa super Hostiam et Calicem efficere 
aut flectendo digitos in ducendis lineis ad ilia efficienda, 
aut manu fere clausa, vel eadem efficiendo saltuatim. 

LIV. Elata voce dicere Orate f retires, aut non secreto 
dicere ut meum, etc., aut subsistere contra populum pra> 
dicta verba proferendi gratia ; respondere Amen, aut con- 
tinuare secreta priusquam responsio Suscipiat a ministro 
compleatur. 

LV. Ad Sursum corda clausas attollere manus aut 
palmis non ad invicem sed ad Altare conversis. 

LVI. Inclinare caput ad ubique gratias agere aut ad 



418 APPENDIX. 

verba per Christum Dominum nostrum in pra?fatione, vel 
alio etiam loco prseterquam post Memento defunctorurn. 

LVII. Pectus percutere dicendo Sanctus aut non me- 
diocri voce dicere ipsum ; recitare voce intelligibili totum 
Canonem aut aliquot ejus partes, quurn omnia secreto 
dicenda sint. 

LVIII. Non jungere manus priusquam signa Crucis 
faciat, aut suspensam tenere sinistram, dum dextera ac- 
tionem aliquam exsequitur. 

LIX. Digitos saliva conspergere ad evolvenda Missalis 
folia. 

LX. Immorari nimis in memento, vel nimia brevitate 
conficere, aut alta voce proferre Memento Domine, etc. 

LXI. Pollices supponere palmis manuum dicendo Hanc 
igitur oblationem, etc. 

LXII. Abstergere digitos, antequam accipiat Hostiam, 
non extremo sed medio corporali prope Hostiam. 

LXIII. Imponere brachium sinistrum Altari sustinendo 
Hostiam ante Consecrationem ad verba benedixit, f regit, etc 

LXIV. Insistere et incurvari indecenter super Altare 
proferendi caussa Consecrationis verba. 

LX V. Proferendo verba Consecrationis gesticulari capite 
aut contorquere corpus ; non proferre ilia secreto, eadem 
verba repetere, dicere sufflando, aut pedem dexterum sus- 
pension tenere ut statim possit genuflecti. 

LXVI. Xon removere de Altari cubitos nee ferre manu- 
um articulos versus frontem Altaris post Consecrationem, ut 
com mod ius genuflectatur. 

LXVII. Post elevationem Hostise detegere Calicem, 
postea genuflectere. 

LXVIII. Accipere Calicem ad verba Accipiens et hune 
prceclarum Calicem nianu dextera tantum, os et nasum 
Calici imponere, aut inclinare eum ad se vel Altari appli- 
catum tenere. 

LXIX. In elevatione non sequi oculis Hostiam et 
Calicem aut elevare et demittere nimis festinanter, aut plus 
a?quo sustinere sublime in conspectum adstantium, aut 
nimis attollere extensis monstruose brachiis, aut tarn parum 
attollere ut conspici non possint, aut elevando super caput 
ponere, aut Calicem osculari. 



APPENDIX. 419 

LXX. Verba Hcec quotiescumque, etc., tempore elevati- 
onis dicere, non post Consecrationis verba dam genuflectitur. 

LXXI. Non genuflectere usque in terrain, vel genu- 
nectere inconcinne et properanter. 

LXXII. Non ten ere pollices et indices junctos a Con- 
secratione usque ad purificationem, aut Hostiam tangere 
digitis inferioribus, aut digitos istos non extendere quum 
Hostiam accipiet. 

LXXIII. Ponere manus junctas super Altare omnino 
intra corporale post Consecrationem non sequendo prsescrip- 
tiones a rubrica expressas una in perpetuum vice sine ulla 
distinctione aut liniitatione. 

LXXIV. Pausam facere in commemoratione defunc- 
torum antequam dicatur qui nos prcecesserunt, etc., aut alta 
voce dicere Memento etiam, Domine, aut reliquas Ipsis, 
Domine, etc. 

LXXV. Pectus non digitis tribus inferioribus percutere, 
et reliquis junctis tangere casulam ad Nobis quoque pecca- 
toribus, ad Agnus Dei, ad Domine non sum dignus. 

LXXVI. Inclinare caput dicendo Nobis quoque pecca- 
toribus, aut alta voce dicere etiam famulis tuis cum suspirio, 
vel dicere Amen ante Per quern hcec omnia. 

LXXVI I. Caput etiam inclinare ad Prceceptis salutari- 
bus, aut recitare ilia apertis manibus, aut oculos non de- 
figere in Sacramentum quum recitabitur Pater noster, aut 
pateuam de corporali deducere eamque abstergere prius- 
quam minister respondent Amen, aut non abstergere, manu 
tantum dextera, sed adjuncta etiam sinistra. 

LXX VIII. Non applicare sinistram infra pectus quum 
signo Crucis se muniat. 

LXXIX. Osculari patenam in parte inferiori aut in 
margine, vel abstergere super planetam aut in alia parte 
postquam illam osculatus sit. 

LXXX. Purificare digitos fragmentis terendo unum 
post alterum in labro Calicis. 

LXXXI. Se vertere ad alterutram partem dicendo 
Domine, non sum dignus, aut brachium sinistrum imponere 
Altari. 

LXXXII. Crucis signum Hostia efncere extra limites 
patense et frontis suae in Communionis actu, aut expuere 



420 APPENDIX. 

dum sumpturus est, vel etiam osculari S. Hostiam ante- 
quam sumat. 

LXXXIII. Ximia vel modica diligentia peccare in 
colligendis fragmentis, et collectis intra Calicem injiciendis. 

LXXXTV. Sumere Calicem strependo labiis, aut oculis 
sublatis, aut sensim et similia. 

LXXXV. Pallani patense imponere antequam transeat 
in cornu Epistolse ad accipiendam ablutionem, aut earn 
purificatorio abstergere. 

LXXXVI. Accipiendo purificationem ponere Calicem 
super Altare, aut extra Altare ilium ministro porrigere nulla 
cogente necessitate. 

LXXXYII. Extergere labia aut os digitis jam ablutis 
vino et aqua antequam purificatorio extergantur. 

LXXXVIII. Corporale complicare elato in altum 
Calice, bursam ponere non versa ante pectus apertura ejus, 
et relinquere velum ex parte anteriori sublatum. 

LXXXIX. Sinere ut minister, quamquam Clericus, 
multo pejus si laicus sit, Calicem cooperiat et accomodet. 

XC. Missale non claudere, ut prsescribitur, et conclu- 
sionem ultimse orationis absolvere veniendo ad medium 
Altare. 

XCI. Se inclinare ad populum dicendo Be missa est, 
aut dicendo Benedicamus Domino se inclinare ad Altare aut 
convertere ad populum. 

XCII. In discessu de Altari accipere biretum antequam 
reverentiam vel genuflexionem efficiat, aut illud sibi de 
capite detrahere priusquam reverentiam fecerit ad Cruceni 
vel imaginem praecipuam Sacrarii. 

XCIII. Paramenta acervatim deponere in exuendo se, 
non osculari stolam, manipulum, amictum, aut sibi albam 
detrahere ex adverso. 

XCIV. Sermones conserere et confabulari in Sacrario, 
aut ex illo et Ecclesia discedere quin tempus conveniens 
intercesserit pro debita gratiarum actione. 

XCV. Quod ad defectus spectat in rubricis generalibus 
pluribus capitibus notatos, quum de rebus agatur, quas 
omnis Sacerdos novisse et probe scire tenetur, quasque 
potest unus quisque in Missali legere et perpendere, potius 
quam eadem capita retractem-us, in totum silentio pra3terire 
operas pretium visum est. 



INDEX. 



Absolut ion after Mass for the dead, 297 

Acolytes, Instruction for the, at the High Mass, 146 ; at Solemn 
Vespers, 185 

A Cunc-Us, What Saint to be named in 13, n. 

Adorna thalamum, 80 

Advent, Sundays in, when Bishop officiates, 324 

All Souls, Vespers of, 202 ; when Bishop officiates, 323 

Altar, Mode of Kissing, 10, n. 

Altar Veil, 76 

Ambry, 2, n. 

Antependium, what, 1, n. 

Archbishop, 277 ; vesting of, 273 

Ash Wednesday, necessary preparations, 81, 210, 329 ; blessing 
of Ashes, 81, 210 ; Mass, 84, 214 ; when Bishop officiates, 330 

Ashes, blessing of, 81, 210 ; distribution, 81, 210 

Ashes, putting on of, 83 # 

Asperges, when there is but one priest, 122 

Assistant Deacon, Instructions for, 304 ; their quality, dress, and 
place, 304 ; at Pontifical Vespers, 305 ; at Pontifical Mass, 
306 ; when the Bishop does not celebrate, 307 

Assistant Priest, his quality, dress, and place, 300 ; his office in 
general, 301 ; his office at Pontifical Vespers, 301 ; at Pon- 
tifical Mass, 302 ; when the Bishop does not celebrate, 304 

Baptism of Infants on Holy Saturday, 257 

Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament, 126 ; ceremonies when 

but one Priest, 127 ; when assisted by another Priest, 131 ; 

by Bishop, 133 

36 



422 INDEX. 

Bishop, what, to be named in memento, 20, n. ; what Mass on 
Ember Days when he ordains, 34, n. ; serving of, at Low 
Mass, 57 ; when there is but one chaplain, 62 ; Mass in pres- 
ence of, 43 ; Mass and Vespers solemnly celebrated by, 261, 
265 ; Solemn Vespers in presence of, 265 ; Complins by, 266 ; 
Matins, 267 ; Lauds, 269 ; Matins and Lauds for the Dead, 
293 ; Solemn Pontifical Mass, 269 ; Seat of, 269 ; Vespers 
for the Dead by, 292 ; Instructions for officers who attend, 300 ; 
on All Souls, 323 ; Sundays in Advent, 324 ; Christmas, 325 ; 
Festivals between Christmas and Candlemas, 326 ; Candle- 
mas, 327 ; Ash Wednesday, 329 ; Sundays in Lent, 332 ; 
Palm Sunday, 333 ; Maundy Thursday, 336 ; the Mandatum, 
or washing of the feet, 335 ; Good Friday, 346 ; what to be 
prepared for, ib., to the beginning of the office, 348; the 
office, 349 ; Holy Saturday, 354 ; what to be prepared for, 
355 ; Solemn Administration of Confirmation, 380 ; Visita- 
tion of Parishes, 383 

Blessed Sacrament, how often to be renewed, 29, n. ; Low Mass, 
when it is exposed, 41 ; Solemn Vespers, when it is exposed, 
196 ; when exposed, no bow made to any one in Sanctuary, 
199 ; Collect of, to be said wheu Blessed Sacrament is ex- 
posed, 35 

Book-bearer, Instruction for, 321 

Bows, 6, ?i., 51 

Burse, 31, 50 

Calotte, what, 137, n. 

Candle-bearer, Instructions for, 322 

Candlemas, blessing of Candles, 175, 326 ; distribution, 178, 326 ; 

procession, 79 ; when Bishop officiates, 326 ; Mass after the 

procession, 81 
Canon, what, 57, n. 
Cappa Magna, 292, n. 
Celebrant, at High Mass, Instruction for the, 173 ; at Vespers, 

183 
Censer-bearer, Instruction for, at High Mass, 142 ; at Solemn 

Vespers, 186 
Ceremonies of Low Mass, 1 ; High Mass, 64 ; Pontifical High 

Mass, 269 ; for the Dead, 180 ; Pontifical Mass for the Dead, 

294 ; for the principal Festivals, 204 



INDEX. 423 

Chapter, Intonation for, 408 

Choir, Rules for Clergy in, at High Mass, 135 ; at Vespers, 184 ; 
order to be observed, 136 ; internal dispositions, 138 ; order 
in going from, 140 

Christmas, when Bishop officiates, 325 ; Festivals between Christ- 
mas and Candlemas, 326 

Ciboriuni, Veil of, 16, n. ; Purification of, 48 

Cincture, how made, 5 

Commemoration of all the faithful departed, 202, 323 

Communion at Masses for the dead, 40, n. ; general rules for 
Communion at Mass, 45 ; at other times, 48 ; at High Mass, 
139 

Complins, when Bishop officiates solemnly, 266 

Confirmation, Solemn Administration of, 380 ; things to be pre- 
pared for, ib. ; the administration of the Sacrament, 381 

Corporal, what, 4, n. ; Confiteor, Intonation for, 412 

Corpus Christi, Procession on, and its octave, 200 

Cope-bearers, Instruction for the, at Solemn Vespers, 191 ; Ves- 
pers without, 68 

Credence, what, 2, n. 

Credo, generally omitted in Votive Masses, 36 

Crosier-bearer, Instructions for, 319 

Cross, Veneration of, on Good Friday, 100 

Cruets, to be of glass, not of silver, 2, n. 

Cum appropinquaret, 88 

Deacon, Instruction for the officiating, 308 ; deacon at High 

Mass, 165 
Dead, Low Mass for the, 39 ; High Mass, 180 ; Vespers for the, 

202 
Defectuum Ehnclms. Append, in fine. 
Deus in adjutorium, Intonation, 407 
Dies irce, when said, 40 
Diocesan Synods, Ceremonies to be observed in, 375 

Epistle, Intonation for, 410 

Faldstool, what, 272 ; Ferial tones, 410 

Font, Blessing of the, 117 

Forty Hours, Exposition of the Blessed Sacrament, 391 



424 INDEX. 

Forty Hours' Exposition, 391 ; things to be prepared, ih. ; of the 
Mass of the Exposition, 392 ; of the Procession for the Ex- 
position, 394 ; of the Mass, pro pace, 397 ; things to be pre- 
pared for the Mass of the Exposition, 398 ; of the Mass of 
the Reposition, 398 ; from the Litany to the end of the Forty 
Hours, 403 

Genuflection, how made, 51 

Gloria in Excelsis, in what votive Masses omitted, 35 

Good Friday, what is to be prepared, 98 ; when Bishop officiates, 
346 ; Office to the uncovering of the Cross, 99, 239, 240 ; un- 
covering and veneration of the Cross, 100, 236 ; Procession, 
106, 242 ; remaining part of the office, 244 ; from the en- 
trance of the Bishop to the beginning of the office, 348 ; the 
office, 349 

Gospel, Intonation for the, 411 

High Mass, without deacon or subdeacon, 64 ; vesting, 65 ; 
ceremonies, 66 ; rules for clergy in choir, 135 ; order to be ob- 
served, 136 ; internal dispositions, 138 ; receiving Holy Com- 
munion, 139 ; going from Choir, 140 ; Preparation for, 141 ; 
Instructions for the offices at, 142 ; Instruction for celebrant, 
173 ; incensing, 143. (See Pontifical Mass, Solemn Mass.) 

High Mass for the Dead, what to be observed particularly at, 
180 ; Pontifical, 294 

Holy Saturday, things to be prepared, 111, 247 ; when Bishop 
officiates, 354 ; office, 113 ; Benediction of the new fire, 113 ; 
by Bishop, 355 ; Exultet, 355 ; Blessing of the Paschal Can- 
dle, 115 ; by Bishop, 355 ; Prophecies, 116, 252 ; Blessing of 
the Font, 117, 358 ; by the Bishop, 358 ; Baptism of Infants, 
119 ; Litany, Mass, 120, 360 ; Vespers, ib. ; bringing back 
the Pyx to the Altar, 121 ; to the beginning of Mass, when 
Bishop officiates, 359 ; Mass, 258, 360 

Holy Week and other Festivals, Ceremonies for, 75 

Host, how broken, 26 

Incense-boat, 75 
Incensing, manner of, 175 

Incensing candles at Candlemas, 78 ; ashes, 83 ; palms, 87 ; the 
Blessed Sacrament in the Repository, 96 ; on Holy Saturday, 



INDEX. 425 

106 ; at Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament, 128, 132 ; at 
High Mass, 143 ; in High Mass for the Dead, 182 ; at Solemn 
Vespers, 186 ; Corpus Christi, 196 

Inferior ministers, at Pontifical Mass, instructions for, 300 

Intonation for Mass and Yespers, 407 

Latare and Gaudete Sundays, 215 

Lauds, when the Bishop officiates, 269 ; for the Dead, 293 
Lent, Sundays in, 332 ; when the Bishop officiates, 332 
Low Mass, Ceremonies of, 1 ; what to be prepared for, 1,2; from 
Commencement to Introit, 9 ; Introit to the Epistle, 11 ; 
Epistle to the Offertory, 13 ; Offertory to the Canon, 15 ; 
Canon to the Consecration, 19 ; Consecration to the Pater 
Noster, 23 ; Pater Noster to the Communion, 25 ; Commu- 
nion to the end of Mass, 31 ; Low Mass for the Dead, 39 ; 
when the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, 41 ; in the pres- 
ence of Prelates, 43 ; manner of serving at, 51 ; Bishop at 
Low Mass, 57 

Mandatum or Washing of Feet, 345 

Mass, Preparations for, 3 ; Ceremonies for Low Mass, 1 ; Yotive 
Masses, 33 ; Mass pro Sponso et Sponsa, 35 ; Low Mass for 
the Dead, 39 ; High Mass, 141 ; High Mass for the Dead, 
180 ; Pontifical Mass, Solemn, 269 ; for the Dead, 294 

Mass, Solemn, in presence of the Bishop, 299 

Masses for the Dead, classed among Yotive Masses, 34 ; when 
prohibited, 39 ; when allowed, 36 ; Dies irce, when said, 40 ; 
Low Mass for the Dead, 39 ; Communion at, 40 ; High Mass, 
180 ; Pontifical, 294 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; the Mass, 
295 ; absolution after Mass, 297 

Master of Ceremonies, duty of; at High Mass, 150; at Solemn 
Yespers, 188 

Matins, when the Bishop officiates, 267 ; for the Dead, 293 ; of 
Tenebrse, 336 

Maundy Thursday, Preparation, 227 ; Mass, 228 ; Procession, 
231 ; removal of the Pyx, 96 ; Yespers, 233 ; stripping of 
the Altar, 97, 233 ; when the Bishop officiates, 336 ; reposi- 
tory, how prepared, 91, 336 

Mitre-bearer, Instruction for, 320 



426 INDEX. 

Monstrance, 128 
Mozetta, 262, n. 

Newly ordained priest, The three Masses of, 34 

Obtulerunt Domine, 80 

Officers, Instructions for the, at High Mass, 141 ; censer-bearer, 
142 ; acolytes, 146 ; master of ceremonies, 150 ; sub-deacon, 
157; deacon, 165, 308 ; celebrant, 173 ; instruction for officers 
who attend Bishop, 300, 308 

Officiating deacon, Instruction for, 308 

Ordo, to be observed by priest celebrating in another church, 36 

OmbrelMno, 196, n. 

Pall, what, 4, n. 

Palm Sunday, Preparation for, 215, 332 ; blessing of the palms, 
85, 216 ; distribution of, 86, 218 ; procession, 87, 220 ; Mass 
and Passion, 222 ; when Bishop officiates, 332 

Parishes, Episcopal visitation of, 383 

Paschal Candles, Blessing of, 115 

Pax, how given, 138 

Peace, instrument of, 44 

Pontifical mantle, 292 

Pontifical Mass, Solemn, 269 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; vesting 
of the clergy and Bishop, 277 ; the Pontifical Mass, 269 ; 
for the Dead, 294; things to be prepared, ib. ; the Mass, 
295 ; absolution after Mass, 297 

Popule ineus, 102 

Prelates, what, 43 

Priest, preparation for Mass, 3 ; at Low Mass, 6 ; after Mass, 
33 ; instruction for, at High Mass, 173 ; assistant priest, 304 

Procession at Candlemas, 79 ; Palm Sunday, 85, 332 ; Maundy 
Thursday, 91,336; Good Friday, 98,346; Corpus Christi 
and its octave, 200, 203 ; at Provincial Councils, 361 

Prophecies on Holy Saturday, 252 

Provincial Councils, Ceremonies to be observed in, 361 ; how the 
Metropolitan Church is to be adorned and arranged, 362 
opening of the council, 363 ; procession, 364 ; Mass, 364 
Ceremonies for first session or opening of the council, 365 
Mode of procedure, 368 ; second Solemn Session, 370 ; third 
Solemn Session, 372 



INDEX. 427 

Purification, Feast of the, necessary preparations, 204 ; from the 
Vesting to the distribution of the candles, 205 ; to the Pro- 
cession, 200 ; the Procession, 208 

Purificator, what, 4, n. 

Pyx, Of the removal of the, 96 ; bringing back to the altar, 106, 
121 

Quarant 'Ore, 391 

Remonstrance, see Monstrance. 

Repository, how prepared, 92, 228 ; procession to, on Maundy 

Thursday, 95, 231 ; on Good Friday, 106, 242 
Requiem Masses, 34 ; Communion at, 40 

Sacred Species, Renewal of, 29, n. 

Sanctuary, Chairs in, 136, n. ; rules for clergy in, 135, 184 

Serving Mass, Low Mass, 51 ; Vesting, 52 ; the Mass, 53 ; Bish- 
op's Low Mass, 57 

Sign of the Cross, how made, 9, n. 

Solemn Mass, in presence of Bishop in mitre and cope, 288 ; 
when in rochet and cope, 291 ; Intonations for, 406 

Solemnities when Bishop officiates, 323 

Stole, Use of, 69, n, 

Sub-deacon, Instruction for, at High Mass, 157 ; Pontifical Mass, 
314 

Tenebrse, Office of, 225 ; when Bishop officiates, 336 
Two Masses on the same day, Order of, 37 

Unrobing after Mass, 33 

Vespers, without cope-bearer, 68 ; Solemn, 183 ; things to be 
prepared, ib. ; general rules for the clergy in the sanctuary, 
184 ; instruction for cope-bearers, 191 ; for the celebrant, 
194 ; Solemn Vespers, the Blessed Sacrament being exposed, 
196 ; for the Dead, on November 1st, 202 ; things to be pre- 
pared, ib. ; peculiar ceremonies, 202 ; on Maundy Thursday, 
336 ; Solemn Pontifical, 261 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; 
from the entrance to the beginning of Vespers, 262 ; to the 
end of Vespers, 263 ; Solemn Vespers in the presence of the 



428 INDEX. 

Bishop, 265 ; All Souls, when the Bishop officiates, 292 ; 
Christmas, 324 ; intonations for, 408 

Vesting priest at Low Mass, 52 ; Bishop, 57 

Vexilla regis, 107 

Visitation of the Parishes, 383 ; things subject to the Episcopal 
visitation, 388 

Votive Masses, 33 ; Vestments at, 36 

Votive Masses of the Holy Ghost, what does not warrant sing- 
ing, 35, n. 

Water, what quantity to be poured into chalice, 17, n. 
Wax candles, only two at Low Mass of priests, 1 



/3* . 
fill 



r 



■ 






■ 







■ 






■ ■ 

■ ■ 







Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Jan. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1t 



